User talk:Hoskir: Difference between revisions

From Engineering Policy Guide
Jump to navigation Jump to search
 
(294 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
='''REVISION REQUEST 3980'''=
='''REVISION REQUEST 3763  (ON HOLD)'''=


==620.2.16 Stop and Yield Lines (MUTCD Section 3B.16)==
='''REVISION REQUEST 3818 (ON HOLD)'''=
'''Guidance.''' Stop lines should be used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to stop, in compliance with a traffic control signal.
   
'''Option.''' Stop lines may be used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to stop in compliance with a STOP (R1-1) sign, a Stop Here For Pedestrians (R1-5b or R1-5c) sign, or some other traffic control device that requires vehicles to stop, except YIELD signs that are not associated with passive grade crossings.
 
Yield lines may be used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to yield in compliance with a YIELD (R1-2) sign or a Yield Here to Pedestrians (R1-5 or R1-5a) sign.
 
'''Standard.''' Except as provided in MUTCD Section 8B.28, stop lines shall not be used at locations where drivers are required to yield in compliance with a YIELD (R1-2) sign or a Yield Here To Pedestrians (R1-5 or R1-5a) sign or at locations on uncontrolled approaches where drivers are required by State law to yield to pedestrians.
 
Yield lines shall not be used at locations where drivers are required to stop in compliance with a STOP (R1-1) sign, a Stop Here For Pedestrians (R1-5b or R1-5c) sign, a traffic control signal, or some other traffic control device.
 
Stop lines shall consist of solid white lines extending across approach lanes to indicate the point at which the stop is intended or required.
 
Stop lines shall be used in advance of railroad crossings to indicate the appropriate location to stop.
 
When any crosswalk is installed where a permanent traffic control device is provided, such as a STOP sign or traffic signal, a stop line shall be installed in advance of the crosswalk.
 
Stop lines shall be 24 in. wide and shall extend across all lanes affected by the traffic control device.
 
Yield lines shall consist of a row of solid white isosceles triangles pointing toward approaching vehicles extending across approach lanes to indicate the point at which the yield is intended or required. The spacing of triangles in a yield line shall be consistent for that marking.
 
'''Guidance.''' Yield lines should be 24in. wide by 36in. long with 12 in. spacing between triangles, as shown on [https://www.modot.org/media/16896 Standard Plan 620.00]. Yield line triangles are paid for per each individual triangle. A yield line, for a lane that is 10 ft. or narrower, will consist of 4 individual triangles spaced accordingly.
 
Yield lines may be considered for those locations where a free right turn lane is developed but there is not an acceleration lane on the intersecting road. Yield lines may also be considered at on ramps with tapered acceleration lanes as shown in [[#Fig. 620.2.5.3|Fig. 620.2.5.3, Examples of Dotted Lined and Channelizing Line Applications for Entrance Ramp Markings]].
 
Yield lines may also be used where engineering judgment indicates a need.
 
'''Guidance.''' If used, stop and yield lines should be placed a minimum of 4 ft. in advance of the nearest crosswalk line at controlled intersections, except for yield lines at roundabouts as provided for in [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/620.3_Roundabout_Markings_(MUTCD_Chapter_3C)#620.3.4_Yield_Lines_for_Roundabouts_.28MUTCD_Section_3C.4.29 EPG 620.3.4 Yield Lines for Roundabouts] and at midblock crosswalks. In the absence of a marked crosswalk, the stop line or yield line should be placed at the desired stopping or yielding point, but should not be placed more than 30 ft. nor less than 4 ft. from the nearest edge of the intersecting traveled way. Stop lines should be placed to allow sufficient sight distance to all other approaches to an intersection.
 
When a stop line is used in conjunction with the STOP sign it should be placed adjacent to, or in line with, the STOP sign.
 
When a yield line is used in conjunction with the YIELD sign it should be placed adjacent to, or in line with, the YIELD sign.
 
Stop lines at midblock signalized locations should be placed at least 40 ft. in advance of the nearest signal indication.
 
If yield or stop lines are used at a crosswalk that crosses an uncontrolled multilane approach, the yield lines or stop lines should be placed 20 to 50 ft. in advance of the nearest crosswalk line, and parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield or stop line and the crosswalk (see Figure 620.2.17.1 Examples of Yield Lines at Unsignalized Midblock Crosswalks).
 
'''Standard.''' If yield (stop) lines are used at a crosswalk that crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach, [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/903.5_Regulatory_Signs#903.5.6_YIELD_HERE_TO_PEDESTRIANS_Signs_.28R1-5.2C_R1-5a.29_.28MUTCD_Section_2B.11.29 Yield Here To (Stop Here For) Pedestrians (R1-5 series)] signs (see [[#620.2.11 Raised Pavement Markers (MUTCD Section 3B.11)|EPG 620.2.11 Raised Pavement Markers]]) shall be used.
 
'''Guidance.''' Yield (stop) lines and Yield Here To (Stop Here For) Pedestrians signs should not be used in advance of crosswalks that cross an approach to or departure from a roundabout.
 
'''Support.''' Drivers yielding or stopping too close to crosswalks that cross uncontrolled multi-lane approaches place pedestrians at risk by blocking other drivers’ views of pedestrians and by blocking pedestrians’ view of vehicles approaching in the other lanes.
 
'''Option.''' Stop and yield lines may be staggered longitudinally on a lane-by-lane basis. Refer to [[#Fig. 620.2.8.2|"D" of Fig. 620.2.8.2]].
 
'''Support.''' Staggered stop lines and staggered yield lines can improve the driver's view of pedestrians, provide better sight distance for turning vehicles and increase the turning radius for left-turning vehicles.
 
[[620.2_Pavement_and_Curb_Markings_(MUTCD_Chapter_3B)#620.2.25_Stop_and_Yield_Lines_at_Highway-Rail_Grade_Crossings_(MUTCD_section_8B.28)|EPG 620.2.25 Stop and Yield Lines at Highway-Rail Grade Crossings]] contains information regarding the use of stop lines and yield lines at grade crossings.
 
 
----


='''REVISION REQUEST 3902  (ON HOLD)'''=


==620.2.24 Pavement Markings for Highway-Rail Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8B.27)==
='''REVISION REQUEST 3905  (ON HOLD)'''=
'''Standard.''' All grade crossing pavement markings shall be retroreflectorized white. All other markings shall be in accordance with [[:Category:620 Pavement Marking|EPG 620 Pavement Marking]].


On paved roadways, pavement markings in advance of a grade crossing shall consist of an X, the letters RR, a no-passing zone marking (on two-lane, two-way highways with centerline markings in compliance with [[#620.2.1 Yellow Centerline Pavement Markings and Warrants (MUTCD Section 3B.01)|EPG 620.2.1]]), and certain transverse lines as shown in Fig. 620.2.25.1, Example of Placement of Warning Signs and Pavement Markings at Grade Crossings and Fig. 620.2.25.2, Grade Crossing Pavement Markings.
='''REVISION REQUEST 3906  (ON HOLD)'''=


Identical markings shall be placed in each approach lane on all paved approaches to grade crossings where signals or automatic gates are located, and at all other grade crossings where the posted or statutory highway speed is 40 mph or greater.
='''REVISION REQUEST 3934  (ON HOLD)'''=


Pavement markings shall not be required at grade crossings where the posted or statutory highway speed is less than 40 mph if an engineering study indicates that other installed devices provide suitable warning and control. Pavement markings shall not be required at grade crossings in urban areas if an engineering study indicates that other installed devices provide suitable warning and control.
='''REVISION REQUEST 4014  (ON HOLD)'''=


'''Guidance.''' When pavement markings are used, a portion of the X symbol should be directly opposite the Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign. The X symbol and letters should be elongated to allow for the low angle at which they will be viewed.
='''REVISION REQUEST 4036  (ON HOLD)'''=


'''Option.''' When justified by engineering judgment, supplemental pavement marking symbol(s) may be placed between the Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign and the grade crossing.
='''REVISION REQUEST 4136  (ON HOLD)'''=




----


 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4165'''=
==620.2.25 Stop and Yield Lines at Highway-Rail Grade Crossings (MUTCD section 8B.28)==
<div style="float: right; margin-top: 5px; margin-left: 15px; width:400px; font-size: 95%; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''Standard.''' On paved roadways at grade crossings that are equipped with active control devices such as flashing-light signals, gates, or traffic control signals, a stop line (see [[#620.2.16 Stop and Yield Lines (MUTCD Section 3B.16)|EPG 620.2.16]]) shall be installed to indicate the point behind which highway vehicles are or might be required to stop.
Several '''foundational documents''' guide MoDOT’s TSMO program:
 
* [https://www.modot.org/sites/default/files/documents/2024%20MoDOT%20TSMO%20Program%20Plan.pdf TSMO Program and Action Plan] – outlines MoDOT’s statewide TSMO vision, goals, and implementation strategies.
'''Guidance.''' On paved roadway approaches to passive grade crossings where a STOP sign is installed in conjunction with the Crossbuck sign, a stop line should be installed to indicate the point behind which highway vehicles are required to stop or as near to that point as practical.
* [https://www.modot.org/sites/default/files/documents/TSMO%20Informational%20Memoranda%20Complete.pdf TSMO Informational Memoranda] – provides background, technical details, and
 
* [https://www.modot.org/sites/default/files/documents/BC%20Reference%20memo_0.pdf TSMO Benefit-Cost Reference Memo] – provides the benefit-cost information on TSMO applications that are critical to MoDOT’s TSMO program and future work.
If a stop line is used, it should be a transverse line at a right angle to the traveled way and should be placed approximately 8 ft. in advance of the gate (if present), but no closer than 15 ft. in advance of the nearest rail.
* [https://epg.modot.org/files/6/6b/909_WZM_Guidebook.pdf Work Zone Management Guidebook] – provides a comprehensive set of tools and strategies for work zone management and describes “advanced work zone” practices, guidance, and resources
 
* [https://www.modot.org/sites/default/files/documents/FR1_MoDOT_CAVPlan_Apr25_ACCESSIBLE.pdf Connected and Automated Vehicle Action Plan] – articulates MoDOT’s mission, vision, strengths, and strategic focus areas for leveraging CV/AV technologies, and lays out actions across institutional capability-building, outreach and education, and partnership development to support safe, efficient deployment.
'''Option.''' On paved roadway approaches to passive grade crossings where a YIELD sign is installed in conjunction with the Crossbuck sign, a yield line (see [[#620.2.16 Stop and Yield Lines (MUTCD Section 3B.16)|EPG 620.2.16]]) or a stop line may be installed to indicate the point behind which highway vehicles are required to yield or stop or as near to that point as practical.
 
'''Guidance.''' If a yield line is used, it should be a transverse line at a right angle to the traveled way and should be placed no closer than 15 ft. in advance of the nearest rail (see Fig. 620.2.25.1, Example of Placement of Warning Signs and Pavement Markings at Grade Crossings).
 
[[Image:620.2.25.1 8B6 2020.jpg|thumb|center|780px|<center>'''Fig. 620.2.25.1, Example of Placement of Warning Signs and Pavement Markings at Grade Crossings (MUTCD 8B-6)'''</center>]]
 
[[Image:620.2.28.2 8B7.jpg|thumb|center|780px|<center>'''Fig. 620.2.25.2, Grade Crossing Pavement Markings (MUTCD 8B-7)'''</center><center>Note: Refer to Fig. 620.2.25.1 for placement.</center>]]
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 3981'''=
 
 
==620.2.18 Crosswalk Markings (MUTCD Section 3B.18)==
'''Support.''' Crosswalk markings provide guidance for pedestrians who are crossing roadways by defining and delineating paths on approaches to and within signalized intersections, and on approaches to other intersections where traffic stops.
 
In conjunction with signs and other measures, crosswalk markings help to alert road users of a designated pedestrian crossing point across roadways at locations that are not controlled by traffic control signals or STOP or YIELD signs.
 
At non-intersection locations, crosswalk markings legally establish the crosswalk.
 
'''Standard.''' When crosswalk lines are used, they shall consist of solid white lines that mark the crosswalk.
 
There are two styles of crosswalk markings: transverse and longitudinal (also known as continental). In most applications, the longitudinal markings are preferred and should be used to provide greater visibility, especially at midblock and uncontrolled crossings.
 
When used, longitudinal crosswalk markings shall be 24 inches wide and at least 6 feet in length, except that they shall be at least 8 feet in length at non-intersection crossings where the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater.
 
If used, transverse crosswalk lines shall be no less than 6 inches wide and at least 6 feet apart
 
'''Guidance.''' Crosswalk lines, if used on both sides of the crosswalk, should extend across the full width of pavement or to the edge of the intersecting crosswalk to discourage diagonal walking between crosswalks.
 
At locations controlled by traffic control signals or on approaches controlled by STOP or YIELD signs, crosswalk lines should be installed where engineering judgment indicates they are needed to direct pedestrians to the proper crossing path(s).
 
Crosswalk lines should not be used indiscriminately. An engineering study should be performed before a marked crosswalk installed at a location away from a traffic control signal or STOP or YIELD signs. The engineering study should consider the number of lanes, the presence of a median, the distance from adjacent signalized intersections, the pedestrian volumes and delays, the average annual daily traffic (AADT), the posted or statutory speed limit or 85<sup>th</sup>-percentile speed, the geometry of the location, the possible consolidation of multiple crossing points, the availability of street lighting and other appropriate factors.
 
New marked crosswalks alone, without other measures designed to reduce traffic speeds, shorten crossing distances, enhance driver awareness of the crossing, and/or provide active warning of pedestrian presence, should not be installed across uncontrolled roadways where the speed limit exceeds 40 mph and either:
 
:A. The roadway has four or more lanes of travel without a raised median or pedestrian refuge island and an ADT of 12,000 vehicles per day or greater; or
 
:B. The roadway has four or more lanes of travel with a raised median or pedestrian refuge island and an ADT of 15,000 vehicles per day or greater.
 
'''Support.''' Chapter 4F of the MUTCD contains information on Pedestrian Hybrid Beacons. Section 4L.03 contains information regarding Warning Beacons to provide active warning of a pedestrian's presence. Section 4N.02 contains information regarding In-Roadway Warning Lights at crosswalks. Chapter 7D contains information regarding school crossing supervision.
'''Guidance.''' Because non-intersection pedestrian crossings are generally unexpected by the road user, warning signs (see [[903.6 Warning Signs#903.6.41 Non-Vehicular Warning Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, W11-7, W11-32, W11-33, W16-9P) (MUTCD Section 2C.50)|Non-vehicular Sign (W11-2, W11-7)]]) should be installed and adequate visibility should be provided by parking prohibitions.
 
If used, the high-visibility longitudinal pedestrian crosswalk marking should consist of longitudinal bars 24 in. wide and spaced uniformly, centering one bar in each lane, and across each lane line, centerline, and edgeline ([https://www.modot.org/media/16896 see Standard Plan 620.00]).
 
When longitudinal bars are used to mark a crosswalk, the transverse crosswalk lines should be omitted. The marking design should avoid the wheel paths.
 
Existing 30 in. crosswalk bars should be replaced with 24 in. bars when the roadway is resurfaced.
 
'''Support.''' [[#620.2.16 Stop and Yield Lines (MUTCD Section 3B.16)|EPG 620.2.16]] contains information regarding placement of stop line markings near crosswalk markings.
 
'''Option.''' Where permanent traffic control devices are not provided, speeds are greater than 35 mph or the crosswalk is located in rural locations where they are unexpected, the width of the crosswalk line may be increased up to 24 inches.
 
Crosswalks may be located mid-block if this placement offers greater safety to the pedestrian than the normal placement at an intersection. In these cases, the longitudinal bar pedestrian crosswalk marking should be used for greater emphasis and visibility. This type of marking may also be used at locations where substantial numbers of pedestrians cross without any other traffic control device, at locations where physical conditions are such that added visibility of the crosswalk is desired, or at places where a pedestrian crosswalk might not be expected.
 
'''Standard.''' All school crosswalks authorized by an agreement between the Commission and the school and/or city shall be marked. Crosswalks for schools shall be maintained in a manner that will provide a clearly visible marking at all times.
 
All school crosswalks shall be marked using both the advance school crosswalk and the school crosswalk sign, refer to [[903.18 Signing for School Areas#903.18.8 School Sign (S1-1) and Plaques (S4-3p, W16-9P and W16-7P) (MUTCD Section 7B.08)|EPG 903.18.8 School Sign (S1-1) and Plaques]].
 
'''Option.''' When school crosswalks are located mid-block, the longitudinal bar pedestrian crosswalk marking should be used for greater emphasis and visibility.
 
'''Guidance.''' Crosswalk markings should be located so that the curb ramps are within the extension of the crosswalk markings.
 
'''Support.''' Detectable warning surfaces mark boundaries between pedestrian and vehicular ways where there is no raised curb. Detectable warning surfaces are required by 49 CFR, Part 37 and by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) where curb ramps are constructed at the junction of sidewalks and the roadway, for marked and unmarked crosswalks. Detectable warning surfaces contrast visually with adjacent walking surfaces, either light-on-dark, or dark-on-light. The [https://www.access-board.gov/guidelines-and-standards/buildings-and-sites/about-the-ada-standards/background/adaag ''Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)''] (see MUTCD Section 1A.11) contains specifications for design and placement of detectable warning surfaces.
 
[[Image:620.2.18 3B19.jpg|thumb|center|780px|<center>'''Fig. 620.2.18, Examples of Crosswalk Markings (MUTCD Figs. 3B-19 and -20)'''</center>]]
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 3997'''=
 
 
===616.6.2.2 Flags and Advance Warning Rail System on Signs===
<div style="width:100%; overflow:auto;">
<div style="width:70%; float:left;">
Signs may be enhanced with flags, but only during daytime hours. Flags should not be used on signs at night, except that it is allowable to leave flags on signs when the work carries over from day to night.
 
'''Standard.''' When standard orange flags are used in conjunction with signs, they shall not block the sign face.
</div>
<div style="width:30%; float:left;"">
{|
| [[image:616.6.2.2_01.png|right|210px|thumb|<center>'''Example of flag assembly on a sign'''</center>]] || [[image:616.2.9 flag assembly.jpg|right|210px|thumb|<center>'''Example of flag assembly, viewed from behind the temporary sign'''</center>]]
|}
</div>
</div>
</div>


Transportation Systems Management and Operations (TSMO) consists of operational strategies and systems that cost-effectively optimize the safety, reliability, efficiency, and capacity of the transportation system. TSMO emphasizes maximizing the performance of the existing system through proactive management and operational improvements.


==909.1 Introduction to TSMO==


===909.1.1 Overview of TSMO Strategies===
TSMO strategies are the day-to-day operational actions MoDOT uses to actively manage the transportation system and address the primary causes of congestion without relying solely on capacity expansion.


Congestion generally falls into two categories:
* Non-recurring delays arise from unplanned or irregular events such as incidents, disasters, weather, work zones, and special events. These disruptions are inherently unpredictable, vary in severity and duration, and often require dynamic traffic management and interagency coordination to reduce their impact.
* Recurring delays occur regularly at specific locations, most often during peak traffic periods. This type of congestion is usually the result of demand exceeding the capacity of the existing system. Transportation agencies do not have the resources to construct enough highway capacity to eliminate all recurring congestion. Instead, TSMO strategies provide more cost-effective ways to manage demand and improve flow.


==616.23.1 Definitions==
By addressing both types of congestion, TSMO supports MoDOT’s mission of moving Missourians safely and reliably while making the best use of available resources. These strategies are organized based on whether they address '''non-recurring delays''' or '''recurring delays''', as described below.
{|style="border:10px solid #ff9933;" width="775px" align="center"
|-
|[[image:616.23.1.jpg|center|750px]]
|}
 
'''Activity Area''' - Area of a temporary traffic control zone where work activity takes place. It is comprised of the work, traffic and buffer spaces.
 
'''Advance Warning Area''' - Area of a temporary traffic control zone where traffic is informed of the upcoming temporary traffic control zone.
 
'''Area Lighting''' - Lighting used at night to guide traffic through the temporary traffic control zone.
 
'''Annual Average Daily Traffic (AADT) ''' - Volume of vehicular traffic using a section of highway on an average day.
 
'''Barricade''' - Temporary traffic control device consisting of one or three appropriately marked rails used to close, restrict or delineate all or a portion of the right of way.
 
'''Barrier-Mounted Sign''' - Sign mounted on a temporary or permanent traffic barrier.
 
'''Buffer Space''' - Area within the activity area free of equipment, material, and personnel used to provide lateral and/or longitudinal separation of traffic from the workspace or an unsafe condition.
 
'''Channelizer''' - Temporary traffic control device used to guide traffic or delineate an unsafe condition.
[[image:616.23.1 daytime.jpg|right|200px]]
'''Crash Cushion''' - Temporary traffic control device used at fixed object and other desirable locations to reduce crash severity.
 
'''Daytime/Daylight''' - Period of time from one-half hour after sunrise to one-half hour before sunset.
 
'''Detour''' - Temporary rerouting of traffic onto an existing facility to avoid a temporary traffic control zone.
 
'''Diversion''' - Rerouting of traffic around an activity area using a temporary roadway or portions of an existing parallel roadway.
 
'''Divided Highway''' - Highway with physical separation of traffic in opposite directions.
 
'''Downstream Taper''' - Visual cue to traffic that access back into a closed lane is available.
 
'''Emergency Operation''' - Work involving the initial response to and repair/removal of safety concerns including Response Priority 1 items.
 
'''Fine Sign''' - Regulatory sign indicating the applicability of additional fines in a temporary traffic control zone.
 
'''Flag System''' – A flag bracket and two flag assemblies. Flags are used to enhance signs.
 
'''Flagger''' - Person who provides temporary traffic control by assigning right of way.
 
'''Flashing Arrow Panel''' - Temporary traffic control device with a pattern of elements capable of flashing displays (i.e. left/right arrow, double arrow, caution mode) used to provide warning or guidance to traffic.
[[image:616.23.1 fleet warning light.jpg|right|200px|thumb|<center>'''Fleet Lighting'''</center>]]
'''Fleet Lighting''' - Rotating or flashing lights used to increase the visibility of work-related vehicles and equipment in the temporary traffic control zone.
 
'''Guide Sign''' - Sign showing route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest or other geographical, recreational or cultural information.
 
'''High Speed''' - Posted speed of 50 mph and above.
 
'''Highway''' - Any facility constructed for the purposes of moving traffic.
 
'''Incident Area''' - Temporary traffic control zone where temporary traffic control devices are deployed in response to a traffic incident, natural disaster, special event, etc.
 
'''Intermediate-Term Stationary Operation''' - Daytime work occupying a location from more than one daylight period up to 3 days or nighttime work occupying a location more than 60 minutes.
 
'''Lane Taper''' - Temporary traffic control measure used to merge or shift traffic either left or right out of a closed lane.
 
'''Lateral Buffer Space''' - Obstacle-free area adjacent to the workspace or an unsafe condition that provides room for recovery of an errant vehicle.
 
'''Lighting Device''' - Temporary traffic control device illuminating a portion of the roadway or supplementing other traffic control devices.
 
'''Long-Term Stationary Operation''' - Work occupying a location longer than 3 days.
 
'''Longitudinal Buffer Space''' - Obstacle-free area in advance of the work space or an unsafe condition that provides room for recovery of an errant vehicle.
 
'''Low Speed''' - Posted speed of 45 mph and below.
 
'''Low Volume''' - 500 or less AADT. The rule of thumb is to count the number of vehicles passing a single reference point over a five-minute period. If not more than three vehicles pass the reference point in that period, then the road can be considered low volume for the purpose of installing work zone traffic control.
 
'''May''' - Indicates a permitted practice and carries no requirement or recommendation.
 
'''Mobile Operation''' - Work on the roadway that moves intermittently or continuously.
 
'''Motorized Traffic''' - Movement of vehicles and equipment on the roadway.
 
'''Multilane Highway''' - Highway with two or more driving lanes in the same direction of travel.
 
'''Nighttime''' - Period of time from one-half hour before sunset to one-half hour after sunrise.
[[image:616.23.1 non-motorize 2013.jpg|right|300px]]
'''Non-Motorized Traffic''' - Movement of pedestrians, bicycles, horse-drawn vehicles, etc. on roadway or within the right of way.
 
'''One-Lane, Two-Way Taper''' - Temporary traffic control measure used to channelize traffic through an activity area occupying one lane of an undivided, two-lane roadway.
 
'''[[:Category:620 Pavement Marking|Pavement Marking]]''' - Lines, markers, words and symbols affixed to the pavement surface to channelize and guide traffic.
 
'''Pilot Car''' - Vehicle used to guide a queue of vehicles through the temporary traffic control zone.
 
'''[[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F)#616.6.60 Portable Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD 6F.60)|
Portable Changeable Message Signs (CMS)]]''' - Temporary traffic control device capable of displaying a variety of messages to traffic.
 
'''Portable Sign''' - Sign mounted on temporary supports (e.g. self-driving post, easels, foldup stands, barricades, etc.).
 
'''Post-Mounted Sign''' - Sign mounted on a non-portable post (e.g. perforated square steel tube, u-channel, wood, etc.).
 
'''Protective Vehicle''' - Vehicle used to protect workers or work equipment from errant vehicles (e.g. pick up, dump truck, loader, etc.).
 
[[903.5 Regulatory Signs|'''Regulatory Sign''']] - Sign giving notice of traffic laws or regulations.
 
'''Roadway''' - Portion of highway, including shoulders, intended for use by motorized traffic.
 
[[941.3 Urban/Rural Designations|'''Rural''']] - Area generally characterized by lower volumes, higher speeds and fewer turning conflicts and conflicts with pedestrians. Includes unincorporated areas designated by community boards.
 
[[616.18 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 616# Safety Requirements (for Sec 616.3)| '''Safety Apparel''']] - [http://sharepoint/safety/csp/SitePages/PPE.aspx Personal protective equipment] worn by a worker to improve visibility (e.g. vests, hats, etc.).
 
'''Shall''' - Indicates a required, mandatory, or specifically prohibitive practice. Shall statements are not to be modified or compromised based on engineering judgement or engineering study.
 
'''Short Duration Operation''' - Daytime or nighttime work occupying a location up to 60 minutes.
 
'''Short-Term Stationary Operation''' - Daytime work occupying a location more than 60 minutes, but less than 12 hours.
 
'''Should''' - Indicates a recommended, but not mandatory, practice in typical situations. Deviations are allowed if engineering judgement or engineering study indicates the deviation to be appropriate.
 
'''Shoulder Taper''' - Temporary traffic control measure used to close the shoulder.
 
'''Sign''' - Traffic control device conveying a static message to traffic through words or symbols.
 
'''Speed Limit''' - Maximum speed applicable to a section of highway as established by law.
 
'''Stop Bar''' - Solid white pavement marking extending across an approach lane to indicate the point where traffic is to stop.
 
'''Supplemental Warning Methods''' - Temporary traffic control enhancements used to increase the effectiveness of select temporary traffic control devices or the awareness of the entire temporary traffic control zone.
 
'''Taper''' - Series of channelizers and/or pavement markings used to move traffic into the intended path.
 
'''Temporary Traffic Barrier''' - Temporary traffic control device used to create a physical separation between traffic and the workspace, an unsafe condition, or non-motorized traffic.
 
'''Temporary Traffic Control Device''' - Item used to regulate, warn or guide traffic through a temporary traffic control zone.
 
'''Temporary Traffic Control Plan''' - Describes temporary traffic control measures to be used for moving traffic through a temporary traffic control zone.
 
'''Temporary Traffic Control Signal''' - Temporary traffic control device used to assign right of way through automatic means.
 
'''Temporary Traffic Control Zone''' - Section of highway where traffic conditions are changed due to a work zone or an incident area through the use of temporary traffic control devices, [[616.16 Law Enforcement Services|law enforcement]] or other authorized officials. It extends from the first warning sign or rotating/strobe lights on a vehicle to the last temporary traffic control device.
 
'''Termination Area''' - Area of a temporary traffic control zone returning traffic to the normal path.
 
'''Traffic''' - Highway user.
 
'''Traffic Space''' - Area within the activity area in which traffic is routed through the activity area.
 
'''Transition Area''' - Area of a temporary traffic control zone where traffic is redirected out of the normal path and into the traffic space.
 
'''Traveled Way''' - Portion of roadway intended for the movement of motorized traffic.
 
[[:Category:612 Impact Attenuators#612.1.1 Truck- and Trailer-Mounted Attenuators|'''Truck-Mounted Attenuator (TMA) ''']] - Device designed to attach to the rear of protective vehicles to absorb the impact of an errant vehicle or inattentive driver.
 
'''Undivided Highway''' - Highway with no physical separation of traffic in opposite directions.
 
'''Urban''' - Area within the limits of incorporated towns and cities where the posted speed is 60 mph or less.
 
'''Vehicle-Mounted Sign''' - Sign mounted on a protective vehicle used in short duration and mobile operations or on a pilot car.
 
'''Warning Sign''' - Sign giving notice of a situation or condition that might not be readily apparent.
 
'''Work Duration''' - Length of time an operation occupies a location.
 
'''Work Lighting''' - Lighting used at night to perform activities within the workspace.
 
'''Work Location''' - Portion of right of way in which work is performed.
 
'''Workspace''' - Area within the activity area closed to traffic and set aside for workers, equipment, materials and a protective vehicle, if one is used upstream. Channelizers usually delineate workspaces.
 
'''Work Vehicle''' - Any vehicle by which work is performed.
 
'''Work Zone''' - Temporary traffic control zone where temporary traffic control devices are deployed for construction, maintenance or utility- related work activities.
 
'''Work Zone Length''' - Distance from last sign in the advance warning area to the last temporary traffic control device in the same direction or the last sign in the advance warning area in the opposing direction, whichever is longest.
 
Refer to [[902.18 Glossary|EPG 902.18 Glossary]] for definitions of interchange, intersection and right of way.
 
 
 
 
 
=====616.23.2.5.1.1 [[616.6_Temporary_Traffic_Control_Zone_Devices_(MUTCD_6F)#616.6.2.2_Flags|Flags]]=====
Guidance is located in [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F)#616.6.2.2 Flags|EPG 616.6.2.2 Flags]].
 
 
 
 
 
=====616.23.2.5.1.3 [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F)#616.6.2.3 Sign Dimension|Sign Design]]=====
Details, descriptions, and ordering information for signs used for temporary traffic control are specified in [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F)|EPG 616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices]].
 
These signs may have a rigid or flexible substrate. Additional information is located in [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F)#616.6.2.3 Sign Dimension|EPG 616.6.2.3 Sign Dimension]] and [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F)#616.6.3 Sign Placement (MUTCD 6F.03)|EPG 616.6.3 Sign Placement]].
 
Flags may be used to supplement these signs provided they do not block the sign face. Additional information located in [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F)#616.6.2.2 Flags|EPG 616.6.2.2 Flags]].
 
 
 
 
<BIG><BIG><BIG><BIG>UPLOAD NEW IMAGES</BIG></BIG></BIG></BIG>
 
 
===616.19.2.2.2 Sign and Flag Quality===
<gallery widths=250px heights=250px position="right" style="text-align:center; font-weight:bold; margin-left:0em" caption="Acceptable Examples">
File:616.19.2.2.2_01.jpg|(1)
File:616.19.2.2.2_02.jpg|(2)
File:616.19.2.2.2_03.jpg|(3)
</gallery>
The signs in '''Pictures 1, 2 and 3''' are considered in good quality. Supplemental devices such as flags and/or a cone may be placed next to a sign. Picture 2 is an example of the proper placement of a FLAGGER (WO20-7) sign, with the optional flags, in advance of the hill versus after the hill. In urban areas with barrier walls and narrow shoulders, a truncated sign may be used as shown in Picture 3.
 
::Note: TTCDs may be highly visible during the day but may not be at night due to inadequate retroreflectivity. MoDOT and Contractor representatives should drive through the work zone at night to check nighttime visibility.
 
<gallery widths=250px heights=250px position="right" style="text-align:center; font-weight:bold; margin-left:0em" caption="Unacceptable Examples">
File:616.19.2.2.2_04.jpg|(4)
File:616.19.2.2.2_05.jpg|(5)
File:616.19.2.2.2_06.jpg|(6)
File:616.19.2.2.2_07.jpg|(7)
File:616.19.2.2.2_08.jpg|(8)
File:616.19.2.2.2_09.jpg|(9)
</gallery>
'''Pictures 4-7''' are in unacceptable condition. Dirty or damaged signs should be cleaned, repaired, or replaced before being installed. When cleaning, follow manufacturer’s recommendations, so the daytime and nighttime visibility of the sign is not adversely impacted. The MEN WORKING sign ('''Picture 8''') should be replaced with worker symbol sign or WORKERS sign (WO-21-1 or 1a) to meet current standards. '''Picture 9''' shows unacceptable flags, if used, deteriorated flags should be replaced.
 
<gallery widths=250px heights=250px position="right" style="text-align:center; font-weight:bold; margin-left:0em" caption="Unacceptable Examples">
File:616.19.2.2.2_10.jpg|(10)
File:616.19.2.2.2_11.jpg|(11)
File:616.19.2.2.2_12.jpg|(12)
File:616.19.2.2.2_13.jpg|(13)
</gallery>
'''Pictures 10 - 13''' are examples of  unacceptable nighttime visibility. Proper storing, transporting, and covering signs is crucial to minimizing deficiencies.
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4008'''=
 
 
===403.1.5 Mixture Production Specification Limits (Sec 403.5)===
Intentional deviations from the JMF will not be permitted, except under the conditions set forth in Sec 403.11. The plant shall be operated in such a manner that the mix is produced as shown on the JMF. The specification tolerances are developed in an attempt to keep the mix as consistent as possible and to allow for some variation during production. However, these tolerances are not production limits. For example, if the target binder content is 5.0%, the binder content of the mix can range from 4.7% to 5.3% when the tolerances are applied. The contractor will not be allowed to produce the mix at 4.7% to save money.
 
Operating out of the specifications may reduce the contractor's pay and/or the pavement service life. When QC tests, either random or informational, are out of specification tolerances, the contractor should adjust the production to bring the mix back in. When QA tests are out of specification tolerances, the contractor should be notified immediately. The contractor is responsible for deciding when adjustments are made to control the mix. Some test properties may be allowed to deviate beyond specification limits occasionally, provided that adjustments are made and the following tests show that production is back within limits.
 
Production may be required to cease if the random QC or QA test results are either out of specifications far enough to indicate that the mix may be subject to failure or beyond the specification removal limits. Production should cease until verification that the problem has been corrected. An order record should be written, on the same day or the next day if paving occurs at night, describing the deficiency and the location and amount of mix affected. The contractor may elect to continue production in order to run more tests. If so, the order record should state that any mix produced after the order record was issued is at the contractor’s risk. Final disposition of the mix can then be made based on all tests and observations and may consist of acceptance at a reduced price or removal and replacement of unacceptable material.
 
Both QC and QA will use the following procedures to determine volumetrics of the mix and compliance with Standard Specification Sections 403.5.3 through 403.5.5. These procedures are discussed in greater detail in the Levels 1 and 2 Bituminous Training.
 
In situations where a retained sample must be tested, the following procedure should be used to reheat the sample. Heat the sample in an oven until the mix is workable. Take the mix out of the sample container (box, bucket, etc.) and spread it in a large pan or several smaller pans. Using this procedure, the mix will reach the molding temperature much quicker than it would if it were left in a mass in the sample container. Also, less aging of the mix occurs since the mix is in the oven for a shorter period of time. Once the mix has reached an acceptable temperature, quarter split the mix. The split portions to be used for making gyratory specimens shall then be heated to the compaction temperature. The entire suite of tests must be performed on a retained sample.
 
'''Gradation''' (Sec 403.5.1)
 
See Sieve Analysis in [[460.3 Plant Inspection|Plant Inspection]]. The gradation of the mix
is not a pay factor item. However, it does have a significant influence on the volumetrics of the mix. Samples may be taken from the hot bins at a batch plant or from the combined cold feed at a drum plant. It is acceptable to determine gradation from the binder ignition sample according to AASHTO Standard Test Method T 308. Contractors should be allowed the option provided that the chosen method is spelled out in the Quality Control Plan. Gradations of extracted samples would be satisfactory as well. QC is required to sample the aggregate and perform a sieve analysis twice per lot. QA is required to independently sample the aggregate and perform a sieve analysis once per lot. These testing requirements are minimums and should be increased as necessary. Minor deviations outside the tolerances given in Standard Specification Sections 403.5.1.1 or 403.5.1.2, whichever is applicable, may be allowed if the test results indicate that the binder content, volumetrics, and density of the mix are satisfactory. If the test results are unsatisfactory, adjustments of the JMF, in accordance with Standard Specification Section 403.11, are necessary.
 
'''Stone Matrix Asphalt Tolerances''' (Sec 403.5.1.1)
 
The tolerances from the JMF for SMA mixes are given in Standard Specification Section 403.5.1.1.
 
'''Mixture Tolerance''' (Sec 403.5.1.2)
 
During production, the combined aggregate gradation must be within the following limits:
 
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
! Colspan="4" style="background:#BEBEBE" | Percent Passing by Weight
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sieve Size||style="background:#BEBEBE"|SP250||style="background:#BEBEBE"|SP190||style="background:#BEBEBE"|SP125
|-
| 1 ½ in. || 100 || -- || --
|-
|1 in.|| 90-100 || 100 || --
|-
|¾ in.|| 92 Max. || 90-100 || 100
|-
|½ in.|| -- || 92 Max. || 90-100
|-
|3/8 in.|| -- || -- || 92 Max.
|-
|#4||--||--||--
|-
|#8||17-47||21-51||26-60
|-
|#16||--||--||--
|-
|#30||--||--||--
|-
|#50||--||--||--
|-
|#100||--||--||--
|-
|#200||1-7||2-8||2-10
|}
 
'''Density''' (Sec 403.5.2)
 
See also Density in [[460.3 Plant Inspection|Plant Inspection]] Density Samples in [[460.6 Paving Operations|Paving Operations]]. One sample per sublot will be taken for QC testing. QA will randomly test one of the samples from each lot to verify that a favorable comparison is obtained. These testing requirements are minimums and should be increased as necessary. SMA mixes shall have a minimum density of 94.0% with no upper limit. All other mixes shall have a density of 94.0 ±2.0%.
 
'''Shoulder Density''' (Sec 403.5.2.1) and '''Integral Shoulder''' (Sec 403.5.2.2)
 
If the shoulders and the traveled way are placed in the same pass (integrally), the cores will be taken on the traveled way. No cores will be taken on the shoulder. For example, if the paving width is 16’ with a 12’ travel lane and a 4’ shoulder, the shoulder will not be subject to density testing.
 
'''Asphalt Content''' (Sec 403.5.3)
 
QC is required to sample and test the mix for the binder content once per sublot and QA is
required to independently sample and test the mix once per lot. These testing requirements are
minimums and should be increased as necessary. During production, the binder content of the
mix, as determined by sampling and testing, shall be within ±0.3% of the target listed on the JMF.
 
<div id="Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) (Sec 403.5.4)"></div>
'''Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA)''' (Sec 403.5.4)
 
QC is required to sample and test the mix for the VMA once per sublot and QA is required
to independently sample and test the mix once per lot. These testing requirements are minimums
and should be increased as necessary. The VMA of the mix shall be within –0.5% and +2.0% of
the minimum required for the corresponding mix type (see Standard Specification Section 403.4.6.2).
 
The following table gives the ranges for each mix type:
 
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Mix Type||style="background:#BEBEBE"|VMA Limits (percent)
|-
|align="center"| SP250 ||align="center"| 11.5-14.0
|-
|align="center"|SP190||align="center"| 12.5-15.0
|-
|align="center"|SP125||align="center"| 13.5-16.0
|-
|align="center"|SP095||align="center"|14.5-17.0
|-
|align="center"|SP048||align="center"| 15.5-18.0
|-
|align="center"|SMA||align="center"| 16.5-19.0
|}
 
'''Air Voids (V<sub>a</sub>)''' (Sec 403.5.5)
 
QC is required to sample and test the mix for the air voids once per sublot and QA is
required to independently sample and test the mix once per lot. These testing requirements are
minimums and should be increased as necessary. The V<sub>a</sub> for all mixes shall be 4.0 ±1.0%.
 
<div id="Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) (Sec 403.5.6)"></div>
'''Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR)''' (Sec 403.5.6)
 
The TSR is used to evaluate the impact that water saturation and freeze-thaw cycles have on the strength of an asphalt mix. It can also be used to predict the susceptibility of the mix to
stripping.
 
During production, loose mix samples will be taken and quartered as described in [[#403.1.5 Mixture Production Specification Limits (Sec 403.5)|Mixture Production Specification Limits]]. TSR samples need to be taken from random locations. However, they should be taken whenever it is convenient to production, such as during a big gap between QC volumetric tests. By specification, sampling locations are from the roadway behind the paver, however, should the MoDOT inspector deem this an unsafe or impractical location, the sample may be taken from the plant. The QA sample(s) should be taken from the same point as the QC sample(s). If QC takes their sample from the plant, QA should take their sample from the plant also. This does not mean that QA should be taking their samples at the same time as QC. Two opposite quarters will be retained and the remaining two quarters will be mixed together and tested in accordance with AASHTO T283.
 
QC should obtain enough mix to retain a sample. QC will sample and test each mix at a minimum of once every 10,000 tons, or fraction thereof. QA will independently sample and test each mix at a minimum of once every 50,000 tons. The TSR sampling requirements are best described with an example. Suppose that 112,960 tons of SP190 are to be placed on a project. By specification, QC is required to take twelve samples and QA is required to take three samples. There are two possible scenarios for sampling this mix. QC may take eleven samples representing 10,000 tons each and a twelfth sample that represents the remaining 2,960 tons. Or QC may take ten samples that represent 10,000 tons each and two samples that represent the remaining 12,960 tons (6,480 tons each). Either scenario is acceptable. Likewise, QA may take two samples representing 50,000 tons each and a third sample that represents the remaining 12,960 tons. Or QA may take one sample that represents 50,000 tons and two samples that represent the remaining 62,960 tons (31,480 tons each). The contract quantity may be used to approximate sample 1 locations.
 
MoDOT should collect at least 250 pounds of asphalt mix for the QA sample, 125 pounds is retained by the RE and the other 125 pounds is sent to the Central Laboratory (typically) in 4 – 13” x 13” x 4.5” boxes for QA testing. Each box must be labeled on one side with the AASHTOWARE Project (AWP) ID, Mix Type, VMA Limits (percent) number and the mix number. An AWP record must be created for each sample, which must include all required information, the mix number, sample date, and the represented tonnage. The represented tonnage is explained in the example in the preceding paragraph. It is recommended to include the lot and sublot to the AWP record as additional information.
 
Additional information that may be included in the AWP record is the G<sub>mm</sub> from the sublot that the sample was taken in (QC or QA) and the specimen weight that QC has been using. The specimen weight may be different from that shown on the JMF because of bin percent changes, etc. This information is helpful because it results in less trial-and-error for the Central Laboratory.
 
In the laboratory, a minimum of six specimens are compacted to a height of approximately 95 mm. The air voids of the specimens are calculated. For all mixes other than SMA, the air voids must be within 7.0 ±0.5%. For SMA mixes, the air voids must be within 6.0 ±0.5%. Half of these specimens are saturated, frozen, and thawed. These are the conditioned specimens. The degree of saturation of the conditioned specimens is also calculated. The remaining specimens are unconditioned. Then, the indirect-tensile strength of all of the specimens is determined. Therefore, the TSR is the ratio of the average tensile strength of the conditioned specimens to the average tensile strength of the unconditioned specimens.
<div id="A favorable comparison will be obtained"></div>
 
A favorable comparison will be obtained if the QC and QA test results are within 10% of each other. The contractor’s pay will be adjusted in accordance with Standard Specification Section 403.23.5 based on the QC test results. For example, if the QC TSR is 95% and the QA TSR is 93%, a favorable comparison has been obtained and the contractor will receive a 3% bonus. However, if the difference is greater than 10%, the field office should be consulted. The field office will evaluate the air voids and saturation levels. The raw data should be collected from QC and forwarded to the field office for comparison in order to determine whether it will be necessary to proceed with 3<sup>rd</sup> party testing. QC and QA retained samples should be kept for an extended period of time so that they may be used during dispute resolution, if necessary.
 
The QC data should be reported in AWP (Test - SAA402AB). Contractors may report their own test results using the TSR Contractor Reporting Excel to Oracle Spreadsheet available on the MoDOT [http://www.modot.org/business/contractor_resources/Quality_Management/ Quality Management] website. Furthermore, this information is quarried regularly and, provided that a favorable comparison is reached, used to signal the appropriate time for disposal of the remaining TSR sample at the Central Lab.
<div id="Aggregate Properties"></div>
 
'''Aggregate Properties''' (Sec 403.5.7)
 
The aggregate consensus tests (Fine and Coarse Aggregate Angularity, Clay Content, and Thin, Elongated Particles) are performed on the blended aggregate. The aggregate will be sampled from the combined cold feed whether dealing with a drum-mix plant or a batch plant. Aggregate samples should be taken in accordance with AASHTO R 90.
 
For each mix that is produced, QC shall sample the aggregate and perform the consensus tests once every 10,000 tons with a minimum of one per mix per project. QA will independently sample the aggregate and perform the consensus tests once per project. QA should also test a minimum of one QC retained sample per project. For large projects, enough QC retained samples should be tested to ensure that QC is performing the tests correctly. These testing requirements are minimums and should be increased as necessary. During production, the following tolerances are applied (see Standard Specification Sections 403.2.1 through 403.2.5 and [[media:403 Figure Consensus Testing.pdf|Consensus Testing]]).
 
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Property||style="background:#BEBEBE"|Tolerance
|-
| FAA || 2% below the minimum
|-
| CAA || 5% below the minimum
|-
| Clay Content|| 5% below the minimum
|-
|Thin, Elongated Particles|| 2% above the maximum
|}
 
'''Moisture Content''' (Sec 403.5.9)
 
See also Asphalt Binder Content in [[460.3 Plant Inspection|Plant Inspection]].
 
'''Contamination''' (Sec 403.5.10)
 
See Material Acceptance in [[460.6 Paving Operations|Paving Operations]].
 
 
 
 
===403.1.17 Quality Control (Sec 403.17)===
 
Under QC/QA, the contractor performs quality control (QC) testing. The contractor is paid based on the results of the randomly located QC tests for Superpave mixes. Beyond random QC tests, quality control by the contractor consists of constantly monitoring materials integrity, mix production and laydown operations to ensure overall acceptability.
 
<div id="Asphalt Test Results (Sec 403.17.1.1)">
'''Asphalt Test Results''' (Sec 403.17.1.1)
 
A copy of all random QC test results shall be furnished to the QA inspector no later than the beginning of the day after testing has been performed. All raw data and printouts must be included with the testing records. Raw data consists of all weights, measurements, etc. used to arrive at the final test results. Printouts include the gyration/height data from the gyratory compactor and the asphalt content ticket from the binder ignition oven or nuclear gauge. The QC testing records must be made available to the QA inspector at all times.
 
It is QC’s responsibility to take appropriate action if unsatisfactory mix is being produced. This may include making adjustments to the plant to bring the mix back into specification, sampling the mix from the roadway and performing informational testing, removing mix from the roadway, etc.
 
'''Informational Tests'''
 
An informational test is a test that QC may perform between random testing to determine whether or not the mix is within specifications. Informational testing is not required and may be performed at any time and at any frequency. Generally, informational testing will be performed early in the production period. The informational test may not be completed in full. For example, QC may only compact the gyratory specimens. Doing so will yield specimen heights and the contractor may or may not make production adjustments based on these heights. Informational test samples must be clearly marked as such if they are tested and stored in the field laboratory.
 
QC is not required to provide the QA inspector with informational test results, since informational tests cannot be used in the QC process to determine pay factors, The timing of random number locations being given to the contractor, typically 100 to 150 tons in advance, is meant to protect the integrity of the statistical sampling process. QA always has the option of taking its own informational samples.
 
Informational test data may be used to determine asphalt removal limits if it is adequately documented. It should not be used for QLA under any circumstances. To be considered adequately documented the following criteria should be met:
 
*The gyratory pucks should be clearly identified and labeled and made available for verification.
*The gyratory printout should be available.
*The printout from the AC test should be available.
 
If the preceding conditions are met and the gyratory specimens are used to troubleshoot the placement, the specimens can then be weighed and bulked to determine the volumetric properties. Data from informational tests is approximate. Its only legitimate use to the QA inspector is to help determine the point on the roadway where the mixture transitioned either above or below the removal limits. We don’t want to remove acceptable mix or leave unacceptable mix in place.
 
'''Removal Limits'''
 
As an example of how informational tests may be used to designate removal limits of failing QC samples, the following situation is provided. The random QC sample shown in the diagram below fell late in sublot ‘a’ and test results indicated that voids were below the limits for removal. By specification sublot ‘a’ should be removed. By the time the test results were available and corrective action was taken, the contractor had crossed into sublot ‘b’. Assuming that mix properties were acceptable at the beginning of sublot ‘a’, the actual limits of unacceptable material are indicated by the dashed lines.
 
Adhering strictly to the specification, it is likely that acceptable material early in sublot ‘a’ will be removed, and it is also likely that unacceptable material early in sublot ‘b’ will be left in place. An adequately documented informational test may be used to zero in on the transitions out of, and back into, acceptable mix. It doesn’t matter that the data is approximate, only that it is above the limit for removal.
 
Random tests within removal limits are to be replaced by an equal number of random QC test locations, regardless of tonnage. For example, if 750 tons replace an area covered by two random tests, the new tests would be randomly chosen in each 375 ton portion of the replaced mixture.
 
The resident engineer has the option to determine removal limits based on puck height, provided that the informational test data is consistent with previous production.
 
[[image:403_removal_limits.png|950px|center|thumb|<center>]]
 
When the random QC density core is below or above the removal limits, additional cores may be cut using the following procedure to determine the area of removal. Locations 250’ parallel to the centerline, ahead and back of the failing QC location, will be determined by the engineer. Cores will be cut in these locations and tested. If both sets of cores are not below or above the removal limits, the 500’ section will be removed and replaced with acceptable material and a new random QC core will be cut with-in the new pavement. If either set of the cores are below or above the removal limits, the whole sublot or the area in which the density core represents is subject to removal.
 
Any sublot of material with air voids in the compacted specimens less than 2.5 percent shall be evaluated with Hamburg testing and removed and replaced with acceptable material by the contractor if the rut depth is greater than 14.0 mm.
 
<div id="level of service (LOS)"></div>
'''Inertial Profiler Test Results''' (Sec 610)
Surface of the pavement should be thoroughly tested with an inertial profiler or straightedge as required by [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=9 Sec 610]. The procedures for testing with an inertial profiler and analyzing the results with the ProVAL software program are set forth in [[106.3.2.59 TM-59, Determination of the International Roughness Index|EPG 106.3.2.59 TM-59, Determination of the International Roughness Index]].
 
'''Bituminous Quality Control Plan''' (Sec 403.17.2)
 
The contractor documents the QC method with a quality control plan (QC Plan*). The QC plan for Superpave mixes shall include the contact information of the contractor’s QC representative, lot and sublot sizes and how they will be designated, the test method for determining asphalt binder content, the number of cores to be cut for density determination, and the independent third party for dispute resolution. The QC plan is approved by MoDOT Construction and Materials and used as a contract document during mix production. Contractor technicians who perform materials testing shall be certified through the MoDOT Technician Certification Program (TCP).
 
*Note*: A QC Plan is not required for bituminous base (BB) and pavement (BP) mixes.
 
Up to 3 cores are allowed at each random location, but only if spelled out in the QC plan. In the drawing below, the cylinder represents the station and offset of the random location. Best management practice is for QA to mark that location on the pavement. The first density core should have that marking on it. Any additional cores should be taken along a straight line, parallel to the centerline, within 1 foot either side of the random location.
 
[[image:403_2foot.png|350px|center|thumb|<center>]]
 
'''Plant Calibration''' (Sec 403.17.2.2)
 
See [[:Category:404 Bituminous Mixing Plants|Bituminous Mixing Plants]].
 
'''Retained Samples''' (Sec 403.17.2.3)
 
QC must retain the portion of each sample that is not tested after the sample has been reduced to testing size. This includes gradation, consensus, TSR, and volumetrics samples. The retained samples must be clearly identified in accordance with Standard Specification Section 403.17.2.3 and stored in the field laboratory for a minimum of 7 days. Also, all cores must be retained for a minimum of 7 days. Notwithstanding the 7 day minimum, retained samples should not be discarded until all comparison issues with the lot are resolved. If space at the field lab is an issue, the sample should be stored at the project office.
 
There is no legitimate reason for unidentified samples to be in the field laboratory. The QA inspector should insist that all test specimens in the field laboratory be marked as soon as they are cool enough. The identifying mark should be permanent, unique, and indicate what the sample is.
 
When running a QC split sample, the comparisons should be within the tolerances shown in the following table:
 
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Loose Mix Property||style="background:#BEBEBE"|Tolerance
|-
|align="center"| G<sub>mb</sub> ||align="center"| 0.010
|-
|align="center"|G<sub>mm</sub>||align="center"| 0.010
|-
|align="center"|AC %||align="center"| 0.1%
|}
 
'''Gradation Sample''' (Sec 403.17.2.3.1)
 
QC will retain the portion of their gradation sample that is not tested. This includes the sample of the combined cold feed from a drum plant and all hot bin samples from a batch plant. Aggregate samples should be taken in accordance with AASHTO R 90.
 
'''Loose Mix Sample''' (Sec 403.17.2.3.2)
 
A loose mix sample consisting of roughly 100 lbs. will be taken from the roadway behind the paver, in accordance with AASHTO T168, at the required frequency. The sample will be thoroughly mixed and quartered in accordance with AASHTO R47, or with an approved splitting/quartering device. Two opposite quarters will be retained for testing during the dispute resolution process, if necessary. The remaining two quarters will be mixed together and quartered again.
 
The required weight of mix, as listed on the JMF, will be taken from one quarter and used to compact a specimen in accordance with AASHTO T312. The mix will be compacted to Ndes gyrations while the mix temperature is within the molding range listed on the JMF. Using the opposite quarter, follow the same procedure for the second specimen. The Gmb of each specimen will be determined and the average will be used to calculate the air voids Va and the voids in the mineral aggregate (VMA). By specification, a minimum of two compacted specimens must be used to calculate these properties.
 
A third quarter will be used to determine the Gmm of the mix in accordance with AASHTO T209. The minimum sample size for each type of mix can be found in the training manual. This property is used to calculate the Va and density. The volume of the sample, which is needed in the calculation, can be determined by either the weigh-in-air method or the weigh-in-water method. The weigh-in-air method consists of weighing the sample and container (with the lid) completely filled with water in air. The weigh-in-water method consists of weighing the sample and container (without the lid) completely submerged in water.
 
The remaining mix should be mixed together and quartered again. To determine the binder content using the nuclear gauge, enough mix should be taken from opposite quarters. The required weight of mix is listed on the JMF. A moisture content sample should be taken from the same quarters. To determine the binder content using the binder ignition oven, enough mix should be taken from one quarter. The minimum sample size for each type of mix can be found in the training manual. A moisture content sample should be taken from the same quarter. Sometimes the ignition oven may not shut itself off. The oven may be shut off manually as long as 3 consecutive readings show less than 0.01% loss. The sample should be examined to assure that a complete burn has been achieved. This will be considered a valid test.
 
'''Quality Control Laboratory''' (Sec 403.17.3)
 
The contractor is required to provide an appropriately equipped QC laboratory, however, it is not required to be at the plant. The contractor is also required to provide office space at the asphalt plant for the QA inspector to work on records and reports. Usually, these two requirements are met with one structure, but not always. The intent of the specification will be met if the QA inspector is provided with suitable facilities at the plant, but the lab is located offsite at another location, such as between the jobsite and the plant. The laboratory should have internet access in the event that cell phone service is not available.
 
'''Calibration Schedule''' (Sec 403.17.3.1)
 
Calibrations and verifications of the testing equipment are very important. If the equipment has not been calibrated or verified as required, false test results may be obtained. The maximum intervals are given in Standard Specification Section 403.17.3.1. These frequencies are taken from the AASHTO test methods and/or the manufacturer’s recommendations.
 
'''Calibration Records''' (Sec 403.17.3.1.2)
 
Periodically, the QA inspector should check the QC calibration records to ensure that the equipment has been calibrated or verified in accordance with Standard Specification Section 403.17.3.1.
 
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4009'''=
 
 
===502.1.11 Contractor Quality Control (Sec 502.11)===
'''Gradation and Deleterious Material (Sec 502.11.2.1.1)'''
 
: '''Aggregate Sampling Hints:'''
 
: '''Bin Discharge'''
:* Ensure sampling device cuts entire stream of material
:* Do not over fill the sample device
:* Ensure sampling device is cleaned out
:* Plant operating at usual production rates
:* Obtain 3 or more equal increments
:* Use AASHTO R 90
 
: '''Belt'''
:* Sample template fits the belt
:* Sweep all the fines from the belt
:* Obtain 3 or more increments
:* Ensure that the contractor is aware that a belt sample is being obtained
:* Ensure that template is pushed all the all the way to the belt
:* AASHTO R 90
 
: '''After Sampling Aggregate'''
:* Ensure that the proper sample size was obtained
:* [[:Category:1001 General Requirements for Material#1001.3 Sampling Procedures|EPG 1001.3 Sampling Procedures]]
:* Remix material during splitting process
:* MoDOT Test Method T-66
:* Use AASHTO T-248 splitting procedure
 
: '''Aggregate Testing Hints'''
:* Ensure sieves not damaged
:* Ensure nesting sieve is used
:* Do not over load the sieves
:* Ensure sieves are cleaned
:* Ensure proper test sample size used
:* [[:Category:1001 General Requirements for Material#1001.5.1.2 Sample Preparation|EPG 1001.5.1.2 Sample Preparation]]
:* Make sure balance is calibrated and level
 
: '''Deleterious Testing Hints'''
:* Ensure proper testing size
:* For Coarse Aggregate
:* [[:Category:1001 General Requirements for Material#1001.5.3 Percent Deleterious Substances in Coarse Aggregate|EPG 1001.5.3 Percent Deleterious Substances in Coarse Aggregate]]
:* [[:Category:1001 General Requirements for Material#1001.5.5 Percent Other Deleterious Substances, Clay Lumps and Shale in Fine Aggregate|EPG 1001.5.5 Percent Other Deleterious Substances, Clay Lumps and Shale in Fine Aggregate]]
:* Ensure balance is calibrated and level
:* Do not soak in water
:* Ensure proper lighting
 
'''Moisture Content (Sec 502.11.2.1.2)'''
 
: '''Moisture Content Testing Hints'''
:* Ensure balance is calibrated and level
:* Use correct sample size
:* Prevent loss of material when stirring
:* Do not over heat sample
:* Use glass plate to check for moisture
:* Use air-tight container to prevent moisture loss prior to testing
 
'''Slump (Sec 502.11.2.2)'''
 
: '''Slump Testing Hints'''
:* Perform test within 2 1/2 minutes
:* Fill mold in 3 equal volumes
:* Do not use rebar as tamper rod
:* Perform on level ground
:* Pre-wet equipment before testing
:* Lift mold straight up
:* Rod concrete properly
 
'''Entrained Air Content (Sec 502.11.2.3)'''
 
: '''Air Content Testing Hints'''
:* Rod concrete properly
:* Fill mold in 3 equal layers
:* Perform on level ground
:* Do not use rebar as tamping rod
:* Use aggregate correction factor
:* Tap sides of bowl after each layer
:* Pre-wet equipment before testing
:* Use calibrated equipment
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4020'''=
 
 
 
===501.1.6 Measurement of Material (Sec 501.6)===
 
====501.1.6.1 Mass Determination (Sec 501.6.1)====
The plant inspector must assure that all equipment is of an approved design and that all
installations meet requirements of the specifications. There must be no attachments to scales or
weighing hoppers which might hamper free movement of any part of the weighing mechanism, or
cause inaccurate weighing during actual operation of the equipment.
 
====501.1.6.2 Mixing Water (Sec 501.6.2)====
Control of the amount of water added to the batch at the concrete mixer is a highly important
part of the proportioning process. This is true whether water is being added through a paving
mixer or is being added to central or truck mixed concrete at the plant. The inspector should be
acquainted with the mechanical operation and construction of the water system. All joints should
be water tight and all valves should close tightly. Leakage of water into the mixer before or after the measuring tank has been discharged should not be permitted.
 
====501.1.6.3 Scale Calibration (Sec 501.6.3)====
Scales may be calibrated in the following manner: Balance the scales accurately with no load. Use standard test weights for the test load. Test weights are suspended from the weighing hopper in such a manner that the test load is uniformly distributed. Load the aggregate scales, using combinations of weights totaling approximately 2000 pounds with test weights as required by [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Sec 501] of the Standard Specifications, and record scale reading. Remove weights and draw 2000 pounds of aggregate equal to the test load from the bins into the weighing hopper. Apply 2000 pounds of standard weights and record scale reading again. Repeat this procedure of drawing up aggregate, adding test weights, and recording scale weights until each scale has been calibrated to a load approximately 5% greater than the maximum working load. Cement scales should be calibrated in the same manner with approximately 500 pounds of test weights. Aggregate or cement scales may be calibrated using different weight increments, if approved by the engineer.
 
PCC pavement plants should be calibrated before actual proportioning starts from any new plant set up. Scale verification by the contractor or producer shall occur six months after the last plant calibration.
 
Calibration for other than PCC pavement plants should be at the start of the construction season. Plants located in urban areas may require more frequent calibration. Verification is required to determine if any wear and tear on the weighing equipment has occurred during the previous six months.
 
Check sensitivity of the scale during the calibration test by applying a small weight and observing movement of the indicator. For aggregate scales, this weight should be 5 pounds and for cement scales, 2 pounds or less. In any case, the sensitivity weight should not be greater than 0.1% of the nominal capacity of the scale. Movement on the indicator should be sufficient to indicate that the scale is out of balance.
 
Check the balance of each scale assembly with all weigh beams in the system free and the weight indicator counterweights moved to zero.
 
The inspector should check scales for balance and sensitivity of each scale assembly at random at least twice each day. These checks should be noted in the diary.
 
Verification of weighing equipment will consist of balancing the scales and then loading the scale to approximately 250 pounds below the scale setting, then adding approximately 500 pounds of standard test weight in not more than 150 pound increments to bring the scale to approximately 250 pounds over the scale setting.
 
These weight intervals for calibration, verification, balance and sensitivity are considered to be the maximum. If difficulty is encountered with the batching operation or if any of the aforementioned checks indicate excessive deviations, the plant should be recalibrated to ensure compliance.
 
[https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Sec 502.4.5] of the Standard Specifications sets out certain conditions under which automatic batching equipment must be furnished. In addition to calibration procedures, automatic equipment must be checked for compliance with requirements of Sec 502.4.5 of the Standard Specifications. It is particularly important to ascertain that the discharge
mechanism will not operate when ingredients have not been weighed within specified tolerances.
 
This check can be made by adding or removing a weight slightly greater than the permissible tolerance to see if the discharge mechanism locks and appropriate warning is given, such as a light buzzer.
 
In the case of a breakdown in equipment which requires a shift to manual operation, the time of breakdown should be noted in the inspector's diary. The contractor should be promptly advised of the limitation for manual batching.
 
'''Water Measuring Devices.''' Control of the amount of water added to the batch at the concrete
mixer is a highly important part of the proportioning process. This is true whether water is
being added through a paving mixer or is being added to central or truck mixed concrete at the
plant. The inspector should be acquainted with the mechanical operation and construction of the
water system. All joints should be water tight and all valves should close tightly. Leakage of
water into the mixer before or after the measuring tank has been discharged should not be permitted.
 
Inspection and calibration of the water system should be performed with utmost care and thoroughness. The water measuring device must be calibrated to determine accuracy of measurements. The most common type of measuring device consists of a tank which may be emptied to various levels by adjusting the height of a movable discharge pipe inside the tank. These devices should be calibrated by weighing the amount of water discharged at various settings on the gauge dial. On some installations water may be weighed, in which case, it will be necessary to calibrate the weighing device by using standard weights. Operation of the water system during calibration should be similar to operating conditions. The full range of water measurements required during mixing operations should be covered during calibration. Several checks should be made at various settings to determine if the device will consistently measure the correct quantity within the permissible tolerances allowed by [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=8 Sec 501.6] of the Standard Specifications. The water meter will be verified at the same frequency as the weighing equipment. At least one setting shall be verified within the working range.
 
'''Admixture Dispensers.''' All measuring devices for dispensing of admixtures should also be carefully checked. The admixture dispensers shall be calibrated by a commercial scale company,
the admixture company or the concrete plant company. Admixture dispensers are usually checked by causing the dispenser to discharge into a graduate where the quantity may be accurately
measured. Repeated measurements should establish that the dispenser will operate within
tolerances permitted by the Standard Specifications. Results of all calibrations, verifications, and sensitivity checks should be made a part of the permanent records. Whenever the admixture dispenser is in question, the inspector has the authority to verify the dispenser.
 
 
 
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4023'''=
 
===751.24.2.1 Design===
 
Designs of Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) walls shall be completed by consultants or contractors in accordance with Section 11.10 of LRFD specifications, FHWA-NHI-10-024 and FHWA-NHI-10-025 for LRFD. [https://www.modot.org/bridge-pre-qualified-products-list Bridge Pre-qualified Products List (BPPL)] provided on MoDOT's web page and in Sharepoint contains a listing of facing unit manufacturers, soil reinforcement suppliers, and wall system suppliers which have been approved for use. See [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=11 Sec 720] and [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=14 Sec 1010] for additional information. The Geotechnical Section is responsible for checking global stability of permanent MSE wall systems, which should be reported in the Foundation Investigation Geotechnical Report. For MSE wall preliminary information, see [[751.1_Preliminary_Design#751.1.4.3_MSE_Walls|EPG 751.1.4.3 MSE Walls]]. For design requirements of MSE wall systems and temporary shoring (including temporary MSE walls), see [[:Category:720_Mechanically_Stabilized_Earth_Wall_Systems#720.2_Design_Requirements|EPG 720 Mechanically Stabilized Earth Wall Systems]]. For staged bridge construction, see [[751.1_Preliminary_Design#751.1.2.11_Staged_Construction|EPG 751.1.2.11 Staged Construction]].
 
For seismic design requirements, see [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]. References for consultants and contractors include Section 11.10 of LRFD, FHWA-NHI-10-024 and FHWA-NHI-10-025.
 
'''Design Life'''  
 
* 75 year minimum for permanent walls (if retained foundation require 100 year than consider 100 year minimum design life for wall).
 
'''Global stability:'''
 
Global stability will be performed by Geotechnical Section or their agent.
 
'''MSE wall contractor/designer responsibility:'''
 
MSE wall contractor/designer shall perform following analysis in their design for all applicable limit states.
 
:* External Stability
::* Limiting Eccentricity
::* Sliding
::* Factored Bearing Pressure/Stress ≤ Factored Bearing Resistance
:* Internal Stability
::* Tensile Resistance of Reinforcement
::* Pullout Resistance of Reinforcement
::* Structural Resistance of Face Elements
::* Structural Resistance of Face Element Connections
:* Compound Stability
:: Capacity/Demand ratio (CDR) for bearing capacity shall be ≥ 1.0
:: <math>Bearing\ Capacity\ (CDR)  = \frac{Factored\ Bearing\ Resistance}{Maximum\ Factored\ Bearing\ Stress} \ge 1.0</math>
:: Strength Limit States:
:: Factored bearing resistance = Nominal bearing resistance from Geotech report X Minimum Resistance factor (0.65, Geotech report)  LRFD Table 11.5.7-1 
 
:: Extreme Event I Limit State:
:: Factored bearing resistance = Nominal bearing resistance from Geotech report X Resistance factor
:: Resistance factor = 0.9  LRFD 11.8.6.1
 
:: Factored bearing stress shall be computed using a uniform base pressure distribution over an effective width of footing determined in accordance with the provisions of LRFD 10.6.3.1 and 10.6.3.2, 11.10.5.4  and Figure 11.6.3.2-1 for foundation supported on soil or rock.
 
:: B’ = L – 2e
 
:: Where,
::: L = Soil reinforcement length (For modular block use B in lieu of L as per LRFD 11.10.2-1)
::: B’ = effective width of footing
::: e = eccentricity
::: Note: When the value of eccentricity e is negative then B´ = L.
 
::Capacity/Demand ratio (CDR) for overturning shall be ≥ 1.0
::<math>Overtuning\ (CDR)  = \frac{Total\ Factored\ Resisting\ Moment}{Total\ Factored\ Driving\ Moment} \ge 1.0</math>
 
::Capacity/Demand ratio (CDR) for eccentricity shall be ≥ 1.0
::<math>Eccentricity\ (CDR)  = \frac{e_{Limit}}{e_{design}} \ge 1.0</math>
 
::Capacity/Demand ratio (CDR) for sliding shall be ≥ 1.0 &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LRFD 11.10.5.3 & 10.6.3.4
::<math>Sliding\ (CDR)  = \frac{Total\ Factored\ Sliding\ Resistance}{Total\ Factored\ Active\ Force} \ge 1.0</math>
 
::Capacity/Demand ratio (CDR) for internal stability shall be ≥ 1.0
 
::Eccentricity, (e) Limit for Strength Limit State: &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LRFD 11.6.3.3 & C11.10.5.4
::: For foundations supported on soil or rock, the location of the resultant of the reaction forces shall be within the middle two-thirds of the base width, L or (e ≤ 0.33L).
 
::Eccentricity, (e) Limit for Extreme Event I (Seismic): &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LRFD 11.6.5.1
:::For foundations supported on soil or rock, the location of the resultant of the reaction forces shall be within the middle two-thirds of the base width, L or (e ≤ 0.33L) for  γ<sub>EQ</sub> = 0.0 and middle eight-tenths of the base width, L or (e ≤ 0.40L) for  γ<sub>EQ</sub> = 1.0.  For γ<sub>EQ</sub>  between 0.0 and 1.0, interpolate e value linearly between 0.33L and 0.40L. For γ<sub>EQ</sub>  refer to LRFD 3.4.
 
:::Note: Seismic design shall be performed for γ<sub>EQ</sub> = 0.5
 
::Eccentricity, (e) Limit for Extreme Event II:
:::For foundations supported on soil or rock, the location of the resultant of the reaction forces shall be within the middle eight-tenths of the base width, L or (e ≤ 0.40L). 
 
'''General Guidelines'''
 
* Drycast modular block wall (DMBW-MSE) systems are limited to a 10 ft. height in one lift.
 
* Wetcast modular block wall (WMBW-MSE) systems are limited to a 15 ft. height in one lift.
 
* For Drycast modular block wall (DMBW-MSE) systems and Wetcast modular block wall (WMBW-MSE) systems, top cap units shall be used and shall be permanently attached by means of a resin anchor system.
 
* For precast modular panel wall (PMPW-MSE) systems, capstone may be substituted for coping and either shall be permanently attached to wall by panel dowels.
 
* For precast modular panel wall (PMPW-MSE) systems, form liners are required to produce all panels. Using form liner to produce panel facing is more cost effective than producing flat panels. Standard form liners are specified on the [https://www.modot.org/mse-wall-msew MSE Wall Standard Drawings]. Be specific regarding names, types and colors of staining, and names and types of form liner.
 
* MSE walls shall not be used where exposure to acid water may occur such as in areas of coal mining.
 
* MSE walls shall not be used where scour is a problem.
 
* MSE walls with metallic soil reinforcement shall not be used where stray electrical ground currents may occur as would be present near electrical substations.
 
* No utilities shall be allowed in the reinforced earth if future access to the utilities would require that the reinforcement layers be cut, or if there is a potential for material, which can cause degradation of the soil reinforcement, to leak out of the utilities into the wall backfill, with the exception of storm water drainage.
 
* All vertical objects shall have at least 4’-6” clear space between back of the wall facing and object for select granular backfill compaction and soil reinforcement skew limit requirements. For piles, see pipe pile spacers guidance.
 
* The interior angle between two MSE walls should be greater than 70°. However, if unavoidable, then place [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#J._MSE_Wall_Notes_.28Notes_for_Bridge_Standard_Drawings.29|EPG 751.50 J1.41 note]] on the design plans.
 
* Drycast modular block wall (DMBW-MSE) systems and Wetcast modular block wall (WMBW-MSE) systems may be battered up to 1.5 in. per foot. Modular blocks are also known as “segmental blocks”.
 
* The friction angle used for the computation of horizontal forces within the reinforced soil shall be greater than or equal to 34°.
 
* For epoxy coated reinforcement requirements, see [[751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines#751.5.9.2.2 Epoxy Coated Reinforcement Requirements|EPG 751.5.9.2.2 Epoxy Coated Reinforcement Requirements]].
 
* All concrete except facing panels or units shall be CLASS B or B-1.
 
* The friction angle of the soil to be retained by the reinforced earth shall be listed on the plans as well as the friction angle for the foundation material the wall is to rest on.
 
* The following requirement shall be considered (from 2009_FHWA-NHI-10-024 MSE wall 132042.pdf, page 200-201) when seismic design is required:
:* For seismic design category, SDC C or D (Zones 3 or 4), facing connections in modular block faced walls (MBW) shall use shear resisting devices (shear keys, pin, etc.) between the MBW units and soil reinforcement, and shall not be fully dependent on frictional resistance between the soil reinforcement and facing blocks. For connections partially dependent on friction between the facing blocks and the soil reinforcement, the nominal long-term connection strength T<sub>ac</sub>, should be reduced to 80 percent of its static value.
 
* Seismic design category and acceleration coefficients shall be listed on the plans for categories B, C and D. If a seismic analysis is required that shall also be noted on the plans. See [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#A._General_Notes|EPG 751.50 A1.1 note]].
 
* Plans note ([[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#J._MSE_Wall_Notes_.28Notes_for_Bridge_Standard_Drawings.29|EPG 751.50 J1.1]]) is required to clearly identify the responsibilities of the wall designer.
 
* Do not use Drycast modular block wall (DMBW-MSE) systems in the following locations:
 
::* Within the splash zone from snow removal operations (assumed to be 15 feet from the edge of the shoulder).
 
::* Where the blocks will be continuously wetted, such as around sources of water.
 
::* Where blocks will be located behind barrier or other obstacles that will trap salt-laden snow from removal operations.
 
* Do not use Drycast modular block wall (DMBW-MSE) systems or Wetcast modular block wall (WMBW-MSE) systems in the following locations:
 
::* For structurally critical applications, such as containing necessary fill around structures.
 
::* In tiered wall systems.
 
* For locations where Drycast modular block wall (DMBW-MSE) systems and Wetcast modular block wall (WMBW-MSE) systems are not desirable, consider coloring agents and/or architectural forms using precast modular panel wall (PMPW-MSE) systems for aesthetic installations.
 
* For slab drain location near MSE Wall, see [[751.10 General Superstructure#General Requirements for Location and Spacing of Slab Drains|EPG 751.10.3.1 Drain Type, Alignment and Spacing]] and [[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.3 General Requirements for Location of Slab Drains|EPG 751.10.3.3 General Requirements for Location of Slab Drains]].
 
* Roadway runoff should be directed away from running along face of MSE walls used as wing walls on bridge structures.
 
* Drainage:
 
:*Gutter type should be selected at the core team meeting.
 
:* When gutter is required without fencing, use Type A or Type B gutter (for detail, see [https://www.modot.org/media/16880 Std. Plan 609.00]).
 
:* When gutter is required with fencing, use Modified Type A or Modified Type B gutter (for detail, see [https://www.modot.org/media/16871 Std. Plan 607.11]).
 
:* When fencing is required without gutter, place in tube and grout behind the MSE wall (for detail, see [https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings MSE Wall Standard Drawings - MSEW], Fence Post Connection Behind MSE Wall (without gutter).
 
:* Lower backfill longitudinal drainage pipes behind all MSE walls shall be two-6” (Min.) diameter perforated PVC or PE pipe (See Sec 1013) unless larger sizes are required by design which shall be the responsibility of the District Design Division. Show drainage pipe size on plans. Outlet screens and cleanouts should be detailed for any drain pipe (shown on MoDOT MSE wall plans or roadway plans). Lateral non-perforated drain pipes (below leveling pad) are permitted by Standard Specifications and shall be sized by the District Design Division if necessary. Lateral outlet drain pipe sloped at 2% minimum.
 
::* Identify on MSE wall plans or roadway plans drainage pipe point of entry, point of outlet (daylighting), 2% min. drainage slopes in between points to ensure positive flow and additional longitudinal drainage pipes if required to accommodate ground slope changes and lateral drainage pipes if required by design.
 
::* Adjustment in the vertical alignment of the longitudinal drainage pipes from that depicted on the MSE wall standard drawings may be necessary to ensure positive flow out of the drainage system.
::* Identify on MSE wall plans or roadway plans the outlet ends of pipes which shall be located to prevent clogging or backflow into the drainage system. Outlet screens and cleanouts should be detailed for any drain pipe.
 
:* For more information on drainage, see [[#Drainage at MSE Walls|Drainage at MSE Walls]].
 
'''MSE Wall Construction: Pipe Pile Spacers Guidance'''
 
For bridges not longer than 200 feet, pipe pile spacers or pile jackets shall be used at pile locations behind mechanically stabilized earth walls at end bents. Corrugated pipe pile spacers are required when the wall is built prior to driving the piles to protect the wall reinforcement when driving pile for the bridge substructure at end bents(s). Pile spacers or pile jackets may be used when the piles are driven before the wall is built. Pipe pile spacers shall have an inside diameter greater than that of the pile and large enough to avoid damage to the pipe when driving the pile. Use [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#E1. Excavation and Fill|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Note E1.2a]] on bridge plans.
 
For bridges longer than 200 feet, pipe pile spacers are required and the pile spacer shall be oversized to mitigate the effects of bridge thermal movements on the MSE wall. For HP12, HP14, CIP 14” and CIP 16” piles provide 24-inch inside diameter of pile spacer for bridge movement. Minimum pile spacing shall be 5 feet to allow room for compaction of the soil layers. Use [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#E1. Excavation and Fill|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Note E1.2b]] on bridge plans.
 
The bottom of the pipe pile spacers shall be placed 5 ft. min. below the bottom of the MSE wall leveling pad. The pipe shall be filled with sand or other approved material after the pile is placed and before driving. Pipe pile spacers shall be accurately located and capped for future pile construction.
 
Alternatively, for bridges shorter than or equal to 200 feet, the contractor shall be given the option of driving the piles before construction of the mechanically stabilized earth wall and placing the soil reinforcement and backfill material around the piling. In lieu of pipe pile spacers contractor may place pile jackets on the portion of the piles that will be in the MSE soil reinforced zone prior to placing the select granular backfill material and soil reinforcement. The contractor shall adequately support the piling to ensure that proper pile alignment is maintained during the wall construction. The contractor’s plan for bracing the pile shall be submitted to the engineer for review.
 
Piling shall be designed for downdrag (DD) loads due to either method. Oversized pipe pile spacers with sand placed after driving or pile jacket may be considered to mitigate some of the effects of downdrag (DD) loads. Sizing of pipe pile spacers shall account for pile size, thermal movements of the bridge, pile placement plan, and vertical and horizontal placement tolerances.
 
When rock is anticipated within the 5 feet zone below the MSE wall leveling pad, prebore into rock and prebore holes shall be sufficiently wide to allow for a minimum 10 feet embedment of pile and pipe pile spacer. When top of rock is anticipated within the 5 to 10 feet zone below the MSE wall leveling pad, prebore into rock to achieve a minimum embedment (pile only) of 10 feet below the bottom of leveling pad. Otherwise, the pipe pile spacer requires a minimum 5 feet embedment below the levelling pad. Consideration shall also be given to oversizing the prebore holes in rock to allow for temperature movements at integral end bents.
 
For bridges not longer than 200 feet, the minimum clearance from the back face of MSE walls to the front face of the end bent beam, also referred to as setback, shall be 4 ft. 6 in. (typ.) unless larger than 18-inch pipe pile spacer required. The 4 ft. 6 in. dimension serves a dual purpose:
:1) the setback ensures that soil reinforcement is not skewed more than 15° for nut and bolt reinforcement connections to clear an 18-inch inside diameter pipe pile spacers by 6 inches per FHWA-NHI-10-24, Figure 5-17C, while considering vertical and horizontal pile placement tolerances
:2) the setback helps to reduce the forces imparted on the MSE wall from bridge movements that typically are not accounted for in the wall design and cannot be completely isolated using a pipe pile spacer. Increasing the minimum setback shall be considered when larger diameter pile spacers are required or when other types of soil reinforcement connections are anticipated
 
For bridges longer than 200 feet, the minimum setback shall be 5 ft. 6 in. based on the use of 24-inch inside diameter of pipe pile spacers.
 
If interference with soil reinforcement is not a concern and the wall is designed for forces from bridge movement, the following guidance for pipe pile spacers clearance shall be used: pipe pile spacers shall be placed 36 in. clear min. from the back face of MSE wall panels to allow for proper compaction; 12 in. minimum clearance is required between pipe pile spacers and leveling pad and 18 in. minimum clearance is required between leveling pad and pile. For isolated pile (e.g, walls skewed from the bent orientation), the pipe pile spacer may be placed 18 in. clear min. from the back face of MSE wall panels.
 
'''MSE Wall Plan and Geometrics'''
 
* A plan view shall be drawn showing a baseline or centerline, roadway stations and wall offsets. The plan shall contain enough information to properly locate the wall. The ultimate right of way shall also be shown, unless it is of a significant distance from the wall and will have no effect on the wall design or construction.
 
* Stations and offsets shall be established between one construction baseline or roadway centerline and a wall control line (baseline). Some wall designs may contain a slight batter, while others are vertical. A wall control line shall be set at the front face of the wall, either along the top or at the base of the wall, whichever is critical to the proposed improvements. For battered walls, in order to allow for batter adjustments of the stepped level pad or variation of the top of the wall, the wall control line (baseline) is to be shown at a fixed elevation. For battered walls, the offset location and elevation of control line shall be indicated. All horizontal breaks in the wall shall be given station-offset points, and walls with curvature shall indicate the station-offsets to the PC and PT of the wall, and the radius, on the plans.
 
* Any obstacles which could possibly interfere with the soil reinforcement shall be shown. Drainage structures, lighting, or truss pedestals and footings, etc. are to be shown, with station offset to centerline of the obstacle, with obstacle size. Skew angles are shown to indicate the angle between a wall and a pipe or box which runs through the wall.
 
* Elevations at the top and bottom of the wall shall be shown at 25 ft. intervals and at any break points in the wall.
 
* Curve data and/or offsets shall be shown at all changes in horizontal alignment. If battered wall systems are used on curved structures, show offsets at 10 ft. (max.) intervals from the baseline.
 
* Details of any architectural finishes (formliners, concrete coloring, etc.).
 
* Details of threaded rod connecting the top cap block.
 
* Estimated quantities, total sq. ft. of mechanically stabilized earth systems.
 
* Proposed grade and theoretical top of leveling pad elevation shall be shown in constant slope. Slope line shall be adjusted per project. Top of wall or coping elevation and stationing shall be shown in the developed elevation per project. If leveling pad is anticipated to encounter rock, then contact the Geotechnical Section for leveling pad minimum embedment requirements.
 
'''MSE Wall Cross Sections'''
 
* A typical wall section for general information is shown.
 
* Additional sections are drawn for any special criteria. The front face of the wall is drawn vertical, regardless of the wall type.
 
* Any fencing and barrier or railing are shown.
 
* Barrier if needed are shown on the cross section. Barriers are attached to the roadway or shoulder pavement, not to the MSE wall. Standard barriers are placed along wall faces when traffic has access to the front face of the wall over shoulders of paved areas.
 
<div id="Drainage at MSE Walls"></div>
'''Drainage at MSE Walls'''
 
*'''Drainage Before MSE Wall'''
 
:Drainage is not allowed to be discharged within 10 ft. from front of MSE wall in order to protect wall embedment, prevent erosion and foundation undermining, and maintain soil strength and stability.
 
*'''Drainage Behind MSE Wall'''
 
::'''Internal (Subsurface) Drainage'''
 
::Groundwater and infiltrating surface waters are drained from behind the MSE wall through joints between the face panels or blocks (i.e. wall joints) and two-6 in. (min.) diameter pipes located at the base of the wall and at the basal interface between the reinforced backfill and the retained backfill.
 
::Excessive subsurface draining can lead to increased risk of backfill erosion/washout through the wall joints and erosion at the bottom of walls and at wall terminal ends. Excessive water build-up caused by inadequate drainage at the bottom of the wall can lead to decreased soil strength and wall instability. Bridge underdrainage (vertical drains at end bents and at approach slabs) can exacerbate the problem.
 
::Subsurface drainage pipes should be designed and sized appropriately to carry anticipated groundwater, incidental surface run-off that is not collected otherwise including possible effects of drainage created by an unexpected rupture of any roadway drainage conveyance or storage as an example.
 
::'''External (Surface) Drainage'''
 
::External drainage considerations deal with collecting water that could flow externally over and/or around the wall surface taxing the internal drainage and/or creating external erosion issues. It can also infiltrate the reinforced and retained backfill areas behind the MSE wall.
 
::Diverting water flow away from the reinforced soil structure is important. Roadway drainage should be collected in accordance with roadway drainage guidelines and bridge deck drainage should be collected similarly.
 
*'''Guidance'''
 
:ALL MSE WALLS
 
:1. Appropriate measures to prevent surface water infiltration into MSE wall backfill should be included in the design and detail layout for all MSE walls and shown on the roadway plans.
 
:2. Gutters behind MSE walls are required for flat or positive sloping backfills to prevent concentrated infiltration behind the wall facing regardless of when top of backfill is paved or unpaved. This avoids pocket erosion behind facing and protection of nearest-surface wall connections which are vulnerable to corrosion and deterioration. Drainage swales lined with concrete, paved or precast gutter can be used to collect and discharge surface water to an eventual point away from the wall. If rock is used, use impermeable geotextile under rock and align top of gutter to bottom of rock to drain. (For negative sloping backfills away from top of wall, use of gutters is not required.)
 
:District Design Division shall verify the size of the two-6 in. (min.) diameter lower perforated MSE wall drain pipes and where piping will daylight at ends of MSE wall or increase the diameters accordingly.  This should be part of the preliminary design of the MSE wall. (This shall include when lateral pipes are required and where lateral drain pipes will daylight/discharge).
:BRIDGE ABUTMENTS WITH MSE WALLS
 
:Areas of concern: bridge deck drainage, approach slab drainage, approach roadway drainage, bridge underdrainage:  vertical drains at end bents and approach slab underdrainage, showing drainage details on the roadway and MSE wall plans
 
:3. Bridge slab drain design shall be in accordance with [[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3 Bridge Deck Drainage - Slab Drains |EPG 751.10.3 Bridge Deck Drainage – Slab Drains]] unless as modified below.
 
:4. Coordination is required between the Bridge Division and District Design Division on drainage design and details to be shown on the MSE wall and roadway plans.
 
:5. Bridge deck, approach slab and roadway drainage shall not be allowed to be discharged to MSE wall backfill area or within 10 feet from front of MSE wall.
::*(Recommended) Use of a major bridge approach slab and approach pavement is ideal because bridge deck, approach slab and roadway drainage are directed using curbs and collected in drain basins for discharge that protect MSE wall backfill. For bridges not on a major roadway, consideration should be given to requiring a concrete bridge approach slab and pavement incorporating these same design elements (asphalt is permeable).
 
::*(Less Recommended) Use of conduit and gutters:
 
:::* Conduit: Drain away from bridge and bury conduit daylighting to natural ground or roadway drainage ditch at an eventual point beyond the limits of the wall. Use expansion fittings to allow for bridge movement and consider placing conduit to front of MSE wall and discharging more than 10 feet from front of wall or using lower drain pipes to intercept slab drainage conduit running through backfill.
 
:::* Conduit and Gutters: Drain away from bridge using conduit and 90° elbow (or 45° bend) for smoothly directing drainage flow into gutters and that may be attached to inside of gutters to continue along downward sloping gutters along back of MSE wall to discharge to sewer or to natural drainage system, or to eventual point beyond the limits of the wall.  Allow for independent bridge and wall movements by using expansion fittings where needed. See [[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.1 Type, Alignment and Spacing|EPG 751.10.3.1 Type, Alignment and Spacing]] and [[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.3 General Requirements for Location of Slab Drains|EPG 751.10.3.3 General Requirements for Location of Slab Drains]].
 
:6. Vertical drains at end bents and approach slab underdrainage should be intercepted to drain away from bridge end and MSE wall.
 
:7. Discharging deck drainage using many slab drains would seem to reduce the volume of bridge end drainage over MSE walls.
 
:8. Drain flumes at bridge abutments with MSE walls do not reduce infiltration at MSE wall backfill areas and are not recommended.
 
:DISTRICT DESIGN DIVISION MSE WALLS
 
:Areas of concern: roadway or pavement drainage, MSE wall drainage, showing drainage details on the roadway and MSE wall plans.
 
:9. For long MSE walls, where lower perforated drain pipe slope become excessive, non-perforated lateral drain pipes, permitted by Standard Specifications, shall be designed to intercept them and go underneath the concrete leveling pad with a 2% minimum slope. Lateral drain pipes shall daylight/discharge at least 10 ft. from front of MSE wall. Screens should be installed and maintained on drain pipe outlets.
 
:10. Roadway and pavement drainage shall not be allowed to be discharged to MSE wall backfill area or within 10 feet from front of MSE wall.
 
:11. For district design MSE walls, use roadway or pavement drainage collection pipes to transport and discharge to an eventual point outside the limits of the wall.
 
:Example: Showing drain pipe details on the MSE wall plans.
 
<gallery mode=packed widths=300px heights=300px>
File:751.24.2.1_elev_drain_pipe-01.png| <big>'''ELEVATION SHOWING DRAIN PIPE'''</big>
File:751.24.2.1_elev_drain_pipe_alt-01.png| <big>'''Alternate option'''</big>
</gallery>
<gallery mode=packed widths=400px heights=400px>
File:751.24.2.1_sec_A-A-02.png| <big>'''Section A-A'''</big>
</gallery>
{| style="text-align: left; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
|
Notes:</br>
(1) To be designed by District Design Division.</br>
(2) To be designed by District Design Division if needed. Provide non-perforated lateral drain pipe under leveling pad at 2% minimum slope. (Show on plans).</br>
(3) Discharge to drainage system or daylight screened outlet at least 10 feet away from end of wall (typ.). (Skew in the direction of flow as appropriate).</br>
(4) Discharge to drainage system or daylight screened outlet at least 10 feet away from front face of wall (typ.). (Skew in the direction of flow as appropriate).</br>
(5) Minimum backfill cover = Max(15”, 1.5 x diameter of drain pipe).</br>
|}
 
=== E1. Excavation and Fill ===
 
'''(E1.1) Use when specified on the Design Layout.'''
:Existing roadway fill under the ends of the bridge shall be removed as shown. Removal of existing roadway fill will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for roadway excavation.
 
'''Use one of the following two notes where MSE walls support abutment fill.'''
 
'''(E1.2a) <font color="purple">[MS Cell]</font color="purple">  Use when pipe pile spacers are shown on plan details and bridge is 200 feet long or shorter. Add “See special provisions” to the pipe pile spacer callout  and add table near the callout.'''
 
See special provisions.
 
<center>
{|border="1" style="text-align:center;" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0"
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="200"| Pile Encasement !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Option Used<br/>(√)
|-
|Pipe Pile Spacer ||
|-
|Pile Jacket ||
|}
</center>
MoDOT Construction personnel will indicate the pile encasement used.
'''(E1.2b) Use note when pipe pile spacers are shown on plan details for HP12, HP14, CIP 14” and CIP 16” piles and bridge is longer than 200 feet. For larger CIP pile size modify following note and use minimum 6” larger pipe pile spacer diameter than CIP pile.'''
 
The pipe pile spacers shall have an inside diameter equal to <u>24</u> inches.
 
'''(E1.4) Use for fill at pile cap end bents. Use the first underlined portion when MSE walls are present. Use <u>approach</u> for semi-deep abutments.'''
:Roadway fill<u>, exclusive of Select Granular Backfill for Structural Systems,</u> shall be completed to the final roadway section and up to the elevation of the bottom of the concrete <u>approach</u> beam within the limits of the structure and for not less than 25 feet in back of the fill face of the end bents before any piles are driven for any bents falling within the embankment section.
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4028'''=
 
====751.5.9.2.8 Development and Lap Splices====
 
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:left"
|+
!style="background:#BEBEBE" align="center"|Development and Lap Splice Table of Contents
|-
|1. [[#751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General|General]]
|-
|2. [[#751.5.9.2.8.2 Development and Lap Splices of Straight Deformed Bars in Tension|Development and Lap Splices of Straight Deformed Bars in Tension]]
|-
|3. [[#751.5.9.2.8.3 Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression|Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression]]
|-
|4. [[#751.5.9.2.8.4 Development and Lap Splices of Standard Hooked Deformed Bars in Tension|Development and Lap Splices of Standard Hooked Deformed Bars in Tension]]
|}
 
=====751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General=====
'''Development of Straight Tension Reinforcement '''
 
Development lengths for tension reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.1.
 
Excess reinforcement modification factor (λ''<sub>er</sub>'') and beneficial clamping stresses (β''<sub>t</sub>'' component of λ''<sub>rc</sub>'') of LRFD 5.10.8.2.1c may be used in situations where development length is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shall be used.
 
Temperature and shrinkage reinforcement are assumed to fully develop the specified yield stresses. Therefore the development length shall not be reduced by λ''<sub>er</sub>'' .
 
Development lengths for tension reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except as described above.
 
'''Lap Splices of Tension Reinforcement (Straight and Hooked)'''
 
Lap splice lengths for tension reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.4.2a and 5.10.8.4.3a. Class B splices are preferred when possible, however it is permissible to use Class A when physical space is limited and Class A requirements are met. It should be noted that "''required by analysis''" of the Class A requirements is based on the stress encountered at the splice location, which is not necessarily the maximum stress used to design the reinforcement. Lap splice lengths for tension reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the development length modification factors as described above.
 
'''Development of Hooked Tension Reinforcement'''
 
Development lengths of hooked tension reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.4.
 
Excess reinforcement modification (λ''<sub>er</sub>'') and beneficial clamping stresses (β''<sub>t</sub>'' component of λ''<sub>rc</sub>'') of LRFD 5.10.8.2.1c may be used in situations where development length is difficult to attain. The permissible 20 percent reduction of LRFD 5.10.8.2.4c may be used in situations where development length is difficult to attain and where required conditions are met. All other modification factors shall be used.
 
Development lengths of hooked tension reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except as described above.
'''Development of Compression Reinforcement '''
 
Development lengths for compression reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.2.
 
Excess reinforcement modification factor (λ''<sub>er</sub>'') of LRFD 5.10.8.2.2b may be used in situations where development length is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shall be used.
 
Development lengths for compression reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except as described above. 
 
'''Lap Splices of Compression Reinforcement '''
 
Lap splices lengths for compression reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.4.2a and 5.10.8.4.5a.
 
Splice lengths for compression reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages.
 
=====751.5.9.2.8.2 Development and Lap Splices of Straight Deformed Bars in Tension=====
The values in the following table are based on Grade 60 bars (ƒ''<sub>y</sub>'' = 60 ksi) and may be adjusted for yield strengths up to 100 ksi. The final step in the table adjusts values for other material strengths. The values for Grade 40 bars are 45% (40<sup>2</sup>/60<sup>2</sup>) of the values in the table (not less than 12 inches), and values for 100 ksi bars are 280% (100<sup>2</sup>/60<sup>2</sup>) of the values in the table.
[[File:751.5.9.2.8.2_01.jpg|900px]]
[[File:751.5.9.2.8.2_02.jpg|900px]]
[[File:751.5.9.2.8.2_03.jpg|900px]]
 
=====751.5.9.2.8.3 Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression=====
The values in the following table are based on Grade 60 bars. Development lengths may be adjusted for yield strengths up to 100 ksi. Lap splice lengths for yield strengths greater than 60 ksi up to 100 ksi shall be calculated in accordance LRFD 5.10.8.4.5a. The final step in the table adjusts values for other material strengths. The values for Grade 40 bars are 40/60 of the values in the table (not less than 8 in. for development length and 12 in. for lap splice length).
[[File:751.5.9.2.7.3.jpg|900px]]
 
=====751.5.9.2.8.4 Development and Lap Splices of Standard Hooked Deformed Bars in Tension=====
 
The hooked bar development length (''l<sub>dh</sub>'') is measured from the critical section to the outside edge of the hook.
 
The values in the following table are based on Grade 60 bars. Due to the complexity of the ''l<sub>dh</sub>'' formula, hooked bar development lengths will need to be calculated manually for ƒ''<sub>c</sub>'' other than 3 and 4 ksi and for ƒ''<sub>y</sub>'' other than 60 ksi. Transverse reinforcement requirements for other material strengths are specified at the bottom of the table.
 
[[File:751.5.9.2.8.4_01.jpg|900px]]
[[File:751.5.9.2.8.4_02.jpg|900px]]
[[File:751.5.9.2.8.4_03.jpg|900px]]
[[File:751.5.9.2.8.4_04.jpg|900px]]
[[File:751.5.9.2.8.4_05.jpg|900px]]
 
===751.8.3.2 Steel Reinforcement===
'''Barrel Section '''
 
Standard boxes shall have main reinforcement placed perpendicular to the centerline of culvert.  In any case, main reinforcement should not be skewed more than 25° from a line normal to the centerline of the culvert. (See LRFD 9.7.1.3.)  The bar sizes, spacings and lengths given in the [https://www.modot.org/media/16942 Standard Plans 703.17], [https://www.modot.org/media/16953 703.47] and [https://www.modot.org/media/16962 703.87] are applicable for uncoated steel reinforcement.  Figure 751.8.3.2.1 shows a typical cross-section of standard box culvert and bar marks of steel reinforcement which are described below:
 
''A1 bar - ''Steel reinforcement shall be designed for maximum positive moment in the top slab.  This bar is placed transversely perpendicular to the centerline of culvert at the bottom of top slab.  Place A1 bars into headwall or edge beam as close as practical.
 
''A2 bar - ''Steel reinforcement shall be designed for maximum positive moment in the bottom slab.  This bar is placed transversely perpendicular to the centerline of culvert at the top of bottom slab.
 
[[image:751.8.3.2.1 less 2015.jpg|center|700px]]
 
 
[[image:751.8.3.2.1 over 2015.jpg|center|700px]]
<center>'''Figure 751.8.3.2.1 Typical Cross-Section of Standard Box Culvert Showing Bar Marks'''</center>
 
''B1 bar -'' Steel reinforcement shall be designed for maximum combined axial load and moment at interior walls.  This bar is placed vertical near stream faces of the wall.  Minimum steel reinforcement of #5 bars spaced at 12” centers shall be provided.  This bar should be extended into the top and bottom slabs.  A hook bar may be required if the embedment length is insufficient due to slab thickness limitations.  [[751.5 Standard Details#751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General] has information pertaining to development of tension reinforcement and hooks.
 
''B2 bar –'' For culverts with bottom slabs, steel reinforcement shall be designed for the maximum positive moment in the exterior wall.  For culverts on rock, steel reinforcement shall be designed for the maximum combined positive moment and axial load.  This bar is placed vertical near the stream face of the wall.  Minimum steel reinforcement of #5 bar spacing at 12” centers shall be provided.  This bar should be extended into the top and bottom slabs.  A hook bar may be required if the embedment length is insufficient due to slab thickness limitations.  [[751.5 Standard Details#751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General]] has information pertaining to development of tension reinforcement and hooks.
 
''J3 bar - ''Steel reinforcement shall be designed for the maximum negative moment in the top corner of the culvert.  This bar is placed vertical along the wall and transversely perpendicular to the centerline of culvert.
 
''J4 bar - ''Steel reinforcement shall be designed for maximum negative moment in the bottom corner of the culvert.  The J4 bar should also be designed for the maximum negative moment near the mid-height of the exterior wall.  This bar is placed vertical along the wall and transversely perpendicular to the centerline of culvert.
 
''H1 bar - ''Steel reinforcement shall be designed for the maximum negative moment in the top slab over the interior walls.  This bar is placed transversely perpendicular to the centerline of culvert at the top of top slab.  Its spacing is alternated with spacing of H2 bar.  The length of H1 bar is longer than the length of H2 bar.
 
''H2 bar - ''Steel reinforcement shall be designed for the maximum negative moment in the top slab over the interior walls.  This bar is placed transversely perpendicular to the centerline of culvert at the top of top slab.  Its spacing is alternated with spacing of H1 bar.
 
''F bar -'' Longitudinal steel reinforcement provides for temperature and shrinkage control.  Use #4 bars at about 14” centers for all interior faces. A minimal number of longitudinal bars in exterior faces are also provided primarily to aid in construction.  This bar is placed parallel to the centerline of culvert.  Additional longitudinal reinforcement may be required to provide for lateral distribution of concentrated live loads.  For distribution of reinforcement, see [[#751.8.2.6 Structural Design|EPG 751.8.2.6]].
 
'''Headwalls and Edge Beams'''
 
Figure 751.8.3.2.2 shows a typical cross-section through headwalls and edge beams, and bar marks of steel reinforcement which are described below. The reinforcement values given below shall be considered standard for headwalls and minimum recommended values for edge beams. 
 
If at least the minimum headwall dimensions are provided (see Fig. 751.8.3.2.2) the steel reinforcement in the top slab need not be increased over that required for barrel design.  Otherwise, the width of the edge beam shall be taken as 3 feet and additional reinforcement in the top and bottom of slab is required.
 
''D1 bar –'' Place 2- #8 bars at the top of headwalls or edge beams.  These bars shall be placed along the headwall or edge beam.
 
''D2 bar – ''Place these bars between D1 bars at the top of headwalls or edge beam and centered over interior walls.  The total length of the bar is equal to two times larger value of 48 bar diameters or ¼ clear span length of headwall or edge beam.  Neglect this bar for single span and if clear span length along headwall is less than or equal to 10’ for multiple spans.  Otherwise, use a number of bars and sizes as indicated below: 
::2- #8 bars when 10’ <math> < \Bigg[\frac{\mbox{clear span length}}{\mbox{cos(skew angle)}}\Bigg] \le </math> 13’
 
::'''*''' 2- #9 bars when 13’<math> < \Bigg[\frac{\mbox{clear span length}}{\mbox{cos(skew angle)}}\Bigg]</math>
 
'''*''' The required area of steel reinforcement should be checked if clear span length along edge beam exceeds 20’.
 
''H bar -'' Provide 4- #8 bars at bottom of headwalls or edge beam when edge beam is skewed.  These bars shall be placed along the headwall or edge beam.
 
''R1 bar –'' Provide minimum #5 bar spacing at 12” centers.  This bar is placed perpendicular to longitudinal axis of upstream headwall or edge beam.
 
''R2 bar -'' Provide minimum #5 bar spacing at 12” centers.  This bar is placed perpendicular to longitudinal axis of upstream headwall or edge beam.
 
''R3 bar -'' Provide minimum #5 bar spacing at 12” centers.  This bar is placed perpendicular to longitudinal axis of downstream headwall or edge beam.
 
[[image:751.8.3.2.2 2021.jpg|center|875px]]
<center>'''Fig. 751.8.3.2.2 Typical Sections and Details of Steel Reinforcement</center>'''
 
'''Wings'''
 
''F bar -'' Longitudinal steel reinforcement provides for temperature and shrinkage control.  Use #4 bars at about 14” centers for all interior faces. A minimal number of longitudinal bars in exterior faces are also provided primarily to aid in construction.  This bar should be placed longitudinal along wing walls as shown in Figure 751.8.3.2.3.  For wings on rock, longitudinal F bars should be designed using maximum moment and shear as specified in [[#751.8.2.5 Structural Model|EPG 751.8.2.5]].
 
''G bar –'' Provide the same bar size and spacing as B1 or B2 bar for interior (Figure 751.8.3.2.3(b)) or exterior wall (Figure 751.8.3.2.3(a)), respectively.
 
''J1 or J6 bar – ''Provide 2- #7 bars at each face of wing walls.  These bars are provided for edge beam action and for support in extreme event scenarios, such as washout. The J6 callout is used for flared wings.
 
''J5 bar –'' Steel reinforcement shall be designed for moment and shear based on Coulomb or Rankine active earth pressure.  In any case, the provided steel area of J5 bar shall not be less than that provided by the adjoined wall.
 
'''Toe Walls'''
 
''E1 bar –'' Provide 4- #5 bars and they should extend into wing walls as far as practical as shown in Figure 751.8.3.2.3.  For wing walls on rock, these bars shall be extended 12” into the rock and grouted.
 
[[image:751-8-3-2_WallReinf-Ext_10-22.jpg|center|750px]]
<center><big>'''(a) ELEVATION OF EXTERIOR WING'''</big></center>
 
 
[[image:751-8-3-2_WallReinf-Int_10-22.jpg|center|775px]]
<center><big>'''(b) ELEVATION OF INTERIOR WING'''</big></center>
 
 
[[image:751.8.3.2.3b 2015.jpg|center|775px]]
 
<center>'''Fig. 751.8.3.2.3 Details of Wings Showing Bar Marks'''</center>
 
 
'''Collar Beams'''
 
Figure 751.8.3.2.4 shows steel reinforcement details of collar beams. The figure also shows that two layers of roofing felt shall be provided between culvert and collar beams.  This will allow free lateral movement of adjoined sections.
 
[[image:751.8.3.2.4a.jpg|center|400px]]
 
 
<gallery heights=376 mode="packed">
File:751.8.3.2_04b.png|'''(b)'''
</gallery>
 
[[image:751.8.3.2.4c.jpg|center|275px]]
 
 
[[image:751.8.3.2.4d.jpg|center|400px]]
 
 
::::::[[image:751.8.3.2.4 footnote.jpg|left|20px]] Two layers of 30# roofing felt.
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="516"
|-
|For box culverts where collars are required and the precast option is used, precast concrete box culvert ties in accordance with [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=11 Sec 733] and [https://www.modot.org/media/16978 Std. Plan 733.00] shall be provided between all precast sections.
|}
 
<center>'''Fig. 751.8.3.2.4 Details of Collar Beam'''</center>
<center>'''(a) Auxiliary View of Collar Beam (b) Section thru Box at Collar Beam '''</center>
<center>'''(c) Section thru Wall (d) Section thru Top and Bottom Slab'''</center>
 
'''Reinforcement Concrete Cover'''
 
The minimum concrete cover shall be 1-1/2” (clear) except the following:
 
:'''Top Slab'''
 
:The minimum concrete cover shall be 2” (clear) at top and 1-1/2” (clear) at bottom of the slab.
 
:'''Bottom Slab '''
 
:The minimum concrete cover shall be 1-1/2” (clear) at top and 3” (clear) at bottom of the slab.
 
:'''Walls and Wing Walls'''
 
:The minimum concrete cover shall be 2” (clear) at fill face and 1-1/2” (clear) at stream face.
 
:'''Wearing Surface'''
 
:A 1” monolithic protective surface shall be used on the bottom of bottom slab to compensate for pouring concrete on uneven earth surfaces.  In special cases, where abrasion on the stream faces is a concern, a 1/2" monolithic wearing surface may be used on stream faces of walls and bottom slab.  In the analysis, the protective surface and wearing surfaces (when considered) are included as part of the member thickness, but shall be excluded in the calculation of effective depth of the member for design.
 
 
 
=== 751.10.1.14 Girder and Beam Haunch Reinforcement===
 
'''General'''
 
:'''Steel Beams and Girders '''
 
:Haunch reinforcement consisting of #4 hairpin bars shall be provided where the embedment of existing studs into a new slab is less than 2 inches or for an excessive haunch where at centerline of beam or girder exceeds 3 inches.
 
:'''Prestressed Beams or Girders with Full Depth CIP Decks (Conventional or SIP forms)'''
 
:Haunch reinforcement consisting of #4 hairpin bars shall be provided when haunch at centerline of beam or girder exceeds:
:::3 inches for Type 2, 3, 4 girders
:::4 inches for Type 6, 7 and 8 girders (bulb-tee), NU girders and spread beams
 
:'''Prestressed Beams or Girders and Partial Depth CIP Decks (Prestressed Panels)'''
:Haunch reinforcement should not be required with precast prestressed panel decks due to joint filler limits.
 
'''Details'''
 
When possible, hairpin bars and tie bars shall be clearly shown on the section thru slab; otherwise, a part section showing hairpins shall be provided. Include these bars in the slab reinforcing steel quantities.
 
[[image:751.10.1.14-part_section-Feb-23.jpg|center|500px]]
<center>'''Part Section Showing Hairpins'''</center>
:(1) Top of slab to bottom of longitudinal bars.
:(2) Haunch limit specified above.
:(3) Use tie bars at the discretion of the Structural Project Manager or the Structural Liaison Engineer.
:(4) The bottom longitudinal bars should be shown to be used as tie bars or add a note allowing adjustment.
:(5) Add asterisked note when there is insufficient clearance or hairpins with varying vertical heights may be used.
 
Hairpin bars and tie bars shall be shown on the plan of slab. Splice lengths of the tie bars shall also be specified if required (19” for #4 bars). For deck replacements without a plan of slab the hairpin bars and tie bars shall be shown either on a part plan detail or in a table. Include these bars in the slab reinforcing steel quantities.
 
[[image:751.10.1.14_02.png|center|1000px]]
<center>'''Example'''</center>
 
Hairpin bars and tie bars shall be included in the bill of reinforcing. Include these bars in the slab reinforcing steel quantities.
 
{|border="1" cellpadding="5" align="center"
|+
|[[image:751.10.1.14 shape 10.jpg|center|250px]] ||width="550"|“C” is based on the top horizontal legs located above the longitudinal bars of the bottom mat at the location of the maximum haunch.
|}
 
 
 
 
 
====751.12.1.2.7 Details of Mounting Light Poles on Safety Barrier Curbs====
[[image:751.12.1.2.7_01_11-13-23.jpg|center|550px]]
[[image:751.12.1.2.7_02.jpg|center|625px]]
[[image:751.12.1.2.7_03.png|center|625px]]
 
Anchor bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with ASTM F1554 Grade 55. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be fully galvanized, See [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#H4._Conduit_System|751.50.H4.2.2]] for additional information.
 
'''Note to Detailer:''' Extend slab transverse steel to edge of slab in blister region often shown with an additional detail with the slab details.
 
'''Note:''' Conduit not shown for clarity.
 
 
 
 
 
====751.12.1.3.2 Typical Section Reinforcement====
The single R bar adds to the rigidity of the reinforcement during construction and it is believed to help prevent cracking. The single bar also appears to assist maintaining uniform reinforcement cover.
 
Splice length for epoxy coated horizontal #5 bars in barrier shall be 30 inches (25” for galvanized bars).
 
All bent bars are formed using stirrup bends except for the Type D #5-R1 bars.
 
All values may be used with both 2.0% and 3/16 inch-per-foot cross slopes.
[[image:751.12.1.3.2-001-2024.png|center]]
 
 
 
 
=====751.12.1.3.3.1 Type D Ending on Integral End Bents=====
Use when distance between upper and lower construction joint in wings is at least 25½ inches.
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.1.1 2021.jpg|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.1_002-2025.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.1-003-2024.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.1-004-2024.png|center|700px]]
 
 
 
 
=====751.12.1.3.3.2 Type H Ending on Integral End Bents=====
Use when distance between upper and lower construction joint in wings is at least 25½ inches.
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.2.1 2021.jpg|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.2-002-2025.png|center|700px]]
 
 
 
 
 
=====751.12.1.3.3.3 Type D Ending on Shallow Integral End Bents=====
Use when distance between upper and lower construction joint in wings is less than 25½ inches.
 
Formulas extend bars to within 1½ʺ of lower construction joint.
 
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.3.1 2021.jpg|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.3-002-2024.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.3-003-2024.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.3-004-2024.png|center|700px]]
 
 
 
 
 
=====751.12.1.3.3.4 Type H Ending on Shallow Integral End Bents=====
Use when distance between upper and lower construction joint in wings is less than 25½ inches.
 
Formulas extend bars to within 1½ʺ of lower construction joint.
 
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.4.1 2021.jpg|center|680px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.4-002-2024.png|center|700px]]
 
 
 
 
=====751.12.1.3.3.5 Type D Ending on Non-Integral End Bents=====
Use when distance between upper and lower construction joint in wings is at least 25½ inches.
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.5-001-2024.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.5_002-2025.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.5-003-2024.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.5-004-2024.png|center|700px]]
 
 
 
 
 
=====751.12.1.3.3.6 Type H Ending on Non-Integral End Bents=====
Use when distance between upper and lower construction joint in wings is at least 25½ inches.
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.6_01-25.png|center|700px]]
 
 
 
 
=====751.12.1.3.3.7 Type D Ending at End of Slab (Redecks)=====
Splice length of epoxy coated #5 K12 and #5 K13 bars with #5 R-bars shall be 30 inches (25 inches for galvanized bars).
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.7-001-2024.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.7-002-2024.png|center|750px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.7-003-2024.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.7-004-2024.png|center|700px]]
 
 
 
 
=====751.12.1.3.3.8 Type H Ending at End of Slab (Redecks)=====
Splice length of epoxy coated #5 K7 bars with #5 R-bars shall be 30 inches (25 inches for galvanized bars).
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.8-001-2024.png|center|700px]]
[[image:751.12.1.3.3.8-002-2024.png|center|700px]]
 
=====751.12.1.4.2 Typical Section Reinforcement=====
The single R bar adds to the rigidity of the reinforcement during construction and it is believed to help prevent cracking. The single bar also appears to assist maintaining uniform reinforcement cover.
 
Splice length for horizontal epoxy coated #5 bars in barrier curb shall be 30 inches (25 inches for galvanized bars).
 
All bent bars are formed using stirrup bends except for the R1 bars.
[[image:751.12.1.4.2-001-2024.png|center]]
 
 
 
 
=====751.12.1.4.3 End of Barrier Reinforcement=====
See barrier ending on end bents sheets of the [https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings barrier standard drawings] for the required details. The bars shown below are for barrier ending on wing walls; see barrier ending at end of slab sheet of the barrier standard drawings for reinforcement details for barrier ending on slabs.
 
Splice length of #5-K9 bars with #4 K-bars above wing walls shall be 31 inches (embedment of #5 bars controls over splice length of #4 bars).
 
All bent bars are formed using stirrup bends except for the K4 and K11 bars.
 
'''Ending on Integral End Bents and Semi-Deep Abutments'''
Use when distance between upper and lower construction joint in wings is at least 25½ inches.
[[image:751.12.1.4.3_01-25.png|center|600px]]
[[image:751.12.1.4.3_02-25.png|center|600px]]
[[image:751.12.1.4.3-002-2024.png|center|600px]]
 
: <big>'''*'''</big> On skewed integral end bents, if the end K3 bars do not meet the minimum 1 1/2" clearance from the front face of the diaphragm, a K12 bar shall be substituted.
 
: <big>'''*'''</big> Based on no wearing surface, adjust as needed. Example: Add 2ʺ for 2ʺ W.S.
 
: <big>'''*'''</big> Also based on 8½ʺ slab, adjust as needed. Example: Subtract 1ʺ for 7½ʺ slab
 
 
'''Ending on Shallow Integral End Bents'''
 
Use when distance between upper and lower construction joint in wings is less than 25½ inches.
[[image:751.12.1.4.3.3 2021.jpg|center|600px]]
[[image:751.12.1.4.3-004-2024.png|center|650px]]
 
'''Ending on Non-Integral End Bents '''
 
Use when distance between upper and lower construction joint in wings is at least 25½ inches.
[[image:751.12.1.4.3-06-25.png|center|600px]]
[[image:751.12.1.4.3-07-25.png|center|600px]]
[[image:751.12.1.4.3-006-2024.png|center|600px]]
 
 
 
 
 
===751.12.1.6 Type A (32ʺ New Jersey Shaped Median)===
Note: Use same grade reinforcing steel in barrier as in slab.
::: Splice length for epoxy coated #5-R bars in barrier shall be 30 inches (25 inches for galvanized bars).
::: Do not use this barrier over precast prestressed panels.
[[image:751.12.1.6-001-2024.png|center|475px]]
 
'''Twin Bridge Median Barrier Details'''
[[image:751.12.1.6.1 2021.jpg|center|375px]]
 
 
 
 
====751.21.3.3.1 Spread Box Beams====
[[image:751.21.3.3.1 spread1.jpg|center|750px]]
[[image:751.21.3.3.1 spread2.jpg|center|750px]]
'''Bending Diagrams'''
 
Dimensions shown are out to out. Use symmetry for dimensions not shown. Use "ɑ" bars for squared-end beams. Use '''<font color="green">"b"</font color="green">''' bars for skewed-end beams.
[[image:751.21.3.3.1_01-25.png|center|650px]]
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:751.21.3.3.1 bending2 2021.jpg|center|375px]]||[[image:751.21.3.3.1 bending3 2021.jpg|center|375px]]
|}
For beams that have excessive haunch or beam steps, create new S2 bars and adjust heights in one-inch increments or provide #4 hairpin bars in accordance with [[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.1.14 Girder and Beam Haunch Reinforcement|EPG 751.10.1.14 Girder and Beam Haunch Reinforcement]] to ensure at least 2-inch embedment into slab.
 
 
 
 
=====751.21.3.6.3 Reinforcement=====
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.21.3.6.3 1.jpg|center|750px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.21.3.6.3_03-25.jpg|center|800px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''SECTION A-A''' (Structure skewed over 25° with skewed-end beams) 
|-
| [[image:751.21.3.6.3_04-25.jpg|center|400px]] || rowspan="4" style="text-align:left;"| '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span>  are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>Bar marks shown are for these details only; vary as needed. <br>Bars will need to clear any required shear blocks for expansion bents. <br>[[image:751.21.3.6.3_06-25.jpg|center|300px]] <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> One strand tie bar for each layer of bent up strands. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> 19 inches minimum for #4 bars and full available width for #6 bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> 11-inch centers may be used if necessary.
|-
| '''PART SECTION A-A''' <br>(Bend strand tie bars if necessary, for clearance)
|-
| [[image:751.21.3.6.3_05-25.png|center|400px]]
|-
| '''SECTION B-B''' <br>(Fixed bent and squared or skewed-end beams)
|}
 
===751.22.2.3 Flexure===


Flexure capacity of girders shall be determined as the following.
909.2 Non-Congested Route (Non-Recurring Delays) – These strategies focus on managing temporary (whether short-term or long-term) capacity reductions caused by irregular or time-limited events that disrupt normal traffic conditions, with the goal of restoring mobility and safety efficiently and consistently.
* 909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management: Coordinates detection, response, and clearance across multiple agencies to minimize secondary crashes and return roadways to normal operation quickly.
* 909.2.2 Transportation Operations for Emergency Incidents or Disasters: Supports system readiness and coordinated response during natural or human-caused disasters through planning, communication, and multimodal evacuation procedures.
* 909.2.3 Road Weather Management: Integrates environmental monitoring, data-driven decision support, and targeted maintenance to mitigate the effects of adverse weather on safety and mobility.
* 909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management: Applies smart work zone technologies and comprehensive traffic management plans to maintain safe and reliable travel through construction and maintenance areas.
* 909.2.5 Planned Special Event Management: Coordinates transportation, enforcement, and communication activities for scheduled events to maintain efficient system operations and traveler safety.


'''Flexural resistance at strength limit state'''<br/>
909.3 Congested Route (Recurring Delays) – These strategies address predictable and routine congestion caused by daily travel demand and capacity constraints on specific facilities or corridors, emphasizing active traffic management, system integration, and multimodal coordination.
* 909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management: Improves freeway performance through corridor-level monitoring, adaptive control, and coordinated operations to enhance safety and travel-time reliability.
* 909.3.2 Arterial Operations and Management: Optimizes signal timing, intersection design, and corridor coordination to improve mobility and safety on surface streets.
* 909.3.3 Freight Operation: Enhances the efficiency and safety of freight movement through improved access, parking management, and technology-based monitoring along key freight corridors.
* 909.3.4 Vulnerable Road Users: Improves safety, accessibility, and comfort for VRUs through targeted infrastructure, operational strategies, and multimodal coordination.
* 909.3.5 Transit Operation: Strengthens transit reliability and accessibility through operational strategies such as priority treatments, multimodal hubs, and corridor management.


<math>\,M_r = \phi M_n \ge M_u</math>
===909.1.2 Relationship with Other Programs===
TSMO is not a standalone initiative—it complements and enhances MoDOT’s other programs:
* '''Safety Programs''': TSMO contributes to MoDOT’s safety goals, as outlined in the Strategic Highway Safety Plan and the SAFER Program (see [[907.9_Safety_Assessment_For_Every_Roadway_(SAFER)|EPG 907.9 Safety Assessment For Every Roadway (SAFER)]]), by reducing secondary crashes, improving work zone management, and advancing road weather management capabilities.
* '''Asset Management''': Proper maintenance of TSMO strategies and supporting systems can improve how facilities operate, reduce incidents that accelerate wear, and extend the life of infrastructure investments.
* '''Planning and Design''': TSMO principles should be incorporated early in the planning and design process so that operational strategies are built into projects from the start.
* '''Maintenance''': Maintenance activities can be coordinated with TSMO tools such as smart work zones and ITS devices to reduce traffic disruptions.
* '''Traveler Information''': TSMO strengthens customer service by providing real-time, accurate, and actionable information to the traveling public.


Where:
In practice, TSMO serves as the operational thread that connects safety, planning, design, maintenance, and customer service into a unified system-management approach.
{|border="0" cellpadding="5"
|<math>\,M_r</math>||=||Flexural resistance
|-
|<math>\,M_n</math>||=||Nominal flexural resistance
|-
|<math>\,M_u</math>||=||Total factored moment from Strength I load combination
|-
|valign="top"|<math>\, \phi</math>
|valign="top"|=
|Flexural resistance factor as calculated in LRFD 5.5.4.2
|}


===909.0.3 Roles and Contributions for TSMO Implementation===
This guide is designed to provide MoDOT staff and partners with a clear, practical reference for TSMO strategies. Table 909.1.3 highlights the typical roles and potential TSMO contributions of different staff in implementing and supporting TSMO strategies, as applicable based on project context, needs, and available resources. These contributions are intended to guide coordination and consideration of TSMO strategies and may vary depending on the specific application.


'''Negative moment reinforcement design'''
{| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto"
 
|+ ''Table 909.1.3. Typical Roles and Potential Contributions for TSMO Implementation''
P/S I-girder shall be designed as a reinforced concrete section at regions of negative flexures (i.e., negative moments).
 
At least one-third of the total tensile reinforcement provided for negative moment at the support shall have an embedment length beyond the point of inflection not less than the specified development length of the bars used.
 
Slab longitudinal reinforcement that contributes to making the precast beam continuous over an intermediate bent shall be anchored in regions of the slab that can be shown to be crack-free at strength limit states.  This reinforcement anchorage shall be staggered.  Regular longitudinal slab reinforcement may be utilized as part of the total longitudinal reinforcement required.
 
 
'''Effective Slab Thickness '''
 
An effective slab thickness shall be used for design by deducting from the actual slab thickness a 1” integral, sacrificial wearing surface.
 
 
<div id="Design A1 reinforcement in the top flange"></div>
 
'''Design A1 reinforcement in the top flange '''
 
The A1 reinforcement shall resist the tensile force in a cracked section computed on the basis of an uncracked section.
 
For I girders and bulb-tee girders, A1 reinforcement shall consist of deformed bars (minimum #5 for Type 2, 3 and 4 and minimum #6 for Type 6, 7 and 8).
 
For NU girders, A1 reinforcement shall consist of the four 3/8-inch diameter reinforcement support strands with deformed bars added only as needed. The WWR in the top flange shall not be used for A1 reinforcement because there is insufficient clearance to splice the WWR.
 
See guidance on [https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings Bridge Standard Drawings (Prestressed I-Girders - PSI)] for required lap lengths, if required.
 
 
Required steel area is equal to:
 
 
<math>\,A1=\frac{T_t}{f_s}</math>
 
Where:
{|
|<math>\, f_s</math>||= <math>\, 0.5 f_y \le 30 KSI</math>, allowable tensile stress of mild steel, (ksi)
|-
|<math>T_t</math>||= Resultant of total tensile force computed on the basis of an uncracked section, (kips)
|}
 
 
'''Limits for reinforcement'''
 
The following criteria shall be considered only at composite stage.
 
Minimum amount of prestressed and non-prestressed tensile reinforcement shall be so that the factored flexural resistance, ''M<sub>r''</sub>, is at least equal to the lesser of:<br/>
 
::1) M<sub>cr</sub> &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LRFD Eq. 5.6.3.3-1
::2) 1.33M<sub>u</sub>
 
Where:
{|border="0" cellpadding="5"
|-
|M<sub>cr</sub>||=||Cracking moment, (kip-in.)
|-
|M<sub>u</sub> ||=||Total factored moment from Strength I load combination,  (kip-in.)
|}
 
 
 
 
 
====751.22.3.7.2 Reinforcement====
The reinforcement shall be detailed on the plan sheets for closed concrete intermediate diaphragms as shown below except:
* Bar marks revised as required.
* Abbreviations used as required.
* Add "(Typ.)" to dimensions and leader notes as appropriate.
 
All U bar reinforcement shall use stirrup bends.
 
All reinforcement in diaphragms shall be epoxy coated, except coating of dowel bars shall match the coating of intermediate bent reinforcement.
 
Coil ties and rods shall also be shown in the section near the diaphragm and the horizontal section near the top of diaphragm in accordance with [[#751.22.3.10 Coil Inserts and Tie Rods|EPG 751.22.3.10 Coil Inserts and Tie Rods]].
 
Unless specified the details shown are for the same girder heights within a continuous girder series.
 
'''I Girders Type 2, 3, 4 and 6'''
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.22.3.7.2_01-2025.png|center|400px]] || [[image:751.22.3.7.2_02-2025.png|center|100px]]
|-
|-
| colspan="2" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br>(Normal to centerline of girders) ||
! Role !! Potential TSMO Contribution
|-
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.22.3.7.2_03-2025.png|center|550px]] || [[image:751.22.3.7.2_04-2025.png|center|175px]]
| '''Transportation Management Center (TMC) Operator''' || Monitor traffic conditions, manage information systems, and coordinate incident response and traveler communication to maintain safe and efficient roadway operations.
|-
|-
| colspan="2" | <span style="color:#00B050">(Skewed over 25°)</span> || <span style="color:#00B050">(Skewed up to 25°)</span>
| '''Emergency Response Operator''' || Provide on-scene incident management, motorist assistance, and roadway clearance to restore normal traffic flow and enhance safety during disruptions.
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A'''  
| '''Maintenance Technician''' || Implement maintenance related TSMO strategies; provide feedback and effort for continual improvement of these strategies and tools.
|-
|-
| [[image:751.22.3.7.2_05-2025.png|center|200px]] || style="text-align:left;"| '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>Bars will need to clear any shear blocks required for expansion bents. <br>X equals layers of bent up strands (omit quantity if one layer). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> X equals layers of bent up strands (omit quantity if one layer). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> 19 inches minimum for #4 bars and full available width for #6 bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> Subtract one row for Type 2 and 3. Add one row for Type 6. ||
| '''Traffic Operations Engineer''' || Implement traffic operations related TSMO strategies; provide feedback and effort for continual improvement of these strategies and tools.  
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
! rowspan="2" | '''PSI<br>Type''' !! colspan="2" | '''Variable'''
|-
|-
! <span style="color:#00B050">'''A'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''B'''</span>
| '''Transportation Planner''' || Incorporate TSMO and other traditional transportation improvement strategies into planning efforts, as appropriate.
|-
|-
| '''2''' || 4 || 12"
| '''Design Staff''' || Consider TSMO as a key element of design, where applicable, either as a direct improvement for the specific application or as an opportunity for the continuation of existing TSMO strategies.
|-
|-
| '''3''' || 4 || 12"
| '''Construction Inspector''' || Coordinate with appropriate personnel when modifying design elements or inspecting TSMO related infrastructure.
|-
|-
| '''4''' || 5 || 12"
| '''Work Zone Specialists''' || Oversee temporary traffic control in construction zones; review and manage Transportation Management Plans (TMPs), ensure proper setup and quality of traffic control devices, assess risks, and provide input during planning and post-construction reviews to enhance safety and minimize disruptions.
|-
|-
| '''6''' || 6 || 15"
| '''Information Systems Manager''' || Provide oversight and management of field and central communications systems, computer and software, and other information systems resources.
|}
|-
|-
| '''SECTION B-B''' <br>(Normal) <br> <span style="color:#00B050">(Fixed Bent)</span>
| '''Human Resources Specialist''' || Incorporate relevant related skills and experience into position descriptions where TSMO expertise is needed; assist with training programs to improve the knowledge, skills, and abilities of existing operations personnel.
|-
|-
| '''Emergency Management Agencies''' || Support TSMO implementation by providing coordinated incident response, traffic control, emergency medical services, and roadway clearance; collaborate with MoDOT and TMC staff, when applicable, to improve incident management, responder safety, and system recovery during emergencies and planned events.
|}
|}


===909.1.4 TSMO Implementation Framework===
The TSMO Implementation Framework provides a structured approach for MoDOT to translate its mission and agency goals into actionable objectives and strategies. It supports the development of purpose-driven, measurable strategies aligned with statewide priorities. This framework serves as a bridge between MoDOT’s overarching mission and the specific strategies implemented across the TSMO program. Effective implementation of these goals relies on coordination across disciplines, integration throughout project phases, and collaboration with internal and external partners.


'''Bulb-Tee Girders Type 7 and 8'''
Table 909.1.4.1 identifies the core programmatic elements, MoDOT’s goals and associated objectives, that guide how TSMO is planned, implemented, and evaluated.
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto;"
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.22.3.7.2_06-2025.png|center|400px]] || [[image:751.22.3.7.2_07-2025.png|center|100px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br>(Normal to centerline of girders) ||
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.7.2_08-2025.png|center|550px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A''' <span style="color:#00B050">(Skewed over 25°)</span>
|-
| [[image:751.22.3.7.2_09-2025.png|center|200px]] || [[image:751.22.3.7.2_10-2025.png|center|200px]] ||style="text-align:left;"| '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>See Section A-A for I girders type 2, 3, 4 and 6 for differences in strand<br>tie bars for bents skewed up to 25°. <br>Bars will need to clear any shear blocks required for expansion bents. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> X equals layers of bent up strands (omit quantity if one layer). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> 19 inches minimum for #4 bars and full available width for #6 bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> 11" may be used if required for spacing.  
|-
| '''ELEVATION C-C''' || '''SECTION B-B''' <br>(Normal) <br><span style="color:#00B050">(Fixed Bent)</span> ||
|}
 


'''NU Girders'''
{| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto"
NU 53 girders are shown in the following details. The details for other NU girder types are similar.
|+ ''Table 909.1.4.1 Programmatic Element''
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.22.3.7.2_11-2025.png|center|400px]] || [[image:751.22.3.7.2_12-2025.png|center|100px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br>(Normal to centerline of girders) ||
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.7.2_13-2025.png|center|550px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A''' <span style="color:#00B050">(Skewed over 25°)</span>
|-
| [[image:751.22.3.7.2_14-2025.png|center|200px]] || [[image:751.22.3.7.2_15-2025.png|center|200px]] ||
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
! rowspan="2" | '''Nu<br>Type''' !! colspan="2" | '''Variable'''
|-
! <span style="color:#00B050">'''A'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''B'''</span>
|-
| '''35''' || 3 || 2
|-
| '''43''' || 4 || 3
|-
| '''53''' || 4 || 3
|-
| '''63''' || 5 || 4
|-
|-
| '''70''' || 6 || 5
! Goal !! Objective
|-
|-
| '''78''' || 7 || 6
| '''Safety''' || Reduce crash frequency and severity through proactive deployment of TSMO strategies (e.g., incident management, work zone safety, network operations).
|}
|-
|-
| '''ELEVATION C-C''' || '''SECTION B-B''' <br>(Normal) <br><span style="color:#00B050">Fixed Bent</span>
| '''Reliability''' || Support predictable and consistent travel times across the system by proactively managing congestion and incidents.
|-
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>See Section A-A for I girders type 2, 3, 4 and 6 for differences in strand tie bars for bents skewed up to 25°. <br>Bars will need to clear any shear blocks required for expansion bents. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> X equals layers of bent up strands (omit quantity if one layer). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> 19 inches minimum for #4 bars and full available width for #6 bars.
| '''Efficiency''' || Operate MoDOT’s existing system efficiently and effectively through the application of TSMO strategies, as appropriate, to improve performance and inform decisions regarding potential capacity expansion.
|-
|-
| '''Customer Service''' || Support timely, accurate, and useful traveler information that enables informed decision-making.
|}
|}


Table 909.1.4.2 links MoDOT’s mission to measurable outcomes and example TSMO strategies, demonstrating how operations initiatives directly support statewide goals.


'''Change in Girder Height'''
{| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto"
 
|+ ''Table 909.1.4.2. Linking MoDOT Mission to Outcomes and Example TSMO Strategies''
The following details are based on I Girders Type 2, 3, 4 and 6. The details are appropriate for bulb-tee and NU girders by substituting the appropriate reinforcing details from above. The reinforcement is that of the taller girder with additional #6 bars located under the shorter girder. The section near the diaphragm shall be from the perspective of the shorter girders. The differences from uniform girder height details are highlighted.
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.22.3.7.2_16-2025.png|center|550px]] || [[image:751.22.3.7.2_17-2025.png|center|100px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(e)'''</span> (Looking back station) (Normal to centerline of girders) ||
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.7.2_18-2025.png|center|650px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A''' <span style="color:#00B050">(Skewed over 25°)</span>
|-
|-
| [[image:751.22.3.7.2_19-2025.png|center|200px]] || style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>See Section A-A for I girders type 2, 3, 4 and 6 for differences in strand<br>tie bars for bents skewed up to 25°. <br>Bars will need to clear any shear blocks required for expansion bents. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> X equals layers of bent up strands (omit quantity if one layer). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> 19 inches minimum for #4 bars and full available width for #6 bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> Subtract one row for Type 2 and 3. Add one row for Type 6. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(d)'''</span> For squared bents replace H26 with H25. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(e)'''</span> Only required if shorter girders are down station from taller girders. ||
! style="width:400px" | Mission !! style="width:400px" | High-Level Outcome !! Example TSMO Strategy
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
! rowspan="2" | '''PSI<br>Type''' !! colspan="2" | '''Variable'''
|-
|-
! <span style="color:#00B050">'''A'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''B'''</span>
| '''Improving safety (Moving Missourians safely)''' || Reduction in crashes, fatalities, and serious injuries; safer travel for all users || • 909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management<br>• 909.2.3 Road Weather Management<br>• 909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management<br>• 909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management<br>• 909.3.2 Arterial Operations and Management
|-
|-
| '''2''' || 4 || 12"
| '''Providing high-value, impactful solutions (Delivering efficient and innovative transportation projects; asset management)''' || Cost-effective improvements that maximize existing infrastructure and delay costly expansions || • 909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management<br>• 909.3.2 Arterial Operations and Management<br>• 909.3.3 Freight Operation<br>• 909.3.4 Vulnerable Road Users
|-
|-
| '''3''' || 4 || 12"
| '''Improving reliability and mobility (Operating a reliable transportation system; Building a prosperous economy for all Missourians)''' || Predictable travel times and improved system performance for people and freight || • 909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management<br>• 909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management<br>• 909.2.5 Planned Special Event Management<br>• 909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management<br>• 909.3.5 Transit Operation
|-
| '''4''' || 5 || 12"
|-
| '''6''' || 6 || 15"
|}
|-
| '''ELEVATION B-B''' <br>(Normal) <br><span style="color:#00B050">(Fixed Bent)</span> <br><span style="color:#00B050">Change in girder heights not</span> <br><span style="color:#00B050">allowed at expansion bents. </span> || ||
|-
|-
| '''Providing useful and timely traveler information (Providing outstanding customer service)''' || Informed travel decisions by the public, increased user satisfaction || • 909.2.2 Transportation Operations for Emergency Incidents or Disasters<br>• 909.2.3 Road Weather Management
|}
|}


====751.22.3.8.2 Reinforcement====
===909.1.5 Performance Metrics===
The reinforcement shall be detailed on the plan sheets for open concrete intermediate diaphragms as shown below except:
Performance metrics provide the foundation for evaluating how TSMO strategies contribute to the safety, reliability, efficiency, and customer experience of Missouri’s transportation system. MoDOT currently tracks performance through a combination of federal performance measures and internal performance management tools (e.g. Tracker: Measures of Departmental Performance). The following tables present example performance measures that may be used to assess the effectiveness of TSMO strategies related to both non-recurring delays (Table 909.1.5.1) and recurring delays (Table 909.1.5.2).  
* Bar marks revised as required.
* Abbreviations used as required.
* Add "(Typ.)" to dimensions and leader notes as appropriate.


All U bar reinforcement shall use stirrup bends.
These measures are not intended to represent required or standalone reporting metrics, but rather a menu of potential measures that can support analysis, planning, and evaluation efforts, as appropriate to the specific application, study type, or operational need. When applied, these metrics can help users identify opportunities for improvement and support data-driven decision-making.


All reinforcement in diaphragms shall be epoxy coated.
{| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto"
 
|+ ''Table 909.1.5.1 Linking MoDOT TSMO Strategies for Non-Recurring Delays to Performance Metrics''
Coil ties and rods shall also be shown in the section near the diaphragm and the horizontal section near the top of diaphragm in accordance with [[#751.22.3.10 Coil Inserts and Tie Rods|EPG 751.22.3.10 Coil Inserts and Tie Rods]].
 
'''I Girders Type 2, 3, 4 and 6'''
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.8.2_01-2025.png|center|600px]]
! style="width:400px" | Strategy !! style="width:400px" | Goals !! Example Performance Metric
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br>(Normal to centerline of girders)
| rowspan="4" | '''909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management''' || Enhance the '''safety''' of traveling public and incident responders || • Number of secondary crashes per incident<br>• Severity (fatalities/serious injuries) of secondary crashes<br>• Percent of incidents with secondary crashes recorded<br>• Number of responders struck-by crashes<br>• Severity of responder-involved crashes<br>• Percent of incidents with responder crash data recorded
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.8.2_02-2025.png|center|650px]]
| Enhance '''reliability''' and '''efficiency''' of Missouri’s transportation system || • Average roadway clearance time<br>• Average incident clearance time<br>• Percent of incidents meeting clearance time targets
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A'''
| Strengthen '''coordination''', '''communication''', and '''collaboration''' between MoDOT and TIM partners || • Number of formalized agreements signed<br>• Number of multi-agency TIM meetings held annually<br>• Number of TIM trainings held annually<br>• Partner participation rate in meetings/exercises
|-
|-
| [[image:751.22.3.8.2_03-2025.png|center|250px]] || [[image:751.22.3.8.2_04-2025.png|center|125px]] ||
| Establish '''TIM policies''', '''procedures''', and '''protocols''' within MoDOT || • Number of formal TIM policies/protocols adopted<br>• Percent of TIM coordinator positions filled and active
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
! rowspan="2" | '''PSI<br>Type''' !! colspan="3" | '''Variable'''
|-
|-
! <span style="color:#00B050">'''A'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''B'''</span>!! <span style="color:#00B050">'''C'''</span>
| rowspan="2" | '''909.2.2 Transportation Operations for Emergency Incidents or Disasters''' || Enhance '''safety''' and responder protection during emergency incidents || • Number of emergency-related crashes<br>• Severity (fatal/serious injury) of emergency-related crashes<br>• Percent of emergency incidents with responder safety data recorded
|-
|-
| '''2''' || 4 || 10" || 2
| Improve '''reliability''' and '''speed''' of emergency response and system restoration || • Time to activate emergency operations<br>• Duration of emergency lane/road closures<br>• Percent of priority routes restored within target timeframes<br>• Emergency communication system uptime<br>• Average time to deploy emergency traffic control
|-
|-
| '''3''' || 4 || 10" || 3
| rowspan="3" | '''909.2.3 Road Weather Management''' || Improve '''safety''' under adverse weather conditions || • Number of weather-related crashes, fatalities, and serious injuries<br>• Crash rate per weather event
|-
|-
| '''4''' || 4 || 10" || 4
| Enhance '''operational readiness''' and '''timely''' roadway treatment || • Time to treat priority routes during storms<br>• Percent of network treated within specific time thresholds<br>• Materials usage efficiency (salt, brine, abrasives)
|-
|-
| '''6''' || 5 || 14" || 4
| Improve '''traveler information''' accuracy during weather events || • Traveler information system accuracy rate during storms<br>• Number of travel information interactions (511 apps, CMS messages)
|-
|-
|}
| rowspan="2" | '''909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management''' || Enhance '''safety''' for workers and motorists in work zones || • Number and rate of work zone crashes<br>• Number of work zone fatalities and serious injuries<br>• Number of work zone intrusions (near-miss events)
|-
|-
| '''SECTION B-B''' <br>(Normal) ||  ||
| Improve '''mobility''' and reduce unexpected work zone delays || • Work-zone related delays<br>• Percent of work zones meeting mobility targets (queue length, speed, travel time)<br>• Average incident clearance time for work zone-related incidents
|-
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>U21 are varied bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> Hook ends if length of bar is less than 88" (ℓ<sub>''d''</sub> = 44"). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> For squared bents replace with pairs of U23 bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> X equals layers of bent up strands (omit quantity if one layer). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(d)'''</span> 19 inches minimum for #4 bars and full available width for #6 bars.
| rowspan="2" | '''909.2.5 Planned Special Event Management''' || Ensure '''safe''' travel conditions during special events || • Number and rate of special event-related crashes<br>• Vulnerable Road User (VRU) level of comfort/safety index near event venues
|-
|-
| Improve '''mobility''' and minimize event-related congestion || • Travel time reliability during event periods<br>• Vehicle and pedestrian throughput at key access points<br>• Percent of events meeting planned operational performance targets
|}
|}




'''Bulb-Tee Girders Type 7 and 8'''
{| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto"
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|+ ''Table 909.1.5.2 Linking MoDOT TSMO Strategies for Recurring Delays to Performance Metrics''
|-
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.22.3.8.2_05-2025.png|center|600px]] || [[image:751.22.3.8.2_06-2025.png|center|125px]]
! style="width:400px" | Strategy !! style="width:400px" | Goals !! Example Performance Metric
|-
|-
| colspan="2" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br>(Normal to centerline of girders) ||
| rowspan="3" | '''909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management''' || Support '''safety''' on managed freeway facilities || • Number and rate of crashes on freeway segments<br>• Number of secondary crashes
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.8.2_07-2025.png|center|675px]]
| Improve '''travel reliability''' on freeway corridors || • Travel time reliability index<br>• Planning time index
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A'''
| Enhance operational '''efficiency''' on freeway corridors || • Average travel speed and delay<br>• Vehicle and truck throughput<br>• Number of recurring congestion hotspots mitigated
|-
|-
| [[image:751.22.3.8.2_08-2025.png|center|225px]] || [[image:751.22.3.8.2_09-2025.png|center|225px]] || style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>U31, U35, U36 & U37 are varied bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> Hook ends if length of bar is less than 88" (ℓ<sub>''d''</sub> = 44"). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> Replace with pairs of U36 bars for squared bents. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> X equals layers of bent up strands (omit quantity if one layer). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(d)'''</span> 19 inches minimum for #4 bars and full available width for #6 bars.
| rowspan="3" | '''909.3.2 Arterial Operations and Management''' || Enhance '''safety''' at signalized intersections and arterials || • Crash frequency and severity at signalized intersections<br>• Pedestrian and bicycle crash rate
|-
|-
| '''ELEVATION C-C''' || '''SECTION B-B''' <br>(Normal) ||
| Improve '''efficiency''' of arterial traffic flow || • Arterial travel time and delay<br>• Signal progression quality (arrival on green, bandwidth)<br>• Number of mitigated congestion hotspots
|-
|-
|}
| Enhance '''reliability''' of multimodal arterial operations || • Transit signal delay at signals (if applicable)<br>• Pedestrian crossing delay
 
 
'''NU Girders'''
 
NU 53 girders are shown in the following details. The details for other NU girder types are similar.
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.22.3.8.2_10-2025.png|center|600px]] || [[image:751.22.3.8.2_11-2025.png|center|125px]]
|-
|-
| colspan="2" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br>(Normal to centerline of girders) ||
| rowspan="2" | '''909.3.3 Freight Operation''' || Improve '''efficiency''' on key freight corridors || • Truck delay at bottlenecks<br>• Freight throughput (corridor or intermodal facility)
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.8.2_12-2025.png|center|700px]]
| Enhance '''reliability''' of freight travel || • Truck travel time reliability index<br>• Number of freight-related congestion hotspots mitigated
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A'''
| rowspan="3" | '''909.3.4 Vulnerable Road Users''' || Enhance '''safety''' and '''comfort''' for Vulnerable Road Users (VRUs) || • Number and rate of VRU crashes<br>• VRU level of comfort/safety index
|-
|-
| [[image:751.22.3.8.2_13-2025.png|center|225px]] || [[image:751.22.3.8.2_14-2025.png|center|255px]] ||
| Improve '''connectivity''' for walking and bicycling || • Miles of connected pedestrian/bicycle facilities<br>• Percent of network meeting connectivity standards
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
! rowspan="2" | '''NU<br>Type''' !! colspan="4" | '''Variable'''
|-
|-
! <span style="color:#00B050">'''A'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''B'''</span>!! <span style="color:#00B050">'''C'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''D'''</span>
| Support '''sustainable''', multimodal travel options || • Share of trips completed using active modes
|-
|-
| rowspan="3" | '''909.3.5 Transit Operation''' || Enhance '''mobility''' of transit users || • Passenger throughput per route or corridor<br>• Average transit travel time
|-
|-
| '''35''' || 2 || 3 || 2 || 1
| Improve transit '''reliability''' and on-time performance || • Percent of on-time arrivals<br>• Transit travel time reliability (travel adherence)
|-
| '''43''' || 3 || 4 || 3 || 2
|-
| '''53''' || 4 || 5 || 4 || 2
|-
| '''63''' || 5 || 5 || 4 || 3
|-
| '''70''' || 5 || 6 || 5 || 3
|-
| '''78''' || 6 || 6 || 5 || 3
|-
|}
|-
| '''ELEVATION C-C''' || '''SECTION B-B''' <br>(Normal) ||
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>U41, U44, U46 & U47 are varied bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> Hook ends if length of bar is less than 88" (ℓ<sub>''d''</sub> = 44"). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> For squared bents replace with pairs of U23 bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> X equals layers of bent up strands (omit quantity if one layer). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(d)'''</span> 19 inches minimum for #4 bars and full available width for #6 bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(e)'''</span> NU 78 requires another row.
|-
|-
| Improve customer experience and multimodal access || • Customer satisfaction survey results<br>• Pedestrian access quality (stop accessibility index)
|}
|}


====751.22.3.9.2 Reinforcement====
<br><br>
The reinforcement shall be detailed on the plan sheets for concrete end diaphragms as shown below except:
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
* Bar marks revised as required.
<br><br>
* Abbreviations used as required.
* Add "(Typ.)" to dimensions and leader notes as appropriate.


All U bar reinforcement shall use stirrup bends.
==909.2 Non-Congested Route (Non-Recurring Delays)==


All reinforcement in diaphragms shall be epoxy coated.
==909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management==
Traffic Incident Management (TIM) can help reduce the impact of roadway incidents by coordinating detection, response, and clearance activities among transportation, law enforcement, fire, EMS, towing, and other partners.


Coil ties and rods shall also be shown in the section near the diaphragm and the horizontal section near the top of diaphragm in accordance with [[#751.22.3.10 Coil Inserts and Tie Rods|EPG 751.22.3.10 Coil Inserts and Tie Rods]].
While crashes, disabled vehicles, and cargo spills are the most common focus of TIM programs, there are a broader set of disruptions that can also be monitored including:
* Debris in the roadway
* Grass fires
* Lane-blocking emergency vehicles
* Vehicle fires
* Heavy congestion


'''I Girders Type 2, 3, 4 and 6'''
By incorporating this broader incident set, TIM strategies ensure operators and responders are prepared for a wide range of events that may impact traveler safety and network performance. The following sections outline strategies for TIM.
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.9.2_01-2025.png|center|650px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br>(Normal to centerline of girders)
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.9.2_02-2025.png|center|700px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A'''
|-
| [[image:751.22.3.9.2_03-2025.png|center|275px]] || [[image:751.22.3.9.2_04-2025.png|center|275px]] || rowspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.9.2_05-2025.png|center|125px]]
|-
| <span style="color:#00B050">Small Expansion Device<br>(End Bend with Sliding Slab Similar)</span> || <span style="color:#00B050">Finger Plate Expansion Device</span>
|-
| colspan="2" | '''SECTION B-B''' <br>(Normal)
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>Use full available width for lap of all stirrup bars except the upper legs at a<br>finger plate expansion device are developed as specified. <br>U21 and U27 are varied bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> Hook ends of H200 bars if length is less than 66" (ℓ<sub>''d''</sub> = 33"). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> For squared bents replace both with Pr.-#4-U23. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> For squared bents replace U24 with U22. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(d)'''</span> For finger plate expansion devices replace with #4-U20 & #4-U26. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(e)'''</span> For finger plate expansion devices replace with #6-U21 & #6-U27. ||
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
! rowspan="2" | '''PSI<br>Type''' !! colspan="3" | '''Variable'''
|-
! <span style="color:#00B050">'''A'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''B'''</span>!! <span style="color:#00B050">'''C'''</span>
|-
| '''2''' || 4 || 10" || 2
|-
| '''3''' || 4 || 10" || 3
|-
| '''4''' || 4 || 10" || 4
|-
| '''6''' || 5 || 14" || 4
|-
|}
|}
 
 
'''Bulb-Tee Girders Type 7 and 8'''
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.9.2_06-2025.png|center|750px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br>(Normal to centerline of girders)
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.9.2_07-2025.png|center|850px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A'''
|-
| rowspan="2" | [[image:751.22.3.9.2_08-2025.png|center|225px]] || colspan="2" | [[image:751.22.3.9.2_09-2025.png|center|525px]]
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>See Section B-B for I Girders for differences due to a finger plate expansion device. <br>Lap #4 stirrup bars 19 inches if available otherwise lap all stirrup bars full available width. <br>H301, U301, U304, U306, U308 and U310 are varied bars. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> Hook ends of H300 bars if length is less than 66" (ℓ<sub>''d''</sub> = 33"). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> For squared bents replace both with Pr.-#4-U306. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> For squared bents replace U307 with U303, U308 with U304 and U309 with U305.
|-
| '''SECTION B-B'''<br>(Normal)
|}


<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''Users:'''
* TMC Operators → Detect and coordinate response ([[#909.2.1.3 Components|909.2.1.3 Components]]), disseminate traveler information ([[#909.2.1.1 Traffic Incident Management Plans|909.2.1.1 Traffic Incident Management Plans]]).
* Maintenance Technicians → Assist with clearance and roadway restoration ([[#909.2.1.3 Components|909.2.1.3 Components]]).
* Emergency Management Agencies → Critical frontline responders ([[#909.2.1.2 Stakeholders|909.2.1.2 Stakeholders]]).
</div>


'''NU Girders'''
===909.2.1.1 Traffic Incident Management Plans===
Traffic incidents occur without warning at any time and location on the highway system. On all segments of the interstate and freeway highway system, TIM plans should be developed in coordination with law enforcement and local responders to:
* Reduce response and clearance times.
* Develop alternate plans for handling affected traffic.
* Communicate and coordinate between first responders.
* Communicate traffic impacts to motorists.


NU 53 girders are shown in the following details. The details for other NU girder types are similar.
Reference [[:Category:948_Incident_Response_Plan_and_Emergency_Response_Management|EPG 948 Incident Response Plan and Emergency Response Management]] for additional information.
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.9.2_10-2025.png|center|775px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION NEAR DIAPHRAGM''' <br>(Normal to centerline of girders)
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.22.3.9.2_11-2025.png|center|875px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''SECTION A-A'''
|-
| [[image:751.22.3.9.2_12-2025.png|center|225px]] || [[image:751.22.3.9.2_13-2025.png|center|275px]] ||
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
! rowspan="2" | '''NU<br>Type''' !! colspan="4" | '''Variable'''
|-
! <span style="color:#00B050">'''A'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''B'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''C'''</span> !! <span style="color:#00B050">'''D'''</span>
|-
| '''35''' || 2 || 3 || 2 || 1
|-
| '''43''' || 3 || 4 || 3 || 2
|-
| '''53''' || 4 || 5 || 4 || 2
|-
| '''63''' || 5 || 5 || 4 || 3
|-
| '''70''' || 5 || 6 || 5 || 3
|-
| '''78''' || 6 || 6 || 5 || 3
|-
|}
|-
| '''SECTION B-B''' <br>(Normal) || ||
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:''' <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''Green items'''</span> are guidance only and shall not be shown on the plans. <br>See Section B-B for I Girders for differences due to a finger plate expansion device. <br>Lap #4 stirrup bars 19 inches if available otherwise lap all stirrup bars full available width. <br>H401, U401, U404, U406, U408 and U410 are varied bars. <br>Do not vary U403 and U407 bars. Horizontal legs are controlled by the minimum allowable space on each end of diaphragm. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(ɑ)'''</span> Hook ends of H400 bars if length is less than 66" (ℓ<sub>''d''</sub> = 33"). <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(b)'''</span> For squared bents replace both with 2 Pr.-#4-U406. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(c)'''</span> For squared bents replace U407 with U403, U408 with U404 and U409 with U405. <br><span style="color:#00B050">'''(d)'''</span> NU 78 requires another row of H401 and H402 (4-#6-H401 & 3-#6-H402 in Section A-A).
|}


===909.2.1.2 Stakeholders===
Effective TIM depends on collaboration among a wide range of partners. Law enforcement, fire/rescue, EMS, and towing operators provide immediate on-scene response, while MoDOT personnel and TMCs deliver critical support through detection, traffic control, and traveler information. Each stakeholder brings unique capabilities, and coordinated multi-agency response supports faster clearance, safer conditions for responders, and more reliable outcomes for the traveling public.


===909.2.1.3 Components===
The core components of TIM—detection, verification, response, clearance, and recovery—create a structured framework for managing roadway incidents. Detection and verification confirm the incident type and location; coordinated response mobilizes the appropriate agencies; clearance restores traffic lanes and removes hazards; and recovery ensures the roadway is returned to normal operation. Addressing each component systematically reduces incident duration and enhances both safety and reliability.


==909.2.2 Transportation Operations for Emergency Incidents or Disasters==
Emergency operations support safe and effective evacuation and mobility during disasters such as floods, tornadoes, earthquakes, or other emergencies. The following sections outline strategies for emergency operations during disasters.
<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''Users:'''
* Emergency Management Agencies → Coordinate disaster response ([[#909.2.2.1 Frameworks and Coordination|909.2.2.1 Frameworks and Coordination]]).
* Transportation Planners → Prepare evacuation plans ([[#909.2.2.2 Preparedness and Planning|909.2.2.2 Preparedness and Planning]]).
* Traffic Operations Engineers → Manage ingress and egress traffic flow ([[#909.2.2.3 Operational Strategies During Disasters|909.2.2.3 Operational Strategies During Disasters]]).
* TMC Operators → Monitor evacuation routes and push real-time traveler information ([[#909.2.2.3 Operational Strategies During Disasters|909.2.2.3 Operational Strategies During Disasters]]).
</div>


====751.22.3.9.3 Closed Diaphragm====
===909.2.2.1 Frameworks and Coordination===
Use only when expansion device connects prestressed girder series and steel girder series, and laminated neoprene pads are used under the prestressed girders in accordance with expansion limits of these bearings and only with the approval of the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer.
MoDOT’s emergency transportation operations should align with the National Incident Management System (NIMS) and the Incident Command System (ICS). These frameworks establish the standard structure, terminology, and coordination processes for incident and disaster response at the local, state, and federal levels.


The simplified detail below is for I girders. The actual details required on the plans can be developed for all girder types by substituting the dimensions and reinforcement of the corresponding section near the diaphragm detail of [[#751.22.3.7 Closed Concrete Intermediate Diaphragms|EPG 751.22.3.7]] and the dimensions from the corresponding Section A-A of [[#751.22.3.9.1 Dimensions|EPG 751.22.3.9.1 Dimensions]].
'''National Incident Management System (NIMS)''':
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
* Provides a nationwide approach for incident management and coordination.
|-
* Provides emergency transportation operations guidance for interoperable collaboration with law enforcement, fire, EMS, emergency management, and federal partners.
| [[image:751.22.3.9.3_01-2025.png|center|470px]] || [[image:751.22.3.9.3_02-2025.png|center|225px]]
* Establishes common terminology, communication protocols, and resource management procedures to support multi-agency operations.
|-
| '''SECTION THRU CLOSED END DIAPHRAGM''' ||
|}


'''Incident Command System (ICS)''':
* Serves as the on-scene management structure for all types of incidents.
* Defines clear roles, responsibilities, and reporting relationships across agencies.
* Provides guidance on unified command structures, filling roles such as transportation branch directors, field observers, or technical specialists.
* Provides flexibility to scale operations for localized or statewide events.


For detailed response information, please contact MoDOT’s Safety and Emergency Management.


===909.2.2.2 Preparedness and Planning===
* Develop and exercise evacuation and emergency operations plans.
* Use simulation and scenario testing to identify gaps and strengthen interagency protocols.
* Establish pre-designated staging areas for resource allocation, evacuation support, and vehicle marshaling.


===909.2.2.3 Operational Strategies During Disasters===
* '''Traffic Management''': Complete rapid damage assessment and plan and publish routes for ingress and egress to the impacted area.
* '''Multimodal Evacuations''': Utilize buses, school buses, and regional transit providers to assist in large-scale evacuations.
* '''Route Monitoring''': Employ field observations, cameras, and sensors to track evacuation route conditions in real time.
* '''Public Information''': Provide timely traveler information, evacuation messaging, and updates in coordination with media partners.


==909.2.3 Road Weather Management==
Road Weather Management strategies improve mobility, reliability, and safety during weather events through strategies such as targeted traveler information, warnings, and operational interventions. The following sections outline strategies for road weather management.


===751.31.3.1 Beam Cap===
<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
'''Users:'''
|-
* TMC Operators → Operate dynamic message signs and push alerts ([[#909.2.3.1 Road Weather Warnings/Alerts and Dynamic Message Signs|909.2.3.1 Road Weather Warnings/Alerts and Dynamic Message Signs]]; [[#909.2.3.2 Road Weather Information Systems|909.2.3.2 Road Weather Information Systems]]).
| colspan="2" | [[Image:751.31.3.1_01-2025.jpg|center|500px]] || [[Image:751.31.3.1_02-2025.jpg|center|200px]] || [[Image:751.31.3.1_03-2025.jpg|center|125px]]
* Maintenance Technicians → Respond to weather conditions, deploy treatment ([[#909.2.3.2 Road Weather Information Systems|909.2.3.2 Road Weather Information Systems]]).
|-
* Traffic Operations Engineers → Integrate road weather information systems data ([[#909.2.3.1 Road Weather Warnings/Alerts and Dynamic Message Signs|909.2.3.1 Road Weather Warnings/Alerts and Dynamic Message Signs]]; [[#909.2.3.2 Road Weather Information Systems|909.2.3.2 Road Weather Information Systems]]).
| colspan="2" | '''PART ELEVATION''' || '''SECTION A-A''' || '''SECTION B-B'''
</div>
|-
| colspan="2" | || colspan="2" | '''(Single Stirrups)'''
===909.2.3.1 Road Weather Warnings/Alerts and Dynamic Message Signs===
|-
Used to display real-time information to warn motorists of roadway incidents, construction or congestion ahead that could pose a hazard or cause delays.
| colspan="2" | [[Image:751.31.3.1_04-2025.png|center|500px]] || [[Image:751.31.3.1_05-2025.jpg|center|225px]] || [[Image:751.31.3.1_06-2025.jpg|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''PART PLAN''' || '''SECTION A-A''' || '''SECTION B-B'''
|-
| colspan="2" | || colspan="2" | '''(Double Stirrups)'''
|-
| colspan="2" | [[Image:751.31.3.1_07-2025.jpg|center|450px]] || colspan="2" | [[Image:751.31.3.1_08-2025.jpg|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''TRANSVERSE BEAM STEPS OVER 3 INCHES'''<br>(Also, steps accumulating over 3 inches) || colspan="2" | '''SLOPED BEAMS'''<br>(Steps over 3 inches on high side)
|-
| [[Image:751.31.3.1_09-2025.jpg|center|230px]] || [[Image:751.31.3.1_10-2025.jpg|center|250px]] || rowspan="5" colspan="2" style="text-align:left; vertical-align:top;" |
(1) #4 @ 12” cts. (Min.)<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; #6 (Dbl.) @ 6” cts. (Max.)<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Minimum spacing of 5” for single stirrups and 6” for double stirrups<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Maximum spacing of 12”<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; All stirrups in the beam shall be the same bar size.<br>
(2) L/4 + d, but not less than theoretical cut-off plus development length, where d equals<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; the distance from compression face to centroid of tension steel.<br>
(3) Beam width controlled by minimum support length required for earthquake criteria.<br>
(4) Location 1 Class B lap splice.<br>
(5) 6” (Max.), add #6 bars as needed.<br>
(6) 9” (Max.), add #6 bars at each face as needed.<br>
(7) Location 2 development length, f'c = 3 ksi: 20”(uncoated), 30”(epoxy coated)<br>


See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8_Development_and_Lap_Splices EPG 751.5.9.2.8] for development and lap splice lengths not given or lengths for<br>scenarios other than those shown. Provide standard hooks if required.
Procedures for Dynamic Message Signs are outlined in [[910.3_Dynamic_Message_Signs_(DMS)|EPG 910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)]].


See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.2_Epoxy_Coated_Reinforcement_Requirements EPG 751.5.9.2.2] for epoxy coated reinforcement requirements.
===909.2.3.2 Road Weather Information Systems===
Road Weather Information Systems (RWIS) provide real-time data on weather and roadway conditions to support transportation system operations and maintenance activities. These systems collect information such as air and pavement temperatures, precipitation, visibility, and surface conditions to help inform operational decisions. Data may be collected through field sensors, third-party weather service providers, or a combination of both, depending on system needs and available resources.


See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.13_Expansion_Devices#751.13.1.4_Details_of_Substructure_Protection EPG 751.13.1.4] for details of protective coating and sloping top of beam to drain<br>when below an expansion device.
==909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management==
|-
Work zone strategies reduce risk to workers and travelers while minimizing delays during construction and maintenance activities. These strategies apply to both short-term and long-term work zones, recognizing that every project, regardless of duration, can significantly affect roadway operations and safety. The following sections outline strategies for work zone traffic management.  
| '''Over 3 Inches Thru 12 Inches''' || '''Over 12 Inches'''
|-
| colspan="2" | '''LONGITUDINAL BEAM STEPS'''
|-
| colspan="2" | [[Image:751.31.3.1_11-2025.jpg|center|475px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''REINFORCEMENT UNDER BEARINGS'''
|-
|}


<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''Users:'''
* Design Staff → Incorporate TMP and ITS strategies into project design, when practical ([[#909.2.4.1 Traffic Management Plan|909.2.4.1 Traffic Management Plan]]; [[#909.2.4.4 Use of Intelligent Transportation Systems|909.2.4.4 Use of Intelligent Transportation Systems]]).
* Work Zone Specialists → Review and manage TMPs, oversee traffic control device setup, and ensure compliance with MoDOT standards ([[#909.2.4.1 Traffic Management Plan|909.2.4.1 Traffic Management Plan]]; [[#909.2.4.2 Traffic Incident Management Plan|909.2.4.2 Traffic Incident Management Plan]]).
* Construction Inspectors → Enforce work zone traffic control measures ([[#909.2.4.2 Traffic Incident Management Plan|909.2.4.2 Traffic Incident Management Plan]]).
* Traffic Operations Engineers → Oversee ITS integration and system strategies ([[#909.2.4.3 Smart Work Zones|909.2.4.3 Smart Work Zones]];  [[#909.2.4.4 Use of Intelligent Transportation Systems|909.2.4.4 Use of Intelligent Transportation Systems]]).
* TMC Operators → Monitor work zones and disseminate real-time traveler information ([[#909.2.4.4 Use of Intelligent Transportation Systems|909.2.4.4 Use of Intelligent Transportation Systems]]).
</div>


===909.2.4.1 Traffic Management Plan===
The Transportation Management Plan (TMP) consists of strategies to manage the work zone impacts of a project. Each TMP is tailored to the unique conditions of a project and typically incorporates three coordinated elements: Traffic Control Plan (TCP), Traffic Operations (TO), and Public Information and Outreach (PIO).


As an initial step, a project design should be selected to eliminate or minimize additional delays and traffic queueing during construction. [[616.19_Work_Zone_Capacity,_Queue_and_Travel_Delay|EPG 616.19 Work Zone Capacity, Queue and Travel Delay]] provides tools to assess the traffic impact of the proposed project design(s).


===751.31.3.2 Column===
For additional detail on the required elements, development process, and documentation standards for TMPs, reference [[616.20_Work_Zone_Safety_and_Mobility_Policy#616.20.9_Work_Zone_Transportation_Management_Plan|EPG 616.20.9 Work Zone Transportation Management Plan]]. For additional information on developing Work Zone Traffic Management JSPs for use in core team meetings, reference [[616.20_Work_Zone_Safety_and_Mobility_Policy#616.20.7_Significant_Projects|EPG 616.20.7 Significant Projects]].


{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
===909.2.4.2 Traffic Incident Management Plan===
|-
When traffic incidents occur within a work zone, it is important to clear the incident and restore traffic as quickly as possible. To aid in this effort, a project-based traffic incident management (TIM) plan should be developed for all significant projects on interstate and freeways.
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.31.3.2_01-2025.jpg|center|200px]] || [[image:751.31.3.2_02-2025.jpg|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''MINIMUM SPACING AT LAP SPLICES''' || '''ALTERNATE DOWEL PLACEMENT'''
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | * || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | Use alternate detail only with approval of Structural Project Manager and then design column reinforcement using the smaller ring diameter.
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | A = || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | 4 1/2” minimum spacing center-to-center.
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | B = || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | 2” clear spacing for bar sizes thru #10.
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | 2 1/2” clear spacing for bar sizes #11 and #14. 
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | 3 1/2” clear spacing for bar size #18.
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.31.3.2_03-2025.jpg|center|275px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''STIRRUP LAP DETAIL AND STAGGER NOTE'''
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | Lap splices for closed circular ties shall be provided and staggered in accordance with LRFD 5.10.6.3.
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | Lap length of 1.3 '''l'''<sub>d</sub> (or Class B) for closed stirrup/ties shall be provided in accordance with LRFD 5.11.2.6.4.
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | Lap length for #4 stirrup bars (4” min. spacing, f’c = 3 ksi, and clear cover = 1½”) equals 24” for uncoated<br>bars and 28” for epoxy coated bars.  
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | For lap length for other scenarios, see [[751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8 Development and Lap Splices|EPG 751.5.9.2.8 Development and Lap Splices]].
|-
|}


{| class="wikitable" cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
Reference [[#909.2.1.1 Traffic Incident Management Plans|EPG 909.2.1.1 Traffic Incident Management (TIM) Plans]] for additional information.
|+'''Collision Shear Reinforcement<sup>1</sup>'''
|-
! rowspan="2" | Column Diameter !! rowspan="2" | Minimum Reinforcement<sup>2,3</sup> !! colspan="2" | Minimum Lap Splice
|-
! Uncoated<br>(f’c = 3ksi)<br>(Cl. = 1½”) !! Epoxy Coated<br>(f’c = 3ksi)<br>(Cl. = 1½”)
|-
| 3’-0” || By Design || NA || NA
|-
| 3’-6” || By Design || NA || NA
|-
| 4’-0” || #6 @ 5” || 47” || 61”
|-
| 4’-6” || #5 @ 5” || 34” || 44”
|-
| 5’-0” || #4 @ 5” || 24” || 28”
|-
| 5’-6” || #4 @ 10” || 24” || 28”
|-
| 6’-0” || #4 @ 12” || 24” || 28”
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" |
'''<sup>1</sup>''' See [[751.2 Loads#751.2.2.6 Other Loads|EPG 751.2.2.6 Other Loads]] to determine if a pier requires design for collision loads.<br/>
'''<sup>2</sup>''' Design assumptions:<br/>
* Vu = 600 k, Pu = 0 k, Mu = 0 k-ft<br/>
* f’c = 3 ksi, fy = 60 ksi, 1.5” clear cover<br/>
* Shear resistance factor = 1.0<br/>
* Minimum longitudinal reinforcement per [[#751.31.2.3 General Design Assumptions|EPG 751.31.2.3 General Design Assumptions]]<br/>
'''<sup>3</sup>''' The shear reinforcement tabulated is adequate for collision but may not be adequate for other design<br>checks. For example, columns greater than 5’-0” require more stirrups to meet min reinforcement.  Lesser<br>reinforcement values may be used by design. Design is required for 3’-0” and 3’-6” columns because the<br>design criteria used for the table requires double stirrups which is not common practice.
|}


::Columns shall be reinforced using stirrup ties, unless excessive reinforcement is required, in which case spirals shall be used.
===909.2.4.3 Smart Work Zones===
Once a project design has been determined, the [[616.19_Work_Zone_Capacity,_Queue_and_Travel_Delay#MoDOT_Work_Zone_Impact_Analysis_Spreadsheet|MoDOT Work Zone Impact Analysis Spreadsheet]] will assist in determining which smart work zones strategies should be included in the project to provide information and warnings to motorists to improve work zone safety and traffic mobility.


::Show spiral details of [[751.9 LFD Seismic#Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.4|Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.4]] on the bridge plans if spirals are used for bridge in non-seismic area. Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by 1 ½ extra turns of spiral reinforcement at each end of the spiral unit.
Additionally, the [[media:909_WZM_Guidebook.pdf|Work Zone Management Guidebook]] provides information about tools and strategies for work zone management that will maximize safety and minimize the impacts to traffic. The [[media:909_WZM_Presentation.pdf|Work Zone Management Guidebook Presentation]] provides additional information about the guidebook.


{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
The nonstandard Work Zone Intelligent Transportation System special provision is available for reference in [[616.19_Work_Zone_Capacity,_Queue_and_Travel_Delay#616.19.6.3_Smart_Work_Zone_(SWZ)_Strategy_Selection|EPG 616.19.6.3 Smart Work Zone (SWZ) Strategy Selection]]. Additional information can also be found in [[616.19_Work_Zone_Capacity,_Queue_and_Travel_Delay|EPG 616.19 Work Zone Capacity, Queue and Travel Delay]] and [[616.20_Work_Zone_Safety_and_Mobility_Policy|EPG 616.20 Work Zone Safety and Mobility Policy]].
|-
|[[Image:751.31.3.2.3 part elev.jpg|left|375px]]||valign="center"|(1) Location 2 development length.<br/><br/>(2) Check clearance to concrete piles.<br/><br/>See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8_Development_and_Lap_Splices EPG 751.5.9.2.8] for development and lap splice lengths not given or lengths for scenarios other than those shown. Provide standard hooks if required.<br/><br/>See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.2_Epoxy_Coated_Reinforcement_Requirements EPG 751.5.9.2.2] for epoxy coated reinforcement requirements.
|}


===751.31.3.3 Web Beam===
===909.2.4.4 Use of Intelligent Transportation Systems===
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) devices (cameras, sensors, communication systems) provide detection and real-time monitoring of work zones.
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.31.3.3_01-2025.jpg|center|600px]] || [[image:751.31.3.3_02-2025.jpg|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''PART ELEVATION''' || '''SECTION THRU WEB BEAM'''
|-
| [[image:751.31.3.3_03-2025.jpg|center|275px]] || colspan="2" rowspan="2" style="text-align:left; |
(1) L/4 + d, but not less than theoretical cut-off + development length.
: L = span between columns
: d = distance from compression face to centroid of tension steel


(2) Location 2 development length, 4” to 12” spacing, 1½” clear, f'c = 3 ksi:
Procedures for ITS devices are outlined in [[:Category:910_Intelligent_Transportation_Systems|EPG 910 Intelligent Transportation Systems]].
: 14" (uncoated #4), 17" (epoxy coated #4)
: 18" (uncoated #5), 27" (epoxy coated #5)


(3) Location 1 development length, f'c = 3 ksi:
==909.1.5 Planned Special Event Management==
: 18" (uncoated #4), 22" (epoxy coated #4)
Special event management strategies ensure safe and efficient mobility during large gatherings, sporting events, and other planned activities. The following sections outline key strategies for planned special event management.
: 23" (uncoated #5), 27" (epoxy coated #5)


(4) Location 2 development length.
<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''Users:'''
* Transportation Planners → Develop TMPs for special events and coordinate agencies ([[#909.1.5.1 Pre-Event Planning|909.1.5.1 Pre-Event Planning]]; [[#909.1.5.4 Post-Event Evaluation|909.1.5.4 Post-Event Evaluation]]).
* Traffic Operations Engineers → Design strategies for traffic flow and multimodal support ([[#909.1.5.2 Implementation|909.1.5.2 Implementation]]).
* TMC Operators → Manage day-of-event operations and traveler communications ([[#909.1.5.3 Day-of-Event Operations|909.1.5.3 Day-of-Event Operations]]).
* Emergency Management Agencies → Manage access, safety, and enforcement ([[#909.1.5.2 Implementation|909.1.5.2 Implementation]]).
</div>


(5) Location 2 Class B lap splice.
===909.1.5.1 Pre-Event Planning===
* Develop Transportation Management Plans (TMPs) with input from MoDOT, local agencies, law enforcement, transit providers, and event organizers.
* Identify needs for Emergency Operations Center (EOC) and Joint Operations Center (JOC) activation, staffing augmentation, and resource staging for high-profile or large-scale events (e.g., sporting events, major concerts, parades, funerals, festivals, eclipse, political events).
* Plan for multimodal access (transit, walking, biking) and freight restrictions, where applicable.


(6) Maximum spacing shall be 6" or 1/5 development length for noncontact lap splice.
===909.1.5.2 Implementation===
* Deploy traffic control devices, signage, and ITS in advance of the event.
* Coordinate with law enforcement and emergency management on enforcement zones, access control, and responder staging.
* Conduct interagency briefings to confirm roles, responsibilities, and communication protocols.


See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8_Development_and_Lap_Splices EPG 751.5.9.2.8] for development and lap splice lengths<br>not given or for lengths for scenarios other than those shown. Provide standard hooks if required.
===909.1.5.3 Day-of-Event Operations===
* Manage traffic and crowd circulation using TMC monitoring, field staff, and real-time traveler information (dynamic message signs, push alerts, social media).
* Coordinate with EOC/JOC if activated to ensure situational awareness and resource support.
* Adjust plans dynamically to address congestion, incidents, or security needs.


See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.2_Epoxy_Coated_Reinforcement_Requirements EPG 751.5.9.2.2] for epoxy coated reinforcement requirements.
===909.1.5.4 Post-Event Evaluation===
|-
* Conduct after-action reviews with MoDOT staff, law enforcement, emergency management, and event organizers.
| '''VARIABLE DIAMETER COLUMN'''<BR>(Without Seismic Detailing)
* Document lessons learned, identify gaps in staffing or coordination, and refine TMPs for future events.
|-
* Capture performance measures such as clearance times, delay estimates, and traveler feedback.
|}


<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


==909.2 Congested Route (Recurring Delays)==


==909.2.1 Freeway Operations and Management==
Freeway operations strategies enhance safety, reduce recurring congestion, and improve travel time reliability on major corridors. The following sections outline key strategies for freeway operations and management.
<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''Users:'''
* TMC Operators → Monitor and adjust dynamic controls, coordinate corridor operations, and manage incident response ([[#909.2.1.1 Ramp Management and Control|909.2.1.1 Ramp Management and Control]]; [[#909.2.1.3 Dynamic Speed Limits|909.2.1.3 Dynamic Speed Limits]]; [[#909.2.1.4 Queue Warning|909.2.1.4 Queue Warning]]; [[#909.2.1.5 Integrated Corridor Management|909.2.1.5 Integrated Corridor Management]]; [[#909.2.1.6 Transportation Management Centers|909.2.1.6 Traffic Management Centers]]).
* Traffic Operations Engineers → Design freeway operations strategies, oversee policy-sensitive strategies, and evaluate corridor performance ([[#909.2.1.2 Part-Time Shoulder Use (Hard Shoulder Running)|909.2.1.2 Part-Time Shoulder Use]]; [[#909.2.1.5 Integrated Corridor Management|909.2.1.5 Integrated Corridor Management]]; [[#909.2.1.6 Transportation Management Centers|909.2.1.6 Traffic Management Centers]]; [[#909.2.1.7 Managed Lanes|909.2.1.7 Managed Lanes]]).
* Information Systems Managers → Maintain ITS infrastructure, support automated detection, and ensure system integration for real-time operations ([[#909.2.1.5 Integrated Corridor Management|909.2.1.5 Integrated Corridor Management]]; [[#909.2.1.6 Transportation Management Centers|909.2.1.6 Traffic Management Centers]]; [[#909.2.1.8 Automated Incident Detection|909.2.1.8 Automated Incident Detection]]).
</div>
<br>
<div style="margin: auto; width:875px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''Policy Coordination''' – Any consideration or application of the following strategies in Missouri should be closely coordinated with MoDOT’s '''Central Office of Highway Safety and Traffic (COHST)''' to ensure consistency with policy, design standards, and operational oversight.
</div>
===909.2.1.1 Ramp Management and Control===
Ramp management and control strategies, including ramp metering and adaptive ramp management, regulate vehicle entry onto freeways to improve merging operations, reduce conflicts, and smooth overall traffic flow. This remains a dynamic application where it is implemented, with operational adjustments based on corridor conditions.


===751.31.3.4 Tie Beam===
Currently, Missouri does not operate continuous ramp metering systems. Instead, ramp meters are activated dynamically based on real-time traffic conditions when metrics (such as speed, volume, and/or density) exceed predefined thresholds.  
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.31.3.4_01-2025.jpg|center|400px]] || [[image:751.31.3.4_02-2025.jpg|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''CONSTANT COLUMN DIAMETER''' || '''CHANGE IN COLUMN DIAMETER'''
|-
| colspan="3" | '''PART ELEVATION AT TIE BEAM AND COLUMN'''


|-
===909.2.1.2 Part-Time Shoulder Use (Hard Shoulder Running)===
| [[image:751.31.3.4_03-2025.jpg|center|250px]] || colspan="2" rowspan="2" style="text-align:left; |
Part-time shoulder use, also known as hard shoulder running, allows roadway shoulders to serve as temporary travel lanes during peak periods, incidents, or emergencies. Applications may be designed for all vehicles or limited to transit operations.
(1) Location 1 development length, f'c = 3 ksi:<br/>
&nbsp;&nbsp; 18" (uncoated #4), 22" (epoxy coated #4)<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp; 23" (uncoated #5), 27" (epoxy coated #5)<br>
(2) Location 1 development length.<br>
(3) Location 2 development length.<br>
(4) Location 2 Class B lap splice.<br>
(5) If depth of tie beam exceeds 1/2 column spacing, use pairs of U-shaped bars.<br>
(6) Maximum spacing shall be 6" or 1/5 development length for noncontact lap splice.


See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8_Development_and_Lap_Splices EPG 751.5.9.2.8] for development and lap splice lengths not given or for lengths<br>for scenarios other than those shown. Provide standard hooks if required.
This strategy is increasingly being implemented by peer agencies across the country, particularly in corridors with limited right-of-way or peak-period capacity needs. While Missouri does not currently have any active applications of part-time shoulder use, the concept may present opportunities in select corridors - especially where traditional widening is not feasible and where shoulders are constructed to full-depth pavement standards.


See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.2_Epoxy_Coated_Reinforcement_Requirements EPG 751.5.9.2.2] for epoxy coated reinforcement requirements.
===909.2.1.3 Dynamic Speed Limits===
|-
Dynamic speed limits adjust posted speed limits in real time based on conditions such as traffic flow, weather, or incidents. This approach has been applied by several peer agencies to improve safety, smooth traffic flow, and reduce crash risk.
| '''SECTION THRU TIE BEAM'''
|-
|}


===751.31.3.5 Hammer Head Type===
In Missouri, there are no permanent applications of dynamic speed limits in routine freeway operations. However, the strategy may hold value in targeted, temporary contexts—particularly in work zones where changing conditions require more flexible speed management.
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto;"
|-
| style=" vertical-align: bottom;" | [[image:751.31.3.5_01-2025.png|center|325px]] || style=" vertical-align: bottom;" | [[Image:751.31.3.5_02-2025.jpg|center|250px]]
|-
| '''PART PLAN''' || '''SECTION A-A'''
|-
| style=" vertical-align: bottom;" | [[Image:751.31.3.5_03-2025.jpg|center|350px]] || style=" vertical-align: bottom;" | [[Image:751.31.3.5_04-2025.jpg|center|210px]]
|-
| '''PART ELEVATION''' || '''SECTION B-B'''
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" |
(1) #4 @ 12” cts. (Min.)
: #6 (Dbl.) @ 6” cts. (Max.)
:Minimum spacing of 5” for single stirrups and 6” for double stirrups
:Maximum spacing of 12”
:All stirrups in the beam shall be the same bar size.
:Locate #4 bars (Π) under bearings if required (not required for P/S double-tee girders).


(2) Hook bars if cantilever is less than the required Location 1 development length.
===909.2.1.4 Queue Warning===
Queue warning systems are designed to alert motorists of slow or stopped traffic ahead, reducing the likelihood of sudden braking and rear-end collisions in congested conditions. These systems typically consist of roadside sensors and Changeable Message Signs (CMS) that detect traffic slowdowns and display real-time warnings to approaching drivers. When sensors identify slowed or stopped vehicles, signals are transmitted to the CMS, which then display queue warning messages. Placement of sensors and signs is critical-warnings should activate when a queue extends to within 1-2 miles upstream, depending on speed, to provide adequate driver reaction time. In Missouri, current applications of queue warning rely exclusively on Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) rather than flashing beacons.


(3) Location 2 development length.
===909.2.1.5 Integrated Corridor Management===
Integrated Corridor Management (ICM) refers to coordinated operations across multiple facilities within a corridor—primarily freeways and parallel arterials. The goal is to manage congestion holistically by making better use of available capacity, balancing demand, and improving traveler information.


(4) Location 2 Class B lap splice, f'c = 3 ksi:
===909.2.1.6 Transportation Management Centers===
::34" (uncoated #7), 51" (epoxy coated #7)
Transportation Management Centers (TMCs) serve as the operational backbone of ICM. From TMCs, MoDOT staff monitor real-time traffic conditions, manage ITS devices, coordinate incident response, and adjust strategies such as ramp metering or queue warning. This centralized approach enables proactive management of corridors, ensuring safety and reliability during incidents, work zones, and peak travel periods.


(5) Location 1 Class B lap splice, f'c = 3 ksi:
===909.2.1.7 Managed Lanes===
::24" (uncoated #4), 28" (epoxy coated #4)
Managed lanes are roadway segments where access and use are actively regulated to improve traffic flow, safety, or reliability. Common approaches used nationally include bus-only lanes and truck-only lanes. These treatments are typically considered in locations with recurring congestion, limited right-of-way, or freight movement challenges.
(6) See EPG 751.2.2.6 and 751.31.2.2 for collision requirements.


(7) See LRFD 5.10.6.3 for tie requirements.
At present, Missouri has no active managed lane facilities.
See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8_Development_and_Lap_Splices EPG 751.5.9.2.8] for development and lap splice lengths not given or for lengths<br>for scenarios other than those shown. Provide standard hooks if required.


See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.2_Epoxy_Coated_Reinforcement_Requirements EPG 751.5.9.2.2] for epoxy coated reinforcement requirements.
===909.2.1.8 Automated Incident Detection===
|-
Automated incident detection systems use roadside sensors, video feeds, and software algorithms to identify crashes, stalled vehicles, or other disruptions in real time. These systems often integrate AI-based analytics with CCTV camera footage to detect unusual traffic patterns or stopped vehicles more quickly than traditional operator observation alone. By providing earlier notification of likely incidents, automated detection enhances safety, reduces secondary crashes, and improves response times for emergency and traffic management personnel.  
|}


=== 751.32.4.1 Typical Pile Cap Bent ===
==909.2.2 Arterial Operations and Management==
Arterial operations strategies improve mobility, safety, and reliability on surface streets through targeted improvements, signal operations, and multimodal accommodations. These strategies focus on reducing congestion at bottlenecks, enhancing intersection performance, and supporting consistent travel across urban and suburban corridors.


[[image:751.32.4.1-01-2024.png|center|800px]]
In Missouri, arterial management is often a shared responsibility between MoDOT and regional or local partners. For example, the Kansas City region’s Operation Green Light program coordinates arterial signal timing and corridor operations in collaboration with MoDOT and multiple local jurisdictions. Other examples include MoDOT’s partnership with St. Charles in the St. Louis region and collaboration with the City of Springfield and the Ozarks Transportation Organization. Similar arrangements may exist in other regions where MPOs, cities, or counties lead day-to-day arterial management. Practitioners should recognize that depending on the corridor and location, responsibility for arterial operations may rest with another entity, requiring coordination and partnership to ensure consistent system performance.


{|border="0" cellpadding="3" align="center" cellspacing="0"
The following sections outline key strategies for arterial operations and management.
|-
   
|valign="top"|Note:||width="550pt" align="left" valign="top"|Locate #4 bars "[[Image:751.32 reinforcement--4 bar under bearing.gif]]" under bearings where required to maintain a 6" maximum spacing of combined stirrups. (#4 bars "[[Image:751.32 reinforcement--4 bar under bearing.gif]]" are not required for Double-Tee Structures.)
<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
|-
'''Users:'''
|&nbsp;||width="550pt"|For epoxy coated reinforcement requirements, see [[751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines#751.5.9.2.2 Epoxy Coated Reinforcement Requirements|EPG 751.5.9.2.2 Epoxy Coated Reinforcement Requirements]]. Details of [[751.13 Expansion Devices#751.13.1.4 Details of Substructure Protection|protective coating and sloping top of beam to drain]] shall be used when below an expansion device.
* Traffic Operations Engineers → Manage signals, coordination, and adaptive timing ([[#909.2.2.3 Traffic Signal Program Management|909.2.2.3 Traffic Signal Program Management]]; [[#909.2.2.4 Traffic Signal Timing and Coordination|909.2.2.4 Traffic Signal Timing and Coordination]]; [[#909.2.2.5 Transit Signal Priority|909.2.2.5 Transit Signal Priority]]).
|-
* Design Engineers → Implement innovative intersections and targeted improvements ([[#909.2.2.1 Targeted Infrastructure Improvements|909.2.2.1 Targeted Infrastructure Improvements]]; [[#909.2.2.2 Innovative Intersection Designs|909.2.2.2 Innovative Intersection Designs]]).
|&nbsp;||width="550pt"|When dimension “B” is required to be greater than 15” to clear piles by 1 ½”, typical when HP14 and CIP14 or larger diameter piles are used, add intermediate longitudinal bar(s) between piles.  The spacing between intermediate bar(s) and full length bars shall not be greater than required by crack control provisions. Ends of intermediate bar(s) shall be hooked.
* TMC Operators → Oversee corridor signal adjustments and incident response ([[#909.2.2.4 Traffic Signal Timing and Coordination|909.2.2.4 Traffic Signal Timing and Coordination]]; [[#909.2.2.6 Arterial Dynamic Shoulder Use|909.2.2.6 Arterial Dynamic Shoulder Use]]).
|}
</div>
 
<br>
{| cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto;"
<div style="margin: auto; width:875px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
|-
'''Policy Coordination''' – Any consideration or application of the following strategies in Missouri should be closely coordinated with MoDOT’s '''Central Office of Highway Safety and Traffic (COHST)''' to ensure consistency with policy, design standards, and operational oversight.
| [[image:751.32.4.1.3.jpg|center|700px]]
</div>
|-
| [[image:751.32.4.1 longitudinal.jpg|center|500px]]
|-
| style="text-align:left;" |
(1) 6” (Max.), add #6 bars as needed.<br>
(2) 9” (Max.), add #6 bars at each face as needed.<br>
(3) Location 2 development length, f'c = 3 ksi:<br>
::20" (uncoated)
::30" (epoxy coated)
 
See [[751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8 Development and Lap Splices|EPG 751.5.9.2.8]] for development and lap splice lengths not given or<br>lengths for scenarios other than those shown. Provide standard hooks if required.
|}
 
=== 751.35.4.1 Wide Flange Beams & Plate Girders ===
 
{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;"
|-
| colspan="4" | [[Image:751.35.4.1_01-2025.jpg|750px]]
|-
| colspan="4" | '''Part Section Near End Bent'''
|-
| colspan="3" | [[Image:751.35.4.1_02-2025.png|800px]] || [[Image:751.35.4.1_03-2025.png|275px]]
|-
| '''Section A-A''' || '''Section B-B''' || '''Section C-C''' || '''Section D-D'''
|-
| [[Image:751.35.4.1_04-2025.png|250px]] || colspan="4" | [[Image:751.35.4.1_05-2025.png|800px]]
|-
| '''Alternate Section A-A''' || '''Alternate Section B-B''' || '''Alternate Section C-C''' || '''Alternate Section D-D'''
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:'''
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">'''Green items'''</font color> are guidance only and shall not be shown plans.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Place all U bars and V pairs parallel to centerline roadway.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Keep 1 1/2" clearance between the piles and the U1 or U2 bars.  
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Keep 1 1/2" clearance between the beams or girders and the U1 or V1 bars.  
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Keep 1 1/2" clearance between the angles of girder chairs and the U2 or U3 bars.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Replace U1 bars with U3 bars at piles under beams or girders.  
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Replace U1 bars with V1 bars at piles between beams or girders.  
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | When dimension “A” is required to be greater than 15” to clear piles by 1 ½”, typical when HP14 and CIP14 or larger diameter piles are used, add intermediate longitudinal<br>bar(s) between piles. The spacing between intermediate bar(s) and full length bars shall not be greater than required by crack control provisions. Ends of intermediate<br>bar(s) shall be hooked.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#G1._Concrete_Bents EPG 751.50 G1 Concrete Bents] for appropriate notes to be placed with details.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(1)</font color> #6-U bar ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders--6-u-bar.gif]]) at 9" centers between barrier curbs. For shallow beams where 22” is not available extend to top of beam minus 1” clear.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(2)</font color> U4 bars ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders--5-u4-bar.gif|13px]]) and #6-U5 bars ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders--6-u-bar.gif]]) spliced with U1 ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders-u1-bar.gif]]) and V1 bars (│). U4 bars shall be same size as U1 bars. Show lap splice on plans as shown. For shallow beams<br>stirrup hooks may be required for U4 bars ( [[image:751.35 shape37S-2024.png|14px]] -Shape 37S) (see Alternate Sections). For shallow beams where 21” is not available extend stirrup hooks to top of beam<br>minus 1” clear.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(3)</font color> U1 bars ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders-u1-bar.gif]]) at 12" centers. Typically #5 bars, except [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.35_Concrete_Pile_Cap_Integral_End_Bents#751.35.2.5_Beam_Reinforcement_Special_Cases special cases]. Replace with pairs of #5-V1 bars (│) at piles. Make sure U1 and V1 bars extend enough to meet<br>lap length requirement across length of diaphragm. For shallow beams stirrup hooks may be required for U1 bars ( [[image:751.35 shape37S-2024.png|14px]] -Shape 37S) and end hooks may be required for V1<br>bars ([[image:751.35.4.1 V1 hook.jpg|8px]]) (see alternate sections). For shallow beams where 21” is not available extend hooks to approach notch minus 1 1/2" clear.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(4)</font color> Stirrups shall clear step by 1 1/2" minimum, if not lengthen step or skew step.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" |<font color="#00B050">(5)</font color> #6-V bars at no more than 9” centers at the end of girders or beams.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" |<font color="#00B050">(6)</font color> #5-U bars (15”H x 24”V) @ about 12" centers placed parallel to centerline roadway. When approach slab haunch is expected to be greater than 18” at the roadway crown<br>at the end of slab, slope the approach slab notch providing 12” of constant approach slab haunch or with SPM or SLE approval greater than 18” approach slab haunch may<br>be used but increase vertical leg length of #5-U bars to ensure 12” minimum embedment. For shallow beams where 12” embedment is not available adjust length of vertical<br>leg and extend to top of beam minus 1” clear.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(7)</font color> With SPM or SLE approval a 24” splice may be used in combination with specifying 2” cover to U bars and V bars if doing so avoids the need for using hooked bars.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(8)</font color> See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.35_Concrete_Pile_Cap_Integral_End_Bents#web_hole_tabel tables] for 1 1/16" round hole spacing for #6-H bars.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(9)</font color> Same number of bars as 1 1/16" round holes in beam or girder.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(10)</font color> Add intermediate longitudinal bar(s) when required for spacing. Keep 3” minimum clearance between the pile and intermediate longitudinal bar(s).
|-
|}
 
=== 751.35.4.2 Prestressed I-Girders, Bulb-Tee Girders and NU-Girders ===
 
{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;"
|-
| colspan="4" | [[Image:751.35.4.2_01-2025.jpg|800px]]
|-
| colspan="4" | '''Part Section Near End Bent'''
|-
| colspan="3" | [[Image:751.35.4.2_02-2025.png|800px]] || [[Image:751.35.4.2_03-2025.png|275px]]
|-
| '''Section A-A''' || '''Section B-B''' || '''Section C-C''' || '''Section D-D'''
|-
| [[Image:751.35.4.2_04-2025.png|250px]] || colspan="4" | [[Image:751.35.4.2_05-2025.png|800px]]
|-
| '''Alternate Section A-A''' || '''Alternate Section B-B''' || '''Alternate Section C-C''' || '''Alternate Section D-D'''
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:'''
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">'''Green items'''</font color> are guidance only and shall not be shown plans.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Place all U bars and V pairs parallel to centerline roadway.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Keep 1 1/2" clearance between the piles and the U1 or U2 bars.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Keep 1 1/2" clearance between the beams or girders and the U1 or V1 bars.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Keep 1 1/2" clearance between the angles of girder chairs and the U2 or U3 bars.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Replace U1 bars with U3 bars at piles under beams or girders.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | Replace U1 bars with V1 bars at piles between beams or girders.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | When dimension “A” is required to be greater than 15” to clear piles by 1 ½”, typical when HP14 and CIP14 or larger diameter piles are used, add intermediate longitudinal<br>bar(s) between piles. The spacing between intermediate bar(s) and full length bars shall not be greater than required by crack control provisions. Ends of intermediate<br>bar(s) shall be hooked.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#G1._Concrete_Bents EPG 751.50 G1 Concrete Bents] for appropriate notes to be placed with details.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(1)</font color> #6-U bar ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders--6-u-bar.gif]]) at 9" centers between barrier curbs. For shallow beams where 22” is not available extend to top of beam minus 1” clear.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(2)</font color> U4 bars ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders--5-u4-bar.gif|13px]]) and #6-U5 bars ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders--6-u-bar.gif]]) spliced with U1 ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders-u1-bar.gif]]) and V1 bars (│). U4 bars shall be same size as U1 bars. Show lap splice on plans as shown. For shallow beams<br>stirrup hooks may be required for U4 bars ( [[image:751.35 shape37S-2024.png|14px]]) (see Alternate Sections). For shallow beams where 21” is not available extend stirrup hooks to top of beam<br>minus 1” clear.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(3)</font color> U1 bars ([[Image:751.35 wide flange and plate girders-u1-bar.gif]]) at 12" centers. Typically #5 bars, except [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.35_Concrete_Pile_Cap_Integral_End_Bents#751.35.2.5_Beam_Reinforcement_Special_Cases special cases]. Replace with pairs of #5-V1 bars (│) at piles. Make sure U1 and V1 bars extend enough to meet<br>lap length requirement across length of diaphragm. For shallow beams stirrup hooks may be required for U1 bars ( [[image:751.35 shape37S-2024.png|14px]]) and end hooks may be required for V1<br>bars ([[image:751.35.4.1 V1 hook.jpg|12px]]) (see alternate sections). For shallow beams where 21” is not available extend hooks to approach notch minus 1 1/2" clear.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(4)</font color> Stirrups shall clear step by 1 1/2" minimum, if not lengthen step or skew step.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" |<font color="#00B050">(5)</font color> #6-V bars at no more than 9” centers at the end of girders or beams.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" |<font color="#00B050">(6)</font color> #5-U bars (15”H x 24”V) @ about 12" centers placed parallel to centerline roadway. When approach slab haunch is expected to be greater than 18” at the roadway crown<br>at the end of slab, slope the approach slab notch providing 12” of constant approach slab haunch or with SPM or SLE approval greater than 18” approach slab haunch may<br>be used but increase vertical leg length of #5-U bars to ensure 12” minimum embedment. For shallow beams where 12” embedment is not available adjust length of vertical<br>leg and extend to top of beam minus 1” clear.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(7)</font color> With SPM or SLE approval a 24” splice may be used in combination with specifying 2” cover to U bars and V bars if doing so avoids the need for using hooked bars.
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(8)</font color> Add intermediate longitudinal bar(s) when required for spacing. Keep 3” minimum clearance between the pile and intermediate longitudinal bar(s).
|-
|}


=== 751.35.4.3 Wing Reinforcement ===
===909.2.2.1 Targeted Infrastructure Improvements===
{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;"
Targeted infrastructure improvements are localized enhancements that address recurring bottlenecks or multimodal safety concerns on arterial corridors. Common treatments include new or extended turn lanes to reduce delay at intersections, access control to improve traffic flow and safety, and bus pullouts to minimize transit-related delays. Pedestrian and bicyclist accommodations such as crosswalk improvements, refuge islands, and protected lanes also support safer and more reliable mobility for all users.
|-
| [[image:751.35.4.3_01-2025.png|650px]] || [[image:751.35.4.3_02-2025.png|300px]]
|-
| '''Elevation Of Wing''' || '''Typical Section Thru Wing'''
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.35.4.3_03-2025.png|700px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''Part Plan (Squared)'''
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.35.4.3_04-2025.png|800px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''Part Plan (Skewed)'''
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | '''Detailing Guidance:'''
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">'''Green items'''</font color> are guidance only and shall not be shown plans.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | Bar marks shown are for these details only. Vary as needed.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | K bars not shown in the Elevation of Wing for clarity. For details of K bars, see [[751.12 Barriers, Railings, Curbs and Fences#751.12.1.4.3 End of Barrier Reinforcement|EPG 751.12.1.4.3 End of Barrier Reinforcement]] for Type B barrier and<br>[[751.12 Barriers, Railings, Curbs and Fences#751.12.1.3.3 End of Barrier Reinforcement|EPG 751.12.1.3.3 End of Barrier Reinforcement]] for Type D and H barriers.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | See [[#751.35.3.3 Prestressed Girder End Bent|EPG 751.35.3.3]] for chamfer detail.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(a)</font color> Use dimension that provides a minimum of 3" center to center spacing between #6 bars placed horizontally and #8 bars placed with grade. See<br>SPM or SLE if spacing at one end exceeds 8 inches due to grade.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(b)</font color> Use construction joint on steel structures only.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(c)</font color> 6 3/8” min and 11 3/8” max. If unable to get dimension to fall within this range using 8-inch centers, then use 6 3/8” and use “@ abt. 8” cts.”
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(d)</font color> Use 66.5” for obtuse corner of bents skewed 55 degrees or greater.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(e)</font color> Use 54.5” for obtuse corner of bents skewed 55 degrees or greater.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(f)</font color> See [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#G1._Concrete_Bents EPG 751.50 G1 Concrete Bents]] for note (G1.7) required for the #6-F bars.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(g)</font color> Use 90 degree standard hook in seismic areas.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | <font color="#00B050">(h)</font color> Adjust as needed if girder web prevents proper placement of bars (i.e., if ALL bars would need to be bent in field according to note G1.7). Rotate leg 90°<br>for box beams. If necessary, the leg may be rotated 90° for other prestressed girder shapes.
|-
|}


===909.2.2.2 Innovative Intersection Designs===
Innovative intersection designs apply alternative layouts to improve safety and efficiency where traditional designs are constrained. Examples include restricted crossing U-turns (RCUTs), median U-turns, and displaced left-turn (continuous flow) intersections, which reduce conflict points and increase throughput. These designs are increasingly considered where right-of-way is limited, traffic volumes are high, or safety issues persist with conventional layouts.


Additional information can be found in [[233.5_Intersection_Alternatives|EPG 233.5 Intersection Alternatives]].


===909.2.2.3 Traffic Signal Program Management===
A comprehensive traffic signal program provides the framework for maintaining effective corridor operations. Program elements include monitoring and evaluating existing signal systems, scheduling recurring retiming efforts, and integrating new technologies over time. A proactive, programmatic approach ensures that signals are managed consistently across jurisdictions, providing reliable performance and minimizing inefficient, piecemeal adjustments.


==== H10a. Cast-In-Place Permanent Barrier====
Procedures for signal operation and maintenance are outlined in [[902.1_General_(MUTCD_Chapter_4A)#902.1.10_Responsibility_for_Operation_and_Maintenance_(MUTCD_Section_4A.10)|902.1.10 Responsibility for Operation and Maintenance (MUTCD Section 4A.10)]].


'''The following notes shall be placed in the General Notes on the elevation sheet.'''
===909.2.2.4 Traffic Signal Timing and Coordination===
Traffic signal timing and coordination strategies are a cost-effective approach to improve arterial operations. By updating signal timing plans and coordinating operations across intersections, agencies can reduce delays and support more predictable travel along corridors. These strategies allow signal operations to reflect current traffic conditions, land use patterns, and system changes, while also providing a foundation for integrating advanced technologies such as adaptive control.


'''(H10.0.1) Use note if slip forming is allowed. Add asterisk to all C-bar leader notes and the one fiberglass bar leader note in the elevation of barrier. '''
<u>Applications:</u>
:'''*''' Slip-formed option only.
* '''Traffic Signal Retiming''' – Updating the timing plans for one signalized intersection or a corridor of intersections based on the latest traffic volumes. Retiming is recommended every few years or after significant changes to transportation systems or land use within a given area.
* '''Traffic Signal Coordination''' – Coordinating traffic signal timing along a corridor to enable a “green wave” of vehicles traveling through a sequence of signals. Coordination optimizes the splits and offsets of signals to allow for smoother, progressive traffic flow.
* '''Adaptive Traffic Signal Control''' – Coordinating traffic signal timing across a network using real-time detector data to accommodate current, prevailing traffic patterns. This allows for dynamic adjustment of timing in response to fluctuating traffic conditions.


'''(H10.0.2) Both methods may be used unless otherwise specified on Bridge Memorandum.'''
===909.2.2.5 Transit Signal Priority===
:Conventional forming <u>or slip</u> forming <u>may</u> <u>shall</u> be used. Saw cut joints may be used with conventional forming.
Transit signal priority (TSP) strategies adjust signal phasing to reduce delay for buses and improve the efficiency of transit operations. TSP can extend green phases and/or provide early green intervals to help transit vehicles move more consistently through intersections. By enhancing the speed and reliability of bus service, TSP supports multimodal goals and encourages greater use of transit along arterial corridors.


'''(H10.1) Exclude underlined part for single span bridges. '''
===909.2.2.6 Arterial Dynamic Shoulder Use===
:Top of barrier shall be built parallel to grade <u>with barrier joints (except at end bents) normal to grade</u>.
Arterial dynamic shoulder use provides additional capacity and improves multimodal efficiency by repurposing existing roadway space under defined conditions. Dynamic shoulder use allows roadway shoulders to operate as travel lanes during peak periods or special events, while maintaining their primary role for emergency access during off-peak times. This strategy can help reduce delays, improve vehicle-throughput, and support multimodal goals in areas where right-of-way is constrained and traditional widening is not feasible. Successful implementation requires clear operational policies, appropriate signing and striping, and coordination with enforcement and transit partners to ensure safety and effectiveness.


'''(H10.2)'''
Although Missouri does not currently implement arterial dynamic shoulder use, the approach may offer targeted benefits in select corridors-especially where traditional widening is not feasible and where shoulders are constructed to full-depth pavement standards.
:All exposed edges of barrier shall have either a 1/2-inch radius or a 3/8-inch bevel, unless otherwise noted.


'''(H10.3)'''
==909.2.3 Freight Operation==
:Payment for all concrete and reinforcement, complete in place, will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for Type <u>A</u> <u>B</u> <u>C</u> <u>D</u> <u>H</u> Barrier per linear foot.
Freight operations strategies address truck mobility, parking, and safety near freight generators such as ports and distribution centers. The following sections outline key strategies for freight operations.


'''(H10.4)'''
<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
:Concrete in barrier shall be Class B-1.
'''Users:'''
* Transportation Planners → Coordinate freight corridors, permitting, and parking strategies ([[#909.2.3.1 Freight Operations Around Ports and Generators|909.2.3.1 Freight Operations Around Ports and Generators]]; [[#909.2.3.2 Truck Parking|909.2.3.2 Truck Parking]]; [[#909.2.3.3 Regional Permitting|909.2.3.3 Regional Permitting]]).
* Traffic Operations Engineers → Oversee technology applications and truck restrictions ([[#909.2.3.1 Freight Operations Around Ports and Generators|909.2.3.1 Freight Operations Around Ports and Generators]]; [[#909.2.3.4 Technology Applications for Freight|909.2.3.4 Technology Applications for Freight]]; [[#909.2.3.5 Connected and Automated Freight Vehicles|909.2.3.5 Connected and Automated Freight Vehicles]]).
</div>
Reference MoDOT’s [https://www.modot.org/2022-state-freight-and-rail-plan-documents 2022 State Freight and Rail Plan Documents] for additional information.


'''(H10.5) Use for Type B, D or H barrier. Include “left” or ”right” and exclude “for each structure” when barriers on each side of the bridge are not the same type. '''
===909.2.3.1 Freight Operations Around Ports and Generators===
:Measurement of barrier is to the nearest linear foot <u>for each structure</u>, measured along the <u>left</u> <u>right</u> outside top of slab from end of <u>wing to end of wing</u> <u>slab to end of slab</u>.
Freight hubs such as ports, intermodal yards, and distribution centers generate concentrated truck activity that can create localized congestion and safety concerns. Targeted operational improvements may include intersection upgrades, dedicated freight lanes, improved signage, or optimized signal timing along key freight corridors. These measures reduce bottlenecks, improve travel time reliability for trucks, and minimize conflicts between freight and passenger vehicles in high-demand areas.


'''(H10.7) Use for Type A or C barriers.'''
===909.2.3.2 Truck Parking===
:Measurement of barrier is to the nearest linear foot, measured along the top of slab at centerline median from end of bridge approach slab to end of bridge approach slab.
Adequate truck parking is essential for driver safety, freight efficiency, and regulatory compliance. Strategies include the development of new truck parking facilities, upgrades to existing rest areas, and the integration of real-time availability systems that help drivers locate spaces. Reservation tools and wayfinding applications can further support efficient parking use and reduce the safety risks associated with unauthorized shoulder or ramp parking.
<div id="(H10.7.1) Notes shall be used on all barrier curbs"></div>
'''(H10.7.1) Use for all barriers (see [[620.5 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3F)#620.5.6 Barrier Wall Delineation|Barrier Wall Delineation]]).'''


:Concrete traffic barrier delineators shall be placed on top of the barrier as shown on Missouri Standard Plans 617.10 and in accordance with Sec 617. <u>Delineators on bridges with two-lane, two-way traffic shall have retroreflective sheeting on both sides.</u> Concrete traffic barrier delineators will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for Type <u>A</u> <u>B</u> <u>C</u> <u>D</u> <u>H</u> Barrier.
===909.2.3.3 Regional Permitting===
Freight often crosses multiple jurisdictions, and inconsistent permitting processes can add delay and administrative burden. Regional permitting strategies streamline requirements by coordinating across state, county, and local agencies. Harmonizing size, weight, and routing approvals enhances efficiency for carriers while reducing redundant processes for agencies, particularly along high-volume freight corridors.


{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:1px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="760px" align="center"
===909.2.3.4 Technology Applications for Freight===
|-
Technology provides powerful tools for managing freight mobility. Examples include routing platforms that help drivers avoid weight-restricted bridges or low-clearance structures, monitoring systems that track freight movement in real time, and automated clearance technologies at weigh stations or ports of entry. Collectively, these applications enhance efficiency, improve safety, and provide data to better manage freight corridors.
|Below is additional guidance for using Note H10.7.1:
|-
|Bridges with two-lane, two-way traffic shall have retroreflective sheeting on both sides of the delineators. For two-lane, one-way traffic, retroreflective sheeting may be on one side only unless crossroad or entranceway traffic is just beyond exit to bridge and wrong way driving is to be discouraged with retroreflective sheeting on both sides of the delineators, (white and red in this case). "Delineators on bridges with two-lane, two-way traffic shall have retroreflective sheeting on both sides" may be modified, as required. For Type A and C barriers, retroreflective sheeting should be used on both sides of the delineators where there is not more than four lanes divided.
|-
|On bridges with more than two lanes, retroreflective sheeting is not required on both sides of the delineators.  The perception of a narrowing roadway at the bridge is of lesser consequence in terms of requiring guidance devices and does not warrant retroreflective sheeting on both sides of the delineators. "Delineators on bridges with two-lane, two-way traffic shall have retroreflective sheeting on both sides" may be removed at the discretion of the design team.
|}


'''(H10.7.2) '''
===909.2.3.5 Connected and Automated Freight Vehicles===
:Joint sealant and backer rods shall be in accordance with Sec 717 for silicone joint sealant for saw cut and formed joints.
The freight industry is a leading sector for testing and deploying connected and automated vehicle (CV/AV) technologies. Applications may include platooning, automated truck-mounted attenuators, or fully automated long-haul freight operations. These technologies have the potential to improve safety, reduce driver fatigue, and increase efficiency in freight corridors. Early deployment efforts require coordination with industry, agencies, and technology providers to ensure infrastructure readiness and to evaluate operational impacts.


'''(H10.7.3) Use note if slip forming is allowed.'''
==909.2.4 Vulnerable Road Users==
:For slip-formed option, both sides of barrier shall have a vertically broomed finish and the top shall have a transversely broomed finish.
Vulnerable road users (VRUs) are individuals who travel without the protection of an enclosed vehicle and therefore face a greater risk of serious injury in a collision. VRUs include pedestrians, roadway workers, individuals using wheelchairs or other personal mobility devices, bicyclists, motorcyclists, and users of electric scooters and other micromobility devices. The following sections outline key strategies to improve safety, access, and comfort for these users within the transportation system.
<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''Users:'''
* Design Engineers → Implement bike lanes, pedestrian facilities, and safety enhancements ([[#909.2.4.1 Safety Enhancements|909.2.4.1 Safety Enhancements]]; [[#909.2.4.2 Pedestrian and Accessibility Facilities|909.2.4.2 Pedestrian and Accessibility Facilities]]; [[#909.2.4.3 Bicycle Lanes and Cycle Tracks|909.2.4.3 Bicycle Lanes and Cycle Tracks]]).
* Transportation Planners → Support multimodal planning and education programs ([[#909.2.4.1 Safety Enhancements|909.2.4.1 Safety Enhancements]]; [[#909.2.4.4 VRU Education and Outreach|909.2.4.4 VRU Education]]).
</div>


'''(H10.7.4) Use for all grade separations except over railroads and county roads.'''
===909.2.4.1 Safety Enhancements===
:Plastic waterstop shall not be used with saw cut joints.
Selective deployment of safety enhancements should be informed by [[:Category:907_Traffic_Safety|EPG Category:907 Traffic Safety]] and tailored to the needs of VRUs. Enhancements may include improved crossings, lighting, signing and pavement markings, speed management strategies, traffic calming measures, work zone protections for roadway workers, and design treatments that reduce conflicts involving motorcyclists and micromobility users.


===909.2.4.2 Pedestrian and Accessibility Facilities===
Sidewalks, shared-use paths, accessible curb ramps, transit stop connections and enhanced or grade-separated crossings should be prioritized where safety risks, accessibility needs, or network gaps are identified. Integrating these facilities in alignment with Complete Streets principles ([[907.10_Complete_Streets|EPG 907.10 Complete Streets]]) helps ensure safe, efficient access for pedestrians and individuals using wheelchairs or other mobility devices.


'''The following three notes shall be placed under section thru barrier.'''
===909.2.4.3 Bicycle Lanes and Cycle Tracks===
Where conditions and community priorities warrant, dedicated bike lanes or protected cycle tracks can significantly enhance comfort and safety for bicyclists and other micromobility users, including users of electric scooters and similar devices. MoDOT’s Complete Streets guidance ([[907.10_Complete_Streets|EPG 907.10 Complete Streets]]) supports integrating these features into designs that serve all users – including VRUs – within roadway corridors.


'''(H10.8)'''
===909.2.4.4 VRU Education and Outreach===
:Use a minimum lap of 2'-6" for #5 horizontal barrier bars.
Support community-informed education and outreach programs that promote safe behaviors among VRUs. Programs may address the needs of pedestrians, bicyclists, micromobility users, motorcyclists, individuals with disabilities, and drivers, and may include collaboration with local schools, community organizations, advocacy groups, employers, transit agencies, and public safety partners.


'''(H10.9) Areas shown are for standard barrier heights and a two percent cross slope. '''
==909.2.5 Transit Operation==
:The cross-sectional area above the slab is <u>*</u> square feet.
Transit operations strategies improve speed, reliability, and accessibility of transit services. The following sections outline key strategies for transit operations.


:{|
<div style="margin-top: 5px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
|*||2.98 for a Type A barrier.  
'''Users:'''
|-
* Transit Agencies → Operate BRT, implement TSP, and manage transit vehicles ([[#909.2.5.1 Transit Signal Priority|909.2.5.1 Transit Signal Priority]]; [[#909.2.5.2 Bus Rapid Transit|909.2.5.2 Bus Rapid Transit]]; [[#909.2.5.3 Transit-Only Lanes|909.2.5.3 Transit-Only Lanes]]; [[#909.2.5.4 Transit Operation Vehicles|909.2.5.4 Transit Operation Vehicles]]).
| ||2.27 for a Type B barrier.  
* Transportation Planners → Plan multimodal centers and support dynamic transit strategies ([[#909.2.5.2 Bus Rapid Transit|909.2.5.2 Bus Rapid Transit]]; [[#909.2.5.3 Transit-Only Lanes|909.2.5.3 Transit-Only Lanes]]; [[#909.2.5.5 Multimodal Transportation Centers|909.2.5.5 Multimodal Transportation Centers]]).
|-
* Traffic Operations Engineers → Support signal priority and corridor treatments ([[#909.2.5.1 Transit Signal Priority|909.2.5.1 Transit Signal Priority]]; [[#909.2.5.2 Bus Rapid Transit|909.2.5.2 Bus Rapid Transit]]; [[#909.2.5.3 Transit-Only Lanes|909.2.5.3 Transit-Only Lanes]]).
| ||4.69 for a Type C barrier.  
</div>
|-
| ||3.52 for a Type D barrier.
===909.2.5.1 Transit Signal Priority===
|-
Transit Signal Priority (TSP) strategies modify traffic signal operations to reduce delay and improve on-time arrivals for buses and other transit vehicles.
| ||3.59 for a Type D barrier used as a median.
|-
| ||2.89 for a Type H barrier
|}


'''(H10.9.1) Add (2) to the dimension for the top of slab to top of the R2 bar. '''
Additional information on TSP is provided in [[#909.2.2.5 Transit Signal Priority|EPG 909.2.2.5 Transit Signal Priority]].
:(2) To top of bar


===909.2.5.2 Bus Rapid Transit===
Bus Rapid Transit (BRT) incorporates a combination of dedicated lanes, intersection treatments, and enhanced stations to provide faster and more reliable bus service. Treatments such as queue jump lanes and high-capacity vehicles further enhance performance. BRT can serve as a cost-effective alternative to rail in high-demand corridors, delivering rapid, frequent, and reliable service with improved passenger amenities.


'''The following three notes shall be used for double-tee structures. '''
===909.2.5.3 Transit-Only Lanes===
Transit-only lanes provide additional capacity and improve multimodal efficiency by repurposing existing roadway space under defined conditions. Transit-only lanes dedicate roadway space to buses, enabling more reliable service and improving schedule adherence in congested corridors. This strategy can help reduce delays, improve person-throughput, and support multimodal goals in areas where right-of-way is constrained and traditional widening is not feasible. Successful implementation requires clear operational policies, appropriate signing and striping, and coordination with enforcement and transit partners to ensure safety and effectiveness.


'''(H10.10)'''
This strategy may offer targeted benefits in select corridors where shoulders are constructed to full-depth pavement standards.
:Coil inserts shall have a concrete ultimate pullout strength of not less than 36,000 pounds in 5000 psi concrete and an ultimate tensile strength of not less than 36,000 pounds.


'''(H10.11)'''
<div style="margin: auto; width:875px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
:Threaded coil rods shall have an ultimate capacity of 36,000 pounds. All coil inserts and threaded coil rods shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 232 (ASTM A153), Class C.  
'''Policy Coordination''' – Any consideration or application of the following strategies in Missouri should be closely coordinated with MoDOT’s '''Central Office of Highway Safety and Traffic (COHST)''' to ensure consistency with policy, design standards, and operational oversight.
</div>


'''(H10.12)'''
===909.2.5.4 Transit Operation Vehicles===
:Payment for furnishing and installing coil inserts and threaded coil rods will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for Type <u>A</u> <u>B</u> <u>C</u> <u>D</u> <u>H</u> Barrier.
Transit vehicle operations may require unique roadway considerations. Streetcars, for example, share corridors with general traffic and necessitate signal coordination and geometric design adjustments for turning movements. Similarly, buses may require accommodations such as bus pullouts, curb extensions, or boarding islands to improve efficiency and passenger safety. These vehicle-specific considerations support smoother operations and minimize conflicts with other modes.


===909.2.5.5 Multimodal Transportation Centers===
Multimodal transportation centers serve as hubs that integrate multiple travel modes, including bus, rail, bike, and pedestrian connections. These facilities improve regional accessibility by consolidating transfers in a single location and providing amenities such as shelters, ticketing, and real-time traveler information.


'''The following two notes, when appropriate, shall be placed under the title of the elevation of barrier. '''
In Missouri, existing park-and-ride facilities present opportunities to serve as future multimodal centers. When thoughtfully designed, these centers encourage greater transit use, strengthen first- and last-mile connections, and elevate the role of transit in supporting regional mobility.


'''(H10.12.1) Dimensions shall be horizontal unless otherwise specified on Bridge Memorandum. '''
='''REVISION REQUEST 4175''' (ON HOLD)=
:Longitudinal dimensions are <u>horizontal</u> <u>arc dimensions</u>.


'''(H10.12.2)'''
===321.2.1.2 Types of Reports===
:Longitudinal dimensions are along top of <u>barrier</u> <u>outside edge of slab</u> parallel to grade.
[[image:321.2.1.2.jpg|right|100px]]
'''1. The soil survey report''' touches on foundations by pointing out possible foundation problems. It also contains basic slope recommendations which affect bridge length, soil types and properties for pavement design, depths to rock and type of rock for determining cut quantities, and cut slope recommendations for soil and rock.  


'''The following two notes shall be placed under the permissible alternate bar shape detail. '''
'''2. The preliminary bridge foundation report,''' which is submitted by the district as an adjunct to the soil survey report, is usually furnished to the Bridge Unit for their guidance in preparing preliminary bridge layouts and to the Materials Engineering Unit for guidance in conducting a more detailed foundation investigation. (Preliminary borings for such reports may be omitted where access problems are especially difficult.)


'''(H10.13) Use R2 for Type D or H barriers, R3 for Type B barrier and M2 for two separate Type D barriers used as a median. Add (4) to the combined #5 bar leader note. Exclude note and associated detail for CIP slabs. '''
'''3. The final foundation investigation report''' will provide the requested properties from Form A of the Bridge Division Request for Soil Properties in accordance with EPG Sections 320, 321, 700 and other applicable sections. The report will also provide seismic properties as requested on Form B. The Bridge Division or District will provide the preliminary structure layout and location of each foundation location. The Geotechnical Section will determine boring locations and sampling frequency based on guidance in, EPG 321.2 Geotechnical Guidelines, and specific site conditions. The Geotechnical Section may make recommendations for specific foundation types if site conditions require special considerations. The intent is to provide the Bridge Division or District with the information needed to develop designs for the foundation types practical for a particular site. Rules of thumb as to what is practical have been developed jointly by the Geotechnical Section and the Bridge Division. These are discussed in the applicable sections within the EPG.
:(4) The <u>R2</u> <u>R3</u> <u>M2</u> bar and #5 bottom transverse slab bar in cantilever (prestressed panels only) combination may be furnished as one bar as shown, at the contractor's option.


'''(H10.14) Use R1 for Type B, D or H barriers. Use M1 for two separate Type D barriers used as a median. Add (3) to the two separated #5 bar leader notes. '''
<br><br>
:(3) The <u>R1</u> <u>M1</u> bar may be separated into two bars as shown, at the contractor's option, only when slip forming is not used. (All dimensions are out to out.)
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


'''(H10.15) Use note if slip forming is allowed. Place under the part elevation of barrier and add (1) to fiberglass bar leader notes in the section thru saw cut joint and part elevation of barrier. '''
=='''701 Drilled Shafts'''==
:(1) Four feet long, centered on joint, slip-formed option only


<div id="Place general notes H10.19,"></div>
Substructure foundations may be designed to transmit loads to foundation strata by concrete columns cast in drilled holes. See [[751.37 Drilled Shafts|EPG 751.37 Drilled Shafts]] for design guidance and additional information.
'''Place general notes H10.19, H10.20 and H10.7.1 on the barrier at end bents sheet with notes H10.19 and H10.20 under the Reinforcing Steel heading. '''


'''(H10.19)'''
This type of foundation is identified in [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Sec 701] of the Standard Specifications as Drilled Shafts. A drilled shaft is generally considered a deep foundation.  


:Minimum clearance to reinforcing steel shall be 1 1/2" except as shown for bars embedded into end bent.
'''Drilled shafts for bridge structures:'''


'''(H10.20) Use for Type B barrier only. Use 2’-4” and K10 bars for barrier ending on wing walls adding K13 bars with two different wing lengths. Will need to add more bars if more than two different wing lengths exist. Use 2’-6” and R6 bars for barrier ending on bridge deck. '''
Drilled shafts for bridge structures shall be constructed with a permanent casing and rock socketed. Requirements for plan reporting of steel casing are given in [[751.37_Drilled_Shafts#751.37.1.3_Casing|EPG 751.37.1.3 Casing]].
:Use a minimum lap of <u>2'-4"</u> <u>2’-6”</u> between K9 and <u>K10 or K13</u> <u>R6</u> bars.  


'''(H10.21) Place note under the K Bar Permissible Alternate Shape detail on the barrier at end bents sheet. Use K1 and K2 for Type B barrier; K9 and K10 for Type D barrier; K3 and K5 for Type H barrier. '''
The shaft portion of a drilled shaft is founded on rock (limestone, dolomite or other suitable material with q<sub>u</sub> ≥ 100 ksf) or weak rock (shale or other suitable material with 5 ksf ≤ q<sub>u</sub> ≤ 100 ksf) with a smaller diameter rock socket drilled into same.  The inspector should carefully study all general specifications and special provisions pertaining to drilled shafts and become familiar with the designer's intent.
:The <u>K1 and K2</u> <u>K9 and K10</u> <u>K3 and K5</u> bar combination may be furnished as one bar as shown, at the contractor's option.


The integrity of the rock socket shall be verified by a foundation inspection hole. This is usually performed after the shaft is drilled. Setting up over a drilled hole can be difficult. The contractor can perform the inspection hole in advance if they submit a procedure that assures the correct location is cored. If the integrity of the cores are questionable the Bridge Division should be contacted to see if the rock socket length should be extended.


Most problems with drilled shafts occur during the concrete pour. The concrete placement requirements in [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Sec 701] should be reviewed carefully.


An anomaly may be detected on a Cross Hole Sonic log test. If, on further investigation, there is a confirmed defect what are some of the steps needed to remediate the defect?
:1. The contractor is responsible for submitting a remediation plan for the repair.
:2. The plan should include as a minimum the following:
::a) The area of deficient material must be clearly defined using coring or other means.
::b) The clean-out process is typically accomplished by flushing the weak material. The access holes needed, water pressure used, and disposal of the soils should be addressed.
::c) Confirmation of the deficient material removal must be made. This can be accomplished by camera inspection, CSL, or by other means acceptable to the engineer.
::d) The grouting plan should include: grouting type, grout mix design including w/c ratio, complete pressure grouting timeline. The grouting timeline should include placement times, pressure, volume, refusal criteria.
:3. A final confirmation of the effectiveness of the grouting should be made. This is typically accomplished by coring. The number of cores required, and depth shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to coring. If all the CSL tubes are still usable, a final CSL can be made for acceptance. The engineer of record for the design should be consulted for final acceptance.


'''Question: Per [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Sec 701.4.17.2.1 Installation of Pipes], “The pipes shall be filled with water and plugged or capped before shaft concrete is poured.” Why is this necessary?'''


=== K1. General ===
The water in the tube helps to regulate the temperature of the CSL tube. Without the water, the tube will heat up from the hydrating concrete and cause de-bonding. This de-bonding from the concrete will cause erroneous CSL readings and show up as an anomaly. Typically, de-bonding is more prevalent in the upper 6 ft. of the tube. The water also serves a second purpose: it helps the energy transmission from the wall of the tube to the probes and vice versa.


'''(K1.1) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Major Road) and omit underlined part for concrete sub-class Bridge Approach Slab (Minor Road).'''
'''Drilled shafts for non-bridge structures:'''
:All concrete for the bridge approach slab <u>and sleeper slab</u> shall be in accordance with Sec 503 (f'<sub>c</sub> = 4,000 psi).


'''(K1.2)'''
Drilled shafts for non-bridge structures are typically designed and constructed without casing. Permanent casing is not allowed except for special designs.
:All joint filler shall be in accordance with Sec 1057 for preformed fiber expansion joint filler, except as noted.
The shafts may be embedded into rock when soil overburden depth is inadequate for properly anchoring the foundation. If overburden soils are unstable and conduit access is not required in the perimeter of the shaft, temporary casing may be used with an oversized shaft to allow excavation into rock at the required diameter.


'''(K1.3) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Major Road) and omit underlined part for concrete sub-class Bridge Approach Slab (Minor Road).'''
<br><br>
:The reinforcing steel in the bridge approach slab <u>and the sleeper slab</u> shall be epoxy coated Grade 60 with F<sub>y</sub> = 60,000 psi.
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


'''(K1.4)'''
===751.1.2.20 Substructure Type===
:Minimum clearance to reinforcing steel shall be 1 1/2", unless otherwise shown.
<div id="(K1.5.1)"></div>


'''(K1.5.1) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Major Road).'''
Once the signed Bridge Memo and the Borings are received, the entire layout folder should be given to the Preliminary Detailer (requested by SPM, assigned by Structural Resource Manager). The Preliminary Detailer will copy the appropriate MicroStation drawings into their own directory. (Do not rename files) Consultants contact Structural Liaison Engineer. The Preliminary Detailer will then draw the proposed bridge on the plat and profile sheets. The bridge should also be drawn on the contracted profile for a perspective of the profile grade relative to the ground line for drainage considerations.  The Preliminary Detailer will also generate a draft Design Layout Sheet and then return the layout folder to the Preliminary Designer for review.
:The reinforcing steel in the bridge approach slab and the sleeper slab shall be continuous. The transverse reinforcing steel may be made continuous by providing a minimum lap splice of 24 inches for #5 bars and 40 inches for #6 bars, or by mechanical bar splice.


'''(K1.5.2) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Minor Road).'''
The Preliminary Designer will then choose the substructure types for each of the bents. Pile cap bents without concrete encasement are less expensive than column bents but they should not be used at the following locations:
:The reinforcing steel in the bridge approach slab shall be continuous. The transverse reinforcing steel may be made continuous by providing a minimum lap splice of 26 inches for #4 bars, or by mechanical bar splice.
* Where drift has been identified as a problem 
* Where the height of the unbraced piling is excessive and kl/r exceeds 120 (kl/r<120 is generally preferred) (take scour into account)  
* Where the bent is adjacent to traffic (grade separations)


'''(K1.6) Use underline portion when mechanical bar splices are required due to staged construction. '''
Encased pile cap bents may be considered if economical.  Embed concrete encasement 2 ft. (minimum) below the top of the lowest finished groundline elevation, unless a greater embedment is required for bridge scour.  Greater embedment up to 5 or 6 ft. may be considered in situations where anticipated ground line elevation can fluctuate more severely. (Be sure to account for excavation quantities for deeper embedment.) Provision for encasing piles may be considered at the following locations:
:Mechanical bar splices shall be in accordance with Sec 710. <u>(Estimated ____ splices per slab) </u>
* Where drift is a concern and protection is required
* Where larger radius of gyration is necessary and therefore improved buckling resistance for locations where the exposed unbraced column length is large
* Not exclusively where the piles at the pile/wall interface may experience wet/dry cycles and/or excessive periods of ground moisture


'''(K1.7)'''
<div id="top of permanent casing elevation"></div>
:<math>\, *</math> Seal joint between vertical face of approach slab and wing with sealant in accordance with Sec 717 for silicone joint sealant for saw cut and formed joints.
For column bents, an economic analysis should be performed to compare drilled shafts to footings. Footings are not recommended for stream crossings where scour potential is identified. For grade separations, assume the top of drilled shaft casing is located at least one foot below the ground line. For shallow rock conditions, consideration should also be given to eliminating the cased portion of the shaft and placing the column directly over an oversized rock socket. Top of drilled shaft casing for stream crossings should consider the following criteria, and with SPM or SLE approval, select the appropriate elevation to balance risk for the anticipated conditions at time of construction:
* 10-year flood elevation
* 1 foot above ordinary high water elevation
* Elevation of nearest overbank
* 3 feet above low water elevation


'''(K1.11)'''
End Bents are usually pile cap bents; however, if quality rock is abundant at or just below the bottom of beam elevation, a stub end bent on spread footings may be used. If you have any doubt about the suitability and uniformity of the rock, you can still use a pile cap end bent.  Just include prebore to get a minimum of 10 ft. of piling.  If you have concerns about temperature movements, you can require that the prebore holes be oversized to allow for this movement.
:The contractor shall pour and satisfactorily finish the <u>bridge</u> <u>semi-deep</u> slab before placing the bridge approach slab.


'''(K1.12)'''
For any pile cap bents, where steel piles are to be placed near a fluctuating water line or near a ground line where aggressive soil conditions exist or anticipated to exist in the future, corrosion can result in substantial material loss in pile sections over time, either slowly or rapidly. Galvanized steel piling is required for all new pile cap bents to be used as a deterrent to both accelerated and incidental pile corrosion as commonly seen in the field. Further, conditions like known in corrosive soils, some stream crossings with known history of effects on steel piles and grounds subject to stray currents, these conditions should affect the decision of whether pile cap bents can be effectively utilized. The potential effects of corrosion and the potential deterioration from environmental conditions should always be considered in the determination and selection of the steel pile type and steel pile cross-section (size of HP pile or casing thickness), and in considering the long-term durability of the pile type in service.  
:Longitudinal construction joints in approach slab <u>and sleeper slab</u> shall be aligned with longitudinal construction joints in <u>bridge</u> <u>semi-deep</u> slab.


'''(K1.13) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Major Road)'''
Once the substructure type has been determined, re-examine your Preliminary Cost Estimate and notify the district if it needs to be adjusted.
:Payment for furnishing all materials, labor and excavation necessary to construct the approach slab, including the timber header, sleeper slab, underdrain, Type 5 aggregate base, joint filler and all other appurtenances and incidental work as shown on this sheet, complete in place, will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for Bridge Approach Slab (Major Road) per square yard.


'''(K1.14a) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Minor) – Concrete Slab Only'''
'''Galvanized Steel Piles'''
:Payment for furnishing all materials, labor and excavation necessary to construct the concrete bridge approach slab, including the timber header, underdrain, Type 5 aggregate base, joint filler and all other appurtenances and incidental work as shown on this sheet, complete in place, will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for Bridge Approach Slab (Minor) per square yard.


'''(K1.14b) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Minor) – Asphalt Slab Only'''
Galvanizing shall be required for all steel piles. Utilizing galvanized steel piles and pile bracing members shall be in addition to the requirements of [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction#page=13 Standard Specifications Sec 702] except that protective coatings specified in Sec 702 will not be required for galvanized piles or galvanized bracing members.  
:Payment for furnishing all materials, labor and excavation necessary to construct the asphalt bridge approach slab, including tack, curb and Type 5 aggregate base within the pay limits shown, complete in place, will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for Bridge Approach Slab (Minor) per square yard.  


'''(K1.15) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Major Road) and Bridge Approach Slab (Minor Road) – Concrete Slab Only'''
Where galvanized steel piling is expected to be exposed to <u>severe</u> corrosive conditions, consideration can be given to increased steel pile thickness or consideration of a reduced loaded steel area for bearing, or conditions mitigated to prevent long term corrosivity risk . This equally applies to the potential corrosion and early deterioration of permanent steel casing used for drilled shafts though they are not required to be galvanized. For all cases, further consideration beyond normal practice should be given to investigating corrosion protection, rate of corrosion as it relates to steel thickness design and expected service life including galvanizing losses, corrosion mitigation or different substructure support in order to meet a 75 year or longer design life. For additional information refer to LRFD 10.7.5 and 10.8.1.5. Consult with the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer to determine options and strategy for implementation.  
:For concrete approach pavement details, see roadway plans.


'''(K1.16) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Major Road)'''
'''All Bridge and Retaining Wall Piles (For Example, abutment piles, wing wall piles, intermediate pile cap bent piles and pile cap footing piles)'''
:See Missouri Standard Plan 609.00 for details of Type A curb.


'''(K1.17) Use for Bridge Approach Slab (Minor Road) – Asphalt Slab Only'''
All surfaces of piles shall be galvanized to a minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) or its full length based on the following guidance. The minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) shall be estimated in preliminary design and finalized in final design. The minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) or full length will be shown on the design layout.
:See Missouri Standard Plan 609.00 for details of Type S curb.  


'''(K1.18)'''
Guidance for determining minimum galvanized penetration (elevation):
:With the approval of the engineer, the contractor may crown the bottom of the approach slab to match the crown of the roadway surface.


'''(K1.19) <font color="purple">[MS Cell]</font color="purple"> Use boxed note for Bridge Approach Slab (Minor Road)'''
The designer shall establish the limits of galvanized structural steel pile (i.e., HP pile and CIP pile).  All exposed pile plus any required length below ground shall be galvanized. Based on required galvanized pile length determine and show Minimum Galvanized Penetration (Elevation) or Full Length on the Design Layout and on the plans.


{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:1px solid #000000; background:#ffffff" text-align:center; font-size: 95%; width="380px" align="center"
When glacial material or other hard material is identified in the geotechnical report discuss with SPM and consider galvanizing full length of pile to avoid the scenario where friction pile may potentially be cut-off once the geotechnical capacity is reached but the depth for galvanization is inadequate.
|-
|colspan="2"|MoDOT Construction personnel will indicate the bridge approach slab used for this structure:
|-
|width="45"| ||<BIG>□</BIG> Concrete Bridge Approach Slab
|-
|width="45"| ||<BIG>□</BIG> Asphalt Bridge Approach Slab
|}
 
'''(K1.20)'''
:Drain pipe may be either 6" diameter corrugated metallic-coated pipe underdrain, 4" diameter corrugated polyvinyl chloride (PVC) drain pipe, or 4" diameter corrugated polyethylene (PE) drain pipe.
 
 
<!--
[[Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines]]
-->
 
 
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4030'''=
 
<!-- Only put this at the beginning of 620.5 -->
<!-- Only put this at the beginning of 620.5 -->
 
<div style="float: right; margin-top: 5px; margin-left: 15px; width:150px; font-size: 95%; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''<u><center>Standard Plan</center></u>'''
<center>[https://www.modot.org/media/51221 903.00]</center>
</div>
 
 
==620.5.4 Delineator Placement and Spacing (MUTCD Section 3F.04)==
 
'''Guidance.''' Delineators should be mounted on suitable supports at a mount height, measured vertically from the bottom of the lowest retroreflective device to the elevation of the near edge of the roadway,  of approximately 4 ft., see [https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Standard Plans 903.00].
 
'''Option.'''  When mounted on the face of or on top of guardrails or other longitudinal barriers, delineators may be mounted at a lower elevation than the normal delineator height recommended in the preceding paragraph.
 
Delineators should be placed 2 to 8 ft. outside the outer edge of the shoulder, or if appropriate, in line with the roadside barrier that is 8 ft.  or less outside the outer edge of the shoulder.
 
Delineators should be placed at a constant distance from the edge of the roadway, except that where an obstruction intrudes into the space between the pavement edge and the extension of the line of the delineators. The delineators should be transitioned to be in line with or inside the innermost edge of the obstruction.  If the obstruction is a guardrail or other longitudinal barrier, the delineators should be transitioned to be just behind, directly above (in line with), or on the innermost edge of the guardrail or longitudinal barrier. Channel post mounted delineators should not be installed behind guardrail if guardrail delineation is present.
 
Delineators should be spaced 200 ft. to 530 ft. apart on mainline tangent sections.  Delineators should be spaced 100 ft. apart on ramp tangent sections.
 
'''Support.''' Examples of delineator installations are shown in [[#Fig. 620.6.4.1|Fig. 620.5.4.1, Examples of Delineator Placement]].
 
'''Option.''' When uniform spacing is interrupted by such features as driveways and intersections, delineators which would ordinarily be located within the features may be relocated in either direction for a distance not exceeding one quarter of the uniform spacing.  Delineators still falling within such features may be eliminated.
 
Delineators may be transitioned in advance of a lane transition or obstruction as a guide for oncoming traffic.
 
'''Guidance.''' The spacing of delineators should be adjusted on approaches to and throughout horizontal curves so that several delineators are always simultaneously visible to the road user. The approximate spacing is shown in the Approximate Spacing for Delineators on Horizontal Curves Table.
 
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center" align="center"
|+ '''Approximate Spacing for Delineators on Horizontal Curves'''
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Radius of Curve, R ft. ||style="background:#BEBEBE"|Approximate Spacing on Curve, S ft.
|-
| 50  || 20
|-
| 115  || 25 
|-
| 180  || 35 
|-
| 250  || 40 
|-
| 300 || 50 
|-
| 400  || 55 
|-
| 500  || 65 
|-
| 600  || 70 
|-
| 700  || 75 
|-
| 800  || 80 
|-
| 900  || 85 
|-
| 1,000  || 90 
|-
| colspan="2" | Distances were rounded to the nearest 5 ft.
|}


<div id="Required Pile Length"></div>
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
| Spacing for specific radii may be interpolated from table.  The minimum spacing should be 20 feet. The spacing on curves should not exceed 300 feet. In advance of or beyond a curve, and proceeding away from the end of the curve, the spacing of the first delineator is 2S, the second 3S, and the third 6S but not to exceed 300 feet. S refers to the delineator spacing for specific radii computed from the formula <math>S=3\sqrt{R-50}</math> (Formula applies to measurements in feet only).
!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="150"| !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Required Pile<br/>Galvanizing<br/>For Nonscour!!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="200"|Required Pile<br/>Galvanizing<br/>For Channel Scour !!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="200"|Required Pile<br/>Galvanizing<br/>For Channel Migration
|-
|}
 
<div id="Fig. 620.6.4.1"></div>
[[Image:620.6.4.1 3F1.jpg|thumb|center|700px|<center>'''Fig. 620.5.4.1, Examples of Delineator Placement (MUTCD 3F-1)'''</center>]]
 
<div id="Fig. 620.6.4.2"></div>
[[Image:620.6.4.2.jpg|thumb|center|700px|<center>'''Fig. 620.5.4.2, Installation of Delineators on Public Side Roads and Private Entrances'''</center>]]
 
 
 
 
==620.5.5 Guardrail Delineation==
[[image:620.4.5.jpg|right|85px]]
 
'''Standard.''' All guardrail shall be delineated in accordance with [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Section 606.10.2.3 of the Standard Specifications]. The design of the guardrail delineators shall be in accordance with [https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Standard Plans 903.00] and [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Standard Specification Sec 1065]. The color of the retroreflective sheeting used shall match the color of the adjacent edgeline. If no edgeline is present, white shall be used on the right side facing approaching traffic.
 
On two-lane roads with two-way traffic the guardrail shall be delineated with white retroreflecitve sheeting on both sides of the delineator, including at bridge approaches.
 
'''Standard.''' If guardrail is present at off ramps, the back side of the guardrail delineator shall be red retroreflective sheeting. The red sheeting is used on the back side of guardrail delineators from the crossroad to the start of the deceleration lane on the main line.
 
'''Option.''' The use of the red sheeting on the back side of guardrail delineators may be used wherever there is a need to discourage wrong way driving.
 
 
 
 
==620.5.6 Barrier Wall Delineation==
'''Standard.''' Permanent barrier walls and bridge barrier walls shall be delineated in accordance with [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=9 Section 617.30 of the Standard Specifications]. The design of barrier wall delineators shall be in accordance with [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.00] and [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=14 Standard Specification Sec 1065]. The color of the barrier delineators shall match the color of the adjacent edgeline.
 
'''Guidance.''' Where there is traffic on both sides of a barrier wall, a two sided delineator with retroreflective sheeting on both sides, should be used. On two-lane roads the bridge barrier walls should be delineated with white retroreflective sheeting on both sides of the delineator.
 
'''Standard.''' If a barrier wall is present at off ramps, the back side of the barrier wall  delineator shall be red retroreflective sheeting. The red sheeting is used on the back side of barrier wall delineators from the crossroad to the start of the deceleration lane on the main line.
 
'''Option.''' The use of the red sheeting on the back side of barrier wall delineators may be used wherever there is a need to discourage wrong way driving. 
 
<!-- [[Category:620 Pavement Marking|620.05]] -->
 
 
 
 
===903.2.25.4 Quantity Computations===
'''Standard.''' Signs and posts will each be paid for individually. This includes emergency reference markers and object markers. Combined unit prices for sign and support combinations have been discontinued. All signs including stop signs, object markers, emergency reference markers and signal signs shall be totaled on [https://www.modot.org/media/16703 Form D-30] in four categories: Flat Sheet (FS), Flat Sheet Fluorescent (FSF), Structural (ST) and Structural Fluorescent. Structural signs’ width and height are designed to the nearest foot. Each standard, non-standard or special sign shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 sq. ft., subtotaled to the nearest 0.1 sq. ft., and final pay total should be to the nearest 1.0 sq. ft.
 
All post quantities shall be calculated and totaled on [https://www.modot.org/media/16702 Form D-29]. All post lengths shall be calculated in increments of 0.25 ft. including the length that extends into the concrete footing or ground as shown on the standard plans. All U-channel post lengths shall include the full length of both pieces when overlaps are required. The post length for wide flange and pipe posts shall be multiplied by the pounds per foot (lb/ft) factor, as shown in the standard plans; each sign's posts are subtotaled to the nearest pound; all sign posts are subtotaled; and the final pay totals are shown to the nearest 10 pounds. All U-channel, wood and perforated square steel tube post length quantities shall be totaled and rounded to the nearest foot. For perforated square steel tube posts, an additional pay item shall be included for the anchor sleeve which is paid for by the linear foot for each post used (and may also include a soil plate). See the Post and Anchor Data Table in Standard Plan 903.03 to select the necessary anchor size. Omni-Directional anchors may be used for installation in weak or loose soil conditions.
 
Concrete for sign support structures shall be totaled on Form D-29. Concrete for overhead structure foundations shall be bolted down. Concrete for all post-mounted sign foundations shall be embedded. Bolted down and embedded quantities shall be calculated for each sign to the nearest 0.01 cubic yard, subtotaled to the nearest 0.01 cubic yard and a final pay total is shown to the nearest 0.1 cubic yard.
 
Cantilever and butterfly tubular support trusses shall have standard pay items. Span tubular trusses shall require special pay items. Information in the description shall include span length, truss number and span design type. Structure pay items shall include costs for all labor and materials associated with the structure, from the bottom of the base plate up, on up, as a lump sum item. Each span structure shall have a separate pay item. Structure data shall be provided on [https://www.modot.org/media/16707 Form D-34].
 
All box trusses shall require a special pay item for each truss. All pay item descriptions shall include span length and truss number. Truss pay items shall include costs for all labor and materials associated with the truss, from the bottom of the base plate up, as a lump sum item. Each box truss, regardless of type, shall have a separate pay item.
 
See [https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Standard Plan 903.00] for payment of delineators. Delineators shall be paid for per each on Form D-29, and include installation, bolts, post and sign.
 
Perforated Square Steel Tube Post Breakaway assemblies shall be totaled on Form D-29. Breakaway assemblies are incidental for pipe and structural steel posts.
 
Backing bar lengths and weights shall be shown on Form D-29, and are totaled with the pay item for structural steel posts. No weight deductions shall be made for punched or drilled holes. If no structural steel posts are used on a project, backing bar weights shall be added to pipe post weights.
 
Signal Sign Mounting Hardware shall be paid for per each on Form D-37A separate from signal signs, which will be paid for by square feet. Signal Sign Hardware will include all mounting hardware necessary to install one sign on the mast arm.
 
Special pay items shall not be included for items considered to be small amounts of work such as: strapping signs to lighting or signal posts or truss columns; covering inappropriate legends; "EXIT ONLY" panels on new signs; any symbol, arrow, shield or legend on new guide signs; hinge plates; aluminum wide flange posts for connecting service signs and exit number panels to structural guide signs; etc. No additional payment shall be made for hardware. Other than the above, it shall be left to the designer to decide which items require direct pay.
 
'''Option.''' Special pay items for signing may be required. Some examples of special work include: modifying legends, relocating existing signs to new posts, temporary ground mounting guide signs, bridge mounted support brackets, truss painting, pedestal repair, etc. It is left to the designer to decide which items require special pay items.
 
'''Support.''' Most jobs include the removal of existing signs and/or trusses. All removals are listed with other roadway Removal of Improvements. It is preferred to list the type of truss to be removed, number of pedestals, posts, footings and a rough estimate of sign area. Consult the District Traffic Engineer or District Constructions and Materials Engineer about which removals to salvage and where the contractor should deliver the salvaged materials. Items to be salvaged and delivery of these items are mentioned in the job special provisions and this work is paid for under Removal of Improvements.
 
 
 
<!-- [[Category:903 Highway Signing|903.02]] -->
 
==903.17.1 Delineators==
'''Support.''' Refer to [https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Standard Plan 903.00] for delineator placement and use. Refer to [[620.5 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3F)|EPG 620.5]] for more information on delineators.
 
Delineators are placed on all divided highways, expressways, non-interstate freeways and interchanges.  It is not necessary to spot each delineator on the sign location plan, unless the geometrics are unusual, and placement is not readily apparent when referencing the standard plans.  Totals are estimated and shown on [https://www.modot.org/d-sheets Form D-29].
 
 
 
 
==903.17.5 Object Markers for Ends of Roadways ([https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/ MUTCD] Section 2C.66)==
[[image:903.18.5 OM4-1.jpg|center|80px|thumb|<center>'''OM4-3'''</center>]]
 
'''Support.''' The Type 4 object marker is used to warn and alert road users of the end of a roadway in other than construction or maintenance areas.
 
'''Standard.''' If object markers are used to mark the end of a roadway, four Type 4 object marker shall be used. See [https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Standard Plan 903.00] for installation details.
 
'''Option.''' The Type 4 object marker may be used in instances where there are no alternate vehicular paths.
 
'''Standard.''' The minimum mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of a Type 4 object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be 4 feet.
 
'''Guidance.''' Appropriate advance warning signs should be used.
 
 
<!-- [[Category:903 Highway Signing]] -->
 
 
 
 
===1044.2.1 Mile and Object Marker, and Delineator Posts===
The required shape, length, weight (mass) and hole punching diagram for mile marker and delineator posts may be found on [https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Standard Plan 903.00]. The inspector should be aware that minimum and maximum weights (masses) and shape dimensions found on the Standard Plan are absolute and no additional tolerance is allowed. The specified weight (mass) of these posts is before galvanizing and before fabrication. Therefore, if the posts are weighed after fabrication and galvanizing and the weight (mass) per linear ft. (meter) is found to be at the specified limit or slightly out, the weight (mass) of the steel in the post will have to be calculated by adding the theoretical weight (mass) of the steel punched out to form the holes and deducting the theoretical weight of the galvanized coating. An [[:category: 1044 Posts for Markers and Delineators#1044.3Calculations| example calculation]] is available.
 
Field determination of weight (mass) of coating is to be made. The magnetic gauge is to be operated and calibrated in accordance with ASTM E376. A single-spot test is to be comprised of five readings of the magnetic gauge taken in a small area and averaged to obtain a single test result.  Three such areas should be tested, one area near each end and one near the center. This would yield three single-spot test results for that specimen. Average the three test results to obtain the average coating weight (mass) for that specimen. Average all test results from all specimens to obtain the average coating weight (mass) to be reported. The minimum result would be the lowest average coating weight (mass) found on any one specimen. Material may be accepted or rejected for galvanized coating on the basis of magnetic gauge results. If a test result fails to comply with the specifications, that lot should be re-sampled at double the original rate. If any of the re-samples fail to comply with the specifications, that lot is to be rejected. The contractor or supplier is to be given the option of sampling for Laboratory testing if the magnetic gauge test results are within minus 15 percent of the specified coating weight (mass).
 
 
 
 
===1044.5.1.2 Physical Tests===
Dimensions, shape, mass, length, and hole punching shall be measured for conformance to [https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Standard Plan 903.00]. To determine the mass per linear foot (linear meter) of a galvanized steel post after fabrication, refer to [[:Category:1044 Posts for Markers and Delineators#1044.3 Calculations|1044.3 Calculations]]. Test results shall be recorded through AWP.
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4033'''=
 
====751.5.9.2.5 Spacing Limits ====
Reinforcement spacing shall be in accordance with LRFD 5.10.3, unless modified by the following criteria or elsewhere shown in the EPG.
 
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: auto; text-align: left"
|+
! colspan="2" | Minimum Spacing - Moment Reinforcement
|-
| Preferred Min. - Footings || 6" centers
|-
| Preferred Min. - Slabs, Culvert Walls and Retaining Walls || 6" centers
|-
| Absolute Min. - Slabs, Culvert Walls and Retaining Walls || 5” centers
|-
| Preferred Min. - All Other || 4” centers
|-
| Absolute Min. || 2 1/2” clear
|-
! colspan="2" | Maximum Spacing - Moment Reinforcement
|-
| Absolute Max. - Slabs || 1.5(slab thickness)
|-
| Absolute Max. - All Other || 18"
|-
! colspan="2" | Minimum Spacing - Shear Reinforcement
|-
| Absolute Min. - Substructure Beams (single stirrups) || 5" centers
|-
| Absolute Min. - Substructure Beams (double Stirrups) || 6" centers
|-
| Absolute Min. - Prestressed Slab Beams, Box Beams and I Girders || 5" centers
|-
! colspan="2" | Maximum Spacing - Shear Reinforcement
|-
| Absolute Max. - Substructure Beams || 12" centers
|-
| Absolute Max. - Prestressed Slab Beams, Box Beams and I Girders || Refer to [[751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders|EPG 751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders]]
|-
! colspan="2" | Minimum Spacing - Longitudinal Compression Reinforcement (Include 1/2-inch buffer for mechanical bar splices)
|-
| Absolute Min. || 4 1/2" centers (5" centers)
|-
| Absolute Min. - Cols. (thru #10) || 2" clear (2 1/2" clear)
|-
| Absolute Min. - Cols. (#11, #14) || 2 1/2" clear (3" clear)
|-
| Absolute Min. - Cols (#18) || 3 1/2” clear (4" clear)
|-
| colspan="2" | For Drilled Shafts and Rock Sockets, see [[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design|EPG 751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design]].
|-
! colspan="2" | Minimum Pitch - Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
|-
| For Columns, Drilled Shafts, Rock Sockets || See [[751.31_Open_Concrete_Intermediate_Bents#751.31.3.2_Column|EPG 751.31.3.2 Column]]
|-
! colspan="2" | Minimum Spacing- Ties (Transverse) Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
|-
|-
| For Columns || See [[751.31_Open_Concrete_Intermediate_Bents#751.31.3.2_Column|EPG 751.31.3.2 Column]]
|align="center"|Estimated Pile Length ≤ 50 feet||align="center"|Full Length of Pile||align="center"| Full Length of Pile||align="center"| Full Length of Pile
|-
|-
| For Drilled Shafts and Rock Sockets, see [[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design|EPG 751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design]]. || 6” centers for #4 bars
|align="center"|Estimated Pile Length > 50 feet ||align="center"|20 feet (in ground)<sup>'''1'''</sup> ||align="center"| 20 feet (in ground)<sup>'''1'''</sup>, but not less than 5 feet below max. scour depth.||align="center"| 20 feet (in ground)<sup>'''1'''</sup>, but not less than 5 feet below stream bed elev.
|-
|-
! colspan="2" | Maximum Spacing - Longitudinal Compression Reinforcement
|colspan="4"|<sup>'''1'''</sup>  “In ground” is measured from finished ground line on intermediate bents, and bottom of beam cap for abutments.
|-
| colspan="2" | Absolute Max. - the minimum number of longitudinal reinforcing bars shall be six for circular members and four for bars in a rectangular arrangement. For other requirements, see LRFD
|-
! colspan="2" | Maximum Pitch - Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
|-
| Absolute Max. - Spirals || 6” pitch
|-
! colspan="2" | Maximum Spacing - Ties (Transverse) Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
|-
| Absolute Max. - Ties || 12" centers
|-
! colspan="2" | Minimum & Maximum Pitch- Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Seismic)
|-
| colspan="2" | See [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2_LRFD_Seismic_Details|EPG 751.9.1.2 LRFD Seismic Details]]
|}
|}
<div id="For retaining walls supported"></div>
For retaining walls supported on piles, the minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) for piles shall be “Full Length of Pile” for estimated pile length up to 50 feet and 15 feet below bottom of wall for estimated pile length greater than 50 feet.


For bridge end bents on piles with embankments supported by MSE walls, the minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) for piles shall be “Full Length of Pile” for estimated pile length up to 50 feet and 15 feet below top of leveling pad for estimated pile length greater than 50 feet.


'''Temporary Bridge Piles'''


Protective coatings are not required in accordance with [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction#page=13 Sec 718]. Galvanized pile is not required. All HP piles driven to rock shall require pile point reinforcement.


<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


====751.5.9.2.6 Cover Limits ====
===751.1.2.24 Drilled Shafts===
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: auto; text-align: left"
|+
! colspan="2" | Situation !! Minimum Cover
|-
| colspan="3" | Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth:
|-
| width=50 | || - primary reinforcement  || 3"
|-
| || - stirrups, ties, spirals || 2 1/2"
|-
| colspan="3" | Conc. exposed to earth or weather:
|-
| || - primary reinforcement || 2"
|-
| || - stirrups, ties, spirals || 1 1/2"
|-
| colspan="3" | Conc. slabs which have no positive corrosion protection:
|-
| || - top reinforcement || 3" *
|-
| || - bottom reinforcement || 1"
|-
| colspan="3" | Conc. not exposed to weather or in contact with ground:
|-
| || - primary reinforcement (thru #11) || 1 1/2"
|-
| || - stirrups, ties, spirals || 1"
|-
| colspan="2" | Conc. piles cast against or permanently exposed to earth || 2"
|-
| colspan="3" | '''*''' Absolute minimum cover shall be 2½ inches by LRFD 5.12.3. <br>The minimum cover for stirrup and tie steel shall be 1½ inches unless otherwise specified. <br>For minimum cover for drilled shafts and rock sockets, see [[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design|EPG 751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design]].
|}


Drilled shafts are to be used when their cost is comparable to that of large cofferdams and footings. Other examples include when there are subsurface items to avoid (culverts, utilities, etc.) or when there are extremely high soil pressures due to slope failures. 


Drilled shafts shall be constructed with a permanent casing and rock socketed.


The Final Foundation Investigation Report (or geotechnical report) for drilled shafts should supply you with the anticipated tip of casing, nominal tip resistance, nominal tip resistance factor, nominal side resistance, nominal side resistance factor as well as the recommended elevations for which the resistance values are applicable.


===751.9.1.2 LRFD Seismic Details===
The Design Layout Sheet should include the following information:
* Top of Drilled Shaft Elevation
* Anticipated Tip of Casing Elevation
* Anticipated Top of Sound Rock Elevation


====751.9.1.2.1 Seismic Details for Column Supported on Footing====
{|border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center"
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: auto; text-align: center"
|- style="width: 100px;"
|+ '''Column shear reinforcement requirements'''
| style="width: 100px;" | Bent || style="width: 100px;" | Elevation || style="width: 175px;" | Nominal Axial Compressive Resistance<br>(Side Resistance) (ksf) || style="width: 175px;" | Side Resistance Factor for<br>Strength Limit State || style="width: 175px;" | Nominal Axial Compressive Resistance<br>(Tip Resistance) (ksf) || style="width: 175px;" | Tip Resistance Factors for<br>Strength Limit States
|+  <font color=white>.</font color>
! colspan="12" style="width:925px" | Seismic Design Category, SDC B
|-
! Shear<br>Reinf. !! Diameter<br>(inch) !! Min.<br>cover<br>(inch) !! Core D'<br>(inch) !! spiral/hoop size<sup>1</sup> !! Area of spiral/hoop bar<br>Asp (sq. inch) !! Pitch or space<br>s (inch) !! f'c<br>(ksi) !! Ro = 4Asp/(D'*s)<br>SGS Eq 8.6.2‐7 !! !! Ro min<br>SGS 8.6.5 !!
|-
| Spiral || 36 || 1.5 || 32.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0095 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 42 || 1.5 || 38.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0080 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 48 || 1.5 || 44.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0069 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 54 || 1.5 || 50.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0061 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 60 || 1.5 || 56.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0054 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 66 || 1.5 || 62.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0049 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 72 || 1.5 || 68.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0045 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|}
 
 
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: auto; text-align: center"
|+
! colspan="12" style="width:925px" | Seismic Design Category, SDC C and D
|-
! Shear<br>Reinf. !! Diameter<br>(inch) !! Min.<br>cover<br>(inch) !! Core D'<br>(inch) !! spiral/hoop size<sup>1</sup> !! Area of spiral/hoop bar<br>Asp (sq. inch) !! Pitch or space<br>s (inch) !! f'c<br>(ksi) !! Ro = 4Asp/(D'*s)<br>SGS Eq 8.6.2‐7 !! !! Ro min<br>SGS 8.6.5 !!
|-
| Spiral || 36 || 1.5 || 32.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0095 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 42 || 1.5 || 38.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0080 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 48 || 1.5 || 44.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0069 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 54 || 1.5 || 50.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0061 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 60 || 1.5 || 56.375 || 5 || 0.307 || 4 || 3 || 0.0054 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 66 || 1.5 || 62.25 || 6 || 0.442 || 4 || 3 || 0.0071 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 72 || 1.5 || 68.25 || 6 || 0.442 || 4 || 3 || 0.0065 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|}
 
 
{| style="margin: auto; text-align: left"  
|+
|-
| width="35px" | Note: || width="685px" | <sup>1</sup>For simplification use minimum #5 spiral/hoop bar. || width="205px" | SGS 8.8.9
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || Ro shall be ≥ 0.003 in SDC B and 0.005 in SDC C and D. No need to meet LRFD 5.6.4.6‐1 & 5.11.4.1.4‐1 minimum Ro requirements. || SGS 8.6.5
|-
| || Use 4" spiral pitch/hoop spacing for column to meet long. bar splice area requirements. || LRFD 5.11.4.1.6
|-
| || Use spiral or hoop but combination of spiral reinforcement with hoops shall not be used except in the footing or bent cap. || SGS 8.8.7
|-
| || Closed tie (Hoop) shall use 135‐degree hook with an extension of 6 bar diameters but not less than 3". || SGS 8.8.9
|-
| || Welding of reinforcing steel (spiral, hoop and longitudinal) is not permitted due to the prohibitive cost of weld inspection. ||
|-
| || Spiral does not need to meet end tail requirements of SGS 8.8.7. ||
|-
| || (1) Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by 1 1/2 extra turns of spiral reinforcement at end of the spiral unit.  ||
|-
| || (2) L<sub>ac</sub> = max(Lac from SGS 8.8.4, 1.25 Ld) or Ldh, but shall be extended to the clear cover specified herein. ||
|-
| || (3) 11 inches for #8 thru #11 bars and 14 inches for #14 bars. ||
|-
| || (4) Plastic hinge area for SDC B: Lpr ≥ max(1.0 * col dia, 1/6 clear col ht., 18") || SGS C8.8.9 & LRFD C5.11.4.1.4
|-
| || (4) Plastic hinge area for SDC C and D: Lpr ≥ max(1.5 * col dia, Lp, 1/6 clear column ht.) || SGS 4.11.6 and 4.11.7
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || (4) Long reinf. and spiral bar shall not be spliced in plastic hinge area. If splice is unavoidable, a mechanical bar splice shall be used. || SGS 8.8.3 LRFD 5.11.4.1.6
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || (5) Minimum lap: Use greater of [[751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8.2_Development_and_Lap_Splices_of_Deformed_Bars_in_Tension|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.2]] Class B lap splice or 60 bar diameters. Lap splices and mechanical bar splices are to be alternately staggered at least 24”at two different locations. || LRFD 5.10.8.4.3b
|-
|-
| || For dowel bar in beam cap, See [[751.22_Prestressed_Concrete_I_Girders#751.22.2.7_Dowel_Bars|EPG 751 .22.2.7 Dowel Bars]] ||
| &nbsp; || || || || ||  
|-
| || For additional requirements of column joints in SDC C and D, See [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2.4_T-Joint_(Column_Joint)_Connections_for_Seismic_Design_category_C_and_D|EPG 751 .9.1.2.4 T-Joint (Column Joint) Connections for Seismic Design Category C and D]]. ||
|-
| || Use [[#751.9.1.2.1.1|Figure 751.9.1.2.1.1]] and [[#751.9.1.2.1.2|Figure 751.9.1.2.1.2]] for seismic detail option.  For complete seismic design option spiral/hoop bar size shall be increased up to #6 and pitch/spacing shall be reduced as needed by design. Absolute minimum clearance is 1.5 inches. ||
|}
|}


<gallery mode=packed heights=800 id="751.9.1.2.1.1">
<br><br>
File:751.9.1.2.1_01-2025.png|'''Figure 751.9.1.2.1.1 Seismic Details for Column Supported on Footing'''
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
</gallery>
<br><br>


<gallery mode=packed heights=500  id="751.9.1.2.1.2">
== 751.4.1 Reinforced Concrete ==
File:751.9.1.2.1_02-2025.png|'''Figure 751.9.1.2.1.2 Seismic Bar Details'''
</gallery>


====751.9.1.2.2 Seismic Details for Non-oversized Drilled Shaft====
'''Classes of Reinforced Concrete'''  
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: auto; text-align: center"
|+ Non‐Oversized Drilled shaft shear reinforcement requirements
|+ (Applicable when difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is ≤ 12")
|+  <font color=white>.</font color>
! colspan="13" | Seismic Design Category, SDC B
|-
! Shear<br>Reinf. !! Diameter<br>(inch) !! Min.<br>cover<br>(inch) !! Core D'<br>(inch) !! spiral/hoop size<sup>1</sup> !! 1 for single bar<br>2 for bundle<br>hoop bars !! Area of spiral/hoop bar<br>Asp (sq. inch) !! Pitch or space<br>s (inch) !! f'c<br>(ksi) !! Ro = 4Asp/(D'*s)<br>SGS Eq 8.6.2‐7 !! !! Ro min<br>SGS 8.6.5 !!
|-
| Spiral || 36 || 6 || 23.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0087 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 42 || 6 || 29.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0070 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 48 || 6 || 35.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0058 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 54 || 6 || 41.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0049 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 60 || 6 || 47.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0043 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 66 || 6 || 53.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0038 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 72 || 6 || 59.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0034 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 78 || 6 || 65.25 || 6 || 1 || 0.442 || 6 || 4 || 0.0045 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|}


Below are classes of concrete for each type or portion of structure:


{| class="wikitable" style="margin: auto; text-align: center"
{| border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" align="auto"
|+
! colspan="13" | Seismic Design Category, SDC C and D
|-
! Shear<br>Reinf. !! Diameter<br>(inch) !! Min.<br>cover<br>(inch) !! Core D'<br>(inch) !! spiral/hoop size<sup>1</sup> !! 1 for single bar<br>2 for bundle<br>hoop bars !! Area of spiral/hoop bar<br>Asp (sq. inch) !! Pitch or space<br>s (inch) !! f'c<br>(ksi) !! Ro = 4Asp/(D'*s)<br>SGS Eq 8.6.2‐7 !! !! Ro min<br>SGS 8.6.5 !!
|-
| Spiral || 36 || 6 || 23.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0087 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 42 || 6 || 29.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0070 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
|-
| Spiral || 48 || 6 || 35.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0058 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
| colspan="2" | '''Box Culverts''' || B-1
|-
|-
| Spiral || 54 || 6 || 41.25 || 6 || 1 || 0.442 || 6 || 4 || 0.0071 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
| colspan="2" | '''Retaining Walls''' || B or B-1
|-
|-
| Spiral || 60 || 6 || 47.25 || 6 || 1 || 0.442 || 6 || 4 || 0.0062 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
| colspan="2" | '''Superstructure (General)''' || B-2
|-
|-
| Hoop || 66 || 6 || 53.25 || 6 || 1 || 0.442 || 6 || 4 || 0.0055 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
| width="20" | || Curbs and Parapets || B-1
|-
|-
| Hoop || 72 || 6 || 59.375 || 5 || 2 || 0.614 || 8 || 4 || 0.0052 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
| || Type A, B, C, D, G and H Barriers || B-1
|-
|-
| Hoop || 78 || 6 || 65.25 || 6 || 2 || 0.884 || 8 || 4 || 0.0068 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
| ||Sidewalks || B-2
|}
 
 
{| style="margin: auto; text-align: left"
|+
|-
| width="35px" | Note: || width="755px" | <sup>1</sup>For simplification use minimum #5 spiral/hoop bar. || width="220px" | SGS 8.8.9
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || Ro shall be ≥ 0.003 in SDC B and 0.005 in SDC C and D. No need to meet LRFD 5.6.4.6‐1 & 5.11.4.1.4‐1 minimum Ro requirements. || SGS 8.6.5
|-
|-
| || Closed tie (Hoop) shall use 135‐degree hook with an extension of 6 bar diameters but not less than 3". || SGS 8.8.9
| || Raised Median || B-2
|-
|-
| || Spiral does not need to meet end tail requirements of SGS 8.8.7. ||
| || Slabs || B-2
|-
|-
| || (6) Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by 1 1/2 extra turns of spiral reinforcement at end of the spiral unit. ||
| || Box Girders || B-2
|-
|-
| || (7) Plastic hinge area for SDC B: Lpr ≥ drilled shaft diameter. || SGS C8.8.9 and LRFD C5.11.4.1.4
| || Deck Girders || B-2
|-
|-
| || (7) Plastic hinge area for SDC C and D: Lpr ≥ max(1.5 * Column dia., Lp, drilled shaft diameter). || SGS 4.11.6 and 4.11.7
| || Prestressed Precast Panels || A-1
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || (7,8) Long reinforcement and spiral bar shall not be spliced in plastic hinge area. If splice is unavoidable, a mechanical bar splice shall be used. || SGS 8.8.3 and LRFD 5.11.4.1.6
|-
| || (8) Plastic hinge area : Lpr ≥ drilled shaft diameter. ||
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || (9) Minimum lap: Use greater of [[751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8.2_Development_and_Lap_Splices_of_Deformed_Bars_in_Tension|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.2]] Class B lap splice or 60 bar diameters. Lap splices and mechanical bar splices are to be alternately staggered at least 24”at two different locations. || LRFD 5.10.8.4.3b
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || (10) Use spiral or hoop but combination of spiral reinforcement with hoops shall not be used except in the bent cap. From above table if hoop required for drilled shaft than hoop shall be used in the column and if spiral required for drilled shaft than spiral shall be used in column. Use spiral or hoop bar size and pitch or spacing per [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2.1_Seismic_Details_for_Column_Supported_on_Footing|EPG 751.9.1.2.1]] || SGS 8.8.7
|-
|-
| || Welding of reinforcing steel (spiral, hoop and longitudinal) is not permitted due to the prohibitive cost of weld inspection. ||
| || Prestressed I - Girders || A-1
|-
|-
| || For detail simplification consider drilled shaft 6” larger than column. Avoid sizing shafts 12” larger than column. ||
| || Prestressed Double -Tee Girders || A-1
|-
|-
| || For column and beam detail requirements, see [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2.1_Seismic_Details_for_Column_Supported_on_Footing|EPG 751.9.1.2.1]]. ||
| || Integral End Bents (Above lower construction joint) || B-2
|-
|-
| || For oversized shaft (generally 18" minimum larger than column), see [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2.3_Seismic_Details_for_Oversized_Drilled_Shaft|EPG 751.9.1.2.3 Seismic Details for Oversized Drilled Shaft]]. ||
| || Semi-Deep Abutments (Above construction joint under slab) || B-2
|-
|-
| || For additional requirements of column joints in SDC C and D, See [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2.4_T-Joint_(Column_Joint)_Connections_for_Seismic_Design_category_C_and_D|EPG 751.9.1.2.4 T-Joint (Column Joint) Connections for Seismic Design Category C and D]]. ||  
| colspan="2" | '''Substructure (General)''' || B
|-
|-
| || Use [[#751.9.1.2.2|Figure 751.9.1.2.2]] for seismic detail option.  For complete seismic design option spiral/hoop bar size shall be increased up to #6 and pitch/spacing shall be 6” by design. Absolute minimum clearance is 5 inches. If #6 at 6” spiral or hoop do not meet design requirements, then use 2-#6 hoop bars @ 8” spacing.  ||  
| || Integral End Bents (Below lower construction joint) || B
|-
|-
| || For seismic bar details (spiral and hoop), see [[#751.9.1.2.1.2|Figure 751.9.1.2.1.2]] ||
| || Non-Integral End Bents || B
|}
 
<gallery mode=packed heights=950 id="751.9.1.2.2">
File:751.9.1.2.2_01-2025.jpg|'''Figure 751.9.1.2.2 Seismic Details for Non-oversized Drilled Shaft'''
</gallery>
 
====751.9.1.2.3 Seismic Details for Oversized Drilled Shaft====
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: auto; text-align: center"
|+ Oversized Drilled shaft shear reinforcement requirements
|+ (Applicable when difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is ≥ 18")
|+  <font color=white>.</font color>
! colspan="13" | Seismic Design Category, SDC B
|-
|-
! Shear<br>Reinf. !! Diameter<br>(inch) !! Min.<br>cover<br>(inch) !! Core D'<br>(inch) !! spiral/hoop size<sup>1</sup> !! 1 for single bar<br>2 for bundle<br>hoop bars !! Area of spiral/hoop bar<br>Asp (sq. inch) !! Pitch or space<br>s (inch) !! f'c<br>(ksi) !! Ro = 4Asp/(D'*s)<br>SGS Eq 8.6.2‐7 !! !! Ro min<br>SGS 8.6.5 !!
| || Semi-Deep Abutments (Below construction joint under slab) || B
|-
| Spiral || 36 || 6 || 23.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0087 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|-
|-
| Spiral || 42 || 6 || 29.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0070 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
| || Intermediate Bents || B (*)
|-
|-
| Spiral || 48 || 6 || 35.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0058 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
| || width="485" | Intermediate Bent Columns, End Bents (Below construction<br>joint at bottom of slab in Cont. Conc. Slab Bridges) || B-1
|-
|-
| Spiral || 54 || 6 || 41.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0049 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
| || Footings || B
|-
|-
| Spiral || 60 || 6 || 47.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0043 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
| || Drilled Shafts (except per Standard Plans 903.15) || B-2
|-
|-
| Spiral/Hoop || 66 || 6 || 53.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0038 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
| || Drilled Shafts (per Standard Plans 903.15) || B
|-
|-
| Spiral/Hoop || 72 || 6 || 59.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0034 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
| || Cast-In-Place Pile || B-1
|-
|-
| Spiral/Hoop || 78 || 6 || 65.25 || 6 || 1 || 0.442 || 6 || 4 || 0.0045 || ≥ || 0.003 || OK
|colspan="3" | (*) In special cases when a stronger concrete is necessary for design, Class B-1 may be considered for intermediate bents (caps, columns, tie beams, web beams, collision walls and/or footings).
|}
|}


 
{|border="1" style="text-align:center" cellpadding="5" align="center"  
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: auto; text-align: center"
|+
! colspan="13" | Seismic Design Category, SDC C and D
|-
! Shear<br>Reinf. !! Diameter<br>(inch) !! Min.<br>cover<br>(inch) !! Core D'<br>(inch) !! spiral/hoop size<sup>1</sup> !! 1 for single bar<br>2 for bundle<br>hoop bars !! Area of spiral/hoop bar<br>Asp (sq. inch) !! Pitch or space<br>s (inch) !! f'c<br>(ksi) !! Ro = 4Asp/(D'*s)<br>SGS Eq 8.6.2‐7 !! !! Ro min<br>SGS 8.6.5 !!
|-
| Spiral || 36 || 6 || 23.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0087 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 42 || 6 || 29.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0070 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 48 || 6 || 35.375 || 5 || 1 || 0.307 || 6 || 4 || 0.0058 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 54 || 6 || 41.25 || 6 || 1 || 0.442 || 6 || 4 || 0.0071 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Spiral || 60 || 6 || 47.25 || 6 || 1 || 0.442 || 6 || 4 || 0.0062 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Spiral/Hoop || 66 || 6 || 53.25 || 6 || 1 || 0.442 || 6 || 4 || 0.0055 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 72 || 6 || 59.375 || 5 || 2 || 0.614 || 8 || 4 || 0.0052 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|-
| Hoop || 78 || 6 || 65.25 || 6 || 2 || 0.884 || 8 || 4 || 0.0068 || ≥ || 0.005 || OK
|}
 
 
{| style="margin: auto; text-align: left"  
|+
|-  
|-  
| width="35px" | Note: || width="755px" | <sup>1</sup>For simplification use minimum #5 spiral/hoop bar. || width="220px" | SGS 8.8.9
|+'''Unit Stresses of Reinforced Concrete'''
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
|-
| || Ro shall be ≥ 0.003 in SDC B and 0.005 in SDC C and D. No need to meet LRFD 5.6.4.6‐1 & 5.11.4.1.4‐1 minimum Ro requirements. || SGS 8.6.5
!Class of Concrete||Aggregate Maximumsize (Inches)||Cement Factor (barrels percubic yard)||<math>\,f'c</math> (psi)||<math>\,fc</math> (psi)||<math>\,n</math> (*)||<math>\,E_c</math> (ksi)
|-
| || Closed tie (Hoop) shall use 135‐degree hook with an extension of 6 bar diameters but not less than 3". || SGS 8.8.9
|-
| || Spiral does not need to meet end tail requirements of SGS 8.8.7. ||
|-
| || (11) Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by 1 1/2 extra turns of spiral reinforcement at end of the spiral unit. ||
|-
| || (12) Plastic hinge area for SDC B: Lpr ≥ drilled shaft diameter. || SGS C8.8.9 and LRFD C5.11.4.1.4
|-
| || (12) Plastic hinge area for SDC C and D: Lpr ≥ max(1.5 * Column dia., Lp, drilled shaft diameter). || SGS 4.11.6 and 4.11.7
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || (12) Long reinforcement and spiral bar shall not be spliced in plastic hinge area. If splice is unavoidable, a mechanical bar splice shall be used. || SGS 8.8.3 and LRFD 5.11.4.1.6
|-
| || (13) Plastic hinge area : Lpr ≥ drilled shaft diameter. ||
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || (14) Minimum lap: Use greater of [[751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8.2_Development_and_Lap_Splices_of_Deformed_Bars_in_Tension|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.2]] Class B lap splice or 60 bar diameters. Lap splices and mechanical bar splices are to be alternately staggered at least 24”at two different locations. || LRFD 5.10.8.4.3b
|-
| || (15) Since column reinforcement embedded into drilled shaft, clear spacing between column reinforcement shall be 5” min. ||
|-
| || (16) Spiral pitch or hoop bar spacing shall be same as drilled shaft requirements. ||
|- style="vertical-align:bottom;"
| || Use spiral or hoop but combination of spiral reinforcement with hoops shall not be used in a reinforcement cage except in bent cap. Spirals in the column cage and hoops in the drilled shaft cage can be used for oversized drilled shaft || SGS 8.8.7
|-
| || Welding of reinforcing steel (spiral, hoop and longitudinal) is not permitted due to the prohibitive cost of weld inspection. ||
|-
| || Hoops are preferred for drilled shafts with diameters at least 2’-6” larger than column. Spirals shall be used in drilled shafts that are oversized by 18” or 24” due to potential interference between the hooks and the column reinforcing cage. ||
|-
| || Column confinement: ||
|-
| || &nbsp; &nbsp; For column use spiral/pitch or hoop/spacing and bar size per column shear reinforcement requirements. ||
|-
| || Drilled shaft confinement: ||
|-
| || &nbsp; &nbsp; Exterior cage: From above table use spiral/pitch or hoop/spacing for drilled shaft. ||
|-
| || &nbsp; &nbsp; Interior cage: Column confinement reinforcement bar size from column shear reinforcement table shall be spaced or<br> &nbsp; &nbsp; pitched same as drilled shaft and provided over entire embedded length of column steel in drilled shaft. ||
|-
| || For column and beam detail requirements, see column shear reinforcement.
|-
| || For additional requirements of column joints in SDC C and D, See [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2.4_T-Joint_(Column_Joint)_Connections_for_Seismic_Design_category_C_and_D|EPG 751.9.1.2.4 T-Joint (Column Joint) Connections for Seismic Design Category C and D]]. ||
|-
| || Use [[#751.9.1.2.3|Figure 751.9.1.2.3]] for seismic detail option.  For complete seismic design option spiral/hoop bar size shall be increased up to #6 and pitch/spacing shall be 6” by design. Absolute minimum clearance is 5 inches. If #6 at 6” spiral or hoop do not meet design requirements, then use 2-#6 hoop bars @ 8” spacing. ||
|-
| || For seismic bar details (spiral and hoop), see [[#751.9.1.2.1.2|Figure 751.9.1.2.1.2]] ||
|}
 
<gallery mode=packed heights=950 id="751.9.1.2.3">
File:751.9.1.2.3_01-2025.png|'''Figure 751.9.1.2.3 Seismic Details for Oversized Drilled Shaft'''
</gallery>
 
====751.9.1.2.4 T-Joint (Column Joint) Connections for Seismic Design category C and D====
Minimum joint reinforcement shall be provided as shown below. Reinforcement marked as “additional” shall not be used to satisfy other load requirements.
 
=====751.9.1.2.4.1 Bent Cap Joint Shear Reinforcement =====
{|
|-
| width="10px" | 1. || Additional Vertical Stirrups Outside the Joint Region || width="150px" | SGS 8.13.5.1.1
|-
| || <math>{}A\ {jv_0 \atop s\ \ \ } \geq 0.175 A_{st} A_{st} =</math> Total area of column longitudinal reinforcement anchored in the joint = Total area of column longitudinal reinforcement anchored in the joint ||
|-
| || <math>{}A\ {jv_0 \atop s\ \ \ } =</math> Minimum total area of additional vertical stirrups on each side of joint ||
|-
| || Total area of vertical stirrups shall be provided transversely within a distance equal to the column diameter extending from each face of the column as shown in [[#751.9.1.2.4.1a|Figure 751.9.1.2.4.1a]]. For additional vertical stirrups size and spacing limitations, see EPG 751.31.3.1. ||
|-
| 2. || Additional Vertical Stirrups Inside the Joint Region || SGS 8.13.5.1.2
|-
| || <math>{}A\ {jvi \atop s\ \ \ } \geq 0.135 A_{st} =</math> ||
|-
| || Where, ||
|-
| ||  <math>A_{st} =</math> Total area of column longitudinal reinforcement anchored in the joint ||
|-
| || <math>{}A\ {jvi \atop s\ \ \ } =</math> Minimum total area of vertical stirrups inside the joint region ||
|-
| || Total area of vertical stirrups spaced evenly over the column inside the joint region as shown in [[#751.9.1.2.4.1a|Figure 751.9.1.2.4.1a]]. For additional vertical stirrups size and spacing limitations, see [[751.31_Open_Concrete_Intermediate_Bents#751.31.3.1_Beam_Cap|EPG 751.31.3.1]]. ||
|-
| 3. || Additional Longitudinal Cap Beam Reinforcement || SGS 8.13.5.1.3
|-
| || <math>{}A\ {jl \atop s\ } \geq 0.245 A_{st} =</math> ||
|-
| || Where, ||
|-
| || <math>A_{st} =</math> Total area of column longitudinal reinforcement anchored in the joint ||
|-
| || <math>{}A\ {jvi \atop s\ \ \ } =</math> Minimum total area of additional longitudinal reinforcement in top and bottom faces of the cap beam ||
|-
|-
| || The additional longitudinal reinforcement shall be extended at least one column diameter plus development length from face of the column as shown in [[#751.9.1.2.4.1a|Figure 751.9.1.2.4.1a]] ||
|A-1||3/4||1.6 (Min.)||5,000||2,000||6||4074
|-
|-
| 4. || Horizontal J-Bars || SGS 8.13.5.1.4
|B||1||1.4 (Min.)||3,000||1,200||10||3156
|-
|-
| || #4 Horizontal J-bars shall be hooked around the longitudinal reinforcement on each face of the cap beam at every other stirrup inside the joint as shown in [[#751.9.1.2.4.1b|Figure 751.9.1.2.4.1b]].
|B-1||1||1.6 (Min.)||4,000||1,600||8||3644
|-
|-
| colspan="2" | When complete seismic analysis is required per bridge seismic design flowchart, joint shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design (SGS). Modify above information and provide additional reinforcement as needed by design. || style="vertical-align:bottom;" | SGS 8.12 and 8.13
|B-2||1||1.875 (Min.)||4,000||1,600||8||3644
|}
|}
<center>(*) Values of n for computations of strength only.</center>


<gallery mode=packed heights=400 id="751.9.1.2.4.1a">
{| border="0" cellpadding="6" cellspacing="0" align="auto"
File:751.9.1.2.4.1_01-2025.png|'''Figure 751.9.1.2.4.1a Elevation Showing Column and Beam Cap Reinforcement<br>(SDC C and D only)'''
| align="left" | '''Reinforcing Steel'''
</gallery>
<gallery mode=packed heights=325 id="751.9.1.2.4.1b">
File:751.9.1.2.4.1_02-2025.png|'''Figure 751.9.1.2.4.1b Section Showing Column and Beam Cap Reinforcement<br>(SDC C and D only)'''
</gallery>
 
=====751.9.1.2.4.2 Footing (Spread Footing and Pile Cap Footing) Joint Shear Reinforcement =====
{|
|-
| colspan="3" | For seismic detail option, use following information for spread footing and pile cap footing || width="170px" | SGS 6.4.7
|-
| colspan="3" | Vertical shear reinforcement #5 at about 12” each way shall be placed around the column perimeter within a horizontal dimension from face of the column equal to minimum <math>D_{ftg}</math> as shown in [[#751.9.1.2.4.2a|Figure 751.9.1.2.4.2a]] and [[#751.9.1.2.4.2b|Figure 751.9.1.2.4.2b]]. #6 maximum bar size shall be used for vertical shear reinforcement.
|-
| width="10px" | || width="10px" | <math>D_{ftg}</math> || Effective depth from top of footing to lower reinforcement mat. ||
|-
| colspan="3" | Additional longitudinal horizontal reinforcement at top of footing, <math>A_{sb}</math>: ||
|-
| || <math>A_{sb}</math> || = <math>0.0625 \mbox{ x } A_{st} \mbox{ x } F_{ye} \mbox{/} F_{y}</math> ||
|-
| || colspan="2" | Where, ||
|-
| || <math>A_{st}</math> || = Total area of column longitudinal reinforcement anchored in the joint ||
|-
| || <math>F_{ye}</math> || = Expected yield stress of column longitudinal reinforcement ||
|-
| || || = 68 ksi for ASTM A706 and ASTM A615 || SGS Table 8.4.2-1
|-
| || <math>F_{y}</math> || = Minimum yield stress of column longitudinal reinforcement ||
|-
| || || = 60 ksi for ASTM A706 and ASTM A615 || SGS Table 8.4.2-1 
|-
| || || The additional longitudinal reinforcement shall be extended at least up to a distance <math>D_{ftg}</math> plus development length from face of the column and must be placed so that the reinforcement goes through the column reinforcement as shown in [[#751.9.1.2.4.2b|Figure 751.9.1.2.4.2b]] <math>A_{sb}</math> shall be provided in both directions in the footing. ||
|-
|-
| colspan="3" | When complete seismic analysis is required per bridge seismic design flowchart, joint shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design (SGS). Modify above information and provide additional reinforcement as needed by design. || style="vertical-align:bottom;" | SGS 6.4.5, 6.4.6 and 6.4.7
|Reinforcing Steel (Grade 60)||<math>\,F_y</math> = 60 ksi
|}
|}


<gallery mode=packed heights=400 id="751.9.1.2.4.2a">
<!-- [[Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|751.04]] -->
File:751.9.1.2.4.2_01-2025.png|'''Figure 751.9.1.2.4.2a Spread Footing Joint Shear Reinforcement'''
</gallery>
<gallery mode=packed heights=500 id="751.9.1.2.4.2b">
File:751.9.1.2.4.2_02-2025.png|'''Figure 751.9.1.2.4.2b Pile Footing Joint Shear Reinforcement'''
</gallery>
 
 
 
 
====751.9.3.1.7 T- Joint Connections for LFD====
For LFD T-Joint connection requirement, see [[751.40_LFD_Widening_and_Repair##751.40.8.11.5_T-_Joint_Connections|EPG 751.40.8.11.5 T- Joint Connections]].
 
 
 
<big><big>'''<font color= red>!!!  MOVE TO NEW ARTICLE NUMBER  DARREN CHECK THIS SECTION AND MAKE SURE I FOUND AND FIXED ALL THE FIGURE NUMBERS  !!!</font color>'''</big></big>
=====751.40.8.11.5 T- Joint Connections=====
 
'''Principal Tension and Compression Stresses in Beam-Column Joints'''
 
The connections where columns and beams join, or where columns and footings join, should be based on the capacity design for shear and diagonal tension. For most locations, this is a “T”-shaped joint. For the analysis of “knee joints”, see Priestley and Seible, 1996.
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.1.jpg|center|750px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.1 Joint Shear Stresses in a T-Joint'''</center>]]
 
In the capacity design of connection joints, the column moment, M<sup>0</sup>, will be the moment that is known and which will correspond to flexural overstrength of the column plastic hinges, i.e. M<sup>0</sup> = 1.3M<sub>p</sub> of the column. If the columns are designed based on plastic hinging, the beam and footings shall be designed with capacities greater than or equal to 1.3M<sub>p</sub>.
 
At each joint, the principal tension and compression stresses are defined and checked as follows:
 
:<math>V_{jh} = \frac {M^o}{h_b} </math> (1)
 
:<math>V_{jh} = \frac {V_jh}{b_{je}h_c} </math> (2)
 
:<math>b_{je} = \begin{cases}
\sqrt {2}D\\
h_c + b_c
\end{cases} </math> (3)
 
:<math>V_{jv} = \frac {V_{jh}h_b}{h_c} </math> (4)
 
:<math>V_{jv} = v_{jh} = \frac {v_{jv}}{b_{je}h_b} </math> (5)
 
:<math>f_v = \frac {P_c}{b_{je}(h_c + h_b)} </math> (6)
 
:<math>p_c = \frac {f_c + f_h}{2} + \sqrt{\Big( \frac {f_v - f_h}{2}\Big)^2 + v_{jh}^2} </math> (7)
 
:<math>p_t = \frac {f_c + f_h}{2} - \sqrt{\Big( \frac {f_v - f_h}{2}\Big)^2 + v_{jh}^2} </math> (8)
 
:in which:
:V<sub>jh</sub> = Average horizontal shear force within a joint.
:V<sub>jv</sub> = Average vertical shear force within a joint.
:v<sub>jh</sub> = Average horizontal shear stress within a joint.
:v<sub>jv</sub> = Average vertical shear stress within a joint.
:h<sub>b</sub> = Beam depth.
:h<sub>c</sub> = Column diameter or rectangular column cross-section height.
:b<sub>je</sub> = The effective width of a joint, defined in Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.2.
:D = Round column diameter.
:f<sub>v</sub> = Average vertical axial stress due to column axial force P<sub>c</sub>, including the seismic component.
:P<sub>c</sub> = Column axial force.
:f<sub>h</sub> = Average horizontal axial stress at the center of the joint.
:p<sub>c</sub> = Nominal principal compression stress in a joint. (positive)
:p<sub>t</sub> = Nominal principal tensile stress in a joint. (negative)
:b<sub>b</sub> = Beam width
:b<sub>c</sub> = Column cross-section width
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.2.jpg|center|750px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.2 Effective Joint Width for Joint Shear Stress Calculations'''</center>]]
 
In Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.2(c), the effective width is taken at the center of the column section, allowing a 45° spread from boundaries of the column section into the beam cap. In the transverse direction, the effective width will be the smaller of the value given by eq. (3) and the beam cap width b<sub>b</sub>. Experimental evidence indicates that diagonal cracking is initiated in the joint region when <math> p_t \ge 3.5\sqrt{f'_c}</math> psi.  The principle compression stress p<sub>c</sub> shall be limited to <math> p_c \le 0.3f'_c</math>.
 
'''Design of Reinforcement for Beam-Column Joints'''
 
When the principal tension stress, p<sub>t</sub>, exceeds <math> 3.5\sqrt{f'_c}</math> psi, joint cracking occurs and the following reinforcement shall be provided:
 
a) Vertical beam stirrup reinforcement shall be placed throughout the distance of h<sub>b</sub>/2 from the column face on each side of the column. The required amount of vertical beam stirrup reinforcement, A<sub>jv</sub>, is:
 
:<math>A_{jv} = 0.125A_{sc}\frac{f^\circ_{yc}}{f_{yv}}</math> (9)
 
:Where:
 
:A<Sub>sc</sub> = The total area of longitudinal steel
 
:f°<sub>yc</sub> = overstrength stress in the column reinforcement use
:::f°<sub>yc</sub> = 1.1f
:f<sub>yv</sub> = yield stress of vertical stirrup reinforcement.
 
b) Vertical beam stirrup reinforcement within the joint, A<sub>vi</sub>, is
:<math>A_{vi} = 0.0625A_{sc}\frac{f^\circ_{yc}}{f_{yv}}</math> (10)
 
c) The additional beam bottom longitudinal reinforcement required is
:<math>A_{sb} = 0.0625A_{sc}\frac{f^\circ_{yc}}{f_{yb}}</math> (11)
 
:where f<sub>yb</sub> = the yield stress of the beam bottom longitudinal reinforcement. This additional reinforcement must be carried a sufficient distance to develop its yield strength a distance h<sub>b</sub>/2 from the column face.
 
d) The horizontal hoop reinforcement within a joint requires
:<math> \rho_s = \frac{3.3}{Df_{gh}L_a}\Bigg(\frac{0.09A_{sc}f^\circ_{yc}D}{L_a}-F\Bigg)</math> (12)
 
which for F = 0 simplifies to
:<math> \rho_s = \frac{0.3A_{sc}f^\circ_{yc}}{L^2_af_{yh}}</math> (13)
:Where
:F = The beam cap prestress force.
:f<sub>yh</sub> = The yield stress of the horizontal hoops.
:L<sub>a</sub> = The Anchorage length in the joint.
 
The minimum amount of horizontal hoop reinforcement shall be
:<math> \rho_s = \frac{3.5\sqrt{f'_c}}{f_{yh}}</math> (14)
 
The spacing of the horizontal hoop can be based on:
 
<math>S=\frac{4A_s}{D'\rho_s}</math> (15)
:Where
:A<sub>s</sub> = The cross-sectional area of the hoop bar.
:D’ = The hoop diameter.
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.3.jpg|center|725px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.3 Beam Cap Joint Reinforcement'''</center>]]
 
When the principal tension stress, p<sub>t</sub>, does not exceed <math>3.5\sqrt{f'_c}</math> psi, no joint cracking is expected. However, the following minimum reinforcement shall be provided:
 
:a) Vertical beam stirrup reinforcement within the joint based on eq. (10)
:b) Minimum horizontal hoop reinforcement based on eq. (14)
 
Note that the bending of any hooked reinforcement outward, away from the column core, shall not be used because it directs the anchorage force away from the joint. Inward bending of the column reinforcement is allowed. However, it is likely to cause a congestion problem. The use of straight column reinforcement embedded into the beam-column joint is recommended. The standard T-joint reinforcement details are shown in Figs. 751.40.8.11.5.4 - 751.40.8.11.5.6. If any reinforcement requirement based on eqs. (9) through (14) is greater than that shown in Figs. 751.40.8.11.5.4 - 751.40.8.11.5.6, the greater requirement shall be used.
<div id="Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.4"></div>
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.4 2019.jpg|center|600px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.4 Int. Bent "T-Joint" Details'''</center>]]
::(1) Increase by 25% the development length (other than top bars) or the standard hook in tension “Ldh” of EPG 751.40.8.4.2.
::(2) The spiral bars or wire shall be continued for a distance equal to ½ the column diameter but not less than 15” from the face of the column connection into the footing.
::(3) Use the greatest length of the following: column diameter of 1/6 of the clear height of column. Lapping of spiral reinforcement in this region is not permitted.
::(4) Splices may be eliminated when the column height is 20’-0” or less or restrictions do not practically allow for lap splices.
 
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.5 2019.jpg|center|750px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.5 Seismic Bar Details'''</center>]]
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.6 2019.jpg|center|600px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.6 Beam - Footing "T-Joint" Details'''</center>]]
::See additional guidance in EPG 751.9.3.1.7, below, for footing reinforcement not shown.
::(1) Increase by 25% the development length (other than top bars) or the standard hook minimum in tension “Ldh” of EPG 751.40.8.4.2.
::(2) The spirals shall be continued for a distance equal to ½ the column diameter but not less than 15” from the face of the column connection into the footing.
 
 
 
'''Example 751.9.3.1.7.1:''' A column is subjected to an axial load (due to dead and seismic earthquake loads) of 520 kips. The column diameter is 36 in. with 20 #8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement. The beam cap dimensions are 3 ft. 9 in. wide by 3 ft. 7 in. deep with 5 #11 bars for the top reinforcement and 7 #10 bars for the bottom reinforcement as shown in Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.7. The column overstrength moment-axial load curve is shown in Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.8. Design the reinforcement details for the beam-column joint.
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.7.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.7 Properties for Example Design'''</center>]]
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.8.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.8 Column Overstrength Interaction Diagram'''</center>]]
 
'''Solution:'''
 
The axial load for the column = 520 kips.
 
From Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.8, M<sup>0</sup> = 1562.6 k-ft.
 
From eq. (1): <math>V_{jh} = \frac{M^0}{h_b} = \frac{1562.6 \times 12}{43} </math> = 436.07 kips
 
From eq. (3): <math>b_{je} = \sqrt{2}D = 50.9\ in. > b_b = 45\ in.;\ Use\ b_{je} = b_b </math>= 45 in.
 
From eq. (2): <math>v_{jh} = \frac{V_{jh}}{b_{je}h_c} = \frac{436.07}{45(36)} </math> = 269.18 psi.
 
<u>Vertical Axial Stress:</u>
 
From eq. (6):
 
:<math>f_v = \frac{P_c}{b_{je}(h_c + h_b)} = \frac{520}{45(36 + 43)}</math> = 146.27 psi.
 
<u>Horizontal Stress:</u>
 
:f<sub>h</sub> = 0 psi.
 
From eq. (7):
 
<math>p_c =\frac{f_v + f_h}{2}+\sqrt{\Big(\frac {f_v - f_h}{2}\Big)^2 + v_{jh}^2} = \frac{146.27 +0}{2} + \sqrt{\Big(\frac{146.27 -0}{2}\Big)^2 + 269.18^2} </math>
 
p<sub>c</sub> = 352.07 psi ≤ 0.3(3000 psi) = 900 psi '''O.K.'''
 
From eq. (8):
 
<math>p_t =\frac{f_v + f_h}{2}-\sqrt{\Big(\frac {f_v - f_h}{2}\Big)^2 + v_{jh}^2} = \frac{146.27 +0}{2} - \sqrt{\Big(\frac{146.27 -0}{2}\Big)^2 + 269.18^2} </math>
 
p<sub>t</sub> = -205.80 psi ≥ 3.5 3000 = 191.7 psi '''Not O.K.'''
 
Since p<sub>t</sub> is greater than <math>3.5\sqrt{f'_c}</math>, special joint reinforcement based on eqs. (9) through (14) are needed.
 
Check if moment capacity of the beam is greater than the overstrength moment capacity of the column.
 
Neglect the effect of the compression steel (conservative).
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.8 compression.jpg|center|450px]]
 
Compare moment capacity of beam versus overstrength moment capacity of the column:
 
:1669.39 k-ft. > 1562.60 k-ft.
 
Moment capacity of beam is greater than the overstrength moment capacity of the column. '''O.K.'''
 
'''Design of reinforcement for the beam-column joint'''
 
:- Vertical reinforcement should be placed throughout a distance of h<sub>b</sub>/2 from the column face on each side of the column.
 
::From eq.(9): <math>A_{jv} = 0.125 A_{sc}\frac{f^0_{yc}}{f_{yv}}</math>
:::A<sub>sc</sub> = 15.70 in<sup>2</sup>
 
:::<math>f^0_{yc}</math> = 1.1f = 66 ksi.
:::f<sub>yv</sub> = 60 ksi.
:::A<sub>jv</sub> = 0.125 (15.70) 66 / 60 = 2.16 in<sup>2</sup>
 
:- Reinforcement within the joint confines:
 
::From eq. (10): <math>A_{vi} = 0.0625 A_{sc}\frac{f^0_{yc}}{f_{yv}}</math>
:::::= 0.0625 (15.70) 66 / 60 = 1.08 in<sup>2</sup>
 
:- Additional bottom of beam longitudinal reinforcement:
 
::From eq. (11): <math>A_{sb} = 0.0625 A_{sc}\frac{f^0_{yc}}{f_{yb}}</math>
:::::= 0.0625 (15.70) 66 / 60 = 1.08 in<sup>2</sup>
 
::This reinforcement must be developed at a distance h<sub>b</sub>/2 away from the face of the column.
 
:- Hoop Reinforcement:
 
::From eq. (13): <math> \rho_s = \frac{0.3A_{sc}f^\circ_{yc}}{L^2_af_{yh}}</math>
 
::::L<sub>a</sub> = 40 in.
::::f<sub>yh</sub> = 60 ksi
::<math> \rho_s = \frac{0.3 (15.70)(66)}{40^2(60)}</math>
::<math> \rho_{s, min} = \frac{3.5 \sqrt{3000}}{60000} = 0.003195  \rho_s > \rho_{s, min}</math> ∴use ρs
 
:use #4 hoop reinforcement
 
:A<sub>s</sub> = 0.1963 in<sup>2</sup>
 
:D’ = 36 – 2(2) – 4/8 = 31.5 in.
 
:ρ<sub>s</sub> = 0.003238
 
:From eq. (15): <math>S=\frac{4A_s}{D'\rho_s} = \frac{4(0.1963)}{31.5(0.003238)}</math> = 7.70” spacing > 3” max. from Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.4.  Therefore, '''Use S = 3”'''
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.9.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.9 Summary of “T-Joint” Reinforcement'''</center>]]
 
'''Principal Tension and Compression Stresses in Column-Footing Joints'''
 
Column – Footing joints are essentially the same as inverted beam-column T joints. Eqs. (1) through (8) are applicable to column-footing joints except the beam height, h<sub>b</sub>, shall be changed to the footing height, h<sub>f</sub>.
 
'''Design of Reinforcement for Column-Footing Joint'''
 
The design of the reinforcement for column-footing joints is similar to that for beam-column T joint. From a joint performance viewpoint, it is desirable to bend the column bars inward toward the joint by using 90° hook bars, but this will cause undue congestion. Bending column bars away from the joint will increase the diagonal tension stress within the joint region. However, it makes a stable platform for supporting the column cage and prevents congestion. When the column reinforcement is bent outward, eqs. (9) through (14) shall be applied. Since the column inelastic action may develop in directions other than parallel to one of the principal axes of the footing, the amount of vertical reinforcement in eq. (9) shall be placed in each of the four quadrant areas outside the joint. In other words, a total vertical stirrup area of:
 
::<math>A_{jv} = 0.5 A_{sc}\frac{f^0_{yc}}{f_{yv}}</math> (16)
 
shall be placed around the column.
 
Extra top reinforcement in the footing is also required in accordance with eq. (11). This reinforcement should pass through the column reinforcement or be placed as close as possible to the sides of the column and extend a distance of not less than l = 0.5*D + L<sub>d</sub>, where L<sub>d</sub> is the bar development length, beyond the face on both sides of the column.
 
'''Example 751.9.3.1.7.2:''' A column is subjected to an axial load (due to dead and seismic loads) of 520 kips. The column diameter is 36 in. with 20 #8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement. All column reinforcement is bent outward into the footing away from the joint. The footing depth is 39 inches. The top and bottom reinforcement for the footing is shown in Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.10, below. Design the reinforcement details for the column-footing joint.
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.10.jpg|center|750px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.10 Details of Footing Reinforcement for Example 751.40.8.11.5.2'''</center>]]
 
'''Solution:'''
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.10 solution.jpg|left|300px]]
The axial load for the column = 520 kips.
 
From Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.8 in Example 751.9.3.1.7.1, M<sup>0</sup> = 1562.6 k-ft.
 
From eq.(1): <math>V_{jh} = \frac{M^0}{h_f} = \frac{1562.6(12)}{39} </math> =  480.8 kips
 
From eq. (3): <math>b_{je} = \sqrt{2}D = \sqrt{2} \times 36'' = 50.9'' </math>
 
From eq. (2): <math>v_{jh} = \frac{V_{jh}}{b_{je}h_c} = \frac{480.8}{50.9(36)} </math> =262.39 psi.
 
 
 
<u>Vertical Axial Stress:</u>
 
From eq. (6):
:<math>f_v = \frac {P_c}{b_{je}(h_c + h_b)} = \frac{520}{50.9(36 + 39)} </math> = 136.21psi.
 
<u>Horizontal Axial Stress:</u>
:f<sub>h</sub> = 0 psi.
 
<u>Principal Stresses:</u>
 
From eq. (7):
<math>p_c = \frac {f_c + f_h}{2} + \sqrt{\Big( \frac {f_v - f_h}{2}\Big)^2 + v_{jh}^2} = \frac{136.21 + 0}{2} + \sqrt{\Big( \frac{136.21 - 0}{2}\Big)^2 + 262.39^2}</math>
 
::= 339.19 psi. ≤ 0.3(3000psi.) = 900 psi. '''O.K.'''
 
From eq. (8):
<math>p_t = \frac {f_v + f_h}{2} - \sqrt{\Big( \frac {f_v - f_h}{2}\Big)^2 + v_{jh}^2} = \frac{136.21 + 0}{2} - \sqrt{\Big( \frac{136.21 - 0}{2}\Big)^2 + 262.39^2}</math>
 
::= -202.98 psi. > 3.5<math>\sqrt{3000}</math> = 191.7 psi. '''Not O.K.'''
 
Since p<sub>t</sub> is greater than allowed, special joint reinforcement based on eqs. (9)through (14) are needed.
 
<u>Check moment capacity</u>
 
Check the moment capacity of footing in the long direction to see if it is greater than the overstrength moment capacity of the column.
 
Neglect the effect of the compression reinforcement.
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.10 compression.jpg|center|550px]]
 
:Since C<sub>c</sub> = T
::<math>a = \frac{9.42(60,000)}{0.85(108)(3000)} </math> = 2.0523"
:M<sub>n</sub> = A<sub>s</sub>(f<sub>y</sub>)(d - a/2)
 
::= 9.42(60)(35-(2.0523/2))
::= 1600.17 k-ft.
 
Compare moment capacity of footing overstrength moment capacity of the column:
:1600.17 k-ft > 1562.60 k-ft.
 
Moment capacity of the footing is greater than the overstrength moment of capacity of the column. '''O.K.'''
 
Check the moment capacity of the footing in the short direction to see if it is greater than the overstrength moment capacity of the column.
 
Neglect the effect of the compression reinforcement.
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.10 compression2.jpg|center|550px]]
 
:Since C<sub>c</sub> = T
::<math>a = \frac{9.43(60,000)}{0.85(168)(3000)} </math> = 1.3207"
:M<sub>n</sub> = A<sub>s</sub>(f<sub>y</sub>)(d - a/2)
::= 9.43(60)(35-(1.3207/2))
::= 1619.11 k-ft.
 
Compare moment capacity of footing overstrength moment capacity of the column:
:1619.11 k-ft > 1562.60 k-ft.
 
Moment capacity of the footing is greater than the overstrength moment of capacity of the column. '''O.K.'''
 
'''Design of reinforcement for the column-footing joint'''
 
:- Vertical reinforcement should be placed throughout a distance of h<sub>f</sub>/2 from the column face on each side of the column.
 
::From eq. (16): <math>A_{jv} = 0.5 A_{sc}\frac{f^0_{yc}}{f_{yv}}</math>
:::A<sub>sc</sub> = 15.71 in<sup>2</sup>
:::<math>f^0_{yc}</math> = 1.1 f<sub>y</sub> = 66 ksi.
:::f<sub>yv</sub> = 60 ksi.
:::A<sub>jv</sub> = 0.5 (15.71) (66 / 60) = 8.641 in<sup>2</sup>
 
:- Reinforcement within the joint confines:
 
::From eqs. (9),(10) & (16):
::: <math>A_{vi} = 0.25A_{sc}\frac{f^0_{yc}}{f_{yf}}</math>
:::::= 0.25 (15.71)(66/60) = 4.320 in<sup>2</sup>
 
:- Additional top of footing longitudinal reinforcement:
:::<math>A_{sb} = 0.0625A_{sc}\frac{f^0_{yc}}{f_{yf}}</math>
:::::= 0.0625 (15.70)(66 / 60) = 1.08 in<sup>2</sup>
 
:This reinforcement must be developed at a distance h<sub>b</sub>/2 away from the face of the column and must be placed so that the reinforcement goes through the column reinforcement. A<sub>sb</sub> is required in both directions in the footing.
 
:- Hoop Reinforcement:
 
::From eq. (13): <math> \rho_s = \frac{0.3A_{sc}f^\circ_{yc}}{L^2_af_{yh}}</math>
 
:::L<sub>a</sub> = 35 in.
:::f<sub>yh</sub> = 60 ksi
 
::<math> \rho_s = \frac{0.3 (15.71)(66)}{35^2(60)}</math> = 0.004232
 
::<math> \rho_{s, min} = \frac{3.5 \sqrt{3000}}{60000}</math> = 0.003195
 
::ρs > ρ<sub>s, min</sub> '''∴use ρ<sub>s</sub>'''
 
::Use #5 hoop reinforcement
 
::A<sub>s</sub> = 0.3068
 
::D’ = 36 - 2(2) - 5/8” = 31.375”
 
::ρ<sub>s</sub> = 0.004232
 
::From eq. (15): <math>S = \frac{4A_S}{D'\rho_s} = \frac{4 (0.3068)}{31.375(0.004232)} </math> = 9.24"
 
::'''Use 9” Spacing'''
 
:Note: By adding 3 in. to footing depth in this example problem, the principal tensile stress in the joint would have been less than the maximum allowed tensile stress, thus eliminating the need for the special joint reinforcement other than the minimum required reinforcement. However, the practice of increasing footing depth to eliminate the need for the special joint reinforcement should be limited to increasing the footing depth a maximum of 6 inches.
 
[[image:751.9.3.1.7.11.jpg|center|700px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.40.8.11.5.11 Summary of Column-Footing Joint Reinforcement'''</center>]]
 
 
 
 
 
====751.11.2.1 Elastomeric Bearings====


'''General'''
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


Elastomeric Bearing design shall follow AASHTO LRFD “Method A”.
===751.37.1.2 Materials===
 
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:1px solid #ff0000; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="250px" align="right"
The elastomeric expansion bearings and fixed bearings for steel girders consist of a sole plate and elastomeric bearing pad. Elastomeric bearings at integral end bents and fixed bearings for prestressed girders at intermediate bents consist of elastomeric bearing pad without a sole plate.
 
The sole plates are flat or beveled to match the profile grade of the roadway surface along the centerline of the girder. If the profile grade is equal to or less than 0.01 or the total drop across the bearing is equal to or less than 1/8 inch, then a flat sole plate may be used and if necessary, elastomer thickness increased to address the bearing rotation due to the profile grade. Sole plates are used to anchor girders, ensure uniform distribution of the compressive stress and strain over bearing area and reduce dead load bearing rotations.  
At fixed bearings, [[#751.11.3.6 Girder/Beam Chairs|girder chairs]] may be considered as an alternate if roadway slope, rotation or bearing pressure is requiring tall or large bearing pads.
 
The elastomer bearing pad shall be 60 durometer hardness and reinforced with 1/8 inch steel shim plates when laminated pads are required by design.
 
When rectangular bearings are used, increased rotation bearing capacity can be achieved by orientating the pad with the shorter dimension of the pad parallel with the span of the girder.
<div id="Plain elastomeric bearing pads"></div>
Plain elastomeric bearing pads should be utilized where vertical loads, translations and rotations are relatively small. For integral end bents, use ½” fixed plain pads when taper due to girder slope or grade is less than 1/8”, or use a laminated bearing pad when taper equals or exceeds 1/8” due to girder slope or grade. In the rare circumstance when intermediate bents are made integral by extending the beam cap stirrups into the diaphragm, consideration can be given to utilizing ½” plain pads under similar conditions of slope.
 
Laminated elastomeric bearing pads should be utilized where there is greater need for vertical loading, translational and rotational capacity. For non-integral end bents, non-integral intermediate bents and for integral end bents when taper exceeds 1/8” due to girder slope or grade use laminated elastomeric bearing pads where the pad thickness and number of laminates is based on design that should account for larger vertical loads, translation, rotation and meet slope of girder and grade requirements.
 
 
'''Size Limitations'''
 
Use the values in the standard bearing pad tables if possible. 
 
Bearing pad length shall be 8” minimum for MoDOT Standard Prestressed (P/S) I-Girders, Adjacent P/S Box Beams and Steel I-Girders.
 
Bearing pad length shall be 5” minimum for P/S NU Girders and P/S Spread Box Beams. Not preferred but for consideration of some lower bound limits as used by the Nebraska Department of Roads (NDOR) that developed the NU I-Girder, for P/S NU Girders only, and based on NDOR guidelines, a 4” minimum bearing pad length and/or 2 ft. minimum bearing pad width can be used with Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer approval.
 
Plain Fixed for P/S I-Girder:<br/>
W, width of bearing ≤ Bottom flange width – 1.5”
 
 
Plain Fixed for steel girders:<br/>
Bottom flange width – 2” ≤ W ≤ Bottom flange width
 
 
Laminated Fixed for P/S I-Girder:<br/>
W = Bottom Flange width – 1.5”
 
 
Laminated Expansion Bearing Pads for PS I-Girders and
Laminated Fixed and Expansion Pads for Steel Girders:
<br/>9” ≤ W ≤ Bottom flange width + 7”
 
 
'''Stability'''
 
The following requirement shall be met for ensuring stability of the bearing pad:
 
<u>Rectangular Pads</u>
 
<math>\,h_{rt} \le MIN \big\{L/3, W/3\big\}</math>
 
<u>Circular Pads</u>
 
<math>\,h_{rt} \le {D/4}</math>
 
 
'''Temperature Movement'''
 
Determining temperature movements for bearings requires the calculation of the thermal origin of the bridge.  To accomplish this, the stiffness of each bent must be calculated.  Once the thermal origin is established, the total temperature movement for each bearing location can be found by the following equations:
 
<math>\,\triangle_s = \gamma \alpha</math> (temperature range)x(distance from thermal origin)(0.65)
 
Where:
 
{|
|-
|<math>\,\triangle_s</math> ||= maximum shear deformation of the pad
|-
|-
|<math>\,\gamma</math> ||= 1.2 for laminated pads
|align="center"|'''[[#Commentary on EPG 751.37.1.2 Materials|Commentary for EPG 751.37.1.2 Materials''']]
|-
|&nbsp; ||= 1.0 for PTFE bearings
|-
|<math>\,\alpha</math>||= coefficient of thermal expansion
|-
|&nbsp; ||= 0.0000065 IN/IN/ºF (steel superstructure)
|-
|&nbsp; ||= 0.000006 IN/IN/ºF (concrete superstructure)
|-
|(0.65)||= 65% reduction due to forgiving nature of elastomer (LRFD 14.7.6.3.4)
|}
|}
{|
|-
Concrete used for drilled shaft for traffic structures in accordance with standard plan 903.15 shall be Class B concrete with minimum compressive strength, f’<sub>c</sub> = 3 ksi. For all other drilled shaft construction concrete shall be Class B-2 with minimum compressive strength, f’<sub>c</sub> = 4 ksi.
|temperature range ||= 150ºF (steel superstructure)
|-
|&nbsp; ||= 120ºF (concrete superstructure)
|}
 
 
'''Shear Deformation'''
 
Both plain elastomeric and laminated elastomeric shall meet the following criteria for shear deformation.
 
<math>\, h_{rt} \ge\ 2 \triangle_s</math>
 
Where:
 
<math>\, h_{rt}</math> = total elastomer thickness, in.
 
The following table represents the available heights of laminated expansion pads that are required due to the shear deformation criteria.  PTFE type bearings shall be used if <math>\,\triangle_s >2.5\ in.</math>
 
<center>
{|border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="1" align="center"
|+'''Laminated Expansion Bearing Pad Heights'''
|-
!colspan="6" align="center"|Laminated Expansion Pads
|-
|<math>\,\triangle_s</math>, in.||Interior layer thickness, in.||Exterior layer thickness, in.||<math>\,h_{rt}</math>, in.||n||C, in.
|-
|1/2||1/2||1/4||1||2||1 1/4
|-
|3/4||1/2||1/4||1 1/2||3||1 7/8
|-
|1||1/2||1/4||2||4||2 1/2
|-
|1 1/4||1/2||1/4||2 1/2||5||3 1/8
|-
|1 1/2||1/2||1/4||3||6||3 3/4
|-
|1 3/4||1/2||1/4||3 1/2||7||4 3/8
|-
|2||1/2||1/4||4||8||5
|-
|2 1/4||1/2||1/4||4 1/2||9||5 5/8
|-
|2 1/2||1/2||1/4||5||10||6 1/4
|}</center>


Where:
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


{|
===751.37.1.3 Casing===
|C ||= total thickness of bearing including steel shims, in.
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:1px solid #ff0000; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="250px" align="right"
|-
|-
|n|| = total number of interior layers of elastomer + 1*
|align="center"|'''[[#Commentary on EPG 751.37.1.3 Casing|Commentary for EPG 751.37.1.3 Casing''']]
|}
|}


'''*''' The additional “1” is accounting for the two exterior layers as per LRFD 14.7.5.3.5
'''Drilled shafts for bridge structures:'''
 
 
'''Compressive Stress'''
 
Service loads without including dynamic load allowance shall be used for design checks. 
 
At intermediate bents with 2 bearing pads per girder line (i.e. PS I-girders), use ½ of the live load reaction for each pad.
 
 
''Total Load''
 
Plain Elastomeric Pad
 
<math>\, \sigma_{TL} \le \ 0.800 ksi</math>
 
 
''Laminated Elastomeric Pad''
 
<math>\, \sigma_{TL} \le 1.00 GS</math>
 
and
 
<math>\, \sigma_{TL} \le 1.0 ksi</math>
 


''Minimum Dead Load''
All drilled shafts shall have permanent casing installed through overburden soils to prevent caving of these soils during construction. Drilled shafts shall be socketed into bedrock. Welded or seamless steel permanent casing shall be in accordance with [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Sec 701].


<math>\, \sigma_{DLmin} \ge 0.200 ksi</math>
Rock sockets shall be uncased.


Permanent Casing Thickness Design and Plan Reporting:
: Any drilled shaft for a major bridge over a river or lake <u>or</u> any drilled shaft longer than 80 feet or any drilled shaft greater than 6 feet in diameter shall have a minimum casing thickness of 1/2 inch specified unless a greater thickness is required by design for strength. The thickness of casing in either case shall be shown on the bridge plans and noted as a minimum.
: All other drilled shafts shall not have a minimum casing thickness specified unless a specific thickness is required by design for strength. The minimum thickness in the latter case shall be shown on the bridge plans and noted as a minimum.
: For drilled shaft stiffness computations and load distribution analysis, use the minimum casing thickness required. When a minimum casing thickness is not required, assume a casing thickness of 3/8” for the analysis.


The 200 psi minimum requirement is intended for preventing the horizontal crawling of the bearing when it is not attached to the top surface. This requirement has been applied to the bearing designs detailed in EPG 751 even though these bearings are detailed with positive attachment to the flange of the girder. Compliance with the requirement is desirable but is not mandatory if it results in a special bearing design or special superstructure treatments.


<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


Where:
===751.37.1.5 Related Provisions===
{|
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:1px solid #ff0000; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="250px" align="right"
|<math>\,\sigma_{TL}</math>||= compressive stress due to total load = <math>\, \frac{DC + DW + LL} {L \times W}</math>
|-
|<math>\,\sigma_{DLmax}</math>||=compressive stress due to maximum dead load = <math>\, \frac{DC + DW } {L \times W}</math>
|-
|-
|<math>\,\sigma_{DLmin}</math>||=compressive stress due to minimum dead load = <math>\, \frac{DC} {L \times W}</math>
|align="center"|'''[[#Commentary on EPG 751.37.1.5 Related Provisions|Commentary for EPG 751.37.1.5 Related Provisions''']]
|-
|G ||= shear modulus = 0.130 ksi for compressive stress calculations
|-
|S ||= shape factor for thickest layer of elastomer = <math>\, \frac{LW}{2h_{ri}(L + W)}</math>
|-
|S ||= shape factor for circular pads = <math>\, \frac{D}{4h_{ri}}</math>
|-
|<math>\,h_{ri}</math> ||= thickness of the i<sup>th</sup> elastomer layer, in.
|}
|}
The provisions of these guidelines were developed presuming that design parameters required to apply the provisions are established following current MoDOT site characterization protocols as described in EPG 321.  Specific attention is drawn to [[321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation|EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation]].  The provisions provided in these guidelines presume that parameter variability, as generally represented by the coefficient of variation (COV), is established following procedures in EPG 321.3.


Sign structure drilled shaft supports are the exception. Sign structure standard drilled shafts are developed using assumed soil properties and following AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 9<sup>th</sup> Edition for design. Site specific designs for drilled shafts for sign structure support may also follow AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 9<sup>th</sup> Edition if there is not enough geotechnical information available to establish the COV.


'''Rotation'''
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


Rotations shall be taken as the maximum possible change in slope between the top and bottom surfaces of the bearing caused by the initial lack of parallelism between the bottom of girder flange and top of bearing and the girder end rotation due to imposed loads and movements. Rotations may be calculated by a straight-line approximation of dead and live load deflections taken at 1/10 or 1/4 points. The following equation must be satisfied to ensure that uplift does not occur under any combination of loads and corresponding rotation:
===751.37.1.6 Drilled Shaft General Detail Considerations===
For Seismic detail requirements for seismic design category, SDC B, C and D, See [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2_LRFD_Seismic_Details|EPG 751.9.1.2 LRFD Seismic Details]].


Rectangular Laminated Elastomeric Pad
[[image:751.37.1.6 01.png|700px|center]]


<math>\,\sigma_{s} \ge \ 0.5GS \left (\frac{L}{h_{ri}} \right)^2 \frac{\theta_s}{n}</math>
Pay items shown in above table are for example only, show actual pay items and quantities in plan details for specific project.
 
Where:
{|
|L|| = length of bearing pad in the direction of traffic
|-
|W ||= width of bearing pad in the direction perpendicular to traffic
|-
|G ||= shear modulus = 0.200 ksi for rotation calculations
|-
|<math>\,\theta_s</math> ||= maximum rotation about the transverse axis due to initial lack of  parallelism and total service load, rad 
|-
|n ||= total number of interior layers of elastomer + 1*
|}
 
'''*''' The additional “1” is accounting for the two exterior layers as per LRFD 14.7.5.3.5
 
 
Plain elastomeric pads contained within integral concrete diaphragms are not subject to this rotation requirement.
 
This criteria is intended as an uplift check. If uplift is not possible at the bearing due to an integral diaphragm/beam at the abutment or an integral diaphragm/beam at an intermediate bent, then this criteria would not be applicable.
 
Circular Laminated Elastomeric Pad
 
<math>\,\sigma_{s} \ge \ 0.375GS \left (\frac{D}{h_{ri}} \right)^2 \frac{\theta_s}{n}</math>
 
Where:
 
D = diameter of pad
 
 
'''Compressive Deflection'''
 
Deflections of elastomeric bearings should be limited to ensure that deck joints and seals are not damaged.  Also, bearings that are too flexible can produce a small step across a deck joint giving rise to a high impact loading when traffic passes from one girder to the other.  The maximum relative deflection across a joint is suggested to be less than 1/8”.
 
Initial compressive deflection of plain elastomeric or in any layer of steel reinforced elastomeric bearing at the service limit state without impact shall not exceed <math>\, 0.07 h_{ri}</math>.
 
Values for compressive strain can be calculated by using LRFD Figure C14.7.6.3.3-1 for 60 durometer reinforced bearings.
 
There is a code check for compressive deflection of a single layer but no code check for total compressive deflection.
 
<div id="Taper"></div>
'''Taper'''
 
When the difference between the slope of the girder and the slope of a bearing pad exceeds 1/8” taper shall be considered. For laminated expansion pads for both PS I-Girders and steel girders and for laminated fixed pads for steel girders where sole plates are required, sole plates shall be tapered to account for the girder slope. Sole plates shall have a minimum thickness of 1 1/2” at the centerline of bearing, and a minimum thickness of 1” at the edge. Plain fixed pads shall not be tapered. At integral end bents where girder slope is greater than 1/8”, use laminated fixed pads. Laminated bearing taper is provided by tapering the top shim to match the slope of the girder to the nearest 1/8” total difference in thickness. Thickness of shims shall be a minimum of 1/8” and a maximum of 1/2”. For excessive girder slopes it may be necessary to taper the top two shims with a maximum combined taper of the bearing of 3/4 inch. Tapered layers of elastomer are not permitted.
 
[[Image:751.11.2.1 taper.jpg|center|800px]]
 
<div id="Anchor Bolts"></div>
'''Anchor Bolts'''
 
Check with Structural Project Manager or Liaison before using anchor bolts other than ASTM F1554. When anchor bolts are used for laminated fixed for steel girders or laminated expansion for steel and P/S I-girders, they should be designed for a minimum horizontal force equal to 25% of the maximum dead load applied to the bearing. With SPM approval for rehab superstructure job designer may design anchor bolt for a minimum horizontal force equal to 15% of the maximum dead load applied to the bearing. Designer may ignore live load in horizontal force computation. Anchor bolts shall be ASTM F1554 Grade 55 unless higher grade anchor bolts are required to meet design requirements. Grade 105 bolts shall not be used in applications where welding to the bolt is required. (Revise anchor bolt notes in [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]] for plans with different grade and nuts, e.g. “ASTM F1554 Grade 55” to “ASTM F1554 Grade 105” and “ASTM A563 Grade A Heavy Hex nuts” to “ASTM A563 Grade DH Heavy Hex nuts”.


''Notes:''
: (1) Number of pipes (equally spaced) for Sonic Logging Testing (for bridge structures only):
:: Diameter ≤ 2.5 ft: 2 pipes
:: Diameter >2.5 ft but ≤ 3.5 ft: 3 pipes
:: Diameter >3.5 ft but ≤ 5.0 ft: 4 pipes
:: Diameter >5.0 ft but ≤ 8.0 ft: 5 pipes
:: Diameter >8.0 ft: 6 pipes
: Single diameter reinforcing cage is typically used. Modify details based on design for single or multiple-diameter cages and splice location(s).
: See [[#751.37.1.3 Casing|EPG 751.37.1.3]] for casing requirements for bridge structures and non-bridge structures.
: When determining P bar diameter for barbill, assume 3/8” casing unless otherwise specified.
: See [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#G8. Drilled Shaft|EPG 751.50, G8]], for notes to include for drilled shafts and rock sockets (starting at G8.1).
: (2) See [[#751.37.1.1 Dimensions and Nomenclature|EPG 751.37.1.1 Dimensions and Nomenclature]] for [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/751.37.1.1_Drilled_Shaft_Design_Aid.docx Design Aid: Minimum Rock Socket Length].
: (3) When difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is 6" a single reinforcement cage is typically used for the socket and shaft and the vertical reinforcement extends into the column. A separate column steel cage is then placed around the protruding shaft reinforcement without requiring an adjustment to minimum cover for rock socket or column reinforcement. When difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is 12” either the vertical column steel or dowels will need to be extended into the shaft or the cover in the socket and shaft will need to be increased to allow the shaft reinforcement to extend into the column. In the former scenario an optional construction joint is recommended as discussed in note 4 for oversized shafts. In the latter scenario the same number of vertical bars should be used in the shaft and column to allow the shaft bars to be tied to the column cage. Any reduction in cage diameter required for fit-up shall be considered in design.
: (4) When difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is greater than 12" (oversized shaft generally 18" to 24" larger than column), show "Optional construction joint" at bottom of column/dowel reinforcement in the drilled shaft and use [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#G8._Drilled_Shaft|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes G8.8 and G8.9]] in plan details.


<center>
<center>
{|border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="1" align="center" style="text-align:center;"
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
!colspan="11"|Bolt properties (Updated in 2022)
|+
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="400" |'''[https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings Bridge Standard Drawings]'''</br> (Drilled Shafts - DSS → As Built Drilled Shaft Data [DSS_01])
|-
|-
!width="225"|Bolt Type!!width="150"| Nominal Bolt<br/>Diameter (in.)!!width="125"| Min. Tensile<br/>Strength (ksi)!!width="125"| Min. Yield <br/>Strength (ksi)!!width="250"| Comments
|align="center"|[https://www.modot.org/media/14725 As Built Drilled Shaft Data (PDF)]
|-
|ASTM F1554 (Grade 36)|| ½” to 4”|| 58|| 36||rowspan="3"| Preferred specification for structural supports anchored into concrete.
|-
|ASTM F1554 (Grade 55)|| ½” to 4”|| 75|| 55
|-
|ASTM F1554 (Grade 105)|| ½” to 3”|| 125|| 105
|-
|rowspan="3"|ASTM A449<br/>Type 1<br/>Type 3 (weathering)||¼” to 1”||120||92||Rowspan="2"|Material properties are applicable for old A325 bolts (Pre-2016). May be manufactured as a threaded rod.
|-
| over 1” to 1 ½” ||105|| 81
|-
| 1 ¾” to 3”|| 90|| 58||Typically used for larger diameter headed anchors for bearings in girder shelves.
|-
|ASTM A307|| ¼” to 4”|| 60|| NA||Typically used for regular strength steel connections. Should not be used for applications that require significant tensile or flexural forces on the bolt.
|-
|ASTM F3125 Grade A325<br/>Type 1<br/>Type 3 (weathering)|| ½” to 1 ½”||120|| 92|| Typically used as high strength fasteners, but also used as headed anchors for bearings in girder shelves.
|-
|ASTM F3125 Grade A490<br/>Type 1<br/>Type 3 (weathering)|| ½” to 1 ½”|| 150|| 130|| Typically used as high-strength fastener. Galvanization is not allowed.
|-
|colspan="5" align="left"|Note: The above table is a comprehensive list for bolts typically used in structural applications on MoDOT projects. These values will aid designers when substitutions need to be made for similar design applications.
|}
|}
</center>
</center>
Anchor bolts are used on bearings with sole plates. For bridges that require seismic details only, design anchor bolts for flexure and shear induced from horizontal seismic forces and design for tension due to uplift forces if present. For bridges that require a seismic analysis, design anchor bolts for flexure induced from horizontal seismic forces and separately design for the effects of combined tension and shear.
Limit the number of bolts per bearing to four. Concrete Shear blocks shall be used  when anchor bolts cannot be designed to resist earthquake loading. For shear blocks details for P/S girder see, [[751.22 Prestressed Concrete I Girders#751.22.3.13 Concrete Shear Blocks|EPG 751.22.3.13 Concrete Shear Blocks]]. Use similar details for shear blocks for steel girder.
Bearing details are shown in [[751.11 Bearings#751.11.3 Details|EPG 751.11.3 Details]] for two 1 ½”, 2” and 2 ½“ diameter anchor bolts. Consult Structural Project Manager before using bolt diameters larger than 2 1/2". Revise bearing details if four anchor bolts are required by design. For larger than 2 ½” diameter anchor bolt revise details in [[751.11 Bearings#751.11.3.5 Anchor Bolts|EPG 751.11.3.5 Anchor Bolts]], bearing details and anchor bolt notes in [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]].
'''For seismic details only (strength limit states)'''
Anchorage shall be adequate to resist lateral loads.
Horizontal factored shear force, <math>{F_H} = \sqrt{(F_T)^2 + (F_L)^2}</math> in kips per girder
For expansion bearings, transverse F<sub>T</sub> = max (A<sub>s</sub>, 0.25)(DL) per girder & longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = 0.
Where DL = unfactored dead load reaction at the bent, kips
::A<sub>s</sub> = Acceleration Coefficient (effective peak ground acceleration coefficient)
For fixed bearings, transverse F<sub>T</sub> = max (A<sub>s</sub>, 0.25)(DL) per girder and Longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = max (A<sub>s</sub>, 0.25)(segment weight)/(# of girders)
Segment weight includes the full width of superstructure and should be distributed appropriately among fixed bents.
When centrifugal forces are present, they should be checked independently (not combined with seismic loads shown above or below). Use a 1.75 load factor with the centrifugal force and check resistance at the Strength Limit state as described below.
'''For complete seismic analysis '''
Anchor bolt designs must meet requirements for strength limit states from above as well as seismic forces from seismic analysis. Anchorage shall be adequate to resist lateral loads as well as uplift force from seismic analysis.
''At Intermediate bent, ''
:<math>{F_H} = \frac{\sqrt{\sum{V_L}^2 + \sum{V_T}^2}}{{N_G}}</math>
where:
F<sub>H</sub> = horizontal seismic force per girder, kips
::If columns are designed for plastic hinging, use the plastic hinging shear.
<math>\sum{V_L}</math> = summation of top of column longitudinal shears at the bent
<math>\sum{V_T}</math> = summation of top of column transverse shears at the bent
N<sub>G</sub> = number of girders at the bent
''At end bents ''
Use the same formula as above, except substitute the abutment shears in place of the top of column shears.


:<math>{P_u} = \frac{F_H}{{n_b}R}</math>
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


P<sub>u</sub> = horizontal factored shear force per bolt, kips
==751.37.2 General Design Procedure and Limit States==
 
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:1px solid #ff0000; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="250px" align="right"  
n<sub>b</sub> = the number of bolts per girder
 
For intermediate bent, R = 1.0
 
For end bent, R = 1.0 for seismic category A & B and 0.8 for seismic category C & D.
 
 
'''Flexural Resistance '''
 
Factored flexural stress shall be less than or equal to the nominal flexural resistance. Assume the bolt is restrained from rotation by the sole plate, but free to translate.
M = P<sub>u</sub> x L/2 = maximum moment per bolt, inch-kips
 
L = moment arm from center of sole plate to top of the beam cap, inches
 
S = section modulus for the bolt <math>=\frac{\pi D^3}{32}</math>, cubic inches.
 
D = minimum body diameter, inches. For F1554 bolts use D = 0.92 x nominal bolt diameter. Alternately, the minimum body diameter can be retrieved from ASTM F1554 Table 4. For all other bolt types the nominal bolt diameter may be used because the bolt is unthreaded in the flexural zone and the minimum body diameter is similar to the nominal diameter.
 
:<math>{f_b} = \frac{M}{S} \le {\empty_f}{F_Y}</math>
 
Where:
 
∅<sub>f</sub> = 1.0 resistance factor for seismic details only (strength limit states) and for complete seismic analysis
 
Yield strength of the anchor bolt, F<sub>Y</sub> = 55 ksi for Grade 55 and F<sub>Y</sub> = 105 ksi for Grade 105
 
 
'''Shear Resistance'''
 
Factored shear force shall be less than or equal to the nominal shear resistance.  
 
:<math>{P_u} \le {\empty_s}{R_n}</math>
 
where:
 
∅<sub>s</sub> = 0.75 resistance for seismic details only (strength limit states) and 1.0 for complete seismic analysis
 
Nominal shear resistance of an F1554 anchor bolt, R<sub>n</sub> = 0.5A<sub>b</sub>F<sub>ub</sub>N<sub>s</sub> &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LRFD 6.13.2.12-1, C6.13.2.7 and 14.8.3
 
Note: ASTM F1554 allows the body diameter of the bolt to be reduced to provide an area not less than the stress area of the threaded portion of the bolt. For this reason, there are no differences in calculation for threads beings included or excluded from the shear plane. If another type of bolt is used for any reason the nominal shear resistance should be determined from LRFD Eq. 6.13.2.7-1 or 2.
 
A<sub>b</sub> <math>= \frac{\pi D^2}{4}</math> = nominal area of the anchor bolt, square inches
 
F<sub>ub</sub> = minimum tensile strength of the anchor bolt, ksi
 
: = 75 ksi for Grade 55, 125 ksi for Grade 105
 
N<sub>s</sub> = number of shear plane per anchor bolt = 1
 
D = nominal bolt diameter, inches
 
 
'''Tensile Resistance'''
 
Factored tensile force shall be less than or equal to the nominal tensile resistance.
 
T = the maximum seismic tensile (uplift) force (DL ± EQ) per girder from the seismic analysis, kips. If (DL+EQ) and (DL-EQ) are both compressive, then there is no need to design the bolts for tensile force.
 
:<math>\frac{T}{{n_b}} \le {\empty_t}{T_n}</math>
 
Where:
 
∅<sub>t</sub> = 0.8 resistance factor for seismic details only (strength limit states) and 1.0 for complete seismic analysis
 
n<sub>b</sub> = the number of bolts per girder
 
Nominal tensile resistance of the anchor bolt, T<sub>n</sub> = 0.76A<sub>b</sub>F<sub>ub</sub> &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LRFD 6.13.2.10.2-1 and 14.8.3
 
:where:
:A<sub>b</sub> = nominal area of the anchor bolt, square inches
:F<sub>ub</sub> = minimum tensile strength of the anchor bolt, ksi
:: = 75 ksi for Grade 55, 125 ksi for Grade 105
 
 
'''Combined Tension and Shear Resistance'''
 
The resistance of anchor bolts for combined tension and shear force shall be determined in accordance with LRFD 6.13.2.11.
 
If <math>\frac{P_u}{R_n} \le 0.33</math>, then T<sub>n</sub> = 0.76A<sub>b</sub>F<sub>ub</sub> &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LRFD 6.13.2.11-1
 
Otherwise
 
 
:<math>{T_n} = 0.76{A_b}{F_{ub}} \Big[ 1 - \big( \frac{{p_u}}{{\empty_s}{R_n}} \big)^2 \Big]^{0.5}</math>  &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LRFD 6.13.2.11-2
 
 
'''Strength Limit States and Seismic Details only'''
Maximum horizontal factored shear force reaction, F<sub>H</sub> for given anchor bolts and total thickness of bearing including steel shims:
 
<center>
{|border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="1" align="center" style="text-align:center;"
! !! colspan="2"|Max. shear deformation of the pad, ∆s, in.!!1/4!! 1/2!! 3/4!! 1!!    1 1/4!! 1 1/2!! 1 3/4!! 2!!    2 1/4
|-
! !! colspan="2"|Total thick. of bearing including steel shims, C in.!! 1 1/4!! 1 7/8!! 2 1/2!! 3 1/8!! 3 3/4!! 4 3/8!! 5!!    5 5/8!! 6 1/4
|-
!Anchor Bolt Type!! No. of Anchor<br/>Bolt!! Nominal dia. of anchor bolt, in.!!colspan="9"| Maximum horizontal factored shear force reaction, F<sub>H</sub>
|-
|rowspan="6"|ASTM F1554<br/>Grade 55||rowspan="3"|2|| 1.5|| 28|| 22|| 17|| 15|| 13|| 11|| 10|| 9|| 8
|-
| 2|| 67 ||51|| 41|| 35|| 30|| 26|| 23|| 21|| 19
|-
| 2.5|| 131|| 100|| 81|| 68|| 58|| 51|| 46|| 41|| 38
|-
|rowspan="3"|4|| 1.5|| 57|| 43|| 35|| 29|| 25|| 22|| 20|| 18|| 16
|-
| 2|| 135|| 103|| 83|| 69|| 60|| 53|| 47|| 42|| 38
|-
|-
| 2.5|| 263|| 200|| 162|| 136|| 117|| 103|| 91|| 82|| 75
|align="center"|'''[[#Commentary on EPG 751.37.2 General Design Procedure and Limit States|Commentary for EPG 751.37.2 General Design Procedure and Limit States''']]
|-
|rowspan="6"|ASTM F1554<br/>Grade 105||rowspan="3"|2 ||1.5 ||54 ||41 ||33 ||28 ||24 ||21 ||19 ||17 ||15
|-
| 2 ||128 ||98 ||79 ||66 ||57 ||50 ||45 ||40 ||37
|-
| 2.5 ||251 ||191 ||154 ||129 ||111 ||98 ||87 ||79 ||72
|-
|rowspan="3"|4 ||1.5 ||108 ||83 ||67 ||56 ||48 ||42 ||38 ||34 ||31
|-
| 2 ||257 ||196 ||158 ||133 ||114 ||100 ||89 ||81 ||73
|-
| 2.5 ||502 ||382 ||309 ||259 ||223 ||196 ||174 ||157 ||143
|-
|valign="top"|'''Notes:'''||align="left" colspan="11"|Calculations were based on 1-1/2" thick sole plate at centerline of bearing.<br/>Flexural resistance calculations were based on minimum body diameter of the anchor bolt.<br/>For centrifugal forces, check anchor bolts for separate load.<br/>For complete seismic analysis case, design anchor bolts as explained above. 
|}
</center>
 
 
 
 
 
===751.22.2.7 Dowel Bars===
 
 
[[Image:751.22.3.15.jpg|center|650px]]
 
 
{|border="0" cellpadding="5" align="center" style="text-align:center"
 
|width="540"|'''PART ELEVATION<br/>(FIXED BENT)'''
|width="240" align="left"|'''SECTION A-A'''
 
|}
|}
Drilled shafts should be sized (diameter and length) to support the required factored loads in the most cost effective manner possible without excessive deflections.  The initial diameter and length of drilled shafts are generally established considering vertical loading at the strength limit state(s) according to EPG 751.37.3.  The resulting shaft should then be evaluated at the axial and lateral serviceability limit states (settlement and lateral deflection) according to EPG 751.37.4 and EPG 751.37.5, where the shaft dimensions shall be adjusted if serviceability requirements are not satisfied. 


The Strength Limit State and applicable Extreme Event Limit States shall be investigated when calculating the soil and structural resistance of the drilled shaft. The Service I Limit State shall be used when evaluating lateral deflection and settlement.


::::Dowel bars shall be used for all fixed intermediate bents under prestressed superstructures. Generally, for typical bridges that require seismic details only (strength limit states), shear resistance from shear key is not considered.
'''Guidance'''
 
 
Dowel bars connect standard concrete diaphragms and beams on concrete girder bridges (standard fixed diaphragms are those with beam stirrups NOT extending up into the diaphragm). For a calculated seismic vertical reaction or an anticipated foundation settlement resulting in a net tensile reaction, use the development length of dowel bars into beam and into diaphragm based on dowel bar size. If the dowel bars are not exposed to net tension a 15-inch embedment shall be used regardless of bar size. Dowel bars size and spacing shall be determined by shear design of the bars. (Minimum #6 Bars @ 12" cts.). Dowel bars should be designed for a minimum horizontal force equal to 25% of the maximum dead load applied to the bearing. Live load is ignored in horizontal force computation. For seismic design category SDC B, C and D, dowel bars shall develop minimum L<sub>d</sub> into diaphragm but shall not extend into slab and develop minimum L<sub>d</sub> into beam but 3” minimum clear from bottom face of the beam. Dowel bars shall not be hooked to meet development requirements.
 
:The number of dowels must also fit into the space available on the key:
::min. bar size = #6; max. bar size = #11
::min. spacing = 6"; max. spacing = 12"
::min. end distance = 3"; max. end distance = 6" (≤ half the spacing)
 
'''For seismic details only (strength limit states)'''
 
Horizontal factored shear force, <math>F_H = \sqrt {(F_T)^2 + (F_L)^2}</math> in kips
 
For expansion bearings, transverse F<sub>T</sub> = max (A<sub>s</sub>, 0.25)(DL) & longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = 0 per girder.
:Where DL = unfactored dead load reaction at the bent, kips
::A<sub>s</sub> = Acceleration Coefficient (effective peak ground acceleration coefficient)
 
For fixed bearings, Transverse F<sub>T</sub> = max (A<sub>s</sub>, 0.25)(DL) and Longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = max (A<sub>s</sub>, 0.25)(segment weight) at bent.
:Segment weight includes the full width of superstructure and should be distributed appropriately among fixed bents.
 
 
'''For complete seismic analysis '''
 
Dowel bar designs must meet requirements for strength limit states from above as well as seismic force demand from seismic analysis.
 
:''At Intermediate bent,''
::<math>F_H = \sqrt {\sum (V_L)^2 + \sum (V_T)^2}</math>
 
:where:
 
:F<sub>H</sub> = horizontal seismic force per bent, kips
:::If columns are designed for plastic hinging, use the plastic hinging shear.
:∑V<sub>L</sub> = summation of top of column longitudinal shears at the bent
:∑V<sub>T</sub> = summation of top of column transverse shears at the bent
 
::<math>P_u = \frac{F_H}{n_d}</math>
:P<sub>u</sub> = Horizontal factored shear force per dowel bar, kips
:n<sub>d</sub> = number of dowel bars
 
 
'''Shear Resistance'''
 
Factored shear force shall be less than or equal to the nominal shear resistance.
 
::''P<sub>u</sub> ≤ ∅<sub>s</sub> x R<sub>n</sub>''
 
:where:
:∅<sub>s</sub> = 0.75 resistance for seismic details only (strength limit states) and 1.0 for complete seismic analysis
 
:Nominal shear resistance of the dowel bar, R<sub>n</sub> = 0.625 A<sub>b</sub>F<sub>ub</sub>, kips
::Note: Since there is no reduced areas as seen in bolts and there is no reduction for bolted connection length, use 0.625 instead of 0.5.
 
:A<sub>b</sub> = <math>\frac {\pi D^3}{4}</math> = area of the dowel bar, square inches
:F<sub>ub</sub> = minimum tensile strength of the dowel bar, ksi
:F<sub>ub</sub> = 80 ksi for Grade 60
:D = diameter of the dowel bar, inch
 
 
'''Tensile Resistance'''
 
Factored tensile force shall be less than or equal to the nominal tensile resistance.
 
:T = the maximum seismic tensile (uplift) force (DL ± EQ) from the seismic analysis, kips. If (DL+EQ) and (DL-EQ) are both compressive, then there is no need to design the dowel for tensile force.
 
::<math>\frac{T}{n_d} \le {\empty_t} T_n</math>
 
:where:
:∅<sub>t</sub>= 0.8 resistance factor for seismic details only (strength limit states) and 1.0 for complete seismic analysis
:n<sub>d</sub> = the number of dowel bars
 
:Nominal tensile resistance of the dowel bar, T<sub>n</sub> = A<sub>b</sub>F<sub>ub</sub> Kips
::Note: Since there is no pretension or reduced areas as seen for bolts, the 0.76 factor is not warranted.
 
:A<sub>b</sub> = area of the dowel bar, square inches
:F<sub>ub</sub> = minimum tensile strength of the dowel bar, ksi
:F<sub>ub</sub> = 80 ksi for Grade 60
 
 
'''Combined Tension and Shear Resistance'''
 
The resistance of dowel bars for combined tension and shear force shall be determined in accordance with LRFD 6.13.2.11.
:Note: Since there is no pretension or reduced areas as seen for bolts, the 0.76 factor is not warranted.
 
 
:If <math>\frac{P_u}{R_n} \le 0.33</math>, then T<sub>n</sub> = A<sub>b</sub>F<sub>ub</sub>
::Otherwise
:::<math>T_n = A_b F_{ub} \Big[ 1- \Big(\frac{p_u}{\empty_s R_n} \Big)^2 \Big]^{0.5}</math>
 
 
 
 
===751.31.1.2 Rigid Frame- No Tie or Web Beam===
 
[[Image:751.31.1.2.jpg|center|450px]]
 
Beam
 
:A = Length to be determined by the superstructure requirements or the [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria, to the
::nearest 1”.  Use square ends.
 
:B = Width to be determined by the minimum of:  superstructure requirements, [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria, or
::column diameter + 6”.  (6” increments) (*)
 
:C = Depth as required by design.  2’-6” minimum and no less than the column diameter. (3” increments) (*)
 
:'''*''' For SDC A ratio of beam width to beam depth, B/C, shall be ≤ 1.25. For SDC B, C and D, beam depth shall be proportioned to D ≤ C ≤ 1.25 D. &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; SGS 8.13.5-1
 
Columns
 
:D = Column diameter.  2’-6” minimum.  Use 3’-0” minimum when the beam depth exceeds 3’-6”.  (6” increments)
 
:D' = Beam width overhang.  Controlled by one of the following:
::1) Beam width controlled by superstructure requirements
 
:::<math>\, \Rightarrow</math> 3” ≤ D' ≤ 6”
 
::2) Beam width controlled by [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria.
:::<math>\, \Rightarrow</math>3” ≤ D' ≤ 15”
 
:L = Spacing as determined by design, with no limit.  (1” increments)
 
:G = Overhang as determined by design, with no limits.
 
:H = Column height as required by grade and footing elevations.  Use construction joint in column when H exceeds 35’-0”.
 
 
:NOTE:  Try to keep columns and beams the same size where possible for economy of construction.
 
 
 
 
===751.31.1.3 Web Beam – Web Supporting Beam===
 
[[Image:751.31.1.3 2019.jpg|center|450px]]
 
Beam
 
:A = Length to be determined by the superstructure requirements or the [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria, to the
::nearest 1”.  Use square ends.
 
:B = Width to be determined by the minimum of:  superstructure requirements, [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria, or
::column diameter + 6”.  (6” increments) (*)
 
:C = Depth as required by design.  2’-6” minimum and no less than the column diameter. (3” increments) (*)
 
:'''*''' For SDC A ratio of beam width to beam depth, B/C, shall be ≤ 1.25. For SDC B, C and D, beam depth shall be proportioned to D ≤ C ≤ 1.25 D. &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; SGS 8.13.5-1
 
Columns
 
:D = Column diameter.  3’-0” minimum. (6” increments)
 
:D' = Beam width overhang.  Controlled by one of the following:
::1) Beam width controlled by superstructure requirements
 
:::<math>\, \Rightarrow</math> 3” ≤ D' ≤ 6”
 
::2) Beam width controlled by [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria.
:::<math>\, \Rightarrow</math>3” ≤ D' ≤ 15”
 
:L = Spacing as determined by design, with 35'-0" maximum.  (1” increments)
 
:G = Overhang as determined by design, with no limits.
 
:H = Column height as required by grade and footing elevations. 
 
Webs
:T = Web thickness.  For a 3’-0” column diameter, use T = column diameter.  For column diameters ≥ 3’-6”, use T = 0.5 x (column diameter).
:H' = See bottom elevations of web given on the Design Layout.
 
 
 
:NOTE:  Try to keep columns and beams the same size where possible for economy of construction.
 
 
 
 
 
 
===751.31.1.4 Tie Beam===
[[Image:751.31.1.4.jpg|center|450px]]
 
Beam
 
:A = Length to be determined by the superstructure requirements or the [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria, to the
::nearest 1”.  Use square ends.
 
:B = Width to be determined by the minimum of:  superstructure requirements, [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria, or
::column diameter + 6”.  (6” increments) (*)
 
:C = Depth as required by design.  2’-6” minimum and no less than the column diameter. (3” increments) (*)
 
:'''*''' For SDC A ratio of beam width to beam depth, B/C, shall be ≤ 1.25. For SDC B, C and D, beam depth shall be proportioned to D ≤ C ≤ 1.25 D. &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; SGS 8.13.5-1
 
Columns
 
:D = Column diameter.  3’-0” minimum. (6” increments)
 
:D' = Beam width overhang.  Controlled by one of the following:
::1) Beam width controlled by superstructure requirements
 
:::<math>\, \Rightarrow</math> 3” ≤ D' ≤ 6”
 
::2) Beam width controlled by [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria.
:::<math>\, \Rightarrow</math>3” ≤ D' ≤ 15”
 
:L = Spacing as determined by design, with 30'-0" maximum.  (1” increments)
 
:G = Overhang as determined by design, with no limits.
 
:H = Column height as required by grade and footing elevations. 
 
Tie Beam
:T = Tie beam thickness.  Minimum T = 0.5 x (column diameter).
:H' = See bottom elevations of tie beam given on the Design Layout.  Minimum H' = 2 x T (round to the next foot higher).
 
 
 
:NOTE:  Try to keep columns and beams the same size where possible for economy of construction.
 
 
 
 
 
===751.31.1.5 Tie Beam with Change in Column Diameter===
 
[[Image:751.31.1.5.jpg|center|450px]]
 
Beam
 
:A = Length to be determined by the superstructure requirements or the [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria, to the
::nearest 1”.  Use square ends.
 
:B = Width to be determined by the minimum of:  superstructure requirements, [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria, or
::column diameter + 6”.  (6” increments) (*)
 
:C = Depth as required by design.  2’-6” minimum and no less than the column diameter. (3” increments) (*)
 
:'''*''' For SDC A ratio of beam width to beam depth, B/C, shall be ≤ 1.25. For SDC B, C and D, beam depth shall be proportioned to D1 ≤ C ≤ 1.25 D1. &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; SGS 8.13.5-1
 
Columns
 
:D1 = Column diameter.  3’-0” minimum. (6” increments)
 
:D2 = Column diameter, Minimum of (D1 + 6”).  Check lap of vertical reinforcement required.  See Structural Project Manager.
 
:D' = Beam width overhang.  Controlled by one of the following:
::1) Beam width controlled by superstructure requirements
 
:::<math>\, \Rightarrow</math> 3” ≤ D' ≤ 6”
 
::2) Beam width controlled by [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design|minimum support length]] required for earthquake criteria.
:::<math>\, \Rightarrow</math>3” ≤ D' ≤ 15”
 
:L = Spacing as determined by design, with a 30’-0” maximum with tie beams and no limit without tie beams.  (1” increments)
 
:G = Overhang as determined by design, with no limits.
 
:H = Column height as required by grade and footing elevations.
:H' = Approximately 0.5 x H.  Top of tie beam should be at the same elevation as the top of the larger diameter columns in order to
::minimize the number of construction joints.  Top of tie beam may be located on the Design Layout.
 
 
Tie Beam
:I = Depth as required by design.  Minimum of 3’-0” (3” increments).
:J = Width as required by design.  Minimum of (0.5 x D1).
 
 
 
:NOTE:  Try to keep columns and beams the same size where possible for economy of construction.
 
 
 
 


===751.31.2.3 General Design Assumptions===
There is one type of drilled shaft construction for bridge structures. There are three types of drilled shaft construction for non-bridge structures, but only two types need be considered for design. See [[#751.37.1.3 Casing|EPG 751.37.1.3 Casing]].
<center>
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- General Intermediate Bent Elevation.gif]]


'''*''' Use only if specified on the Design Layout or as stated by the guidelines in this article.
: '''Drilled shafts for bridge structures:'''
: Permanently cased shaft through soil and socketed into rock. A reduced shaft diameter for rock socket is required. This case shall be used for all MoDOT bridge structures. For axial loading and settlement computations substitute D with D<sub>s</sub> and L with L<sub>s</sub> which are equal to the diameter and length of the rock socket since the required resistance to loading and settlement are computed for segment of the shaft in rock only (Rock sockets to be installed through casing shall have diameters 6” less than the inside diameter of the casing to allow for clearance and insertion of rock excavation re-tooling equipment).


'''**''' For column spacings greater than 30'-0", tie beams are not to be used, unless the web supports the beam.
: '''Drilled shafts for non-bridge structures:'''
:1. Uncased shaft through soil and not socketed into rock. For axial loading and settlement computations use D = diameter of shaft.
:2. Uncased shaft through soil and rock. Similar to (1) because the shaft diameter is assumed to be constant between soil and rock.
:3. Temporarily cased shaft through soil with an uncased and reduced or same shaft diameter in rock. This method is optional for the contractor in limited scenarios and requires the shaft in soil to be oversized by six inches with respect to the shaft diameter shown on the plans.


Permanently cased shafts shall not be allowed to use frictional resistance of the soil for either a drilled shaft with or without a rock socket.


'''Elevations for General Intermediate Bent'''
Temporarily cased shafts may use the frictional resistance of the soil only for the case where a rock socket is not used (see the [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/CM/geotechnical/default.aspx Geotechnical Section]).


</center>
Note on Definitions:
''General''
:1. Where L<sub>,i</sub> is defined, L<sub>i</sub> shall mean the length of the shaft segment through soil or through rock.
:The following are general design guidelines for the design of intermediate bents.
:2. Where L is defined, L shall mean overall shaft length including the length of the rock socket.


:Rigid frame design is to be used for designing Intermediate Bents and Piers.
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


:The joint between the beam and column, and web or tie beam and column, shall be assumed to be integral for all phases of design and must be analyzed for reinforcement requirements as a “Rigid Frame”.
==751.37.3 Design for Axial Loading at Strength Limit State==
 
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:1px solid #ff0000; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="250px" align="right"  
:The joint between the column and footing is assumed to be “fixed”, unless foundation flexibility needs to be considered as required by the Structural Project Manager. 
<div id="Beam"></div>
 
''Beam''
:Beams shall be designed for vertical loads, including a dynamic load allowance (impact) and components of horizontal forces.
 
:The gross concrete section, without contribution from reinforcement, shall not rupture under service dead loads.  In addition, longitudinal reinforcement shall be distributed to control cracking at the Service-I limit state.
 
:Fatigue design should not control the size of reinforcement in the beam.  LRFD 5.5.3.2 may be ignored for open concrete intermediate bents.
 
:The minimum reinforcement shall be such that the factored flexural resistance, Mr, is greater than or equal to the lesser of:
:Minimum Tensile Reinforcement
 
:The amount of tensile reinforcement shall be adequate to develop a factored flexural resistance, M<sub>r</sub>, at least equal to the lesser of either:
 
::1) M<sub>cr</sub>  = cracking moment &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LRFD Eq. 5.7.3.3.2-1
::2) 1.33 times the factored moment required by the applicable strength load combinations specified in LRFD Table 3.4.1-1.
:Additional reinforcement is required in the sides of the beam. The following table gives adequate steel for both temperature and shrinkage (LRFD 5.10.8), and skin reinforcement (LRFD 5.7.3.4).
 
<center>
{|border=1 cellpadding=1 cellspacing= 1 style="text-align:center"
|+'''Additional side reinforcement required for reinforced concrete beam caps (per face)'''
|width="300"|Beam Height, H||width="400"|Number – Bar Size
|-
|H ≤ 36”||4 - #6
|-
|36” < H < 54”||5 - #6
|-
|54” ≤ H ≤ 72”||6 - #6
|-
|H > 72”||By Design (LRFD 5.7.3.4)
|-
|-
|align="center"|'''[[#Commentary on EPG 751.37.3 Geotechnical Resistance for Axial Loading at Strength Limit States|Commentary for EPG 751.37.3 Design for Axial Loading at Strength Limit State''']]
|}
|}
</center>
Geotechnical resistance to axial loading at the relevant strength limit state shall be computed as the sum of tip resistance and side resistance unless conditions are present that may prevent reliable mobilization of tip resistance (e.g. karst conditions with known or likely voids that cannot be specifically identified or characterized).  Shafts should be sized such that the factored geotechnical resistance to axial loads exceeds the factored axial loads:


''Tie Beam''
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
:Use a tie beam when specified on the Design Layout or by the Structural Project Manager or when the unsupported height exceeds 30 feet, except as noted
 
:Do not use tie beams on grade separations.
 
:Do not use tie beams when column spacing exceeds 30 feet.  For this situation, use a minimum column diameter of <math>\, Kl_u / 25 (K = 1.2)</math> in lieu of a tie beam.
 
:Additional side reinforcement shall be designed for temperature and shrinkage (LRFD 5.10.8), and skin reinforcement (LRFD 5.7.3.4).
 
''Unsupported Height''
:The unsupported height is the distance from the bottom of the beam to the top of the footing.  If the distance from the ground line to the top of footing is <math>\, \ge</math> 10 feet, the unsupported height and the fixed point may be measured from the bottom of the beam to the ground line plus 1/2 the distance from the ground line to the top of the footing.
 
:For single column intermediate bents, the column shall be considered “fixed” at the top of footing for all conditions.
<div id="Columns"></div>
 
''Columns''
:Use round columns for all bridges, unless otherwise specified on the Design Layout.
 
:Tops of column shall be designed for vertical loads with consideration of dynamic load allowance (impact) and maximum components of horizontal forces.  Bottom of columns do not require impact forces to be included.
 
:The minimum area of reinforcement, A<sub>s</sub>, shall be taken as the greater of:
 
 
:*<math>\, \frac{0.135A_gf'_c}{f_y}</math>
::::::'''LRFD 5.7.4.2'''
:*<math>\, \ 0.01A_g</math>
 
 
 
:Where:
 
 
:<math>\,  A_g</math>= gross area of section. (in.²)
 
 
:For typical columns with f’<sub>c</sub> = 3 ksi, the 1% of column gross area will control. MoDOT prefers to follow ACI 10.9 and recognize LRFD 5.7.4.2 when it would control. (The minimum area of reinforcement based on LRFD is significantly less than ACI for f’<sub>c</sub> = 3 ksi).
 
 
:{|border=1 cellpadding=1 cellspacing=1 style="text-align:center"
|+'''Minimum Allowable Bars for Column Reinforcement Design'''
|Column Diameter||Vertical Reinforcement<br>(Assuming 1% of Column Gross Area)
|-
|2’-6”||9 - #8
|-
|3’-0”||13 - #8
|-
|3’-6”||18 - #8
|-
|4’-0”||23 - #8
|-
|4’-6”||29 - #8
|-
|5’-0”||29 - #9
|-
|5’-6”||35 - #9
|-
|6’-0”||41 - #9
|-
|-
|align="left"|<math> R_R = R_{sR} + R_{pR} \ge \gamma Q</math>||align="center"| (consistent units of force)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.3.1
|}
|}


where:


:The maximum reinforcement shall be limited by the following requirements:
:''R<sub>R</sub>'' = factored axial shaft resistance (consistent units of force),


<math>\, \ A_s \le 0.04A_g</math> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;  SGS 8.8.1
:''R<sub>sR</sub>'' = factored side resistance (consistent units of force),
:*<math>\, \ A_s \le 0.04A_g</math> (Preferred max for seismic design.)
:*<math>\, \ A_s \le 0.08A_g</math> (Absolute max, LRFD 5.7.4.2)
:*Spacing limitations given in this article.


:''R<sub>pR</sub>'' = factored tip resistance (consistent units of force) and


:<math>\mathbf\gamma Q</math> = factored load for the appropriate strength limit state (consistent units of force).


Tip resistance and side resistance shall be computed according to the provisions of EPG 751.37.3 for the material type(s) encountered. The Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer shall be consulted before utilizing design methods other than those provided in EPG 751.37.3 for calculating the geotechnical resistance of drilled shafts.


:{|border=1 cellpadding=1 cellspacing=1 style="text-align:center"
The factored side resistance for drilled shafts shall be established from factored unit side resistance values for the relevant soil/rock conditions as provided in this article. For stratified ground conditions or where the shaft dimensions change (e.g. at tip of temporary casing for non-bridge structure, or at top of rock socket for bridge structure), the shaft shall be divided into segments with practically uniform shaft geometry and soil/rock properties and unit side resistance values determined for each shaft segment. The total factored side resistance shall then be computed as the sum of the factored resistance values for each shaft segment:
|+'''Maximum Allowable Number of Bars for the Given Bar Sizes'''
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
|rowspan="2"|Column Diameter||colspan="4"|Maximum Number of Bars
|-
|#8||#9||#10||#11
|-
|2’-6”||18||18||17||15
|-
|3’-0”||22||22||21||18
|-
|3’-6”||26||26||26||22
|-
|4’-0”||30||30||30||25
|-
|4’-6”||34||34||34||29
|-
|5’-0”||&nbsp;||38||38||32
|-
|5’-6”||&nbsp;||43||42||36
|-
|6’-0”||&nbsp;||47||46||40
|-
|-
|align="left"|<math> R_{sR} = \textstyle \sum_{i=1}^n (q_{sR-i} \cdot A_{s-i}) = \textstyle \sum_{i=1}^n (\phi_{qs-i}\cdot q_{s-i} \cdot \pi \cdot D_i \cdot L_i)</math>||align="center"| (consistent units of force)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.3.2
|}
|}


:Above table is applicable for standard dowel bar arrangments, see [[751.31_Open_Concrete_Intermediate_Bents#751.31.3.2_Column|EPG 751.31.3.2]].
where:  
:''n'' = number of shaft segments,  


:A preliminary economic analysis should be conducted before determining the number of columns and column spacing.  For the analysis, assume the rates for Concrete, Class 1 and Class 2 Excavation, and Piles.  Omit reinforcing bars in the cost analysis.
:<math>q_{sR-i} = \phi_{qs-i} \cdot q_{s-i}</math> = factored unit side resistance for shaft segment ''i'' (consistent units of stress),  


''Column Spacing''
:<math>A_{s-i} = \pi \cdot D_{i} \cdot L_{i}</math> = perimeter interface area for shaft segment ''i'' (consistent units of area),  
:Columns, with the exception of web supporting beam type bents, shall be spaced, to the nearest 1”, in which balanced positive and negative beam moments are produced.  A positive beam moment up to 10% larger than the negative beam moment is acceptable.  Strength Limit State Load Combinations shall be used to determine column spacing.


:To estimate centerline-to-centerline spacing for a two column bent, use 72% of the distance from centerline of outside girder to centerline of outside girder.  For a three column bent, use 44% of the centerline-to-centerline distance of outside girders.
:<math>\mathbf \phi_{qs-i}</math> = resistance factor for unit side resistance along shaft segment ''i'' (dimensionless),  


''Footings''
:''<math>\mathbf q_{s-i}</math>'' = nominal unit side resistance along shaft segment ''i'' (consistent units of stress),
:Footings shall be designed for vertical loads and maximum normal and parallel components of the horizontal forces.


<center>
:''D<sub>i</sub>'' = shaft diameter for shaft segment ''i'' (consistent units of length), and
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Elevations for Intermediate Bent with Web Beam.gif]]


'''Elevations for Intermediate Bent with Web Beam'''
:''L<sub>i</sub>'' = length of shaft segment ''i'' (consistent units of length).
</center>


'''Web Supporting Beam'''
<math>\mathbf \phi_{qs-i}</math> and ''<math>\mathbf q_{s-i}</math>''   shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this article, based on the material type present along the respective shaft segment. 
:In analysis, web beams shall be modeled as plate elements.  If the ability to model a web beam as a plate element is unavailable, the following may be considered:


''Simplified Model''
Side resistance shall generally be neglected or reduced, as recommended by the Geotechnical Section, over shaft segments with permanent casing and over any length of rock socket that is deemed unusable.
:The web itself is made up of several tie beams (typically 4 tie beams).  The moment of inertia of an individual tie beam is equal to the moment of inertia of the web in the bent’s out-of-plane direction divided by the total number of tie beams.


:Any column segment which is connected to the web is treated as a prismatic member with moment of inertia in the bent’s out-of-plane direction <math>\, (I_z)</math> equal to the actual column moment of inertia in that direction, and with the moment of inertia in the bent’s in-plane direction <math>\, (I_y)</math> equal to the total moment of inertia of web in the bent’s in-plane direction divided by the total number of columns plus the moment of inertia of the column itself.  The equivalent column diameter is assumed to be <math>\, \Bigg( \frac{64I_y}{\pi} \Bigg)^{0.25} </math>.
The factored tip resistance for drilled shafts shall be established from factored unit tip resistance values for the relevant soil/rock conditions as provided in this article.  The appropriate tip resistance shall be established for the soil/rock located between the tip of the shaft and two diameters below the tip of the shaft.  The factored tip resistance shall be computed as
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
<center>
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Section Views for Intermediate Bent with Web Beam.gif]]
 
'''Section Views for an Intermediate Bent with Web Beam'''
</center>
 
In the above example, the moment of inertia of the column in the bent’s in-plane and out-of-plane directions can be calculated as:
 
{|
|-
|-
|Out-of-plane->||<math>\, I_z = \frac { \pi (3.5 \times 12)^4}{64} (in.^4 )</math>
|align="left"|<math> R_{pR} = q_{pR} \cdot A_p = \phi_{qp} \cdot q_p \cdot \pi \cdot \frac {D^2}{4}</math>||align="center"| (consistent units of force)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.3.3
|-
|&nbsp;
|-
|In-plane->||<math>\, I_y = \frac {(2 \times (17 \times 12) \times 21^3)}{(12)(3)} + \frac { \pi (3.5 \times 12)^4}{64} (in.^4)</math>
|}
|}


 
where:
The equivalent column diameter is then assumed to be <math>\, ( \frac{64I_y}{\pi})^{0.25} </math>. 
 
Thus, the column can be treated as a telescoping column and then the moment magnifier or P-δ slenderness effects can be calculated.
 
Since the web is made up of 4 tie beams, the moment of inertia of the tie beams in the bent’s out-of-plane direction is:
 
<math>\, I_z = \frac{(21 \times (10 \times 12)^3)}{(12)(4)}(in.^4)</math>
 
 
 
''Reinforcement''
:Additional side reinforcement shall be designed for temperature and shrinkage (LRFD 5.10.8), and skin reinforcement (LRFD 5.7.3.4).
 
''Column Spacing''
:Columns shall be spaced so that the negative moment in the beam over the outside columns requires a minimum beam depth of 3.0 FT.  No attempt should be made to use a column spacing that produces equal positive and negative beam moments.  The negative moment is to be determined at the face of the column (for round columns, check moment at the face of an equivalent area square column).
 
<center>
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Elevations for Intermediate Bent with Tie Beam.gif]]
 
 
'''*''' Use a tie beam if specified on the Design Layout or if the design calls for one.
 
'''**''' For column spacing > 30’, tie beams are not to be used unless the web supports the beam
 
'''Elevations for Intermediate Bent with Tie Beam'''
</center>
 
'''Change in Column Diameter'''
:Use rigid frame design.
 
:If H’ ≤ 0.5H and no tie beam is used, the design may be done assuming the entire column to have the smaller diameter.  This will result in a very small error.
 
''Columns''
:Use round columns for all bridges, unless otherwise specified on the Design Layout.
 
:Use two or more columns, as required for the more economical design.
 
''Column Spacing''
:Column spacing (to the nearest 1”) should be that which produces balanced positive and negative moments.  A positive beam moment up to 10% larger than the negative beam moment is acceptable.  Strength Limit State Load Combinations shall be used to determine column spacing.
 
''Reinforcement''
:Reinforcement in the beams, column and tie beams for the moments at the joints shall be based on the moment at the face of the column, beam, or tie beam (equivalent square, based on areas, for round columns).
<center>
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Elevations for Hammer Head Intermediate Bent.gif]]
 
'''Elevations for Hammer Head Intermediate Bent'''
</center>
 
'''Hammer Head Type Intermediate Bent'''
 
:Hammer Head type intermediate bents shall be designed according to the applicable provisions listed under the design assumptions for the General intermediate bent guidelines except as follows:
 
''Reinforcement''
:Additional side reinforcement shall be designed for temperature and shrinkage (LRFD 5.10.8), and skin reinforcement (LRFD 5.7.3.4).
 
 
 
 
 
 
===751.31.2.4 Column Analysis===
 
Refer to this article to check slenderness effects in column and the moment magnifier method of column design.  See Structural Project Manager for use of P Delta Analysis.
 
 
'''Transverse Reinforcement'''
 
''Seismic Design Category (SDC) A''
:Columns shall be analyzed as “Tied Columns”.  Unless excessive reinforcement is required, in which case spirals shall be used.
 
 
'''Bi-Axial Bending'''
 
Use the resultant of longitudinal and transverse moments.
 
 
'''Slenderness effects in Columns'''
 
The slenderness effects shall be considered when:
 
<math>\, \ l_u \ge \frac {22r}{K}</math>
 
 
Where:  
   
   
<math>\, \ l_u</math> = unsupported length of column
:<math>q_{pR} = \phi_{qp} \cdot q_p</math> = factored unit tip resistance (consistent units of stress),


<math>\, \ r</math> = radius of gyration of column cross section
:<math>A_p = \pi \cdot \frac{D^2}{4}</math> = cross-sectional area of the shaft at the tip (consistent units of area),


<math>\, \ K</math> = effective length factor
:<math>\mathbf \phi_{qp}</math> = resistance factor for unit tip resistance (dimensionless),


:''<math>\mathbf q_p </math>''= nominal unit tip resistance (consistent units of stress), and


Effects should be investigated by using either the rigorous P-∆ analysis or the Moment Magnifier Method with consideration of bracing and non-bracing effects.  Use of the moment magnifier method is limited to members with Kl<sub>u</sub>/r ≤ 100, or the diameter of a round column must be ≥ Kl<sub>u</sub>/25. A maximum value of 2.5 for moment magnifier is desirable for efficiency of designIncrease column diameter to reduce the magnifier, if necessary.
:''D'' = shaft diameter at the tip of the shaft (consistent units of length).   


When a compression member is subjected to bending in both principal directions, the effects of slenderness should be considered in each direction independently.  Instead of calculating two moment magnifiers, db and ds, and performing two analyses for M<sub>2b</sub> and M<sub>2s</sub> as described in LRFD 4.5.3.2.2b, the following conservative, simplified moment magnification method in which only a moment magnifier due to sidesway, δ<sub>s</sub>, analysis is required:
<math>\mathbf \phi_{qp}</math> and ''<math>\mathbf q_p</math>'' shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this article, based on the material type present within a depth of ''2D'' below the tip of the shaft.
<center>
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Typical Intermediate Bent.gif]]
</center>


<center>'''Typical Intermediate Bent'''</center>
Tip resistance shall be neglected, as recommended by the Geotechnical Section, when the shaft tip is located within karstic rock or other conditions where tip resistance cannot be reliably determined. 


''General Procedure for Bending in a Principal Direction''
The specific methods and resistance factors for determining nominal and factored side and tip resistance shall be selected based on the material type(s) present along the sides and beneath the tip of the shaft:


::M<sub>c</sub> = δ<sub>s</sub>M<sub>2</sub>
:* EPG 751.37.3.1 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in rock from results of uniaxial compression tests on intact rock core with uniaxial compressive strengths ''(q<sub>u</sub> )'' greater than 100 ksf;


:* EPG 751.37.3.2 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in weak rock from results of uniaxial compression tests on rock core with uniaxial compressive strengths ''(q<sub>u</sub> )'' greater than 5 ksf but less than 100 ksf;


::Where:
:* EPG 751.37.3.3 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in weak rock from results of Standard Penetration Tests with equivalent ''N''-values ''(N<sub>eq</sub> )'' less than 400 blows/foot;
::M<sub>c</sub> = Magnified column moment about the axis under investigation.


::M<sub>2</sub> = value of larger column moment about the axis under investigation due to LRFD Load Combinations.
:* EPG 751.37.3.4 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in weak rock from results of Texas Cone Penetration Tests with measured penetrations ''(TCP)'' greater than 1 inch/100 blows but less than 10 inches/100 blows;


:<sub>s</sub> = moment magnification factor for sidesway about the axis under investigation
:* EPG 751.37.3.5 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in weak rock from results of Point Load Index Tests with Point Load Indices ''(I<sub>s(50)</sub> )'' less than 40 ksf;


::<math>\, =\cfrac{C_m}{1- \cfrac{\sum P_u }{\phi_k \sum P_e }} \ge 1.0; \ C_m = 1.0 </math>
:* EPG 751.37.3.6 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in cohesive soils with undrained shear strengths ''(s<sub>u</sub> )'' less than 5 ksf; and


:* EPG 751.37.3.7 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in cohesionless soils.


Where:
Additional guidance on selection of specific methods and resistance factors based on the material types encountered is provided in the commentary to these guidelines.
{|style="text-align:left"
|-
|<math>\, \sum P_u</math> ||=||summation of individual column factored axial loads for a specific Load Combination (kip)
|-
|<math>\, \phi_K</math> ||=||stiffness reduction factor for concrete = 0.75
|-
|<math>\, \sum P_e</math>|| =||summation of individual column Euler buckling loads
|-
|}




<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


<math>\, =\sum {\frac{\pi^2 \ EI}{\left( \ Kl_u \right)^2}}</math>


Where:
===751.37.3.7 Axial Resistance for Individual Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils===
 
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:1px solid #ff0000; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="250px" align="right"
<math>\, \ K</math> = effective length factor = 1.2 min. (see the following figure showing boundary conditions for columns)
 
<math>\, \ l_u</math> = unsupported lenth of column (in.)
 
 
 
<math>\, \ EI = \cfrac{{E_cI_g}{/2.5}}{1+\beta_d}</math>
 
Where:
 
<math>\, \ E_c</math>= concrete modulus of elasticity as defined in [[751.31 Open Concrete Intermediate Bents#751.31.1.1 Material Properties|EPG 751.31.1.1]] (ksi)
 
<math>\, \ I_g</math>= moment of inertia of gross concrete section about the axis under investigation <math>\, (in^4)</math>
 
<math>\, \beta_d</math>= ratio of maximum factored permanent load moments to maximum factored total load moment: always positive
 
 
 
''Column Moment Parallel to Bent In-Plane Direction''
 
<math>M_{cy}= \delta_{sy}M_{2y}</math>
 
<math>l_{uy}</math>= top of footing to top of beam cap
 
 
 
''Column Moment Normal to Bent In-Plane Direction''
 
<math>M_{cz}= \delta_{sz}M_{2z}</math>
 
<math>l_{uz}</math> = top of footing to bottom of beam cap or tie beam and/or top of tie beam to bottom of beam cap
 
<center>
{|
|-
|Out-of-plane bending<br>Non-integral Bent||[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Boundary Conditions for columns-Top Image.gif]]||Out-of-plane bending<br>Integral Bent
|-
|In-plane bending||[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Boundary Conditions for columns-Bottom Image.gif]]||&nbsp;
|-
|-
|align="center"|'''[[#Commentary on EPG 751.37.3.7 Axial Resistance for Individual Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils|Commentary for EPG 751.37.3.7 Axial Resistance for Individual Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils]]
|}
|}


'''Boundary Conditions for Columns'''
'''Side Resistance for Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils'''


 
The nominal unit side resistance for shaft segments located in cohesionless soils shall be computed using the “β-method” as
For telescoping columns, the equivalent moment of inertia, <i>I</i>, and equivalent effective length factor, <i>K</i>, can be estimated as follows:
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
 
 
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Telescoping Columns.gif]]
 
'''Telescoping Columns'''
</center>
 
 
 
<math>\, \ I = \frac {\sum \left(l_n I_n \right)}{L}</math>
 
 
Where:
 
<math>\, l_n</math>= length of column segment <math>\, n</math>
 
<math>\, I_n</math>= moment of inertia of column segment <math>\, n</math>
 
<math>\, L</math>= total length of telescoping column
 
 
'''Equivalent Effective Length Factor'''
 
<math>\, \ K =\sqrt \frac{\pi^2EI}{P_cL^2}</math>
 
 
Where:
 
<math>\, E</math> = modulus of elasticity of column
 
<math>\, I</math> = equivalent moment of inertia of column
 
<math>\,L</math> = total length of telescoping column
 
<math>\, P_c</math> =elastic buckling load solved from the equations given by the following boundary conditions:
 
<center>
''Fixed- Fixed Condition''
 
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Columns Fixed-Fixed Condition.gif]]
 
 
<math>\, \left(a_1 + a_2 \right) \bigg[ \left(d_1 + d_2 \right) - P_c \Big( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Big) \bigg]- \left(c_1 - c_2 \right)^2 = 0</math>
 
 
 
{|
|-
|<math>\, a_1</math>||<math>\, = \frac{4EI_1}{l_1}</math>||width="100"|&nbsp;||<math>\, a_2</math>||<math>\, =\frac{4EI_2}{l_2}</math>
|-
|<math>\, c_1</math>||<math>\, = \frac{6EI_1}{{l_1}^2}</math>||&nbsp;||<math>\, c_2</math>||<math>\, =\frac{6EI_2}{{l_2}^2}</math>
|-
|<math>\, d_1</math>||<math>\, = \frac{12EI_1}{{l_1}^3}</math>||&nbsp;||<math>\, d_2</math>||<math>\, = \frac{12EI_2}{{l_2}^3}</math>
|-
|-
|align="left"|<math> q_s = \beta \cdot \sigma^'_v</math>||align="center"| (consistent units of stress)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.3.21
|}
|}


where:


:''q<sub>s</sub> = nominal unit side resistance for the shaft segment (consistent units of stress),


''Hinged-Fixed Condition''
:β = an empirical correlation factor (dimensionless) and


:σ'<sub>v</sub> = average vertical effective stress for the soil along the shaft segment (consistent units of stress). 


[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Columns Hinged-Fixed Condition.gif]]
The value for β shall be taken as (O’Neill and Reese, 1999)
</center>
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
 
 
{|align="center"
|-
|-
|<math>\, \left(a_2 \right) \left(a_1 + a_2 \right) \bigg[ \left(d_1 + d_2 \right) - P_c \Big( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Big) \bigg]- \left(2b_2c_2 \right) \left(c_2 - c_1 \right) </math>
|align="left"|<math> \beta = 1.5 - 0.135\sqrt{z}</math>||align="center"| (for ''N<sub>60</sub> ≥ 15)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.3.22a
|-
|-
|<math>- \left(b_2 \right)^2 \bigg[ \left(d_1 + d_2 \right) - P_c \Big( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Big) \bigg]- \left(a_2 \right) \left(c_2 - c_1 \right)^2</math>
|align="left"|<math> \beta = \frac{N_{60}}{15} \cdot \big(1.5 - 0.135\sqrt{z} \big)</math>||align="center"| (for ''N<sub>60</sub> < 15)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.3.22b
|-
|<math>- \left(c_2 \right)^2 \left(a_2 + a_1 \right) = 0 </math>
|}
|}


where 0.25 ≤ β ≤ 1.2 and


Where:
:z = depth below ground surface to center of shaft segment (ft.) and
{|
|-
|<math>\, b_1</math>||<math>\, = \frac{2EI_1}{l_1}</math>||width="100"|&nbsp;||<math>\, b_2</math>||<math>\, =\frac{2EI_2}{l_2}</math>
|-
|}


<math>\, a_1, a_2, c_1, c_2, d_1,</math> and <math>\, d_2</math> are defined in the previous equations.
:''N<sub>60</sub>'' = average SPT ''N''-value corrected for hammer efficiency (blows/ft).


If permanent casing is used, the side resistance shall be ignored for the cased portion.


<center>
The resistance factor <math>\mathbf\phi_{qs}</math> to be applied to the nominal unit side resistance shall be taken as 0.55 (LRFD Table 10.5.5.2.4-1). 


''Fixed-Fixed with Lateral Movement Condition''
'''Tip Resistance for Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils'''


The nominal unit tip resistance for shafts founded on cohesionless soils shall be computed from corrected SPT ''N''-values, N<sub>60</sub> (O’Neill and Reese, 1999). 


[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Fixed-Fixed Lateral Movement Condition.gif]]
For N_60≤50:
</center>
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
 
 
{|align="center"
|-
|-
|<math>\, \bigg[(d_1 + d_2) - \frac{(c_2 - c_1)^2}{a_1 + a_2} - P_c \Bigg( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Bigg) \bigg] \bigg[d_2 - \frac{{c_2}^2}{a_1 + a_2} - P_c \Bigg(\frac {1}{l_2} \Bigg) \Bigg]</math>
|align="left"|<math> q_p = 1.2 \cdot N_{60} \le 60 ksf</math>||align="center"| (ksf)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.3.23
|-
|<math>- \Bigg[(-d_2) + \frac{c_2 (c_2 - c_1)}{a_1 + a_2} + P_c \Bigg(\frac{1}{l_2} \Bigg) \Bigg]^2 = 0</math>
|}
|}


Where:
where:
:''q<sub>p</sub>'' = nominal unit tip resistance for the shaft (ksf) and


<math>\, a_1, a_2, b_1, b_2, c_1, c_2, d_1,</math> and <math>\, d_2</math> are defined in the previous equations.
:''N<sub>60</sub>'' = average SPT ''N''-value corrected for hammer efficiency (blows/ft).


 
For ''N<sub>60</sub>'' ≥ 50:
<center>
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
''Fixed-Free with Lateral Movement Condition''
 
 
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Fixed-Free Lateral Movement Condition.gif]]
 
</center>
 
 
{|align="center"
|-
|-
|<math>\, \Bigg[ (d_1 + d_2) - P_c \Bigg( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Bigg) - \frac{A_1}{\beta} \Bigg] \Bigg[ d_2 - \frac{P_c}{l_2} - \frac{A_3}{\beta} \Bigg]</math>
|align="left"|<math> q_p = 0.59\cdot \sigma^'_v \cdot \Bigg( N_{60}\bigg(\frac{p_a}{\sigma^'_v}\bigg)\Bigg)^{0.8}</math>||align="center"| (ksf)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.3.24
|-
|<math>\, - \Bigg[(-d_2) + \frac{P_c}{l_2} - \frac{A_2}{\beta} \Bigg]^2 = 0</math>
|}
|}


where:
:''q<sub>p</sub>'' = nominal unit tip resistance for the shaft (ksf),


Where:
:''N<sub>60</sub>'' = average SPT N-value corrected for hammer efficiency (blows/foot),  
{|
|<math>\, \beta</math>|| <math>\, = (a_2)(a_1 + a_2) - ( b_2)^2</math>
|-
|<math>\, A_1</math>|| <math>\, = (c_1 - c_2)[a_2(c_1 - c_2) + (b_2c_2)] + (c_2)[b_2(c_1 - c_2) + (c_2)(a_1 + a_2)]</math>
|-
|<math>\, A_2</math>|| <math>\, = (c_1 - c_2)[(a_2c_2) - (b_2c_2)] + (c_2)[(b_2c_2) - (c_2)(a_1 + a_2)]</math>
|-
|<math>\, A_3</math>|| <math>\, = (c_2)[(a_2c_2) - (2b_2c_2) + (c_2)(a_1 + a_2)]</math>
|-
|colspan="2"|&nbsp;
|-
|colspan="2"|<math>\, a_1, a_2, b_1, b_2, c_1, c_2, d_1,</math> and <math>\, d_2</math> are defined in the previous equations.
 
 
 


:''p<sub>a</sub>'' = 2.12 ksf = atmospheric pressure (ksf). 


:<math>\sigma^'_v</math> = vertical effective stress for the soil at the tip of the shaft (ksf). 


==751.31.3 Reinforcement==
''Note that these expressions are dimensional so values must be entered in the units specified. ''  
For Seismic detail requirements for seismic design category, SDC B, C and D, See [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2_LRFD_Seismic_Details|EPG 751.9.1.2 LRFD Seismic Details]].
 
===751.31.3.2 Column===
 
{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:751.31.3.2_01-2025.png|center|250px]] || [[image:751.31.3.2_02-2025.png|center|250px]]
|-
| colspan="2" | '''MINIMUM SPACING AT LAP SPLICES''' || '''ALTERNATE DOWEL PLACEMENT'''
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | * || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | Use alternate detail only with approval of Structural Project Manager and then design column reinforcement using the smaller ring diameter.
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | Include 1/2-inch buffer for mechanical bar splice.
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | A = || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | 4 1/2” (5") minimum spacing center-to-center.
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | B = || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | 2” (2 1/2") clear spacing for bar sizes thru #10.
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | 2 1/2” (3") clear spacing for bar sizes #11 and #14. 
|-
| style="width:25px; text-align:right;" | || colspan="2" style="text-align:left;" | 3 1/2” (4") clear spacing for bar size #18.
|-
| colspan="3" | [[image:751.31.3.2_03-2025.png|center|250px]]
|-
| colspan="3" | '''STIRRUP LAP DETAIL AND STAGGER NOTE'''
|-
| colspan="3" | * X” Minimum lap (Stagger adjacent bar splices)
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | Lap splices for closed circular ties shall be provided and staggered in accordance with LRFD 5.10.6.3.
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | Lap length of 1.3 '''l'''<sub>d</sub> (or Class B) for closed stirrup/ties shall be provided in accordance with LRFD 5.11.2.6.4.
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | Lap length for #4 stirrup bars (4” min. spacing, f’c = 3 ksi, and clear cover = 1½”) equals 24” for uncoated<br>bars and 28” for epoxy coated bars.
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align:left;" | For lap length for other scenarios, see [[751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8 Development and Lap Splices|EPG 751.5.9.2.8 Development and Lap Splices]].
|-
|}


{| class="wikitable" cellpadding="10" style="text-align:center; margin:auto"
The resistance factor <math>\mathbf\phi_{qp}</math> shall be taken as 0.50 for Equation 751.37.3.23 and as 0.55 for Equation 751.37.3.24.
|+'''Collision Shear Reinforcement<sup>1</sup>'''
|-
! rowspan="2" | Column Diameter !! rowspan="2" | Minimum Reinforcement<sup>2,3</sup> !! colspan="2" | Minimum Lap Splice
|-
! Uncoated<br>(f’c = 3ksi)<br>(Cl. = 1½”) !! Epoxy Coated<br>(f’c = 3ksi)<br>(Cl. = 1½”)
|-
| 3’-0” || By Design || NA || NA
|-
| 3’-6” || By Design || NA || NA
|-
| 4’-0” || #6 @ 5” || 47” || 61”
|-
| 4’-6” || #5 @ 5” || 34” || 44”
|-
| 5’-0” || #4 @ 5” || 24” || 28”
|-
| 5’-6” || #4 @ 10” || 24” || 28”
|-
| 6’-0” || #4 @ 12” || 24” || 28”
|-
| colspan="4" style="text-align:left;" |
'''<sup>1</sup>''' See [[751.2 Loads#751.2.2.6 Other Loads|EPG 751.2.2.6 Other Loads]] to determine if a pier requires design for collision loads.<br/>
'''<sup>2</sup>''' Design assumptions:<br/>
* Vu = 600 k, Pu = 0 k, Mu = 0 k-ft<br/>
* f’c = 3 ksi, fy = 60 ksi, 1.5” clear cover<br/>
* Shear resistance factor = 1.0<br/>
* Minimum longitudinal reinforcement per [[#751.31.2.3 General Design Assumptions|EPG 751.31.2.3 General Design Assumptions]]<br/>
'''<sup>3</sup>''' The shear reinforcement tabulated is adequate for collision but may not be adequate for other design<br>checks. For example, columns greater than 5’-0” require more stirrups to meet min reinforcement.  Lesser<br>reinforcement values may be used by design. Design is required for 3’-0” and 3’-6” columns because the<br>design criteria used for the table requires double stirrups which is not common practice.
|}


::Columns shall be reinforced using stirrup ties, unless excessive reinforcement is required, in which case spirals shall be used.


::Show spiral details of [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2.1.1|Fig. 751.9.1.2.1.1]] on the bridge plans if spirals are used for bridge in non-seismic area. Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by 1 ½ extra turns of spiral reinforcement at each end of the spiral unit.
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


::For Seismic detail requirements for seismic design category, SDC B, C and D, See [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2_LRFD_Seismic_Details|EPG 751.9.1.2 LRFD Seismic Details]].


{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
===751.37.4.1 Settlement of Individual Drilled Shafts using Approximate Method===
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:1px solid #ff0000; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="250px" align="right"  
|-
|-
|[[Image:751.31.3.2.3 part elev.jpg|left|375px]]||valign="center"|(1) Location 2 development length.<br/><br/>(2) Check clearance to concrete piles.<br/><br/>See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8_Development_and_Lap_Splices EPG 751.5.9.2.8] for development and lap splice lengths not given or lengths for scenarios other than those shown. Provide standard hooks if required.<br/><br/>See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.2_Epoxy_Coated_Reinforcement_Requirements EPG 751.5.9.2.2] for epoxy coated reinforcement requirements.
|align="center"|'''[[#Commentary on EPG 751.37.4.1 Settlement of Individual Drilled Shafts using Approximate Method|Commentary on EPG 751.37.4.1 Settlement of Individual Drilled Shafts using Approximate Method]]'''
|}
|}


===751.37.1.6 Drilled Shaft General Detail Considerations===
Prediction of factored settlement due to factored service loads shall be determined as follows depending on the magnitude of factored loads relative to the magnitude of factored side and tip resistance:
For Seismic detail requirements for seismic design category, SDC B, C and D, See [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2_LRFD_Seismic_Details|EPG 751.9.1.2 LRFD Seismic Details]].
 
[[image:751.37.1.6 01.png|700px|center]]


Pay items shown in above table are for example only, show actual pay items and quantities in plan details for specific project.
If <math>\gamma Q \le R_{sR} + 0.1 R_{pR}</math>:


''Notes:''
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
::(1) Number of pipes (equally spaced) for Sonic Logging Testing:
::::::Diameter ≤ 2.5 ft: 2 pipes
::::::Diameter >2.5 ft but ≤ 3.5 ft: 3 pipes
::::::Diameter >3.5 ft but ≤ 5.0 ft: 4 pipes
::::::Diameter >5.0 ft but ≤ 8.0 ft: 5 pipes
::::::Diameter >8.0 ft: 6 pipes
::::Single diameter reinforcing cage is typically used. Modify details based on design for single or multiple-diameter cages and splice location(s).
::::See [[#751.37.1.3 Casing|EPG 751.37.1.3]] for casing requirements and alternatives.
::::When determining P bar diameter for barbill, assume 3/8” casing unless otherwise specified.
::::See [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#G8. Drilled Shaft|EPG 751.50, G8]], for notes to include for drilled shafts and rock sockets (starting at G8.1).
::(2) See [[#751.37.1.1 Dimensions and Nomenclature|EPG 751.37.1.1 Dimensions and Nomenclature]] for [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/751.37.1.1_Drilled_Shaft_Design_Aid.docx Design Aid: Minimum Rock Socket Length].
::(3) When difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is 6" a single reinforcement cage is typically used for the socket and shaft and the vertical reinforcement extends into the column. A separate column steel cage is then placed around the protruding shaft reinforcement without requiring an adjustment to minimum cover for rock socket or column reinforcement. When difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is 12” either the vertical column steel or dowels will need to be extended into the shaft or the cover in the socket and shaft will need to be increased to allow the shaft reinforcement to extend into the column. In the former scenario an optional construction joint is recommended as discussed in note 4 for oversized shafts. In the latter scenario the same number of vertical bars should be used in the shaft and column to allow the shaft bars to be tied to the column cage. Any reduction in cage diameter required for fit-up shall be considered in design.
::(4) When difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is greater than 12" (oversized shaft generally 18" to 24" larger than column), show "Optional construction joint" at bottom of column/dowel reinforcement in the drilled shaft and use [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#G8._Drilled_Shaft|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes G8.8 and G8.9]] in plan details.
 
<center>
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
|+
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="400" |'''[https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings Bridge Standard Drawings]'''</br> (Drilled Shafts - DSS → As Built Drilled Shaft Data [DSS_01])
|-
|-
|align="center"|[https://www.modot.org/media/14725 As Built Drilled Shaft Data (PDF)]
|align="left"|<math>\delta_R = 0.005 \cdot D \cdot \frac{\gamma Q}{R_{sR} + 0.1 R_{pR}} + \delta_{eR}</math>||align="center"| (consistent units of lengths)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.4.3
|}
|}


</center>
where:


:<math>\mathbf\gamma Q</math> = factored load for the appropriate serviceability limit state (consistent units of force),


:''R<sub>sR</sub>'' = total factored side resistance determined according to the provisions of this article (consistent units of force),


:''R<sub>pR</sub>'' = factored tip resistance determined according to the provisions of this article (consistent units of force),


:''δ<sub>R</sub>'' = factored total settlement of shaft due to factored service loads (consistent units of length),


===751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design===
:''D'' = shaft diameter (consistent units of length) and  
 
Drilled shaft structural resistance shall be designed similarly to reinforced concrete columns. The Strength Limit State and applicable Extreme Event Limit State load combinations shall be used in the reinforcement design.
 
Longitudinal reinforcing steel shall extend below the point of fixity of the drilled shaft at least 10 ft. in accordance with LRFD 10.8.3.9.3 or the required bar development length whichever is larger.
If permanent casing is used, and the shell consists of smooth pipe greater than 0.12 in. thick, it may be considered load carrying.  An 1/8" shall be subtracted off of the shell thickness to account for corrosion. Casing could also be corrugated metal pipe.  If casing is assumed to contribute to the structural resistance, the plans should indicate the minimum thickness and type of casing required.


Minimum clear spacing between longitudinal bars as well as between transverse bars shall not be less than five times the maximum aggregate size or 5 in. (LRFD 10.8.3.9.3).  
:''δ<sub>eR</sub>'' = factored elastic compression of the unsupported length of the shaft (consistent units of length).


For minimum concrete cover for drilled shaft, see [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Sec 701.4.12.1].  If drilled shaft diameter does not match Sec 701.4.12.1 then use concrete cover for the next greater diameter drilled shaft.  For rock sockets use 3” min. clear cover.
If <math>R_{sR} + 0.1 R_{pR} \le \gamma Q \le R_{sR} + R_{pR}</math> :
 
For longitudinal reinforcement, splicing shall be in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.4.
 
For transverse reinforcement, lap splices for closed circular stirrups/ties shall be provided and staggered in accordance with LRFD 5.10.4.3. Lap length of 1.3 '''l'''<sub>d</sub> (Class B) for closed stirrups/ties shall be provided in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.6d.
 
For lap length, see [[751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General]].
 
 
 
 
===751.37.6.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement===
 
Longitudinal reinforcement shall be designed to resist bending in the shaft due to lateral loads.  The cross-sectional area for longitudinal reinforcement shall fall within the following limits:  


{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
|-
|-
| align="left" rowspan="2" | <math>\frac{0.135 A_g f^'_c}{f_y} \le A_{steel} \le 0.04 A_g</math> || align="center" | (Consistent units of stress)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.6.1
|align="left"|<math>\delta_R = 0.005 \cdot D + 0.045 \cdot D \cdot \Big(\frac{\gamma Q - R_{sR} - 0.1 R_{pR}}{0.9 \cdot R_{pR}}\Big) + \delta_{eR}</math>||align="center"| (consistent units of lengths)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.4.4
|-
| align="center" | '''LRFD 5.7.4.2 and SGS 8.8.1''' ||
|}
|}


where:
where:
:''A<sub>g</sub>'' = gross cross-sectional area of drilled shaft (consistent units of area),


:''f'<sub>c</sub>'' = concrete compressive strength (consistent units of stress),  
:<math>\mathbf\gamma Q</math> = factored load for the appropriate serviceability limit state (consistent units of force),  


:''f<sub>y</sub>'' = yield strength of steel reinforcement (consistent units of stress) and
:''R<sub>sR</sub>'' = total factored side resistance determined according to the provisions of this article (consistent units of force),


:''A<sub>steel</sub>'' = cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel reinforcement (consistent units of area)
:''R<sub>pR</sub>'' = factored tip resistance determined according to the provisions of this article (consistent units of force),


MoDOT prefers to follow LRFD 5.7.4.2 for drilled shafts since for typical cases, the potential exists for load transfer between the concrete and steel casing. (The minimum area of reinforcement based on LRFD is 10 percent less than ACI for f’<sub>c</sub> = 4 ksi).
:''δ<sub>R</sub>'' = factored total settlement of shaft due to factored service load (consistent units of length),


:''D'' = shaft diameter (consistent units of length) and


:''δ<sub>eR</sub>'' = factored elastic compression of the unsupported length of the shaft (consistent units of length). 


Note that if <math>\gamma Q \ge R_{sR} + R_{pR}</math>, the factored service load exceeds the maximum factored resistance of the shaft and the limit state cannot be satisfied without increasing the dimensions of the shaft. 


===751.37.6.4 Transverse Reinforcement===
The factored side resistance in Equations 751.37.4.3 and 751.37.4.4 shall be established from factored unit side resistance values for the relevant soil/rock conditions as provided in this article. For stratified ground conditions or where the shaft dimensions change, the shaft shall be divided into segments with practically uniform shaft geometry and soil/rock properties and unit side resistance values determined for each shaft segment. The total factored side resistance shall then be computed as the sum of the factored resistance values for each shaft segment:


Minimum transverse reinforcement shall be designed to resist the potential of diagonal cracking and improve ductility, and to control the stability of the reinforcement cage. Follow the four-step procedure, below for seismic design category SDC A.
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
 
For Seismic detail requirements for seismic design category, SDC B, C and D, See [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2_LRFD_Seismic_Details|EPG 751.9.1.2 LRFD Seismic Details]].
 
'''No. 1. Determine if Transverse Reinforcement is Required for Loading'''
 
:If 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="900"
|-
|-
|align="left"|<math>V_u > 0.5 \boldsymbol\phi V_c</math>,||align="left|then go to No. 2a, below,<br/>otherwise, go to No. 2b.|| align="center"| (consistent units of force) '''(LRFD 5.8.2.4)'''||align="right"|Equation 751.37.6.4.1
|align="left"|<math>R_{sR} = \textstyle \sum_{i=1}^n \big( q_{sR-1} \cdot A_{s-i} \big) = \textstyle \sum_{i-1}^n \big( \phi_{\delta s - i} \cdot q_{s-i} \cdot \pi \cdot D_i \cdot L_i \big)</math>||align="center"| (consistent units of force)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.4.5
|}
|}


:where:
where:
 
::''V<sub>u</sub>'' = factored shear force (consistent units of force),
:''n'' = number of shaft segments,  
 
::<math>V_c = 0.0316\beta \sqrt{f^'_c} b_v d_v</math> = approximate shear resistance of drilled shaft (consistent units of force),  


::''Φ'' = 0.9 = resistance factor for shear resistance of drilled shaft (dimensionless),  
:<math>q_{sR-i} = \phi_{\delta s-i} \cdot q_{s-i}</math> = factored unit side resistance for shaft segment i (consistent units of stress),  


::''β'' = 2.0,
:<math>A_{s-i} = \pi \cdot D_i \cdot L_i</math> = perimeter interface area for shaft segment i (consistent units of area),  


::''b<sub>v</sub>'' = D = shaft diameter (consistent units of length),
:<math>\mathbf \phi_{\delta s-i}</math> = settlement resistance factor for side resistance along shaft segment i (dimensionless),  


::''d<sub>v</sub>'' = 0.9 (''D''/2 + ''D<sub>r</sub>'' /π) and
:''q<sub>s-i</sub>'' = nominal unit side resistance along shaft segment i (consistent units of stress),


::''D<sub>r</sub>'' = diameter of circle passing through the centers of the longitudinal reinforcement (consistent units of length).  See commentary for LRFD C5.8.2.9-2.
:''D<sub>i</sub>'' = shaft diameter for shaft segment i (consistent units of length) and


:''L<sub>i</sub>'' = length of shaft segment i (consistent units of length).


'''No. 2. Determine Minimum Transverse Reinforcement'''
Values for ''q<sub>s-i</sub>'' shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of [[#751.37.3 Design for Axial Loading at Strength Limit State|EPG 751.37.3]], based on the material type present along the respective shaft segments.  Values for <math>\mathbf \phi_{\delta s-i}</math> shall be established as provided subsequently in this article.  Side resistance shall generally be neglected or reduced, as recommended by the Geotechnical Section, over shaft segments with permanent casing and over any length of rock socket that is deemed unusable for consistency with evaluations performed for strength limit states. 


:'''a)''' Minimum transverse reinforcement to control shear diagonal cracking and increase ductility:
The factored tip resistance in Equations 751.37.4.3 and 751.37.4.4 shall be established from factored unit tip resistance values for the relevant soil/rock conditions as provided in this article. The appropriate tip resistance shall be established for the soil/rock located between the tip of the shaft and a distance of 2D below the tip of the shaft. The factored tip resistance shall be computed as 
 
:The minimum amount of transverse reinforcement shall satisfy the following equation if transverse reinforcement is required for loading in No. 1, otherwise go to No. 2b:


{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
|-
|-
|align="left"|<math>A_v \ge 0.0316 \sqrt{f^'_c}\frac{b_vs}{f_y}</math>||align="center"| (consistent units)||align="Center"|'''(LRFD 5.8.2.5)'''  ||align="right"|Equation 751.37.6.4.2
|align="left"|<math>R_{pR} = q_{pR} \cdot A_p = \phi_{\delta p} \cdot q_p \cdot \pi \cdot \frac{D^2}{4}</math>||align="center"| (consistent units of force)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.4.6
|}
|}


:where:
where:  


:''A<sub>v</sub>'' = area of transverse reinforcement within distance s (consistent units of area),
:<math>q_{pR} = \phi_{\delta p} \cdot q_p</math> = factored unit tip resistance (consistent units of stress),  


:''s'' = spacing of transverse reinforcement (consistent units of length),  
:<math>A_p = \pi \cdot \frac{D^2}{4}</math> = cross-sectional area of the shaft at the tip (consistent units of area),  


:''b<sub>v</sub>'' = ''D'' = shaft diameter (consistent units of length),
:<math>\mathbf \phi_{\delta p}</math> = settlement resistance factor for tip resistance (dimensionless),  


:''f'<sub>c</sub>'' = concrete compressive strength (consistent units of stress) and
:''q<sub>p</sub>'' = nominal unit tip resistance (consistent units of stress) and


:''f<sub>y</sub>'' = yield strength of steel reinforcement (consistent units of stress).
:''D'' = shaft diameter at the tip of the shaft (consistent units of length).


The value for ''q<sub>p</sub>'' shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of [[#751.37.3 Design for Axial Loading at Strength Limit State|EPG 751.37.3]], based on the material type present within a depth of 2''D'' below the tip of the shaft.  The value for <math>\mathbf \phi_{\delta p}</math> shall be established as provided subsequently in this article.  For consistency with evaluations for strength limit states, tip resistance shall be neglected, as recommended by the Geotechnical Section, when the shaft tip is located within karstic rock or other conditions where tip resistance cannot be reliably determined. 


:'''b)''' Minimum transverse reinforcement to control stability of cage before and during placement:
The factored elastic compression of the unsupported length of the shaft shall be determined as


:Use minimum #4 @ 12” stirrups for reinforcing cage ≤ 4 ft. diameter and minimum #5 @ 12” stirrups for reinforcing cage > 4 ft. diameter (FHWA-NHI-10-016) unless transverse reinforcement needs to be designed as in No. 1. If transverse reinforcement needs to be designed as in No. 1, then provide the controlling  transverse reinforcement area required by EPG 751.37.6.4 No. 2a, 2b and [[#751.37.6.5 Factored Shear Resistance|EPG 751.37.6.5 Factored Shear Resistance]].
:All shafts, cased or uncased, or where casing is used for strength, shall be transversely reinforced.
'''No. 3. Determine Maximum Transverse Reinforcement Spacing:'''
:The maximum transverse reinforcement spacing shall be ≤ 12” to provide crack control without consideration for casing. MoDOT does not implement LRFD 5.8.2.7 maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement requirements for typical shaft sizes. However, for small shafts where LRFD 5.8.2.7 will control, it should be directly implemented.
<div id="No. 4. Determine Maximum"></div>
'''No. 4. Determine Maximum Transverse Shaft Reinforcement Spacing at the Anchorage of Column Reinforcement: '''
:For columns with longitudinal reinforcement anchored into oversized shafts, in the anchorage region, the spacing of the transverse shaft reinforcement shall meet the requirements of the following equation:
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" width="800"
|-
|-
|align="left"|<math>S_{max}=\frac{2\pi A_{sp}f_{ytr}l_s}{kA_lf_{ul}}</math>||align="center"| (consistent units)||align="Center"|'''(LRFD 5.11.5.2.1-1)'''  ||align="right"|Equation 751.37.6.4.3
|align="left"|<math>\delta_{eR} = \frac{\gamma Q (L-L_s)}{\phi_{\delta e} \cdot E_p A_p}</math>||align="center"| (consistent units of length)||align="right"|Equation 751.37.4.7
|}
|}


:where:  
where:


::''S<sub>max</sub>'' = maximum spacing of transverse shaft reinforcement (consistent units of length),
:''δ<sub>eR</sub>'' = factored elastic compression of the unsupported length of the shaft (consistent units of length),  
::''A<sub>sp</sub>'' = area of transverse shaft reinforcement (consistent units of area),
::''f<sub>ytr</sub>'' = yield strength of transverse shaft reinforcement (consistent units of stress),
::''ℓ<sub>s</sub>'' = required lap splice of the longitudinal column reinforcement (consistent units of length),  
::''k'' = ratio of column tensile reinforcement to total column reinforcement at the nominal resistance,
::''A<sub>ℓ</sub>'' = area of longitudinal column reinforcement (consistent units of area), and
::''f<sub>uℓ</sub>'' = tensile strength of longitudinal column reinforcement (consistent units of stress).


:<math>\mathbf\gamma Q </math> = factored load for the appropriate serviceability limit state (consistent units of force),


:''L'' = overall shaft length (consistent units of length),


:''L<sub>s</sub>'' = length of the rock socket (consistent units of length),


:''E<sub>p</sub>'' = nominal modulus of elasticity for the shaft (consistent units of stress),


====751.38.8.3.1 Spread Footing Reinforcement====
:''A<sub>p</sub>'' = nominal shaft area (consistent units of area) and


{|border="0" align="center" style="text-align:center"
:<math>\mathbf\phi_{\mathbf\delta e}</math> = settlement resistance factor for elastic compression of the shaft.
! colspan="2" |'''Reinforcement Details - Seismic Design Category A'''
|-
| [[Image:751.38_Reinforcement_Front_Elevation.gif]] || [[Image:751.38_Reinforcement_Side_Elevation.gif]]
|-
| '''FRONT ELEVATION''' || '''SIDE ELEVATION'''
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left" | '''*''' Footing depths > 36 in. may require the side faces to have shrinkage and temperature reinforcement. See Structural Project Manager.
|-
! colspan="2" |'''Reinforcement Details - Seismic Design Category B, C & D'''
|-
| [[Image:751.38.8.3.1_04-2025.png|400px]] || [[Image:751.38.8.3.1_04-2025.png|400px]]
|-
| '''FRONT ELEVATION''' || '''SIDE ELEVATION'''
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left" | '''*''' Use same area of steel in the top of the footing as is required for the bottom.
|-
| colspan="2" style="text-align:left" | For spread footing joint shear reinforcement requirement for SDC C and D, see [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2.4.2_Footing_(Spread_Footing_and_Pile_Cap_Footing)_Joint_Shear_Reinforcement|EPG 751.9.1.2.4.2  Footing (Spread Footing and Pile Cap Footing) Joint Shear Reinforcement]].
|}


Values for the settlement resistance factor for elastic compression of the shaft shall be taken from Table 751.37.4.1 according to the operational importance of the structure. 


 
====<center>''Table 751.37.4.1 Settlement resistance factors for elastic compression of drilled shafts''</center>====
 
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 
|+
 
! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Operational Importance !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Settlement Resistance Factor, ''Φ<sub>δe</sub>''
 
=751.39.1 Dimensions=
Long, narrow footings (length to width ratio ≥ 2.0) supporting individual columns are not desirable, and care should be taken to avoid their use unless space constraints or eccentric loading dictate otherwise.
 
{|
|-
| style="width: 350px;" | [[image:Dim_Side_Elevation_10-26-23.png|center]] || style="width: 350px;" | [[image:Dim_Front_Elevation_10-26-23.png|center]]
|-
| <center>'''Side Elevation'''</center> || <center>'''Front Elevation'''</center>
|}
 
{|  
|-
| (1)
| style="text-align:left;" | Min. = 1/8 x (Distance from top of beam to bottom of footing.)
|-
| (2)
| style="text-align:left;" | 3'-0" (Min.) & 6'-0" (Max.) for steel HP piles, 14" CIP piles. 3D (Min.) and 6D (Max.) for 16”, 20" and 24" CIP piles. (D = pile diameter)
|-
| (3)
| style="text-align:left;" | Indicates column diameter, or column length or width on a hammer head pier.
|-
|-
| style="vertical-align:top" | (4)
|Minor or Low Volume Route || align="center"|0.68
|
 
{| class="wikitable"  style="text-align: center"
|-
|-
!
|Major Route ||align="center"|0.64
! Seismic Design Category
! Min. Footing Thickness
|-
|-
| rowspan="2" | Friction Pile
|Major Bridge <$100 million ||align="center"| 0.61
| A
| 2’-6” or column diameter
|-
|-
| B, C, D
|Major Bridge >$100 million||align="center"| 0.60
| 3’-0” or column diameter
|-
| rowspan="2" | HP Pile
| A
| 3’-0” or column diameter
|-
| B, C, D
| 3’-0” or column diameter
|}
|}
|-
|
| Note: For column diameters 4'-0" and greater use a 4'-0" min. footing</br>thickness.  If SDC A S<sub>D1</sub> ≥ 0.1, provide seismic details similar to SDC B for applicable routes per [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart].


|-
| (5)
| style="text-align:left;" | 12" for seismic design category A and 18" for SDC B, C, & D. If SDC A SD1 ≥ 0.1, provide seismic details similar to SDC B for applicable routes per [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart].
|-
| (6)
| style="text-align:left;" | Use 18" for steel HP piles and 14" and 16” CIP piles. The distance from the side of any pile to the nearest edge of the pile footing shall not be less than 9 inches.
|}


'''Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Rock'''


{|
Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.1 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean uniaxial compressive strength, <math>COV_{\overline {q_u}}</math>.  Values for <math>COV_{\overline {q_u}}</math> shall be determined in accordance with [[321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation|EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation]] to reflect the variability of the mean uniaxial compressive strength for the rock over the shaft segment.  Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.2 based on values for <math>COV_{\overline {q_u}}</math> that reflect the variability of the mean uniaxial compressive strength for the rock over the distance 2''D<sub>s</sub>'' below the tip of the shaft.
|-
| style="width: 350px;" | [[image:Typ_Plan_Staggered_Pile_10-26-23.png|center]]  
|-
| <center>'''TYPICAL PLAN</br>STAGGERED PILE'''<br>(7 Pile Footings shall not be used.)</center>  
|}
<nowiki>*</nowiki> &nbsp; The maximum pile spacing is 4'-0".


<nowiki>**</nowiki> 3'-0" (Min.) & 6'-0" (Max.) for steel HP piles, 14" CIP piles. 3D (Min.) and 6D (Max.) for 16”, 20" and 24" CIP piles. (D = pile diameter)
[[image:751.37.4.1.1 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.1 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in rock from uniaxial compression test measurements using approximate method. '''</center>]]
[[image:751.37.4.1.2 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.2 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in rock from uniaxial compression test measurements using approximate method. '''</center>]]
'''Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Weak Rock from Uniaxial Compression Tests on Rock Core'''


Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through weak rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.3 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean uniaxial compressive strength, <math>COV_{\overline {q_u}}</math>.  Values for <math>COV_{\overline {q_u}}</math> shall be determined in accordance with [[321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation|EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation]] to reflect the variability of the mean uniaxial compressive strength for the rock over the shaft segment.  Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on weak rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.4 based on values for <math>COV_{\overline {q_u}}</math> that reflect the variability of the mean uniaxial compressive strength for the rock over the distance 2''D<sub>s</sub>'' below the tip of the shaft.


[[image:751.37.4.1.3 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.3 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from uniaxial compression test measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]] 
[[image:751.37.4.1.4 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.4 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from uniaxial compression test measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]]
'''Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Weak Rock from Standard Penetration Test Measurements'''


Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through weak rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.5 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean equivalent SPT ''N''-value, <math>COV_{\overline {N_{eq}}}</math>.  Values for <math>COV_{\overline {N_{eq}}}</math> shall be determined in accordance with [[321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation|EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation]] to reflect the variability of the mean equivalent ''N''-value over the shaft segment.  Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on weak rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.6 based on values for <math>COV_{\overline {N_{eq}}}</math> that reflect the variability of the mean equivalent ''N''-value over the distance 2''D<sub>s</sub>'' below the tip of the shaft.


[[image:751.37.4.1.5 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.5 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Standard Penetration Test measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]] 
[[image:751.37.4.1.6 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.6 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Standard Penetration Test measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]]
 
'''Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Weak Rock from Texas Cone Penetration Test Measurements'''


=751.39.5 Reinforcement=
Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through weak rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.7 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean ''TCP''-value, <math>COV_{\overline {TCP}}</math>.  Values for <math>COV_{\overline {TCP}}</math> shall be determined in accordance with [[321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation|EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation]] to reflect the variability of the mean ''TCP''-value over the shaft segment.  Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on weak rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.8 based on values for <math>COV_{\overline {TCP}}</math> that reflect the variability of the mean TCP-value over the distance 2''D<sub>s</sub>'' below the tip of the shaft.


'''Unreinforced Footing - Use only in Seismic Design Category A'''
[[image:751.37.4.1.7 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.7 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Texas Cone Penetration Test measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]] 
[[image:751.37.4.1.8 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.8 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Texas Cone Penetration Test measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]]
 
'''Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Weak Rock from Point Load Index Test Measurements'''


The term “unreinforced footing” is used for footings where only #6 hairpin bars are required.
Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through weak rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.9 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean ''I<sub>s(50)</sub>''-value, <math>COV_{\overline {I_{s(50)}}}</math>.  Values for <math>COV_{\overline {I_{s(50)}}}</math> shall be determined in accordance with [[321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation|EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation]] to reflect the variability of the mean ''I<sub>s(50)</sub>''-value for the rock over the shaft segment.  Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on weak rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.10 based on values for <math>COV_{\overline {I_{s(50)}}}</math> that reflect the variability of the mean ''I<sub>s(50)</sub>''-value for the rock over the distance 2''D<sub>s</sub>'' below the tip of the shaft.


Do not use unreinforced footing if SDC A, S<sub>D1</sub> ≥ 0.1 for applicable routes per [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart].  
 
[[image:751.37.4.1.9 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.9 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Point Load Index Test measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]
Unreinforced footings shall only be used when the shear line for all piles is within the column projected, or where additional flexural steel is not required by design (not typical).  
 
[[image:751.37.4.1.10 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.10 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Point Load Index Test measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]]
{|
|-
| style="width: 275px;" | [[image:Elevation_4_Pile_Footing_A_10-26-23.png|center]] || style="width: 275px;" | [[image:Plan_4_Pile_Footing_A_10-26-23.png|center]]
|-
| <center>'''Elevation</br>(4 Pile Footing)'''</center> || <center>'''Plan</br>(4 Pile Footing)'''</center>
|}
<nowiki>*</nowiki> See [[751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8.2_Development_and_Lap_Splices_of_Deformed_Bars_in_Tension|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.2]]. 
 
Notes: Use Class B lap splice of deformed bars in tension.
::Use for all types of piling.
 
 
'''Reinforced Footing - Seismic Design Category (SDC) A'''
 
If SDC A, S<sub>D1</sub> ≥ 0.1, provide seismic details similar to SDC B for applicable routes per [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart].
 
{|
|-
| style="width: 350px;" | [[image:Front_Elevation_A_10-26-23.png|center]] || style="width: 350px;" | [[image:Side_Elevation_A_10-26-23.png|center]]
|-
| <center>'''Front Elevation'''</center> || <center>'''Side Elevation'''</center>
|-
| colspan="2" | [[image:Plan_A_10-26-23.png|center]]
|-
| colspan="2" | <center>'''Plan'''</center>
|}
<nowiki>*</nowiki> See See [[751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8.2_Development_and_Lap_Splices_of_Deformed_Bars_in_Tension|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.2]]
    
    
Notes: Use Class B lap splice of deformed bars in tension.


::The minimum bar size for flexural steel that meets all design requirements is preferred. Straight bars are preferred to hooked ends.
'''Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Cohesive Soils'''


Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through cohesive soil shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.11 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean undrained shear strength, <math>COV_{\overline {s_u}}</math>. Values for  <math>COV_{\overline {s_u}}</math> shall be determined in accordance with [[321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation|EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation]] to reflect the variability of the mean undrained shear strength for the soil over the shaft segment.  Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on cohesive soil shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.12 based on values for <math>COV_{\overline {s_u}}</math> that reflect the variability of the mean undrained shear strength for the soil over the distance 2''D'' below the tip of the shaft.


'''Reinforced Footing - Seismic Design Categories B, C & D'''
[[image:751.37.4.1.11 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.11 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in cohesive soil from undrained shear strength measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]] 
[[image:751.37.4.1.12 2021.jpg|center|700px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 751.37.4.1.12 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in cohesive soil from undrained shear strength measurements using approximate method.'''</center>]] 


{|
For shafts founded in soft cohesive soils, consideration shall also be given to including additional settlement induced from time dependent consolidation of the soil.
|-
| style="width: 400px;" | [[image:Front_Elevation_BCD_10-26-23.png|325px|center]] || style="width: 400px;" | [[image:Side_Elevation_BCD_10-26-23.png|350px|center]]
|-
| <center>'''Front Elevation'''</center> || <center>'''Side Elevation'''</center>
|-
| [[image:Plan_Top_BCD_10-26-23.png|395px|center]] || [[image:Plan_Bottom_BCD_10-26-23.png|center]]
|-
| <center>'''Plan Showing Top Reinforcement'''</center> || <center>'''Plan Showing Bottom Reinforcement'''</center>
|}
For anchorage of piles for seismic details for SDC B, C and D, see [[751.36_Driven_Piles#751.36.4_Anchorage_of_Piles_for_Seismic_Details|EPG 751.36.4 Anchorage of Piles for Seismic Details]].


<nowiki>  *</nowiki> For reinforcement in top of the footing and bottom of footing, See [[751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8.2_Development_and_Lap_Splices_of_Deformed_Bars_in_Tension|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.2]] for lap splice. 
'''Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils'''


: Note: Use Class B lap splice of deformed bars in tension.  
Settlement evaluations for individual drilled shafts in cohesionless soils shall be designed according to applicable sections of the current AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.


<nowiki>  **</nowiki>Place the top reinforcement uniformly outside the column reinforcement. Use same area of steel in the top of the footing as is required for the bottom.


For pile footing joint shear reinforcement requirement for SDC C and D, see [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1.2.4.2_Footing_(Spread_Footing_and_Pile_Cap_Footing)_Joint_Shear_Reinforcement|EPG 751.9.1.2.4.2  Footing (Spread Footing and Pile Cap Footing) Joint Shear Reinforcement]].
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>




===751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design===
Drilled shaft structural resistance shall be designed similarly to reinforced concrete columns. The Strength Limit State and applicable Extreme Event Limit State load combinations shall be used in the reinforcement design.


Longitudinal reinforcing steel shall extend below the point of fixity of the drilled shaft at least 10 ft. in accordance with LRFD 10.8.3.9.3 or the required bar development length whichever is larger.
If permanent casing is used, and the shell consists of a smooth pipe greater than 0.12 in. thick, it may be considered load carrying.  An 1/8" shall be subtracted off of the shell thickness to account for corrosion. Casing could also be corrugated metal pipe. If casing is assumed to contribute to the structural resistance, the plans should indicate the minimum thickness of casing required.


Minimum clear spacing between longitudinal bars as well as between transverse bars shall not be less than five times the maximum aggregate size or 5 in. (LRFD 10.8.3.9.3).


For rock sockets use 3” min. clear cover. For drilled shafts for sign structure support, use 3” min. clear cover for all shaft diameters.


For longitudinal reinforcement, splicing shall be in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.4.


For transverse reinforcement, lap splices for closed circular stirrups/ties shall be provided and staggered in accordance with LRFD 5.10.4.3. Lap length of 1.3 '''l'''<sub>d</sub> (Class B) for closed stirrups/ties shall be provided in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.6d.


<big><big>'''<font color= red>!!!  DARREN should the note before G1.40 include note 1.44 and note 1.45    !!!</font color>'''</big></big>
For lap length, see [[751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines#751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General|EPG 751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General]].
 
=== G1. Concrete Bents ===
 
'''Expansion Device at End Bents (G1.1 and G1.1.1)'''
 
'''(G1.1)'''
:Top of backwall for end Bent<u>s</u> No. <u> &nbsp;    &nbsp; </u>&nbsp; shall be formed to the crown and grade of the roadway.   Backwall above upper construction joint<u>s</u> shall not be poured until the superstructure slab has been poured in the adjacent span.
 
'''(G1.1.1)'''
:All concrete above the upper construction joint in backwall shall be Class B-2.
 
 
'''Abutments with Flared Wings'''
 
'''(G1.2)'''
:Longitudinal dimensions shown for bar spacing in the developed elevations are measured along front face of abutments.
 
 
'''Stub Bents (G1.3 and G1.4) '''
 
'''(G1.3)'''
:<u>Barrier</u>, <u>parapets</u> <u>and</u> <u>end post</u> shall not be poured until the slab has been poured in the adjacent span.
 
 
'''(G1.4) Use when embedded in rock or on a footing.'''
:Rock shall be excavated to provide at least 6" of earth under the <u>beam and wings.</u>
 
 
'''End Bents with Turned-Back Wings (G1.5 and G1.6)'''
 
'''(G1.5) Use for Non-Integral End Bents only.'''
:Field bending shall be required when necessary at the wings for #<u> &nbsp; </u>-H<u> &nbsp; </u>&nbsp;bars in the backwalls for skewed structures and for #<u> &nbsp; </u>-F<u> &nbsp; </u>&nbsp;bars in the wings for the slope of the wing.
 
'''(G1.6) Add to sheet showing the typical section thru wing detail.'''
:For reinforcement of the barrier, see Sheet No. <u> &nbsp; &nbsp; </u> (1).


::(1) Use sheet number of the details of the barrier at end bents.




'''Integral End Bents (G1.7 thru G1.10)'''
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


'''(G1.7) Place with part plan of end bent, second F bar required for skewed bents. '''
:The #6-F___ <u>and #6-F &nbsp; </u>  bars shall be bent in the field to clear <u>beams</u> <u>girders</u>.
<div id="(G1.7.1) Use for skewed bents."></div>


'''(G1.7.1) Use for skewed bents. Place with plan of beam showing reinforcement and part plan of end bent, V bars not required with part plan of end bent. '''
====Commentary on [[#751.37.1.3 Casing|EPG 751.37.1.3 Casing]]====
:The U bars <u>and pairs of V bars</u> shall be placed parallel to centerline of roadway.


'''(G1.8) Place with part plan of end bent.'''
Temporary or permanent casing is commonly required to support the shaft excavation during construction to prevent caving of overburden soils. Use of permanent casing generally simplifies construction by avoiding the need for multiple cranes to simultaneously place concrete and extract the casing and reduces the risk of problems during concrete placement. However, use of either temporary or permanent casing will generally reduce the side resistance of the constructed shaft over the cased length. Alternatives to use of casing for non-bridge structures include use of mineral or polymer slurry to maintain the stability of the excavation during construction, or use of no casing and no slurry when soil/rock conditions will permit the shafts to be constructed without caving of the excavation walls.
:All concrete in the end bent above top of beam and below top of slab shall be Class B-2.


'''P/S Structures (G1.9 and G1.9.1). place with part plan of end bent.'''
Permanent casing may also be required to provide structural resistance, especially when lateral loads are substantial (see [[#751.37.6 Structural Resistance of Drilled Shafts|EPG 751.37.6]]). For example, permanent casing may be required to:
:* Achieve the required flexural resistance of the drilled shaft
:* Resist large lateral loads for bridges located in seismic areas
:* Facilitate shaft construction through water
:* Support the shaft excavation when there is insufficient head room available for casing recovery


'''(G1.9) '''
:Strands at end of the <u>girders</u> <u>beams</u> shall be field bent or, if necessary, cut in field to maintain 1 1/2-inch minimum clearance to fill face of end bent.
<div id="(G1.9.1)"></div>
'''(G1.9.1) Use appropriate girder sheet number. '''
:For location of coil tie rods and #5-H__(strand tie bar), see Sheet No.___.


'''(G1.10) Use for steel structures without steel diaphragms at end bents.'''
<br><br>
:Concrete diaphragms at the integral end bents shall be poured a minimum of 12 hours before the slab is poured.
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


===751.38.1.1 Dimensions and Nomenclature===


'''Semi-Deep Abutments (G1.11 thru G1.13) Place near the ground line and piling in abutment detail. This detail and notes can be placed with abutment details or near the foundation table.'''
Dimensions to be established in design include the bearing depth (depth to footing base) and the footing dimensions shown in Figure 751.38.1.1Table 751.38.1.1 defines each dimension and provides relevant minimum and/or maximum values for the respective dimension.
   
   
'''(G1.11)'''
[[image:751.38.1.1.jpg|center|775px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.38.1.1 Nomenclature used for spread footings.'''</center>  ]]
:Earth within abutment shall not be above the ground line shown . Forms supporting the abutment slab may be left in place.


 
====<center>''Table 751.38.1.1 Summary of footing dimensions with minimum and maximum values''</center>====
'''(G1.12)'''
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
:The maximum variation of the head of the pile and the battered face of the pile from the position shown shall be no  more than 2 inches.
 
 
'''(G1.13)'''
:Exposed <u>steel piles</u> <u>steel pile shells</u> within the abutment shall be coated with a heavy coating of an approved bituminous paint.
 
<div id="All Substructure Sheets with Anchor Bolts"></div>
 
'''All Substructure Sheets with Anchor Bolts'''
 
'''(G1.15A)'''
:Reinforcing steel shall be shifted to clear anchor bolt wells by at least 1/2".
 
'''(G1.15B) Use unless only anchor bolt wells are preferred, i.e. uplift, congested reinforcement, etc. '''
 
:Holes for anchor bolts may be drilled into the substructure.
 
 
'''Beam/Girder Chairs (G1.16 thru G1.19). Notes G1.16 and G1.17 shall be placed near chair details. '''
<div id="(G1.16)"></div>
'''(G1.16)'''
:Cost of furnishing, fabricating and installing chairs will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for <u>(a)</u>.
<center>
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|
{| border="1" cellpadding="3" cellspacing="1" style:"text-align:left"  
|+  
|+  
! style="background:#BEBEBE" |Condition!! style="background:#BEBEBE" |(a)
! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Dimension !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Description!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Minimum Value !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Maximum Value !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Comment
|-
|-
|align="left" width="230"|Structures without steel beam or girder pay item  ||align="left" width="230"|Fabricated Structural Carbon Steel (Misc.)
|align="center"|D||Column diameter||align="center"|12”||align="center"|--||align="center"|--
|-
|-
|align="left"|Structures with steel beam or girder pay item|| align="left"|Use beam or girder pay item
|align="center"|B||Footing width||align="center"|D+24”||align="center"|--||align="center"|Min. 3” increments
|}
||
{| border="1" cellpadding="3"  cellspacing="1" style:"text-align:left"  
|-
|-
|width="250" align="left"|When there is no steel beam or girder pay item, the miscellaneous steel for the chair is a substructure pay item and should also be included in the bent substructure quantity box
|align="center"|L||Footing length||align="center"|D+24”<sup>'''1'''</sup>||align="center"|--||align="center"|Min. 3” increments
|}
|}
 
</center>
'''(G1.17) Use for P/S structures and for steel structures when the chair material is not the pay item material. '''
:Steel for chairs shall be ASTM A709 Grade 36.
 
'''(G1.18) Use for structures with steel beam or girder pay items. Place below the substructure quantity box of all bents with chairs using the same pay item for (a) as used in Note G1.16. '''
 
:The weight of <u> &nbsp;</u>  pounds of chairs is included in the weight of (a).
 
'''(G1.19) Place with the other bent notes. Second sentence is required when the chair details are located with other bent details. '''
 
Reinforcing steel shall be shifted to clear chairs. <u>For details of chairs, see Sheet No. &nbsp;  </u>.
 
'''Pile Cap Bents. '''
 
'''(G1.20) Place with plan showing reinforcement.'''
:Reinforcing steel shall be shifted to clear piles. U bars shall clear piles by at least 1 1/2 inches. 
 
'''Vertical Drains at End Bents.'''
 
'''(G1.25) Place with part plan of end bent. '''
:For details of vertical drain at end bent, see Sheet No.___.
 
'''Bridge Approach Slab. '''
 
'''(G1.30) Place with part plan of end bent.'''
:For details of bridge approach slab, see Sheet No.___.
 
 
'''Miscellaneous (G1.41 thru G1.43) '''
 
'''(G1.40)  Use the following note at all fixed intermediate bents on prestressed girder bridges with steps of 2" or more. Place with plan of beam.'''
:For steps 2 inches or more, use 2 1/4 x 1/2 inch joint filler up vertical face.
 
'''(G1.41a) Use the following note when vertical column steel is hooked into the bent beam for seismic category A.'''
:At the contractor's option, the hooks of vertical bars embedded in the beam cap may be oriented inward or outward.
 
'''(G1.41b) Use the following note when vertical column steel is hooked into the bent beam for seismic category B, C or D. '''
:The hooks of vertical bars embedded in the beam cap shall not be turned outward, away from the column core.
 
'''(G1.42)  Place the following note on plans when using Optional Section for Column-Web beam joints.'''
:At the contractor's option, the details shown in optional Section __-__ may be used for column-web beam or tie beam at intermediate Bent No. <u>&nbsp;&nbsp;</u>.  No additional payment will be made for this substitution.
 
'''(G1.43)  Place the following note on plans when you have adjoining twin bridges.'''
:Preformed compression joint seal shall be in accordance with Sec 717. Payment will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for other items included in the contract.
 
'''(G1.44) Use with column closed circular stirrup/tie bar detail.'''
:Minimum lap ____ (Stagger adjacent bar splices)
 
'''(G1.45) Use when mechanical bar splices (MBS) are to be specified on the plans for column and drilled shaft vertical reinforcement.'''
: When contractor use MBS for column and drilled shaft vertical reinforcement, contractor shall increase diameter of stirrup bars and seismic bars (spiral/hoop) as needed at the MBS locations. No additional payment will be made for this adjustment. Stirrup bars and seismic bars shall not be shifted to create large gaps to avoid MBS.
 
 
 
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4034'''=
 
<big><big>'''<font color= red>!!!  Only replace first part of 751.9.1  up to 751.9.1.1   !!!</font color>'''</big></big>
 
==751.9.1 Seismic Analysis and Design Specifications==
<div style="float: left; margin-top: 5px; margin: 15px; width:255px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''<u><center>Additional Information</center></u>'''
* [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]
</div>
All new or replacement bridges on the state system shall include seismic design and/or detailing to resist an expected seismic event per the [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]. For example, for a bridge in Seismic Design Categories A, B, C or D, complete seismic analysis or seismic detailing only may be determined as per “[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]”.
 
Missouri is divided into four Seismic Design Categories. Most of the state is SDC A which requires minimal seismic design and/or detailing in accordance with SGS (Seismic Zone 1 of LRFD) and “[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]”.  The other seismic design categories will require a greater amount of seismic design and/or detailing.
 
For seismic detailing only:
 
When A<sub>S</sub> is greater than 0.75 then use A<sub>S</sub> = 0.75 for abutment design where required per “[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]” and [https://www.modot.org/media/47036 SEG 24-01]
 
For complete seismic analysis:
 
When A<sub>S</sub> is greater than 0.75 then use A<sub>S</sub> = 0.75 at zero second for seismic analysis and response spectrum curve. See [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Example-1_SDC_Response_Spectra.docx Example 1_SDC_Response_Spectra]. The other data points on the response spectrum curve shall not be modified.
 
<div style="float: left; margin-top: 5px; margin: 15px; width:255px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
'''<u><center>Additional Information</center></u>'''
* [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Retrofit_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Retrofit Flowchart]
</div>
 
When existing bridges are identified as needing repairs or maintenance, a decision on whether to include seismic retrofitting in the scope of the project shall be determined per the “[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Retrofit_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Retrofit Flowchart]”, the extent of the rehabilitation work and the expected life of the bridge after the work. For example, if the bridge needs painting or deck patching, no retrofitting is recommended. However, redecking or widening the bridge indicates that MoDOT is planning to keep the bridge in the state system with an expected life of at least 30 more years. In these instances, the project core team should consider cost effective methods of retrofitting the existing bridge. Superstructure replacement requires a good substructure and the core team shall decide whether there is sufficient seismic capacity. Follow the design procedures for new or replacement bridges in forming logical comparisons and assessing risk in a rational determination of the scope of a superstructure replacement project specific to the substructure. For example, based on SPC and route, retrofit of the substructure could include seismic detailing only or a complete seismic analysis may be required determine sufficient seismic capacity. Economic analysis should be considered as part of the decision to re-use and retrofit, or re-build. Where practical, make end bents integral and eliminate expansion joints. Seismic isolation systems shall conform to AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design 4th Ed. 2023.
 
Bridge seismic retrofit for widenings shall be in accordance with [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Retrofit_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Retrofit Flowchart]. Seismic details should only be considered for widenings where they can be practically implemented and where they can be uniformly implemented as not to create significant stress redistribution in the structure. When a complete seismic analysis is required for widenings the existing structure shall be retrofitted and the new structural elements shall be detailed to resist seismic demand.
 
* '''Seismic Details for Widening (one side):''' When widening the bridge in one direction there is not a significant benefit, and it could be detrimental, to strengthen a new wing or column while ignoring the existing structure. It may be practical to use FRP wrap to retrofit the existing columns to provide a similar level of service to a new column with seismic details, but this will likely require design computations to verify (see below). For SDC C and D, seismic details typically require a T-joint detail in the beam cap and footing, but t-joint details shall be ignored if the existing beam cap is not retrofitted. For abutments it is not practical to dig up an existing wing solely to match the new wing design so the abutment need not be designed for mass inertial forces. SPM, SLE or owner’s representative approval is required to determine the appropriate level of seismic detail implementation.
* '''Seismic Details for Widening (both sides):''' When widening in both directions the wings shall be designed to resist the mass inertial forces. Seismic details shall be added to the new columns in SDC B only if the existing columns can be retrofitted with FRP wrap to provide a similar level of service as discussed below. SDC C and D bridges may be detailed and retrofitted similar to SDC B since retrofitting the beam cap or footing is likely not practical.
* '''Seismic Details for Widening (FRP wrap)''': Carbon or glass fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) composite wrap should be considered to strengthen the factored axial resistance of existing columns. There are limitations to the existing and achievable column factored axial resistance with FRP wrap. The goal of the FRP wrap is to increase the factored axial resistance of the existing column to be not less than the factored axial resistance of the new column with seismic details. If an existing column cannot be retrofitted with FRP wrap to match the factored axial resistance of a new column with seismic details at the same bent then seismic details shall be ignored for all columns in the bridge substructure. See AASHTO Guide Spec for Design of Bonded FRP Systems for Repair and Strengthening of Concrete Bridge Elements, March 2023, 2nd Ed., Appendix A, Example 6 for an example for increasing column factored axial resistance with FRP wrap. Use [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#I5._Fiber_Reinforced_Polymer_(FRP)_Wrap_–_Intermediate_Bent_Column_Strengthening_for_Seismic_Details_for_Widening._Report_following_notes_on_Intermediate_bent_plan_details.|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes I5]] on plans to report factored axial resistance of existing column and new column. The flexural resistance of the column is also increased with FRP wrap, but it may not be practical to match the flexural resistance of a new column using existing longitudinal steel.  For additional references, see [[751.40_LFD_Widening_and_Repair#751.40.3.2_Bent_Cap_Shear_Strengthening_using_FRP_Wrap|EPG 751.40.3.2 Bent Cap Shear Strengthening using FRP Wrap]].
 
 
 
 
 
===751.40.3.2 Bent Cap Shear Strengthening using FRP Wrap===
 
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 0 auto; text-align: center"
|+
| style="background:#BEBEBE" | '''[https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
|-
|-
| Rehabilitation, Surfacing & Widening; Fiber Reinf. Polymer (FRP) Wrap for Bent Cap Strengthening [RHB08]
|align="center"|A||Edge distance in width direction||align="center"|12”||align="center"|--||align="center"|--
|}
 
Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) wrap may be used for Bent Cap Shear Strengthening. FRP wrap may also be used for seismic retrofit of existing columns, but that procedure is not discussed herein (see [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.1_Seismic_Analysis_and_Design_Specifications|EPG 751.9.1 Seismic Analysis and Design Specifications]]).
 
'''When to strengthen:'''  When increased shear loading on an existing bent cap is required and a structural analysis shows insufficient bent cap shear resistance, bent cap shear strengthening is an option.  An example of when strengthening a bent cap may be required:  removing existing girder hinges and making girders continuous will draw significantly more force to the adjacent bent. An example of when strengthening a bent cap is not required:  redecking a bridge  where analysis shows that the existing bent cap cannot meet capacity for an HS20 truck loading, and the new deck is similar to the old deck and the existing beam is in good shape.
 
'''How to strengthen:'''  Using FRP systems for shear strengthening follows from the guidelines set forth in ''NCHRP Report 678, Design of FRP System for Strengthening Concrete Girders in Shear''. The method of strengthening, using either discrete strips or continuous sheets, is made optional for the contractor in accordance with ''NCHRP Report 678''.  A Bridge Standard Drawing and Bridge Special Provision have been prepared for including this work on jobs. They can be revised to specify a preferred method of strengthening if desired, strips or continuous sheet.
 
'''What condition of existing bent cap required for strengthening:'''  If a cap is in poor shape where replacement should be considered, FRP should not be used.  Otherwise, the cap beam can be repaired before applying FRP.  Perform a minimum load check using (1.1DL + 0.75(LL+I))'''*''' on the existing cap beam to prevent catastrophic failure of the beam if the FRP fails (''ACI 440.2R, Guide for the Design and Construction of Externally Bonded FRP, Sections 9.2 and 9.3.3'').  If the factored shear resistance of the cap beam is insufficient for meeting the factored minimum load check, then FRP strengthening should not be used.
   
:: '''*''' ACI 440.2R: ''Guide for the Design and Construction of Externally Bonded FRP''
 
'''Design force (net shear strength loading):'''  Strengthening a bent cap requires determining the net factored shear loading that the cap beam must carry in excess of its unstrengthened factored shear capacity, or resistance. The FRP system is then designed by the manufacturer to meet this net factored shear load, or design force.  The design force for a bent cap strengthening is calculated considering AASHTO LFD where the factored load is the standard Load Factor Group I load case.  To determine design force that the FRP must carry alone, the factored strength of the bent cap, which is 0.85 x nominal strength according to LFD design, is subtracted out to give the net factored shear load that the FRP must resist by itself.  ''NCHRP Report 678'' is referenced in the special provisions as guidelines for the contractor and the manufacturer to follow.  The report and its examples use AASHTO LRFD.  <u>Regardless, the load factor case is given and it is left to the manufacturer to provide for a satisfactory factor of safety based on their FRP system.</u>
 
Other References:
:: '''*''' ACI 201.1R: ''Guide for Making a Condition Survey of Concrete in Service''
:: '''*''' ACI 224.1R: ''Causes, Evaluation, and Repair of Cracks in Concrete''
:: '''*''' ACI 364.1R-94: ''Guide for Evaluation of Concrete Structures Prior to Rehabilitation''
:: '''*''' ACI 440.2R-08: ''Guide for the Design and Construction of Externally Bonded FRP Systems for Strengthening Concrete Structures''
:: '''*''' ACI 503R: ''Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete''
:: '''*''' ACI 546R: ''Concrete Repair Guide''
:: '''*''' International Concrete Repair Institute (ICI) ICI 03730: ''Guide for Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion''
:: '''*''' International Concrete Repair Institute (ICI) ICI 03733: ''Guide for Selecting and Specifying Materials for Repairs of Concrete Surfaces''
:: '''*''' NCHRP Report 609: ''Recommended Construction Specifications Process Control Manual for Repair and Retrofit of Concrete Structures Using Bonded FRP Composites''
:: '''*''' AASHTO Guide Spec for Design of Bonded FRP Systems for Repair and Strengthening of Concrete Bridge Elements, March 2023, 2nd Ed.
 
 
 
 
 
===I5. Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Wrap – Intermediate Bent Column Strengthening for Seismic Details for Widening. Report following notes on Intermediate bent plan details.===
 
'''(I5.1)'''
:Factored axial resistance of new columns = _____ kip and factored axial resistance of existing columns = _____ kip. The factored axial resistance of the existing column with FRP wrap shall not be less than the factored axial resistance of the new columns.
 
'''(I5.2)''' 
:See special provisions.
 
 
 
 
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4036'''=
 
 
 
==106.3.2.93.1 Means of Evaluating Aggregate Alkali Carbonate Reactivity==
 
'''1. Chemical Analysis'''
 
The chemical analysis of aggregate reactivity is an objective, quantifiable and repeatable test.  MoDOT will perform the chemical analysis per the process identified in ASTM C 25 for determining the aggregate composition.  The analysis determines the calcium oxide (CaO), magnesium oxide (MgO), and aluminum oxide (Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>) content of the aggregate.  The chemical compositions are then plotted on a chart with the CaO/MgO ratio on the y-axis and Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub> percentage on the x-axis per Fig. 2 in AASHTO R 80.  Aggregates are considered potentially reactive if the Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub> content is greater than or equal to 1.0% and the CaO/MgO ratio is either greater than or equal to 3.0 or less than or equal to 10.0 (see chart below). See flow charts in 106.3.2.93.2 for approval hierarchy. CaO, MgO and Al2O3 shall be analyzed by instrumental analysis only.
 
[[File:106.3.2.93.1_Potentially_Expansive_Aggregate_Limits-01.png|700px]]
 
<nowiki>*</nowiki> MoDOT’s upper and lower limits of potentially reactive (shaded area) aggregates.
 
'''2.  Petrographic Examination'''
 
A petrographic examination is another means of determining alkali carbonate reactivity.  The sample aggregate for petrographic analysis will be obtained at the same time as the source sample.  MoDOT personnel shall be present at the time of sample.  The petrographic sample shall be placed in an approved tamper-evident container (provided by the quarry) for shipment to petrographer.  Per ASTM C 295, a petrographic examination is to be performed by a petrographer with at least 5 years of experience in petrographic examinations of concrete aggregate including, but not limited to, identification of minerals in aggregate, classification of rock types, and categorizing physical and chemical properties of rocks and minerals.  The petrographer will have completed college level course work in mineralogy, petrography, or optical mineralogy.  MoDOT does not accept on-the-job training by a non-degreed petrographer as qualified to perform petrographical examinations.  MoDOT may request petrographer’s qualifications in addition to the petrographic report.  The procedures in C 295 shall be used to perform the petrographic examination.  The petrographic examination report to MoDOT shall include at a minimum:
 
:* Quarry name and ledge name; all ledges if used in combination
:* MoDOT District quarry resides
:* Date sample was obtained; date petrographic analysis was completed
:* Name of petrographer and company/organization affiliated
:* Lithographic descriptions with photographs of the sample(s) examined
:* Microphotographs of aggregate indicating carbonate particles and/or other reactive materials
:* Results of the examination
:* All conclusions related to the examination 
 
See flow charts in EPG 106.3.2.93.2 for the approval hierarchy.  See EPG 106.3.2.93.3 for petrographic examination submittals.  No direct payment will be made by the Commission for shipping the petrographic analysis sample to petrographer, or for the petrographic analysis performed by the petrographer. 
 
'''3.  Concrete Prism/Beam Test'''
 
ASTM C 1105 is yet another means for determining the potential expansion of alkali carbonate reactivity in concrete aggregate.  MoDOT will perform this test per C 1105 at its Central Laboratory.  Concrete specimen expansion will be measured at 3, 6, 9, and 12 months.  The test specimens will be considered alkali carbonate reactive (expansive) if the specimens expand greater than 0.015% at 3 months, 0.025% at 6 months, or 0.030% at 12 months.  See flow chart in EPG 106.3.2.93.2 for the approval hierarchy.
 
 
 
 
='''REVISION REQUEST 4038'''=
 
==1018.5 Laboratory Procedures for Sec 1018==
===1018.5.1 Sample Preparation===
Prior to testing, the sample should be thoroughly mixed, passed through a No.20 [850 mm] sieve, and brought to room temperature. All foreign matter and lumps that do not pulverize easily in the fingers must be discarded.
 
===1018.5.2 Procedure===
Chemical analysis is to be conducted according to ASTM C114 and MoDOT Test Methods T46 and T91. Original test data and calculations are to be recorded in Laboratory workbooks. Test results are to be recorded through AWP and retained on file in the Laboratory.
 
Physical tests on the following are to be conducted in accordance with ASTM C311.
:(a) Fineness, 325 (45 mm) sieve analysis  ASTM C430
:(b) Pozzolanic Activity Index (7 day)  ASTM C311
:(c) Water requirement  ASTM C311
:(d) Soundness, autoclave ASTM C311
:(e) Specific Gravity ASTM C311
Original test data and calculations are to be recorded in Laboratory workbooks. Test results are to be recorded through AWP and retained on file in the Laboratory.
 
===1018.5.3 Source Acceptance===
Samples are to be taken by the manufacturer in accordance with ASTM C311 from the conveyor, after exiting the precipitator collector and prior to entry into the designated storage silo, or where designated by the engineer.
 
Ash, that is manually sampled and tested every 400 tons, is to be held until the required tests have been run and the results are properly certified and are available for pick up by MoDOT personnel prior to shipment.
 
Ash, that is continually sampled and tested at a frequency and duration acceptable to the engineer, can be continuously shipped direct from a generating station silo, provided the following minimum criteria are met:
:a. The storage silo has a minimum capacity of two days production or 1000 tons, whichever is the largest.
:b. The storage silo is full, and certified test results on the entire contents are available prior to the first shipment.
:c. The ash quantity in the silo is never less than 400 tons.
:d. A continual inventory of the quantity of ash in silos is maintained within one shift of being correct.
:e. The engineer has free access to station facilities and records necessary to conduct inspection and sampling.
:f. All ash conveyance lines to the designated silo or silos will be sampled after precipitator collector and prior to entry into the designated silo(s) where designated by the engineer.
:g. The generating station personnel handle and expedite all documents required to ship by MoDOT Certification.
 
===1018.5.4 Plant Inspection===
Qualified fly ash manufacturers and terminals shipping material by certification to Department projects shall be inspected on a regular basis by a representative of the Laboratory. This inspection shall include a review of plant facilities for producing a quality product; plant testing procedures; frequency of tests; plant records of daily test results and shipping information; company certification procedures of silos, bins, and/or shipments; and a discussion of items of mutual interest between the plant and the Department. The Laboratory representative shall coordinate test results and test procedures between the Laboratory and the respective plant laboratory, and investigate associated problems.
 
All silo or bin certifications and results of complete physical and chemical tests received in the Laboratory are to be checked for specification compliance and to determine if the required certifications have been furnished.
 
===1018.5.5 Sample Record===
The sample record shall be completed in AASHTOWARE Project (AWP) in accordance with [[:Category:101 Standard Forms #Sample Record, General|AWP MA Sample Record, General]], and shall indicate acceptance, qualified acceptance, or rejection. Appropriate remarks, as described in [[106.20 Reporting|EPG 106.20 Reporting]], are to be included in the remarks to clarify conditions of acceptance or rejections. Test results shall be reported on the appropriate templates under the Tests tab.
 
 
 
----
='''REVISION REQUEST 4041'''=
 
 
===751.31.2.4 Column Analysis===
 
Refer to this article to check slenderness effects in column and the moment magnifier method of column design.  See Structural Project Manager for use of P Delta Analysis.
 
'''Transverse Reinforcement'''
 
''Seismic Zone 1''
:Columns shall be analyzed as “Tied Columns”.  Unless excessive reinforcement is required, in which case spirals shall be used.
 
'''Bi-Axial Bending'''
 
Use the resultant of longitudinal and transverse moments.
 
'''Slenderness effects in Columns'''
 
The slenderness effects shall be considered when:
 
<math>\, \ l_u \ge \frac {22r}{K}</math>
 
Where:
<math>\, \ l_u</math> = unsupported length of column
 
<math>\, \ r</math> = radius of gyration of column cross section
 
<math>\, \ K</math> = effective length factor
 
Effects should be investigated by using either the rigorous P-∆ analysis or the Moment Magnifier Method with consideration of bracing and non-bracing effects.  Use of the moment magnifier method is limited to members with Kl<sub>u</sub>/r ≤ 100, or the diameter of a round column must be ≥ Kl<sub>u</sub>/25. A maximum value of 2.5 for moment magnifier is desirable for efficiency of design.  Increase column diameter to reduce the magnifier, if necessary.
 
When a compression member is subjected to bending in both principal directions, the effects of slenderness should be considered in each direction independently.  Instead of calculating two moment magnifiers, <math>\, \delta_b</math> and <math>\, \delta_s</math>, and performing two analyses for M<sub>2b</sub> and M<sub>2s</sub> as described in LRFD 4.5.3.2.2b, the following conservative, simplified moment magnification method in which only a moment magnifier due to sidesway, δ<sub>s</sub>, analysis is required:
<center>
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Typical Intermediate Bent.gif]]
</center>
 
<center>'''Typical Intermediate Bent'''</center>
 
''General Procedure for Bending in a Principal Direction''
 
::M<sub>c</sub> = δ<sub>s</sub>M<sub>2</sub>
 
::Where:
::M<sub>c</sub> = Magnified column moment about the axis under investigation.
 
::M<sub>2</sub> = value of larger column moment about the axis under investigation due to LRFD Load Combinations.
 
::δ<sub>s</sub> = moment magnification factor for sidesway about the axis under investigation
 
::<math>\, =\cfrac{C_m}{1- \cfrac{\sum P_u }{\phi_k \sum P_e }} \ge 1.0; \ C_m = 1.0 </math>
 
Where:
{|style="text-align:left"
|-
|-
|<math>\, \sum P_u</math> ||=||summation of individual column factored axial loads for a specific Load Combination (kip)
|align="center"|A’||Edge distance in length direction||align="center"| 12”||align="center"|--||align="center"|--
|-
|-
|<math>\, \phi_K</math> ||=||stiffness reduction factor for concrete = 0.75
|align="center"|t||Footing thickness||align="center"|30” or D<sup>'''2'''</sup> ||align="center"|72” ||align="center"|Min. 3” increments
|-
|-
|<math>\, \sum P_e</math>|| =||summation of individual column Euler buckling loads
|colspan="5"|<sup>'''1'''</sup> Minimum of 1/6 x distance from top of beam to bottom of footing
|-
|-
|colspan="5"|<sup>'''2'''</sup> For column diameters ≥ 48”, use minimum value of 48”. Sign support structures may utilize a minimum thickness of 24”.
|}
|}


<math>\, =\sum {\frac{\pi^2 \ EI}{\left( \ Kl_u \right)^2}}</math>
The nomenclature used in these guidelines has intentionally been selected to be consistent with that used in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (AASHTO, 2009) to the extent possible to avoid potential confusion with methods provided in those specifications. By convention, references to other provisions of the MoDOT Engineering Policy Guide are indicated as “EPG XXX.XX” throughout these guidelines where the ''X''s are replaced with the appropriate article numbers.  Similarly, references to provisions within the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications are indicated as “LRFD XXX.XX”.
 
Where:
 
<math>\, \ K</math> = effective length factor = 1.2 min. (see the following figure showing boundary conditions for columns)
 
<math>\, \ l_u</math> = unsupported length of column (in.)
 
 
 
<math>\, \ EI = \cfrac{{E_cI_g}{/2.5}}{1+\beta_d}</math>
 
Where:
 
<math>\, \ E_c</math>= concrete modulus of elasticity as defined in [[751.31 Open Concrete Intermediate Bents#751.31.1.1 Material Properties|EPG 751.31.1.1]] (ksi)
 
<math>\, \ I_g</math>= moment of inertia of gross concrete section about the axis under investigation <math>\, (in^4)</math>
 
<math>\, \beta_d</math>= ratio of maximum factored permanent load moments to maximum factored total load moment: always positive
 
 
 
''Column Moment Parallel to Bent In-Plane Direction''
 
<math>M_{cy}= \delta_{sy}M_{2y}</math>
 
<math>l_{uy}</math>= top of footing to top of beam cap
 
 
 
''Column Moment Normal to Bent In-Plane Direction''
 
<math>M_{cz}= \delta_{sz}M_{2z}</math>


<math>l_{uz}</math> = top of footing to bottom of beam cap or tie beam and/or top of tie beam to bottom of beam cap
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


<center>
===751.38.1.2 General Design Considerations===
{|
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:1px solid #ff0000; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="250px" align="right"
|-
|Out-of-plane bending<br>Non-integral Bent||[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Boundary Conditions for columns-Top Image.gif]]||Out-of-plane bending<br>Integral Bent
|-
|In-plane bending||[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Boundary Conditions for columns-Bottom Image.gif]]||&nbsp;
|-
|-
|align="center"|'''[[#Commentary on EPG 751.38.1.2 General Design Considerations|Commentary for EPG 751.38.1.2 General Design Considerations''']]
|}
|}


'''Boundary Conditions for Columns'''
Footings shall be founded to bear a minimum of 36 in. below the finished elevation of the ground surface.  In cases where scour, erosion, or undermining can be reasonably anticipated, footings shall bear a minimum of 36 in. below the maximum anticipated depth of scour, erosion, or undermining. 


Footing size shall be proportioned so that stresses under the footing are as uniform as practical at the service limit state.


For telescoping columns, the equivalent moment of inertia, <i>I</i>, and equivalent effective length factor, <i>K</i>, can be estimated as follows:
Long, narrow footings supporting individual columns should be avoided unless space constraints or eccentric loading dictate otherwise, especially on foundation material of low capacity. In general, spread footings should be made as close to square as possible.  The length to width ratio of footings supporting individual columns should not exceed 2.0, except on structures where the ratio of longitudinal to transverse loads or site constraints makes use of such a limit impractical. For spread footings supporting overhead sign structures the length to width ratio of footings supporting individual columns may be as high as 4.0.


Footings located near to rock slopes (e.g. rock cuts, river bluffs, etc.) shall be located so that the footing is founded beyond a prohibited region established by a line inclined from the horizontal passing through the toe of the slope as shown in Figure 751.38.1.2.  The boundary of the prohibited region shall be established by the Geotechnical Section.  For the purposes of this provision, the toe of the slope shall be the point on the slope that produces the most severe location for the active zone.  Exceptions to this provision shall only be made with specific approval of the Geotechnical Section and shall only be granted if overall stability can be demonstrated as provided in [[#751.38.7 Design for Overall Stability|EPG 751.38.7]]. 


[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Telescoping Columns.gif]]
[[image:751.38.1.2.jpg|center|775px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.38.1.2 Prohibited region for spread footings placed near rock slopes unless exception is specifically approved by MoDOT Geotechnical Section.'''</center>]]


'''Telescoping Columns'''
Footings located near to soil slopes shall be evaluated for overall stability as provided in EPG 751.38.7 unless they are located a minimum distance of 2''B'' beyond the crest of the slope.
</center>




<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


<math>\, \ I = \frac {\sum \left(l_n I_n \right)}{L}</math>


===751.38.1.3 Related Provisions===


Where:
The provisions in these guidelines were developed presuming that design parameters required to apply the provisions are established following current MoDOT site characterization protocols as described in [[:Category:321 Geotechnical Engineering|EPG 321]].  Specific attention is drawn to [[321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation|EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation]].  The provisions provided in this subarticle presume that parameter variability, as generally represented by the coefficient of variation (COV), is established following procedures in EPG 321.3.


<math>\, l_n</math>= length of column segment <math>\, n</math>
Sign structure spread footing supports are the exception. Sign structure standard spread footings are developed using assumed soil properties and following AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 9<sup>th</sup> Edition for design. Site specific designs for spread footings for sign structure support may also follow AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 9<sup>th</sup> Edition if there is not enough geotechnical information available to establish the COV.


<math>\, I_n</math>= moment of inertia of column segment <math>\, n</math>


<math>\, L</math>= total length of telescoping column
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


===751.38.8.3 Details===


'''Equivalent Effective Length Factor'''
Hooks at the end of reinforcement are not required for spread footings supporting sign structures. Include reinforcement near the top of spread footings supporting sign structures as required for uplift and in accordance with design requirements.


<math>\, \ K =\sqrt \frac{\pi^2EI}{P_cL^2}</math>
<br><br>
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
<br><br>


===G8. Drilled Shaft===
<div id="Drilled Shafts"></div> 


Where:
'''(G8.1) Include underlined portion when a minimum thickness is required and shown on the plans as minimum.'''
:Thickness of permanent steel casing shall be <u>as shown on the plans and</u> in accordance with [https://www.modot.org/missouri-standard-specifications-highway-construction Sec 701].


<math>\, E</math> = modulus of elasticity of column
'''(G8.2) Note may not be required with drilled shafts for high mast tower lighting.'''
:An additional 4 feet has been added to V-bar lengths and additional __-#_-P___ bars have been added in the quantities, if required, for possible change in drilled shaft or rock socket length. The additional V-bar length shall be cut off or included in the reinforcement lap if not required. The additional P bars shall be spaced similarly to that shown in elevation, if required, or to a lesser spacing if not required, but not less than 6-inch centers.


<math>\, I</math> = equivalent moment of inertia of column
'''(G8.3) Note not required with drilled shafts for high mast tower lighting. '''


<math>\,L</math> = total length of telescoping column
:Sonic logging testing shall be performed on all drilled shafts and rock sockets.


<math>\, P_c</math> =elastic buckling load solved from the equations given by the following boundary conditions:
'''(G8.4) Note to be used only with Drilled Shafts for High Mast Tower Lighting.'''
:Drilling slurry, if used, shall require desanding.


<center>
'''(G8.5) Note to be used only with Drilled Shafts for High Mast Tower Lighting. Drilled shaft diameter is required to be at least 21 in. greater than the largest anticipated anchor bolt circle diameter per the DSP - High Mast Tower Lighting.'''
''Fixed- Fixed Condition''
:The following non-factored base reactions were used to design the drilled shafts for the <u> &nbsp;  &nbsp;  &nbsp; </u> ft. high mast lighting towers: overturning moment = * kip-foot, base shear = * kip and axial force = * kip.
:&nbsp;*'''Values used in the design of the drilled shaft.'''
'''(G8.6) Use the following note only when the tops of drilled shafts are ≤ 3'-0" below the ground surface at centerline column / drilled shaft. Otherwise excavation quantity to the top of drilled shafts needs to be figured. Excavation diameter limit will be the 3'-0" larger than the column diameter above the drilled shaft.'''
:The cost of any required excavation to the top of the drilled shafts will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for other items.


[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Columns Fixed-Fixed Condition.gif]]
'''(G8.7)'''
:The tip of casing shall not extend into the rock socket elevation range reported in the Foundation Data table without approval by the engineer.


'''(G8.8) Use the following note when non-contact or contact lap is required at the top of drilled shaft between column/dowel reinforcement and drilled shaft reinforcement.'''
:Column or dowel reinforcement shall be placed prior to pouring drilled shaft concrete in the area of the lap.  Dowel bar or column reinforcement shall not be inserted after drilled shaft pour is complete.


<math>\, \left(a_1 + a_2 \right) \bigg[ \left(d_1 + d_2 \right) - P_c \Big( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Big) \bigg]- \left(c_1 - c_2 \right)^2 = 0</math>
'''(G8.9) For oversized shafts, use the following note in conjunction with callout for optional construction joint near top of drilled shaft.'''
:Remove sediment laitance and weak concrete to sound concrete prior to setting column/dowel reinforcement if optional construction joint is used.






{|
<br><br>
|-
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
|<math>\, a_1</math>||<math>\, = \frac{4EI_1}{l_1}</math>||width="100"|&nbsp;||<math>\, a_2</math>||<math>\, =\frac{4EI_2}{l_2}</math>
<br><br>
|-
|<math>\, c_1</math>||<math>\, = \frac{6EI_1}{{l_1}^2}</math>||&nbsp;||<math>\, c_2</math>||<math>\, =\frac{6EI_2}{{l_2}^2}</math>
|-
|<math>\, d_1</math>||<math>\, = \frac{12EI_1}{{l_1}^3}</math>||&nbsp;||<math>\, d_2</math>||<math>\, = \frac{12EI_2}{{l_2}^3}</math>
|-
|}


Category:901 Lighting


===Nonstandard Lighting Structures===
If any lighting installation being considered will use a special or nonstandard structure or with dimensions exceeding those shown in the Standard Plans, [http://sp/sites/ts/Pages/default.aspx Traffic] should be consulted early in the project planning regarding the installation’s feasibility and necessary contract provisions.  Examples of this situation are high mast lighting and exceeding lengths on the Standard Plans.


''Hinged-Fixed Condition''
Since designing details for nonstandard installations is typically performed by an outside engineer employed by the contractor or producer and is certified to MoDOT, the project contract documents must include appropriate requirements about the design standards used.  Since structures beyond MoDOT's standard designs are involved, a performance-based specification of the design signed and sealed by a Missouri Registered Professional Engineer is needed from the contractor.  Certification to the current AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals including the latest fatigue provisions is required. For standard detailing notes regarding drilled shafts for High Mast Tower Lighting, see [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#G8._Drilled_Shaft|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes G8.4 and G8.5].


<!-- [[Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL]] -->


[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Columns Hinged-Fixed Condition.gif]]
</center>


 
<br><br>
{|align="center"
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
|-
<br><br>
|<math>\, \left(a_2 \right) \left(a_1 + a_2 \right) \bigg[ \left(d_1 + d_2 \right) - P_c \Big( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Big) \bigg]- \left(2b_2c_2 \right) \left(c_2 - c_1 \right) </math>
|-
|<math>- \left(b_2 \right)^2 \bigg[ \left(d_1 + d_2 \right) - P_c \Big( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Big) \bigg]- \left(a_2 \right) \left(c_2 - c_1 \right)^2</math>
|-
|<math>- \left(c_2 \right)^2 \left(a_2 + a_1 \right) = 0 </math>
|}




Where:
==901.7.6 High Mast Lighting==
{|
|-
|<math>\, b_1</math>||<math>\, = \frac{2EI_1}{l_1}</math>||width="100"|&nbsp;||<math>\, b_2</math>||<math>\, =\frac{2EI_2}{l_2}</math>
|-
|}


<math>\, a_1, a_2, c_1, c_2, d_1,</math> and <math>\, d_2</math> are defined in the previous equations.
High mast lighting is principally used at complex interchanges and lights a large area by a group of luminaires mounted in a fixed orientation at the top of a tall mast, generally 80 ft. or taller.  The district must authorize high mast lighting.  The request for high mast lighting conceptual approval is to be included with the lighting warrants.  Data supporting the selection of pole height, pole location and type of luminaires is to be included with the preliminary lighting plan.  Where high mast lighting is used at complex interchanges, adaptation lighting is recommended for each section where vehicles enter and leave the interchange.


The district is responsible for all bid items associated with high mast lighting and to design the foundation and the structure above the foundation for inclusion in the project plans.


<center>
For standard detailing notes regarding drilled shafts for High Mast Tower Lighting, see [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#G8._Drilled_Shaft|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes G8.4 and G8.5].


''Fixed-Fixed with Lateral Movement Condition''


 
<br><br>
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Fixed-Fixed Lateral Movement Condition.gif]]
<hr style="border:none; height:2px; background-color:red;" />
</center>
<br><br>
 
 
{|align="center"
|-
|<math>\, \bigg[(d_1 + d_2) - \frac{(c_2 - c_1)^2}{a_1 + a_2} - P_c \Bigg( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Bigg) \bigg] \bigg[d_2 - \frac{{c_2}^2}{a_1 + a_2} - P_c \Bigg(\frac {1}{l_2} \Bigg) \Bigg]</math>
|-
|<math>- \Bigg[(-d_2) + \frac{c_2 (c_2 - c_1)}{a_1 + a_2} + P_c \Bigg(\frac{1}{l_2} \Bigg) \Bigg]^2 = 0</math>
|}
 
Where:
 
<math>\, a_1, a_2, b_1, b_2, c_1, c_2, d_1,</math> and <math>\, d_2</math> are defined in the previous equations.
 
 
<center>
''Fixed-Free with Lateral Movement Condition''
 
 
[[Image:751.31 Open Concrete Int Bents and Piers- Fixed-Free Lateral Movement Condition.gif]]
 
</center>
 
 
{|align="center"
|-
|<math>\, \Bigg[ (d_1 + d_2) - P_c \Bigg( \frac{1}{l_1} + \frac{1}{l_2} \Bigg) - \frac{A_1}{\beta} \Bigg] \Bigg[ d_2 - \frac{P_c}{l_2} - \frac{A_3}{\beta} \Bigg]</math>
|-
|<math>\, - \Bigg[(-d_2) + \frac{P_c}{l_2} - \frac{A_2}{\beta} \Bigg]^2 = 0</math>
|}
 
 
Where:
{|
|<math>\, \beta</math>|| <math>\, = (a_2)(a_1 + a_2) - ( b_2)^2</math>
|-
|<math>\, A_1</math>|| <math>\, = (c_1 - c_2)[a_2(c_1 - c_2) + (b_2c_2)] + (c_2)[b_2(c_1 - c_2) + (c_2)(a_1 + a_2)]</math>
|-
|<math>\, A_2</math>|| <math>\, = (c_1 - c_2)[(a_2c_2) - (b_2c_2)] + (c_2)[(b_2c_2) - (c_2)(a_1 + a_2)]</math>
|-
|<math>\, A_3</math>|| <math>\, = (c_2)[(a_2c_2) - (2b_2c_2) + (c_2)(a_1 + a_2)]</math>
|-
|colspan="2"|&nbsp;
|-
|colspan="2"|<math>\, a_1, a_2, b_1, b_2, c_1, c_2, d_1,</math> and <math>\, d_2</math> are defined in the previous equations.

Latest revision as of 13:34, 13 May 2026

REVISION REQUEST 3763 (ON HOLD)

REVISION REQUEST 3818 (ON HOLD)

REVISION REQUEST 3902 (ON HOLD)

REVISION REQUEST 3905 (ON HOLD)

REVISION REQUEST 3906 (ON HOLD)

REVISION REQUEST 3934 (ON HOLD)

REVISION REQUEST 4014 (ON HOLD)

REVISION REQUEST 4036 (ON HOLD)

REVISION REQUEST 4136 (ON HOLD)

REVISION REQUEST 4165

Several foundational documents guide MoDOT’s TSMO program:

  • TSMO Program and Action Plan – outlines MoDOT’s statewide TSMO vision, goals, and implementation strategies.
  • TSMO Informational Memoranda – provides background, technical details, and
  • TSMO Benefit-Cost Reference Memo – provides the benefit-cost information on TSMO applications that are critical to MoDOT’s TSMO program and future work.
  • Work Zone Management Guidebook – provides a comprehensive set of tools and strategies for work zone management and describes “advanced work zone” practices, guidance, and resources
  • Connected and Automated Vehicle Action Plan – articulates MoDOT’s mission, vision, strengths, and strategic focus areas for leveraging CV/AV technologies, and lays out actions across institutional capability-building, outreach and education, and partnership development to support safe, efficient deployment.

Transportation Systems Management and Operations (TSMO) consists of operational strategies and systems that cost-effectively optimize the safety, reliability, efficiency, and capacity of the transportation system. TSMO emphasizes maximizing the performance of the existing system through proactive management and operational improvements.

909.1 Introduction to TSMO

909.1.1 Overview of TSMO Strategies

TSMO strategies are the day-to-day operational actions MoDOT uses to actively manage the transportation system and address the primary causes of congestion without relying solely on capacity expansion.

Congestion generally falls into two categories:

  • Non-recurring delays arise from unplanned or irregular events such as incidents, disasters, weather, work zones, and special events. These disruptions are inherently unpredictable, vary in severity and duration, and often require dynamic traffic management and interagency coordination to reduce their impact.
  • Recurring delays occur regularly at specific locations, most often during peak traffic periods. This type of congestion is usually the result of demand exceeding the capacity of the existing system. Transportation agencies do not have the resources to construct enough highway capacity to eliminate all recurring congestion. Instead, TSMO strategies provide more cost-effective ways to manage demand and improve flow.

By addressing both types of congestion, TSMO supports MoDOT’s mission of moving Missourians safely and reliably while making the best use of available resources. These strategies are organized based on whether they address non-recurring delays or recurring delays, as described below.

909.2 Non-Congested Route (Non-Recurring Delays) – These strategies focus on managing temporary (whether short-term or long-term) capacity reductions caused by irregular or time-limited events that disrupt normal traffic conditions, with the goal of restoring mobility and safety efficiently and consistently.

  • 909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management: Coordinates detection, response, and clearance across multiple agencies to minimize secondary crashes and return roadways to normal operation quickly.
  • 909.2.2 Transportation Operations for Emergency Incidents or Disasters: Supports system readiness and coordinated response during natural or human-caused disasters through planning, communication, and multimodal evacuation procedures.
  • 909.2.3 Road Weather Management: Integrates environmental monitoring, data-driven decision support, and targeted maintenance to mitigate the effects of adverse weather on safety and mobility.
  • 909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management: Applies smart work zone technologies and comprehensive traffic management plans to maintain safe and reliable travel through construction and maintenance areas.
  • 909.2.5 Planned Special Event Management: Coordinates transportation, enforcement, and communication activities for scheduled events to maintain efficient system operations and traveler safety.

909.3 Congested Route (Recurring Delays) – These strategies address predictable and routine congestion caused by daily travel demand and capacity constraints on specific facilities or corridors, emphasizing active traffic management, system integration, and multimodal coordination.

  • 909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management: Improves freeway performance through corridor-level monitoring, adaptive control, and coordinated operations to enhance safety and travel-time reliability.
  • 909.3.2 Arterial Operations and Management: Optimizes signal timing, intersection design, and corridor coordination to improve mobility and safety on surface streets.
  • 909.3.3 Freight Operation: Enhances the efficiency and safety of freight movement through improved access, parking management, and technology-based monitoring along key freight corridors.
  • 909.3.4 Vulnerable Road Users: Improves safety, accessibility, and comfort for VRUs through targeted infrastructure, operational strategies, and multimodal coordination.
  • 909.3.5 Transit Operation: Strengthens transit reliability and accessibility through operational strategies such as priority treatments, multimodal hubs, and corridor management.

909.1.2 Relationship with Other Programs

TSMO is not a standalone initiative—it complements and enhances MoDOT’s other programs:

  • Safety Programs: TSMO contributes to MoDOT’s safety goals, as outlined in the Strategic Highway Safety Plan and the SAFER Program (see EPG 907.9 Safety Assessment For Every Roadway (SAFER)), by reducing secondary crashes, improving work zone management, and advancing road weather management capabilities.
  • Asset Management: Proper maintenance of TSMO strategies and supporting systems can improve how facilities operate, reduce incidents that accelerate wear, and extend the life of infrastructure investments.
  • Planning and Design: TSMO principles should be incorporated early in the planning and design process so that operational strategies are built into projects from the start.
  • Maintenance: Maintenance activities can be coordinated with TSMO tools such as smart work zones and ITS devices to reduce traffic disruptions.
  • Traveler Information: TSMO strengthens customer service by providing real-time, accurate, and actionable information to the traveling public.

In practice, TSMO serves as the operational thread that connects safety, planning, design, maintenance, and customer service into a unified system-management approach.

909.0.3 Roles and Contributions for TSMO Implementation

This guide is designed to provide MoDOT staff and partners with a clear, practical reference for TSMO strategies. Table 909.1.3 highlights the typical roles and potential TSMO contributions of different staff in implementing and supporting TSMO strategies, as applicable based on project context, needs, and available resources. These contributions are intended to guide coordination and consideration of TSMO strategies and may vary depending on the specific application.

Table 909.1.3. Typical Roles and Potential Contributions for TSMO Implementation
Role Potential TSMO Contribution
Transportation Management Center (TMC) Operator Monitor traffic conditions, manage information systems, and coordinate incident response and traveler communication to maintain safe and efficient roadway operations.
Emergency Response Operator Provide on-scene incident management, motorist assistance, and roadway clearance to restore normal traffic flow and enhance safety during disruptions.
Maintenance Technician Implement maintenance related TSMO strategies; provide feedback and effort for continual improvement of these strategies and tools.
Traffic Operations Engineer Implement traffic operations related TSMO strategies; provide feedback and effort for continual improvement of these strategies and tools.
Transportation Planner Incorporate TSMO and other traditional transportation improvement strategies into planning efforts, as appropriate.
Design Staff Consider TSMO as a key element of design, where applicable, either as a direct improvement for the specific application or as an opportunity for the continuation of existing TSMO strategies.
Construction Inspector Coordinate with appropriate personnel when modifying design elements or inspecting TSMO related infrastructure.
Work Zone Specialists Oversee temporary traffic control in construction zones; review and manage Transportation Management Plans (TMPs), ensure proper setup and quality of traffic control devices, assess risks, and provide input during planning and post-construction reviews to enhance safety and minimize disruptions.
Information Systems Manager Provide oversight and management of field and central communications systems, computer and software, and other information systems resources.
Human Resources Specialist Incorporate relevant related skills and experience into position descriptions where TSMO expertise is needed; assist with training programs to improve the knowledge, skills, and abilities of existing operations personnel.
Emergency Management Agencies Support TSMO implementation by providing coordinated incident response, traffic control, emergency medical services, and roadway clearance; collaborate with MoDOT and TMC staff, when applicable, to improve incident management, responder safety, and system recovery during emergencies and planned events.

909.1.4 TSMO Implementation Framework

The TSMO Implementation Framework provides a structured approach for MoDOT to translate its mission and agency goals into actionable objectives and strategies. It supports the development of purpose-driven, measurable strategies aligned with statewide priorities. This framework serves as a bridge between MoDOT’s overarching mission and the specific strategies implemented across the TSMO program. Effective implementation of these goals relies on coordination across disciplines, integration throughout project phases, and collaboration with internal and external partners.

Table 909.1.4.1 identifies the core programmatic elements, MoDOT’s goals and associated objectives, that guide how TSMO is planned, implemented, and evaluated.

Table 909.1.4.1 Programmatic Element
Goal Objective
Safety Reduce crash frequency and severity through proactive deployment of TSMO strategies (e.g., incident management, work zone safety, network operations).
Reliability Support predictable and consistent travel times across the system by proactively managing congestion and incidents.
Efficiency Operate MoDOT’s existing system efficiently and effectively through the application of TSMO strategies, as appropriate, to improve performance and inform decisions regarding potential capacity expansion.
Customer Service Support timely, accurate, and useful traveler information that enables informed decision-making.

Table 909.1.4.2 links MoDOT’s mission to measurable outcomes and example TSMO strategies, demonstrating how operations initiatives directly support statewide goals.

Table 909.1.4.2. Linking MoDOT Mission to Outcomes and Example TSMO Strategies
Mission High-Level Outcome Example TSMO Strategy
Improving safety (Moving Missourians safely) Reduction in crashes, fatalities, and serious injuries; safer travel for all users • 909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management
• 909.2.3 Road Weather Management
• 909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management
• 909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management
• 909.3.2 Arterial Operations and Management
Providing high-value, impactful solutions (Delivering efficient and innovative transportation projects; asset management) Cost-effective improvements that maximize existing infrastructure and delay costly expansions • 909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management
• 909.3.2 Arterial Operations and Management
• 909.3.3 Freight Operation
• 909.3.4 Vulnerable Road Users
Improving reliability and mobility (Operating a reliable transportation system; Building a prosperous economy for all Missourians) Predictable travel times and improved system performance for people and freight • 909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management
• 909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management
• 909.2.5 Planned Special Event Management
• 909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management
• 909.3.5 Transit Operation
Providing useful and timely traveler information (Providing outstanding customer service) Informed travel decisions by the public, increased user satisfaction • 909.2.2 Transportation Operations for Emergency Incidents or Disasters
• 909.2.3 Road Weather Management

909.1.5 Performance Metrics

Performance metrics provide the foundation for evaluating how TSMO strategies contribute to the safety, reliability, efficiency, and customer experience of Missouri’s transportation system. MoDOT currently tracks performance through a combination of federal performance measures and internal performance management tools (e.g. Tracker: Measures of Departmental Performance). The following tables present example performance measures that may be used to assess the effectiveness of TSMO strategies related to both non-recurring delays (Table 909.1.5.1) and recurring delays (Table 909.1.5.2).

These measures are not intended to represent required or standalone reporting metrics, but rather a menu of potential measures that can support analysis, planning, and evaluation efforts, as appropriate to the specific application, study type, or operational need. When applied, these metrics can help users identify opportunities for improvement and support data-driven decision-making.

Table 909.1.5.1 Linking MoDOT TSMO Strategies for Non-Recurring Delays to Performance Metrics
Strategy Goals Example Performance Metric
909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management Enhance the safety of traveling public and incident responders • Number of secondary crashes per incident
• Severity (fatalities/serious injuries) of secondary crashes
• Percent of incidents with secondary crashes recorded
• Number of responders struck-by crashes
• Severity of responder-involved crashes
• Percent of incidents with responder crash data recorded
Enhance reliability and efficiency of Missouri’s transportation system • Average roadway clearance time
• Average incident clearance time
• Percent of incidents meeting clearance time targets
Strengthen coordination, communication, and collaboration between MoDOT and TIM partners • Number of formalized agreements signed
• Number of multi-agency TIM meetings held annually
• Number of TIM trainings held annually
• Partner participation rate in meetings/exercises
Establish TIM policies, procedures, and protocols within MoDOT • Number of formal TIM policies/protocols adopted
• Percent of TIM coordinator positions filled and active
909.2.2 Transportation Operations for Emergency Incidents or Disasters Enhance safety and responder protection during emergency incidents • Number of emergency-related crashes
• Severity (fatal/serious injury) of emergency-related crashes
• Percent of emergency incidents with responder safety data recorded
Improve reliability and speed of emergency response and system restoration • Time to activate emergency operations
• Duration of emergency lane/road closures
• Percent of priority routes restored within target timeframes
• Emergency communication system uptime
• Average time to deploy emergency traffic control
909.2.3 Road Weather Management Improve safety under adverse weather conditions • Number of weather-related crashes, fatalities, and serious injuries
• Crash rate per weather event
Enhance operational readiness and timely roadway treatment • Time to treat priority routes during storms
• Percent of network treated within specific time thresholds
• Materials usage efficiency (salt, brine, abrasives)
Improve traveler information accuracy during weather events • Traveler information system accuracy rate during storms
• Number of travel information interactions (511 apps, CMS messages)
909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management Enhance safety for workers and motorists in work zones • Number and rate of work zone crashes
• Number of work zone fatalities and serious injuries
• Number of work zone intrusions (near-miss events)
Improve mobility and reduce unexpected work zone delays • Work-zone related delays
• Percent of work zones meeting mobility targets (queue length, speed, travel time)
• Average incident clearance time for work zone-related incidents
909.2.5 Planned Special Event Management Ensure safe travel conditions during special events • Number and rate of special event-related crashes
• Vulnerable Road User (VRU) level of comfort/safety index near event venues
Improve mobility and minimize event-related congestion • Travel time reliability during event periods
• Vehicle and pedestrian throughput at key access points
• Percent of events meeting planned operational performance targets


Table 909.1.5.2 Linking MoDOT TSMO Strategies for Recurring Delays to Performance Metrics
Strategy Goals Example Performance Metric
909.3.1 Freeway Operations and Management Support safety on managed freeway facilities • Number and rate of crashes on freeway segments
• Number of secondary crashes
Improve travel reliability on freeway corridors • Travel time reliability index
• Planning time index
Enhance operational efficiency on freeway corridors • Average travel speed and delay
• Vehicle and truck throughput
• Number of recurring congestion hotspots mitigated
909.3.2 Arterial Operations and Management Enhance safety at signalized intersections and arterials • Crash frequency and severity at signalized intersections
• Pedestrian and bicycle crash rate
Improve efficiency of arterial traffic flow • Arterial travel time and delay
• Signal progression quality (arrival on green, bandwidth)
• Number of mitigated congestion hotspots
Enhance reliability of multimodal arterial operations • Transit signal delay at signals (if applicable)
• Pedestrian crossing delay
909.3.3 Freight Operation Improve efficiency on key freight corridors • Truck delay at bottlenecks
• Freight throughput (corridor or intermodal facility)
Enhance reliability of freight travel • Truck travel time reliability index
• Number of freight-related congestion hotspots mitigated
909.3.4 Vulnerable Road Users Enhance safety and comfort for Vulnerable Road Users (VRUs) • Number and rate of VRU crashes
• VRU level of comfort/safety index
Improve connectivity for walking and bicycling • Miles of connected pedestrian/bicycle facilities
• Percent of network meeting connectivity standards
Support sustainable, multimodal travel options • Share of trips completed using active modes
909.3.5 Transit Operation Enhance mobility of transit users • Passenger throughput per route or corridor
• Average transit travel time
Improve transit reliability and on-time performance • Percent of on-time arrivals
• Transit travel time reliability (travel adherence)
Improve customer experience and multimodal access • Customer satisfaction survey results
• Pedestrian access quality (stop accessibility index)






909.2 Non-Congested Route (Non-Recurring Delays)

909.2.1 Traffic Incident Management

Traffic Incident Management (TIM) can help reduce the impact of roadway incidents by coordinating detection, response, and clearance activities among transportation, law enforcement, fire, EMS, towing, and other partners.

While crashes, disabled vehicles, and cargo spills are the most common focus of TIM programs, there are a broader set of disruptions that can also be monitored including:

  • Debris in the roadway
  • Grass fires
  • Lane-blocking emergency vehicles
  • Vehicle fires
  • Heavy congestion

By incorporating this broader incident set, TIM strategies ensure operators and responders are prepared for a wide range of events that may impact traveler safety and network performance. The following sections outline strategies for TIM.

Users:

909.2.1.1 Traffic Incident Management Plans

Traffic incidents occur without warning at any time and location on the highway system. On all segments of the interstate and freeway highway system, TIM plans should be developed in coordination with law enforcement and local responders to:

  • Reduce response and clearance times.
  • Develop alternate plans for handling affected traffic.
  • Communicate and coordinate between first responders.
  • Communicate traffic impacts to motorists.

Reference EPG 948 Incident Response Plan and Emergency Response Management for additional information.

909.2.1.2 Stakeholders

Effective TIM depends on collaboration among a wide range of partners. Law enforcement, fire/rescue, EMS, and towing operators provide immediate on-scene response, while MoDOT personnel and TMCs deliver critical support through detection, traffic control, and traveler information. Each stakeholder brings unique capabilities, and coordinated multi-agency response supports faster clearance, safer conditions for responders, and more reliable outcomes for the traveling public.

909.2.1.3 Components

The core components of TIM—detection, verification, response, clearance, and recovery—create a structured framework for managing roadway incidents. Detection and verification confirm the incident type and location; coordinated response mobilizes the appropriate agencies; clearance restores traffic lanes and removes hazards; and recovery ensures the roadway is returned to normal operation. Addressing each component systematically reduces incident duration and enhances both safety and reliability.

909.2.2 Transportation Operations for Emergency Incidents or Disasters

Emergency operations support safe and effective evacuation and mobility during disasters such as floods, tornadoes, earthquakes, or other emergencies. The following sections outline strategies for emergency operations during disasters.

Users:

909.2.2.1 Frameworks and Coordination

MoDOT’s emergency transportation operations should align with the National Incident Management System (NIMS) and the Incident Command System (ICS). These frameworks establish the standard structure, terminology, and coordination processes for incident and disaster response at the local, state, and federal levels.

National Incident Management System (NIMS):

  • Provides a nationwide approach for incident management and coordination.
  • Provides emergency transportation operations guidance for interoperable collaboration with law enforcement, fire, EMS, emergency management, and federal partners.
  • Establishes common terminology, communication protocols, and resource management procedures to support multi-agency operations.

Incident Command System (ICS):

  • Serves as the on-scene management structure for all types of incidents.
  • Defines clear roles, responsibilities, and reporting relationships across agencies.
  • Provides guidance on unified command structures, filling roles such as transportation branch directors, field observers, or technical specialists.
  • Provides flexibility to scale operations for localized or statewide events.

For detailed response information, please contact MoDOT’s Safety and Emergency Management.

909.2.2.2 Preparedness and Planning

  • Develop and exercise evacuation and emergency operations plans.
  • Use simulation and scenario testing to identify gaps and strengthen interagency protocols.
  • Establish pre-designated staging areas for resource allocation, evacuation support, and vehicle marshaling.

909.2.2.3 Operational Strategies During Disasters

  • Traffic Management: Complete rapid damage assessment and plan and publish routes for ingress and egress to the impacted area.
  • Multimodal Evacuations: Utilize buses, school buses, and regional transit providers to assist in large-scale evacuations.
  • Route Monitoring: Employ field observations, cameras, and sensors to track evacuation route conditions in real time.
  • Public Information: Provide timely traveler information, evacuation messaging, and updates in coordination with media partners.

909.2.3 Road Weather Management

Road Weather Management strategies improve mobility, reliability, and safety during weather events through strategies such as targeted traveler information, warnings, and operational interventions. The following sections outline strategies for road weather management.

Users:

909.2.3.1 Road Weather Warnings/Alerts and Dynamic Message Signs

Used to display real-time information to warn motorists of roadway incidents, construction or congestion ahead that could pose a hazard or cause delays.

Procedures for Dynamic Message Signs are outlined in EPG 910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS).

909.2.3.2 Road Weather Information Systems

Road Weather Information Systems (RWIS) provide real-time data on weather and roadway conditions to support transportation system operations and maintenance activities. These systems collect information such as air and pavement temperatures, precipitation, visibility, and surface conditions to help inform operational decisions. Data may be collected through field sensors, third-party weather service providers, or a combination of both, depending on system needs and available resources.

909.2.4 Work Zone Traffic Management

Work zone strategies reduce risk to workers and travelers while minimizing delays during construction and maintenance activities. These strategies apply to both short-term and long-term work zones, recognizing that every project, regardless of duration, can significantly affect roadway operations and safety. The following sections outline strategies for work zone traffic management.

Users:

909.2.4.1 Traffic Management Plan

The Transportation Management Plan (TMP) consists of strategies to manage the work zone impacts of a project. Each TMP is tailored to the unique conditions of a project and typically incorporates three coordinated elements: Traffic Control Plan (TCP), Traffic Operations (TO), and Public Information and Outreach (PIO).

As an initial step, a project design should be selected to eliminate or minimize additional delays and traffic queueing during construction. EPG 616.19 Work Zone Capacity, Queue and Travel Delay provides tools to assess the traffic impact of the proposed project design(s).

For additional detail on the required elements, development process, and documentation standards for TMPs, reference EPG 616.20.9 Work Zone Transportation Management Plan. For additional information on developing Work Zone Traffic Management JSPs for use in core team meetings, reference EPG 616.20.7 Significant Projects.

909.2.4.2 Traffic Incident Management Plan

When traffic incidents occur within a work zone, it is important to clear the incident and restore traffic as quickly as possible. To aid in this effort, a project-based traffic incident management (TIM) plan should be developed for all significant projects on interstate and freeways.

Reference EPG 909.2.1.1 Traffic Incident Management (TIM) Plans for additional information.

909.2.4.3 Smart Work Zones

Once a project design has been determined, the MoDOT Work Zone Impact Analysis Spreadsheet will assist in determining which smart work zones strategies should be included in the project to provide information and warnings to motorists to improve work zone safety and traffic mobility.

Additionally, the Work Zone Management Guidebook provides information about tools and strategies for work zone management that will maximize safety and minimize the impacts to traffic. The Work Zone Management Guidebook Presentation provides additional information about the guidebook.

The nonstandard Work Zone Intelligent Transportation System special provision is available for reference in EPG 616.19.6.3 Smart Work Zone (SWZ) Strategy Selection. Additional information can also be found in EPG 616.19 Work Zone Capacity, Queue and Travel Delay and EPG 616.20 Work Zone Safety and Mobility Policy.

909.2.4.4 Use of Intelligent Transportation Systems

Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) devices (cameras, sensors, communication systems) provide detection and real-time monitoring of work zones.

Procedures for ITS devices are outlined in EPG 910 Intelligent Transportation Systems.

909.1.5 Planned Special Event Management

Special event management strategies ensure safe and efficient mobility during large gatherings, sporting events, and other planned activities. The following sections outline key strategies for planned special event management.

Users:

909.1.5.1 Pre-Event Planning

  • Develop Transportation Management Plans (TMPs) with input from MoDOT, local agencies, law enforcement, transit providers, and event organizers.
  • Identify needs for Emergency Operations Center (EOC) and Joint Operations Center (JOC) activation, staffing augmentation, and resource staging for high-profile or large-scale events (e.g., sporting events, major concerts, parades, funerals, festivals, eclipse, political events).
  • Plan for multimodal access (transit, walking, biking) and freight restrictions, where applicable.

909.1.5.2 Implementation

  • Deploy traffic control devices, signage, and ITS in advance of the event.
  • Coordinate with law enforcement and emergency management on enforcement zones, access control, and responder staging.
  • Conduct interagency briefings to confirm roles, responsibilities, and communication protocols.

909.1.5.3 Day-of-Event Operations

  • Manage traffic and crowd circulation using TMC monitoring, field staff, and real-time traveler information (dynamic message signs, push alerts, social media).
  • Coordinate with EOC/JOC if activated to ensure situational awareness and resource support.
  • Adjust plans dynamically to address congestion, incidents, or security needs.

909.1.5.4 Post-Event Evaluation

  • Conduct after-action reviews with MoDOT staff, law enforcement, emergency management, and event organizers.
  • Document lessons learned, identify gaps in staffing or coordination, and refine TMPs for future events.
  • Capture performance measures such as clearance times, delay estimates, and traveler feedback.






909.2 Congested Route (Recurring Delays)

909.2.1 Freeway Operations and Management

Freeway operations strategies enhance safety, reduce recurring congestion, and improve travel time reliability on major corridors. The following sections outline key strategies for freeway operations and management.

Users:


Policy Coordination – Any consideration or application of the following strategies in Missouri should be closely coordinated with MoDOT’s Central Office of Highway Safety and Traffic (COHST) to ensure consistency with policy, design standards, and operational oversight.

909.2.1.1 Ramp Management and Control

Ramp management and control strategies, including ramp metering and adaptive ramp management, regulate vehicle entry onto freeways to improve merging operations, reduce conflicts, and smooth overall traffic flow. This remains a dynamic application where it is implemented, with operational adjustments based on corridor conditions.

Currently, Missouri does not operate continuous ramp metering systems. Instead, ramp meters are activated dynamically based on real-time traffic conditions when metrics (such as speed, volume, and/or density) exceed predefined thresholds.

909.2.1.2 Part-Time Shoulder Use (Hard Shoulder Running)

Part-time shoulder use, also known as hard shoulder running, allows roadway shoulders to serve as temporary travel lanes during peak periods, incidents, or emergencies. Applications may be designed for all vehicles or limited to transit operations.

This strategy is increasingly being implemented by peer agencies across the country, particularly in corridors with limited right-of-way or peak-period capacity needs. While Missouri does not currently have any active applications of part-time shoulder use, the concept may present opportunities in select corridors - especially where traditional widening is not feasible and where shoulders are constructed to full-depth pavement standards.

909.2.1.3 Dynamic Speed Limits

Dynamic speed limits adjust posted speed limits in real time based on conditions such as traffic flow, weather, or incidents. This approach has been applied by several peer agencies to improve safety, smooth traffic flow, and reduce crash risk.

In Missouri, there are no permanent applications of dynamic speed limits in routine freeway operations. However, the strategy may hold value in targeted, temporary contexts—particularly in work zones where changing conditions require more flexible speed management.

909.2.1.4 Queue Warning

Queue warning systems are designed to alert motorists of slow or stopped traffic ahead, reducing the likelihood of sudden braking and rear-end collisions in congested conditions. These systems typically consist of roadside sensors and Changeable Message Signs (CMS) that detect traffic slowdowns and display real-time warnings to approaching drivers. When sensors identify slowed or stopped vehicles, signals are transmitted to the CMS, which then display queue warning messages. Placement of sensors and signs is critical-warnings should activate when a queue extends to within 1-2 miles upstream, depending on speed, to provide adequate driver reaction time. In Missouri, current applications of queue warning rely exclusively on Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) rather than flashing beacons.

909.2.1.5 Integrated Corridor Management

Integrated Corridor Management (ICM) refers to coordinated operations across multiple facilities within a corridor—primarily freeways and parallel arterials. The goal is to manage congestion holistically by making better use of available capacity, balancing demand, and improving traveler information.

909.2.1.6 Transportation Management Centers

Transportation Management Centers (TMCs) serve as the operational backbone of ICM. From TMCs, MoDOT staff monitor real-time traffic conditions, manage ITS devices, coordinate incident response, and adjust strategies such as ramp metering or queue warning. This centralized approach enables proactive management of corridors, ensuring safety and reliability during incidents, work zones, and peak travel periods.

909.2.1.7 Managed Lanes

Managed lanes are roadway segments where access and use are actively regulated to improve traffic flow, safety, or reliability. Common approaches used nationally include bus-only lanes and truck-only lanes. These treatments are typically considered in locations with recurring congestion, limited right-of-way, or freight movement challenges.

At present, Missouri has no active managed lane facilities.

909.2.1.8 Automated Incident Detection

Automated incident detection systems use roadside sensors, video feeds, and software algorithms to identify crashes, stalled vehicles, or other disruptions in real time. These systems often integrate AI-based analytics with CCTV camera footage to detect unusual traffic patterns or stopped vehicles more quickly than traditional operator observation alone. By providing earlier notification of likely incidents, automated detection enhances safety, reduces secondary crashes, and improves response times for emergency and traffic management personnel.

909.2.2 Arterial Operations and Management

Arterial operations strategies improve mobility, safety, and reliability on surface streets through targeted improvements, signal operations, and multimodal accommodations. These strategies focus on reducing congestion at bottlenecks, enhancing intersection performance, and supporting consistent travel across urban and suburban corridors.

In Missouri, arterial management is often a shared responsibility between MoDOT and regional or local partners. For example, the Kansas City region’s Operation Green Light program coordinates arterial signal timing and corridor operations in collaboration with MoDOT and multiple local jurisdictions. Other examples include MoDOT’s partnership with St. Charles in the St. Louis region and collaboration with the City of Springfield and the Ozarks Transportation Organization. Similar arrangements may exist in other regions where MPOs, cities, or counties lead day-to-day arterial management. Practitioners should recognize that depending on the corridor and location, responsibility for arterial operations may rest with another entity, requiring coordination and partnership to ensure consistent system performance.

The following sections outline key strategies for arterial operations and management.

Users:


Policy Coordination – Any consideration or application of the following strategies in Missouri should be closely coordinated with MoDOT’s Central Office of Highway Safety and Traffic (COHST) to ensure consistency with policy, design standards, and operational oversight.

909.2.2.1 Targeted Infrastructure Improvements

Targeted infrastructure improvements are localized enhancements that address recurring bottlenecks or multimodal safety concerns on arterial corridors. Common treatments include new or extended turn lanes to reduce delay at intersections, access control to improve traffic flow and safety, and bus pullouts to minimize transit-related delays. Pedestrian and bicyclist accommodations such as crosswalk improvements, refuge islands, and protected lanes also support safer and more reliable mobility for all users.

909.2.2.2 Innovative Intersection Designs

Innovative intersection designs apply alternative layouts to improve safety and efficiency where traditional designs are constrained. Examples include restricted crossing U-turns (RCUTs), median U-turns, and displaced left-turn (continuous flow) intersections, which reduce conflict points and increase throughput. These designs are increasingly considered where right-of-way is limited, traffic volumes are high, or safety issues persist with conventional layouts.

Additional information can be found in EPG 233.5 Intersection Alternatives.

909.2.2.3 Traffic Signal Program Management

A comprehensive traffic signal program provides the framework for maintaining effective corridor operations. Program elements include monitoring and evaluating existing signal systems, scheduling recurring retiming efforts, and integrating new technologies over time. A proactive, programmatic approach ensures that signals are managed consistently across jurisdictions, providing reliable performance and minimizing inefficient, piecemeal adjustments.

Procedures for signal operation and maintenance are outlined in 902.1.10 Responsibility for Operation and Maintenance (MUTCD Section 4A.10).

909.2.2.4 Traffic Signal Timing and Coordination

Traffic signal timing and coordination strategies are a cost-effective approach to improve arterial operations. By updating signal timing plans and coordinating operations across intersections, agencies can reduce delays and support more predictable travel along corridors. These strategies allow signal operations to reflect current traffic conditions, land use patterns, and system changes, while also providing a foundation for integrating advanced technologies such as adaptive control.

Applications:

  • Traffic Signal Retiming – Updating the timing plans for one signalized intersection or a corridor of intersections based on the latest traffic volumes. Retiming is recommended every few years or after significant changes to transportation systems or land use within a given area.
  • Traffic Signal Coordination – Coordinating traffic signal timing along a corridor to enable a “green wave” of vehicles traveling through a sequence of signals. Coordination optimizes the splits and offsets of signals to allow for smoother, progressive traffic flow.
  • Adaptive Traffic Signal Control – Coordinating traffic signal timing across a network using real-time detector data to accommodate current, prevailing traffic patterns. This allows for dynamic adjustment of timing in response to fluctuating traffic conditions.

909.2.2.5 Transit Signal Priority

Transit signal priority (TSP) strategies adjust signal phasing to reduce delay for buses and improve the efficiency of transit operations. TSP can extend green phases and/or provide early green intervals to help transit vehicles move more consistently through intersections. By enhancing the speed and reliability of bus service, TSP supports multimodal goals and encourages greater use of transit along arterial corridors.

909.2.2.6 Arterial Dynamic Shoulder Use

Arterial dynamic shoulder use provides additional capacity and improves multimodal efficiency by repurposing existing roadway space under defined conditions. Dynamic shoulder use allows roadway shoulders to operate as travel lanes during peak periods or special events, while maintaining their primary role for emergency access during off-peak times. This strategy can help reduce delays, improve vehicle-throughput, and support multimodal goals in areas where right-of-way is constrained and traditional widening is not feasible. Successful implementation requires clear operational policies, appropriate signing and striping, and coordination with enforcement and transit partners to ensure safety and effectiveness.

Although Missouri does not currently implement arterial dynamic shoulder use, the approach may offer targeted benefits in select corridors-especially where traditional widening is not feasible and where shoulders are constructed to full-depth pavement standards.

909.2.3 Freight Operation

Freight operations strategies address truck mobility, parking, and safety near freight generators such as ports and distribution centers. The following sections outline key strategies for freight operations.

Users:

Reference MoDOT’s 2022 State Freight and Rail Plan Documents for additional information.

909.2.3.1 Freight Operations Around Ports and Generators

Freight hubs such as ports, intermodal yards, and distribution centers generate concentrated truck activity that can create localized congestion and safety concerns. Targeted operational improvements may include intersection upgrades, dedicated freight lanes, improved signage, or optimized signal timing along key freight corridors. These measures reduce bottlenecks, improve travel time reliability for trucks, and minimize conflicts between freight and passenger vehicles in high-demand areas.

909.2.3.2 Truck Parking

Adequate truck parking is essential for driver safety, freight efficiency, and regulatory compliance. Strategies include the development of new truck parking facilities, upgrades to existing rest areas, and the integration of real-time availability systems that help drivers locate spaces. Reservation tools and wayfinding applications can further support efficient parking use and reduce the safety risks associated with unauthorized shoulder or ramp parking.

909.2.3.3 Regional Permitting

Freight often crosses multiple jurisdictions, and inconsistent permitting processes can add delay and administrative burden. Regional permitting strategies streamline requirements by coordinating across state, county, and local agencies. Harmonizing size, weight, and routing approvals enhances efficiency for carriers while reducing redundant processes for agencies, particularly along high-volume freight corridors.

909.2.3.4 Technology Applications for Freight

Technology provides powerful tools for managing freight mobility. Examples include routing platforms that help drivers avoid weight-restricted bridges or low-clearance structures, monitoring systems that track freight movement in real time, and automated clearance technologies at weigh stations or ports of entry. Collectively, these applications enhance efficiency, improve safety, and provide data to better manage freight corridors.

909.2.3.5 Connected and Automated Freight Vehicles

The freight industry is a leading sector for testing and deploying connected and automated vehicle (CV/AV) technologies. Applications may include platooning, automated truck-mounted attenuators, or fully automated long-haul freight operations. These technologies have the potential to improve safety, reduce driver fatigue, and increase efficiency in freight corridors. Early deployment efforts require coordination with industry, agencies, and technology providers to ensure infrastructure readiness and to evaluate operational impacts.

909.2.4 Vulnerable Road Users

Vulnerable road users (VRUs) are individuals who travel without the protection of an enclosed vehicle and therefore face a greater risk of serious injury in a collision. VRUs include pedestrians, roadway workers, individuals using wheelchairs or other personal mobility devices, bicyclists, motorcyclists, and users of electric scooters and other micromobility devices. The following sections outline key strategies to improve safety, access, and comfort for these users within the transportation system.

Users:

909.2.4.1 Safety Enhancements

Selective deployment of safety enhancements should be informed by EPG Category:907 Traffic Safety and tailored to the needs of VRUs. Enhancements may include improved crossings, lighting, signing and pavement markings, speed management strategies, traffic calming measures, work zone protections for roadway workers, and design treatments that reduce conflicts involving motorcyclists and micromobility users.

909.2.4.2 Pedestrian and Accessibility Facilities

Sidewalks, shared-use paths, accessible curb ramps, transit stop connections and enhanced or grade-separated crossings should be prioritized where safety risks, accessibility needs, or network gaps are identified. Integrating these facilities in alignment with Complete Streets principles (EPG 907.10 Complete Streets) helps ensure safe, efficient access for pedestrians and individuals using wheelchairs or other mobility devices.

909.2.4.3 Bicycle Lanes and Cycle Tracks

Where conditions and community priorities warrant, dedicated bike lanes or protected cycle tracks can significantly enhance comfort and safety for bicyclists and other micromobility users, including users of electric scooters and similar devices. MoDOT’s Complete Streets guidance (EPG 907.10 Complete Streets) supports integrating these features into designs that serve all users – including VRUs – within roadway corridors.

909.2.4.4 VRU Education and Outreach

Support community-informed education and outreach programs that promote safe behaviors among VRUs. Programs may address the needs of pedestrians, bicyclists, micromobility users, motorcyclists, individuals with disabilities, and drivers, and may include collaboration with local schools, community organizations, advocacy groups, employers, transit agencies, and public safety partners.

909.2.5 Transit Operation

Transit operations strategies improve speed, reliability, and accessibility of transit services. The following sections outline key strategies for transit operations.

Users:

909.2.5.1 Transit Signal Priority

Transit Signal Priority (TSP) strategies modify traffic signal operations to reduce delay and improve on-time arrivals for buses and other transit vehicles.

Additional information on TSP is provided in EPG 909.2.2.5 Transit Signal Priority.

909.2.5.2 Bus Rapid Transit

Bus Rapid Transit (BRT) incorporates a combination of dedicated lanes, intersection treatments, and enhanced stations to provide faster and more reliable bus service. Treatments such as queue jump lanes and high-capacity vehicles further enhance performance. BRT can serve as a cost-effective alternative to rail in high-demand corridors, delivering rapid, frequent, and reliable service with improved passenger amenities.

909.2.5.3 Transit-Only Lanes

Transit-only lanes provide additional capacity and improve multimodal efficiency by repurposing existing roadway space under defined conditions. Transit-only lanes dedicate roadway space to buses, enabling more reliable service and improving schedule adherence in congested corridors. This strategy can help reduce delays, improve person-throughput, and support multimodal goals in areas where right-of-way is constrained and traditional widening is not feasible. Successful implementation requires clear operational policies, appropriate signing and striping, and coordination with enforcement and transit partners to ensure safety and effectiveness.

This strategy may offer targeted benefits in select corridors where shoulders are constructed to full-depth pavement standards.

Policy Coordination – Any consideration or application of the following strategies in Missouri should be closely coordinated with MoDOT’s Central Office of Highway Safety and Traffic (COHST) to ensure consistency with policy, design standards, and operational oversight.

909.2.5.4 Transit Operation Vehicles

Transit vehicle operations may require unique roadway considerations. Streetcars, for example, share corridors with general traffic and necessitate signal coordination and geometric design adjustments for turning movements. Similarly, buses may require accommodations such as bus pullouts, curb extensions, or boarding islands to improve efficiency and passenger safety. These vehicle-specific considerations support smoother operations and minimize conflicts with other modes.

909.2.5.5 Multimodal Transportation Centers

Multimodal transportation centers serve as hubs that integrate multiple travel modes, including bus, rail, bike, and pedestrian connections. These facilities improve regional accessibility by consolidating transfers in a single location and providing amenities such as shelters, ticketing, and real-time traveler information.

In Missouri, existing park-and-ride facilities present opportunities to serve as future multimodal centers. When thoughtfully designed, these centers encourage greater transit use, strengthen first- and last-mile connections, and elevate the role of transit in supporting regional mobility.

REVISION REQUEST 4175 (ON HOLD)

321.2.1.2 Types of Reports

1. The soil survey report touches on foundations by pointing out possible foundation problems. It also contains basic slope recommendations which affect bridge length, soil types and properties for pavement design, depths to rock and type of rock for determining cut quantities, and cut slope recommendations for soil and rock.

2. The preliminary bridge foundation report, which is submitted by the district as an adjunct to the soil survey report, is usually furnished to the Bridge Unit for their guidance in preparing preliminary bridge layouts and to the Materials Engineering Unit for guidance in conducting a more detailed foundation investigation. (Preliminary borings for such reports may be omitted where access problems are especially difficult.)

3. The final foundation investigation report will provide the requested properties from Form A of the Bridge Division Request for Soil Properties in accordance with EPG Sections 320, 321, 700 and other applicable sections. The report will also provide seismic properties as requested on Form B. The Bridge Division or District will provide the preliminary structure layout and location of each foundation location. The Geotechnical Section will determine boring locations and sampling frequency based on guidance in, EPG 321.2 Geotechnical Guidelines, and specific site conditions. The Geotechnical Section may make recommendations for specific foundation types if site conditions require special considerations. The intent is to provide the Bridge Division or District with the information needed to develop designs for the foundation types practical for a particular site. Rules of thumb as to what is practical have been developed jointly by the Geotechnical Section and the Bridge Division. These are discussed in the applicable sections within the EPG.






701 Drilled Shafts

Substructure foundations may be designed to transmit loads to foundation strata by concrete columns cast in drilled holes. See EPG 751.37 Drilled Shafts for design guidance and additional information.

This type of foundation is identified in Sec 701 of the Standard Specifications as Drilled Shafts. A drilled shaft is generally considered a deep foundation.

Drilled shafts for bridge structures:

Drilled shafts for bridge structures shall be constructed with a permanent casing and rock socketed. Requirements for plan reporting of steel casing are given in EPG 751.37.1.3 Casing.

The shaft portion of a drilled shaft is founded on rock (limestone, dolomite or other suitable material with qu ≥ 100 ksf) or weak rock (shale or other suitable material with 5 ksf ≤ qu ≤ 100 ksf) with a smaller diameter rock socket drilled into same. The inspector should carefully study all general specifications and special provisions pertaining to drilled shafts and become familiar with the designer's intent.

The integrity of the rock socket shall be verified by a foundation inspection hole. This is usually performed after the shaft is drilled. Setting up over a drilled hole can be difficult. The contractor can perform the inspection hole in advance if they submit a procedure that assures the correct location is cored. If the integrity of the cores are questionable the Bridge Division should be contacted to see if the rock socket length should be extended.

Most problems with drilled shafts occur during the concrete pour. The concrete placement requirements in Sec 701 should be reviewed carefully.

An anomaly may be detected on a Cross Hole Sonic log test. If, on further investigation, there is a confirmed defect what are some of the steps needed to remediate the defect?

1. The contractor is responsible for submitting a remediation plan for the repair.
2. The plan should include as a minimum the following:
a) The area of deficient material must be clearly defined using coring or other means.
b) The clean-out process is typically accomplished by flushing the weak material. The access holes needed, water pressure used, and disposal of the soils should be addressed.
c) Confirmation of the deficient material removal must be made. This can be accomplished by camera inspection, CSL, or by other means acceptable to the engineer.
d) The grouting plan should include: grouting type, grout mix design including w/c ratio, complete pressure grouting timeline. The grouting timeline should include placement times, pressure, volume, refusal criteria.
3. A final confirmation of the effectiveness of the grouting should be made. This is typically accomplished by coring. The number of cores required, and depth shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to coring. If all the CSL tubes are still usable, a final CSL can be made for acceptance. The engineer of record for the design should be consulted for final acceptance.

Question: Per Sec 701.4.17.2.1 Installation of Pipes, “The pipes shall be filled with water and plugged or capped before shaft concrete is poured.” Why is this necessary?

The water in the tube helps to regulate the temperature of the CSL tube. Without the water, the tube will heat up from the hydrating concrete and cause de-bonding. This de-bonding from the concrete will cause erroneous CSL readings and show up as an anomaly. Typically, de-bonding is more prevalent in the upper 6 ft. of the tube. The water also serves a second purpose: it helps the energy transmission from the wall of the tube to the probes and vice versa.

Drilled shafts for non-bridge structures:

Drilled shafts for non-bridge structures are typically designed and constructed without casing. Permanent casing is not allowed except for special designs.

The shafts may be embedded into rock when soil overburden depth is inadequate for properly anchoring the foundation. If overburden soils are unstable and conduit access is not required in the perimeter of the shaft, temporary casing may be used with an oversized shaft to allow excavation into rock at the required diameter.






751.1.2.20 Substructure Type

Once the signed Bridge Memo and the Borings are received, the entire layout folder should be given to the Preliminary Detailer (requested by SPM, assigned by Structural Resource Manager). The Preliminary Detailer will copy the appropriate MicroStation drawings into their own directory. (Do not rename files) Consultants contact Structural Liaison Engineer. The Preliminary Detailer will then draw the proposed bridge on the plat and profile sheets. The bridge should also be drawn on the contracted profile for a perspective of the profile grade relative to the ground line for drainage considerations. The Preliminary Detailer will also generate a draft Design Layout Sheet and then return the layout folder to the Preliminary Designer for review.

The Preliminary Designer will then choose the substructure types for each of the bents. Pile cap bents without concrete encasement are less expensive than column bents but they should not be used at the following locations:

  • Where drift has been identified as a problem
  • Where the height of the unbraced piling is excessive and kl/r exceeds 120 (kl/r<120 is generally preferred) (take scour into account)
  • Where the bent is adjacent to traffic (grade separations)

Encased pile cap bents may be considered if economical. Embed concrete encasement 2 ft. (minimum) below the top of the lowest finished groundline elevation, unless a greater embedment is required for bridge scour. Greater embedment up to 5 or 6 ft. may be considered in situations where anticipated ground line elevation can fluctuate more severely. (Be sure to account for excavation quantities for deeper embedment.) Provision for encasing piles may be considered at the following locations:

  • Where drift is a concern and protection is required
  • Where larger radius of gyration is necessary and therefore improved buckling resistance for locations where the exposed unbraced column length is large
  • Not exclusively where the piles at the pile/wall interface may experience wet/dry cycles and/or excessive periods of ground moisture

For column bents, an economic analysis should be performed to compare drilled shafts to footings. Footings are not recommended for stream crossings where scour potential is identified. For grade separations, assume the top of drilled shaft casing is located at least one foot below the ground line. For shallow rock conditions, consideration should also be given to eliminating the cased portion of the shaft and placing the column directly over an oversized rock socket. Top of drilled shaft casing for stream crossings should consider the following criteria, and with SPM or SLE approval, select the appropriate elevation to balance risk for the anticipated conditions at time of construction:

  • 10-year flood elevation
  • 1 foot above ordinary high water elevation
  • Elevation of nearest overbank
  • 3 feet above low water elevation

End Bents are usually pile cap bents; however, if quality rock is abundant at or just below the bottom of beam elevation, a stub end bent on spread footings may be used. If you have any doubt about the suitability and uniformity of the rock, you can still use a pile cap end bent. Just include prebore to get a minimum of 10 ft. of piling. If you have concerns about temperature movements, you can require that the prebore holes be oversized to allow for this movement.

For any pile cap bents, where steel piles are to be placed near a fluctuating water line or near a ground line where aggressive soil conditions exist or anticipated to exist in the future, corrosion can result in substantial material loss in pile sections over time, either slowly or rapidly. Galvanized steel piling is required for all new pile cap bents to be used as a deterrent to both accelerated and incidental pile corrosion as commonly seen in the field. Further, conditions like known in corrosive soils, some stream crossings with known history of effects on steel piles and grounds subject to stray currents, these conditions should affect the decision of whether pile cap bents can be effectively utilized. The potential effects of corrosion and the potential deterioration from environmental conditions should always be considered in the determination and selection of the steel pile type and steel pile cross-section (size of HP pile or casing thickness), and in considering the long-term durability of the pile type in service.

Once the substructure type has been determined, re-examine your Preliminary Cost Estimate and notify the district if it needs to be adjusted.

Galvanized Steel Piles

Galvanizing shall be required for all steel piles. Utilizing galvanized steel piles and pile bracing members shall be in addition to the requirements of Standard Specifications Sec 702 except that protective coatings specified in Sec 702 will not be required for galvanized piles or galvanized bracing members.

Where galvanized steel piling is expected to be exposed to severe corrosive conditions, consideration can be given to increased steel pile thickness or consideration of a reduced loaded steel area for bearing, or conditions mitigated to prevent long term corrosivity risk . This equally applies to the potential corrosion and early deterioration of permanent steel casing used for drilled shafts though they are not required to be galvanized. For all cases, further consideration beyond normal practice should be given to investigating corrosion protection, rate of corrosion as it relates to steel thickness design and expected service life including galvanizing losses, corrosion mitigation or different substructure support in order to meet a 75 year or longer design life. For additional information refer to LRFD 10.7.5 and 10.8.1.5. Consult with the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer to determine options and strategy for implementation.

All Bridge and Retaining Wall Piles (For Example, abutment piles, wing wall piles, intermediate pile cap bent piles and pile cap footing piles)

All surfaces of piles shall be galvanized to a minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) or its full length based on the following guidance. The minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) shall be estimated in preliminary design and finalized in final design. The minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) or full length will be shown on the design layout.

Guidance for determining minimum galvanized penetration (elevation):

The designer shall establish the limits of galvanized structural steel pile (i.e., HP pile and CIP pile). All exposed pile plus any required length below ground shall be galvanized. Based on required galvanized pile length determine and show Minimum Galvanized Penetration (Elevation) or Full Length on the Design Layout and on the plans.

When glacial material or other hard material is identified in the geotechnical report discuss with SPM and consider galvanizing full length of pile to avoid the scenario where friction pile may potentially be cut-off once the geotechnical capacity is reached but the depth for galvanization is inadequate.

Required Pile
Galvanizing
For Nonscour
Required Pile
Galvanizing
For Channel Scour
Required Pile
Galvanizing
For Channel Migration
Estimated Pile Length ≤ 50 feet Full Length of Pile Full Length of Pile Full Length of Pile
Estimated Pile Length > 50 feet 20 feet (in ground)1 20 feet (in ground)1, but not less than 5 feet below max. scour depth. 20 feet (in ground)1, but not less than 5 feet below stream bed elev.
1 “In ground” is measured from finished ground line on intermediate bents, and bottom of beam cap for abutments.

For retaining walls supported on piles, the minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) for piles shall be “Full Length of Pile” for estimated pile length up to 50 feet and 15 feet below bottom of wall for estimated pile length greater than 50 feet.

For bridge end bents on piles with embankments supported by MSE walls, the minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) for piles shall be “Full Length of Pile” for estimated pile length up to 50 feet and 15 feet below top of leveling pad for estimated pile length greater than 50 feet.

Temporary Bridge Piles

Protective coatings are not required in accordance with Sec 718. Galvanized pile is not required. All HP piles driven to rock shall require pile point reinforcement.






751.1.2.24 Drilled Shafts

Drilled shafts are to be used when their cost is comparable to that of large cofferdams and footings. Other examples include when there are subsurface items to avoid (culverts, utilities, etc.) or when there are extremely high soil pressures due to slope failures.

Drilled shafts shall be constructed with a permanent casing and rock socketed.

The Final Foundation Investigation Report (or geotechnical report) for drilled shafts should supply you with the anticipated tip of casing, nominal tip resistance, nominal tip resistance factor, nominal side resistance, nominal side resistance factor as well as the recommended elevations for which the resistance values are applicable.

The Design Layout Sheet should include the following information:

  • Top of Drilled Shaft Elevation
  • Anticipated Tip of Casing Elevation
  • Anticipated Top of Sound Rock Elevation
Bent Elevation Nominal Axial Compressive Resistance
(Side Resistance) (ksf)
Side Resistance Factor for
Strength Limit State
Nominal Axial Compressive Resistance
(Tip Resistance) (ksf)
Tip Resistance Factors for
Strength Limit States
 






751.4.1 Reinforced Concrete

Classes of Reinforced Concrete

Below are classes of concrete for each type or portion of structure:

Box Culverts B-1
Retaining Walls B or B-1
Superstructure (General) B-2
Curbs and Parapets B-1
Type A, B, C, D, G and H Barriers B-1
Sidewalks B-2
Raised Median B-2
Slabs B-2
Box Girders B-2
Deck Girders B-2
Prestressed Precast Panels A-1
Prestressed I - Girders A-1
Prestressed Double -Tee Girders A-1
Integral End Bents (Above lower construction joint) B-2
Semi-Deep Abutments (Above construction joint under slab) B-2
Substructure (General) B
Integral End Bents (Below lower construction joint) B
Non-Integral End Bents B
Semi-Deep Abutments (Below construction joint under slab) B
Intermediate Bents B (*)
Intermediate Bent Columns, End Bents (Below construction
joint at bottom of slab in Cont. Conc. Slab Bridges)
B-1
Footings B
Drilled Shafts (except per Standard Plans 903.15) B-2
Drilled Shafts (per Standard Plans 903.15) B
Cast-In-Place Pile B-1
(*) In special cases when a stronger concrete is necessary for design, Class B-1 may be considered for intermediate bents (caps, columns, tie beams, web beams, collision walls and/or footings).
Unit Stresses of Reinforced Concrete
Class of Concrete Aggregate Maximumsize (Inches) Cement Factor (barrels percubic yard) fc (psi) fc (psi) n (*) Ec (ksi)
A-1 3/4 1.6 (Min.) 5,000 2,000 6 4074
B 1 1.4 (Min.) 3,000 1,200 10 3156
B-1 1 1.6 (Min.) 4,000 1,600 8 3644
B-2 1 1.875 (Min.) 4,000 1,600 8 3644
(*) Values of n for computations of strength only.
Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing Steel (Grade 60) Fy = 60 ksi







751.37.1.2 Materials

Commentary for EPG 751.37.1.2 Materials

Concrete used for drilled shaft for traffic structures in accordance with standard plan 903.15 shall be Class B concrete with minimum compressive strength, f’c = 3 ksi. For all other drilled shaft construction concrete shall be Class B-2 with minimum compressive strength, f’c = 4 ksi.






751.37.1.3 Casing

Commentary for EPG 751.37.1.3 Casing

Drilled shafts for bridge structures:

All drilled shafts shall have permanent casing installed through overburden soils to prevent caving of these soils during construction. Drilled shafts shall be socketed into bedrock. Welded or seamless steel permanent casing shall be in accordance with Sec 701.

Rock sockets shall be uncased.

Permanent Casing Thickness Design and Plan Reporting:

Any drilled shaft for a major bridge over a river or lake or any drilled shaft longer than 80 feet or any drilled shaft greater than 6 feet in diameter shall have a minimum casing thickness of 1/2 inch specified unless a greater thickness is required by design for strength. The thickness of casing in either case shall be shown on the bridge plans and noted as a minimum.
All other drilled shafts shall not have a minimum casing thickness specified unless a specific thickness is required by design for strength. The minimum thickness in the latter case shall be shown on the bridge plans and noted as a minimum.
For drilled shaft stiffness computations and load distribution analysis, use the minimum casing thickness required. When a minimum casing thickness is not required, assume a casing thickness of 3/8” for the analysis.







751.37.1.5 Related Provisions

Commentary for EPG 751.37.1.5 Related Provisions

The provisions of these guidelines were developed presuming that design parameters required to apply the provisions are established following current MoDOT site characterization protocols as described in EPG 321. Specific attention is drawn to EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation. The provisions provided in these guidelines presume that parameter variability, as generally represented by the coefficient of variation (COV), is established following procedures in EPG 321.3.

Sign structure drilled shaft supports are the exception. Sign structure standard drilled shafts are developed using assumed soil properties and following AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 9th Edition for design. Site specific designs for drilled shafts for sign structure support may also follow AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 9th Edition if there is not enough geotechnical information available to establish the COV.






751.37.1.6 Drilled Shaft General Detail Considerations

For Seismic detail requirements for seismic design category, SDC B, C and D, See EPG 751.9.1.2 LRFD Seismic Details.

Pay items shown in above table are for example only, show actual pay items and quantities in plan details for specific project.

Notes:

(1) Number of pipes (equally spaced) for Sonic Logging Testing (for bridge structures only):
Diameter ≤ 2.5 ft: 2 pipes
Diameter >2.5 ft but ≤ 3.5 ft: 3 pipes
Diameter >3.5 ft but ≤ 5.0 ft: 4 pipes
Diameter >5.0 ft but ≤ 8.0 ft: 5 pipes
Diameter >8.0 ft: 6 pipes
Single diameter reinforcing cage is typically used. Modify details based on design for single or multiple-diameter cages and splice location(s).
See EPG 751.37.1.3 for casing requirements for bridge structures and non-bridge structures.
When determining P bar diameter for barbill, assume 3/8” casing unless otherwise specified.
See EPG 751.50, G8, for notes to include for drilled shafts and rock sockets (starting at G8.1).
(2) See EPG 751.37.1.1 Dimensions and Nomenclature for Design Aid: Minimum Rock Socket Length.
(3) When difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is 6" a single reinforcement cage is typically used for the socket and shaft and the vertical reinforcement extends into the column. A separate column steel cage is then placed around the protruding shaft reinforcement without requiring an adjustment to minimum cover for rock socket or column reinforcement. When difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is 12” either the vertical column steel or dowels will need to be extended into the shaft or the cover in the socket and shaft will need to be increased to allow the shaft reinforcement to extend into the column. In the former scenario an optional construction joint is recommended as discussed in note 4 for oversized shafts. In the latter scenario the same number of vertical bars should be used in the shaft and column to allow the shaft bars to be tied to the column cage. Any reduction in cage diameter required for fit-up shall be considered in design.
(4) When difference between drilled shaft and column diameter is greater than 12" (oversized shaft generally 18" to 24" larger than column), show "Optional construction joint" at bottom of column/dowel reinforcement in the drilled shaft and use EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes G8.8 and G8.9 in plan details.
Bridge Standard Drawings
(Drilled Shafts - DSS → As Built Drilled Shaft Data [DSS_01])
As Built Drilled Shaft Data (PDF)






751.37.2 General Design Procedure and Limit States

Commentary for EPG 751.37.2 General Design Procedure and Limit States

Drilled shafts should be sized (diameter and length) to support the required factored loads in the most cost effective manner possible without excessive deflections. The initial diameter and length of drilled shafts are generally established considering vertical loading at the strength limit state(s) according to EPG 751.37.3. The resulting shaft should then be evaluated at the axial and lateral serviceability limit states (settlement and lateral deflection) according to EPG 751.37.4 and EPG 751.37.5, where the shaft dimensions shall be adjusted if serviceability requirements are not satisfied.

The Strength Limit State and applicable Extreme Event Limit States shall be investigated when calculating the soil and structural resistance of the drilled shaft. The Service I Limit State shall be used when evaluating lateral deflection and settlement.

Guidance

There is one type of drilled shaft construction for bridge structures. There are three types of drilled shaft construction for non-bridge structures, but only two types need be considered for design. See EPG 751.37.1.3 Casing.

Drilled shafts for bridge structures:
Permanently cased shaft through soil and socketed into rock. A reduced shaft diameter for rock socket is required. This case shall be used for all MoDOT bridge structures. For axial loading and settlement computations substitute D with Ds and L with Ls which are equal to the diameter and length of the rock socket since the required resistance to loading and settlement are computed for segment of the shaft in rock only (Rock sockets to be installed through casing shall have diameters 6” less than the inside diameter of the casing to allow for clearance and insertion of rock excavation re-tooling equipment).
Drilled shafts for non-bridge structures:
1. Uncased shaft through soil and not socketed into rock. For axial loading and settlement computations use D = diameter of shaft.
2. Uncased shaft through soil and rock. Similar to (1) because the shaft diameter is assumed to be constant between soil and rock.
3. Temporarily cased shaft through soil with an uncased and reduced or same shaft diameter in rock. This method is optional for the contractor in limited scenarios and requires the shaft in soil to be oversized by six inches with respect to the shaft diameter shown on the plans.

Permanently cased shafts shall not be allowed to use frictional resistance of the soil for either a drilled shaft with or without a rock socket.

Temporarily cased shafts may use the frictional resistance of the soil only for the case where a rock socket is not used (see the Geotechnical Section).

Note on Definitions:

1. Where L,i is defined, Li shall mean the length of the shaft segment through soil or through rock.
2. Where L is defined, L shall mean overall shaft length including the length of the rock socket.






751.37.3 Design for Axial Loading at Strength Limit State

Commentary for EPG 751.37.3 Design for Axial Loading at Strength Limit State

Geotechnical resistance to axial loading at the relevant strength limit state shall be computed as the sum of tip resistance and side resistance unless conditions are present that may prevent reliable mobilization of tip resistance (e.g. karst conditions with known or likely voids that cannot be specifically identified or characterized). Shafts should be sized such that the factored geotechnical resistance to axial loads exceeds the factored axial loads:

RR=RsR+RpRγQ (consistent units of force) Equation 751.37.3.1

where:

RR = factored axial shaft resistance (consistent units of force),
RsR = factored side resistance (consistent units of force),
RpR = factored tip resistance (consistent units of force) and
γQ = factored load for the appropriate strength limit state (consistent units of force).

Tip resistance and side resistance shall be computed according to the provisions of EPG 751.37.3 for the material type(s) encountered. The Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer shall be consulted before utilizing design methods other than those provided in EPG 751.37.3 for calculating the geotechnical resistance of drilled shafts.

The factored side resistance for drilled shafts shall be established from factored unit side resistance values for the relevant soil/rock conditions as provided in this article. For stratified ground conditions or where the shaft dimensions change (e.g. at tip of temporary casing for non-bridge structure, or at top of rock socket for bridge structure), the shaft shall be divided into segments with practically uniform shaft geometry and soil/rock properties and unit side resistance values determined for each shaft segment. The total factored side resistance shall then be computed as the sum of the factored resistance values for each shaft segment:

RsR=i=1n(qsRiAsi)=i=1n(ϕqsiqsiπDiLi) (consistent units of force) Equation 751.37.3.2

where:

n = number of shaft segments,
qsRi=ϕqsiqsi = factored unit side resistance for shaft segment i (consistent units of stress),
Asi=πDiLi = perimeter interface area for shaft segment i (consistent units of area),
ϕqsi = resistance factor for unit side resistance along shaft segment i (dimensionless),
qsi = nominal unit side resistance along shaft segment i (consistent units of stress),
Di = shaft diameter for shaft segment i (consistent units of length), and
Li = length of shaft segment i (consistent units of length).

ϕqsi and qsi shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this article, based on the material type present along the respective shaft segment.

Side resistance shall generally be neglected or reduced, as recommended by the Geotechnical Section, over shaft segments with permanent casing and over any length of rock socket that is deemed unusable.

The factored tip resistance for drilled shafts shall be established from factored unit tip resistance values for the relevant soil/rock conditions as provided in this article. The appropriate tip resistance shall be established for the soil/rock located between the tip of the shaft and two diameters below the tip of the shaft. The factored tip resistance shall be computed as

RpR=qpRAp=ϕqpqpπD24 (consistent units of force) Equation 751.37.3.3

where:

qpR=ϕqpqp = factored unit tip resistance (consistent units of stress),
Ap=πD24 = cross-sectional area of the shaft at the tip (consistent units of area),
ϕqp = resistance factor for unit tip resistance (dimensionless),
qp= nominal unit tip resistance (consistent units of stress), and
D = shaft diameter at the tip of the shaft (consistent units of length).

ϕqp and qp shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this article, based on the material type present within a depth of 2D below the tip of the shaft.

Tip resistance shall be neglected, as recommended by the Geotechnical Section, when the shaft tip is located within karstic rock or other conditions where tip resistance cannot be reliably determined.

The specific methods and resistance factors for determining nominal and factored side and tip resistance shall be selected based on the material type(s) present along the sides and beneath the tip of the shaft:

  • EPG 751.37.3.1 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in rock from results of uniaxial compression tests on intact rock core with uniaxial compressive strengths (qu ) greater than 100 ksf;
  • EPG 751.37.3.2 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in weak rock from results of uniaxial compression tests on rock core with uniaxial compressive strengths (qu ) greater than 5 ksf but less than 100 ksf;
  • EPG 751.37.3.3 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in weak rock from results of Standard Penetration Tests with equivalent N-values (Neq ) less than 400 blows/foot;
  • EPG 751.37.3.4 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in weak rock from results of Texas Cone Penetration Tests with measured penetrations (TCP) greater than 1 inch/100 blows but less than 10 inches/100 blows;
  • EPG 751.37.3.5 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in weak rock from results of Point Load Index Tests with Point Load Indices (Is(50) ) less than 40 ksf;
  • EPG 751.37.3.6 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in cohesive soils with undrained shear strengths (su ) less than 5 ksf; and
  • EPG 751.37.3.7 shall generally be followed to estimate resistance for shafts in cohesionless soils.

Additional guidance on selection of specific methods and resistance factors based on the material types encountered is provided in the commentary to these guidelines.








751.37.3.7 Axial Resistance for Individual Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils

Commentary for EPG 751.37.3.7 Axial Resistance for Individual Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils

Side Resistance for Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils

The nominal unit side resistance for shaft segments located in cohesionless soils shall be computed using the “β-method” as

qs=βσv' (consistent units of stress) Equation 751.37.3.21

where:

qs = nominal unit side resistance for the shaft segment (consistent units of stress),
β = an empirical correlation factor (dimensionless) and
σ'v = average vertical effective stress for the soil along the shaft segment (consistent units of stress).

The value for β shall be taken as (O’Neill and Reese, 1999)

β=1.50.135z (for N60 ≥ 15) Equation 751.37.3.22a
β=N6015(1.50.135z) (for N60 < 15) Equation 751.37.3.22b

where 0.25 ≤ β ≤ 1.2 and

z = depth below ground surface to center of shaft segment (ft.) and
N60 = average SPT N-value corrected for hammer efficiency (blows/ft).

If permanent casing is used, the side resistance shall be ignored for the cased portion.

The resistance factor ϕqs to be applied to the nominal unit side resistance shall be taken as 0.55 (LRFD Table 10.5.5.2.4-1).

Tip Resistance for Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils

The nominal unit tip resistance for shafts founded on cohesionless soils shall be computed from corrected SPT N-values, N60 (O’Neill and Reese, 1999).

For N_60≤50:

qp=1.2N6060ksf (ksf) Equation 751.37.3.23

where:

qp = nominal unit tip resistance for the shaft (ksf) and
N60 = average SPT N-value corrected for hammer efficiency (blows/ft).

For N60 ≥ 50:

qp=0.59σv'(N60(paσv'))0.8 (ksf) Equation 751.37.3.24

where:

qp = nominal unit tip resistance for the shaft (ksf),
N60 = average SPT N-value corrected for hammer efficiency (blows/foot),
pa = 2.12 ksf = atmospheric pressure (ksf).
σv' = vertical effective stress for the soil at the tip of the shaft (ksf).

Note that these expressions are dimensional so values must be entered in the units specified.

The resistance factor ϕqp shall be taken as 0.50 for Equation 751.37.3.23 and as 0.55 for Equation 751.37.3.24.








751.37.4.1 Settlement of Individual Drilled Shafts using Approximate Method

Commentary on EPG 751.37.4.1 Settlement of Individual Drilled Shafts using Approximate Method

Prediction of factored settlement due to factored service loads shall be determined as follows depending on the magnitude of factored loads relative to the magnitude of factored side and tip resistance:

If γQRsR+0.1RpR:

δR=0.005DγQRsR+0.1RpR+δeR (consistent units of lengths) Equation 751.37.4.3

where:

γQ = factored load for the appropriate serviceability limit state (consistent units of force),
RsR = total factored side resistance determined according to the provisions of this article (consistent units of force),
RpR = factored tip resistance determined according to the provisions of this article (consistent units of force),
δR = factored total settlement of shaft due to factored service loads (consistent units of length),
D = shaft diameter (consistent units of length) and
δeR = factored elastic compression of the unsupported length of the shaft (consistent units of length).

If RsR+0.1RpRγQRsR+RpR :

δR=0.005D+0.045D(γQRsR0.1RpR0.9RpR)+δeR (consistent units of lengths) Equation 751.37.4.4

where:

γQ = factored load for the appropriate serviceability limit state (consistent units of force),
RsR = total factored side resistance determined according to the provisions of this article (consistent units of force),
RpR = factored tip resistance determined according to the provisions of this article (consistent units of force),
δR = factored total settlement of shaft due to factored service load (consistent units of length),
D = shaft diameter (consistent units of length) and
δeR = factored elastic compression of the unsupported length of the shaft (consistent units of length).

Note that if γQRsR+RpR, the factored service load exceeds the maximum factored resistance of the shaft and the limit state cannot be satisfied without increasing the dimensions of the shaft.

The factored side resistance in Equations 751.37.4.3 and 751.37.4.4 shall be established from factored unit side resistance values for the relevant soil/rock conditions as provided in this article. For stratified ground conditions or where the shaft dimensions change, the shaft shall be divided into segments with practically uniform shaft geometry and soil/rock properties and unit side resistance values determined for each shaft segment. The total factored side resistance shall then be computed as the sum of the factored resistance values for each shaft segment:

RsR=i=1n(qsR1Asi)=i1n(ϕδsiqsiπDiLi) (consistent units of force) Equation 751.37.4.5

where:

n = number of shaft segments,
qsRi=ϕδsiqsi = factored unit side resistance for shaft segment i (consistent units of stress),
Asi=πDiLi = perimeter interface area for shaft segment i (consistent units of area),
ϕδsi = settlement resistance factor for side resistance along shaft segment i (dimensionless),
qs-i = nominal unit side resistance along shaft segment i (consistent units of stress),
Di = shaft diameter for shaft segment i (consistent units of length) and
Li = length of shaft segment i (consistent units of length).

Values for qs-i shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of EPG 751.37.3, based on the material type present along the respective shaft segments. Values for ϕδsi shall be established as provided subsequently in this article. Side resistance shall generally be neglected or reduced, as recommended by the Geotechnical Section, over shaft segments with permanent casing and over any length of rock socket that is deemed unusable for consistency with evaluations performed for strength limit states.

The factored tip resistance in Equations 751.37.4.3 and 751.37.4.4 shall be established from factored unit tip resistance values for the relevant soil/rock conditions as provided in this article. The appropriate tip resistance shall be established for the soil/rock located between the tip of the shaft and a distance of 2D below the tip of the shaft. The factored tip resistance shall be computed as

RpR=qpRAp=ϕδpqpπD24 (consistent units of force) Equation 751.37.4.6

where:

qpR=ϕδpqp = factored unit tip resistance (consistent units of stress),
Ap=πD24 = cross-sectional area of the shaft at the tip (consistent units of area),
ϕδp = settlement resistance factor for tip resistance (dimensionless),
qp = nominal unit tip resistance (consistent units of stress) and
D = shaft diameter at the tip of the shaft (consistent units of length).

The value for qp shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of EPG 751.37.3, based on the material type present within a depth of 2D below the tip of the shaft. The value for ϕδp shall be established as provided subsequently in this article. For consistency with evaluations for strength limit states, tip resistance shall be neglected, as recommended by the Geotechnical Section, when the shaft tip is located within karstic rock or other conditions where tip resistance cannot be reliably determined.

The factored elastic compression of the unsupported length of the shaft shall be determined as

δeR=γQ(LLs)ϕδeEpAp (consistent units of length) Equation 751.37.4.7

where:

δeR = factored elastic compression of the unsupported length of the shaft (consistent units of length),
γQ = factored load for the appropriate serviceability limit state (consistent units of force),
L = overall shaft length (consistent units of length),
Ls = length of the rock socket (consistent units of length),
Ep = nominal modulus of elasticity for the shaft (consistent units of stress),
Ap = nominal shaft area (consistent units of area) and
ϕδe = settlement resistance factor for elastic compression of the shaft.

Values for the settlement resistance factor for elastic compression of the shaft shall be taken from Table 751.37.4.1 according to the operational importance of the structure.

Table 751.37.4.1 Settlement resistance factors for elastic compression of drilled shafts

Operational Importance Settlement Resistance Factor, Φδe
Minor or Low Volume Route 0.68
Major Route 0.64
Major Bridge <$100 million 0.61
Major Bridge >$100 million 0.60


Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Rock

Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.1 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean uniaxial compressive strength, COVqu. Values for COVqu shall be determined in accordance with EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation to reflect the variability of the mean uniaxial compressive strength for the rock over the shaft segment. Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.2 based on values for COVqu that reflect the variability of the mean uniaxial compressive strength for the rock over the distance 2Ds below the tip of the shaft.

Fig. 751.37.4.1.1 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in rock from uniaxial compression test measurements using approximate method.
Fig. 751.37.4.1.2 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in rock from uniaxial compression test measurements using approximate method.

Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Weak Rock from Uniaxial Compression Tests on Rock Core

Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through weak rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.3 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean uniaxial compressive strength, COVqu. Values for COVqu shall be determined in accordance with EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation to reflect the variability of the mean uniaxial compressive strength for the rock over the shaft segment. Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on weak rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.4 based on values for COVqu that reflect the variability of the mean uniaxial compressive strength for the rock over the distance 2Ds below the tip of the shaft.


Fig. 751.37.4.1.3 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from uniaxial compression test measurements using approximate method.
Fig. 751.37.4.1.4 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from uniaxial compression test measurements using approximate method.

Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Weak Rock from Standard Penetration Test Measurements

Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through weak rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.5 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean equivalent SPT N-value, COVNeq. Values for COVNeq shall be determined in accordance with EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation to reflect the variability of the mean equivalent N-value over the shaft segment. Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on weak rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.6 based on values for COVNeq that reflect the variability of the mean equivalent N-value over the distance 2Ds below the tip of the shaft.


Fig. 751.37.4.1.5 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Standard Penetration Test measurements using approximate method.
Fig. 751.37.4.1.6 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Standard Penetration Test measurements using approximate method.

Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Weak Rock from Texas Cone Penetration Test Measurements

Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through weak rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.7 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean TCP-value, COVTCP. Values for COVTCP shall be determined in accordance with EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation to reflect the variability of the mean TCP-value over the shaft segment. Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on weak rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.8 based on values for COVTCP that reflect the variability of the mean TCP-value over the distance 2Ds below the tip of the shaft.


Fig. 751.37.4.1.7 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Texas Cone Penetration Test measurements using approximate method.
Fig. 751.37.4.1.8 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Texas Cone Penetration Test measurements using approximate method.

Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Weak Rock from Point Load Index Test Measurements

Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through weak rock shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.9 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean Is(50)-value, COVIs(50). Values for COVIs(50) shall be determined in accordance with EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation to reflect the variability of the mean Is(50)-value for the rock over the shaft segment. Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on weak rock shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.10 based on values for COVIs(50) that reflect the variability of the mean Is(50)-value for the rock over the distance 2Ds below the tip of the shaft.


Fig. 751.37.4.1.9 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Point Load Index Test measurements using approximate method.
Fig. 751.37.4.1.10 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in weak rock from Point Load Index Test measurements using approximate method.


Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Cohesive Soils

Settlement resistance factors to be applied to side resistance for shaft segments through cohesive soil shall be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.11 based on the coefficient of variation of the mean undrained shear strength, COVsu. Values for COVsu shall be determined in accordance with EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation to reflect the variability of the mean undrained shear strength for the soil over the shaft segment. Settlement resistance factors to be applied to tip resistance for shafts founded on cohesive soil shall similarly be determined from Figure 751.37.4.1.12 based on values for COVsu that reflect the variability of the mean undrained shear strength for the soil over the distance 2D below the tip of the shaft.


Fig. 751.37.4.1.11 Settlement resistance factors for side resistance of drilled shafts in cohesive soil from undrained shear strength measurements using approximate method.
Fig. 751.37.4.1.12 Settlement resistance factors for tip resistance of drilled shafts in cohesive soil from undrained shear strength measurements using approximate method.

For shafts founded in soft cohesive soils, consideration shall also be given to including additional settlement induced from time dependent consolidation of the soil.

Settlement Resistance Factors for Approximate Method for Drilled Shafts in Cohesionless Soils

Settlement evaluations for individual drilled shafts in cohesionless soils shall be designed according to applicable sections of the current AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.








751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design

Drilled shaft structural resistance shall be designed similarly to reinforced concrete columns. The Strength Limit State and applicable Extreme Event Limit State load combinations shall be used in the reinforcement design.

Longitudinal reinforcing steel shall extend below the point of fixity of the drilled shaft at least 10 ft. in accordance with LRFD 10.8.3.9.3 or the required bar development length whichever is larger.

If permanent casing is used, and the shell consists of a smooth pipe greater than 0.12 in. thick, it may be considered load carrying. An 1/8" shall be subtracted off of the shell thickness to account for corrosion. Casing could also be corrugated metal pipe. If casing is assumed to contribute to the structural resistance, the plans should indicate the minimum thickness of casing required.

Minimum clear spacing between longitudinal bars as well as between transverse bars shall not be less than five times the maximum aggregate size or 5 in. (LRFD 10.8.3.9.3).

For rock sockets use 3” min. clear cover. For drilled shafts for sign structure support, use 3” min. clear cover for all shaft diameters.

For longitudinal reinforcement, splicing shall be in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.4.

For transverse reinforcement, lap splices for closed circular stirrups/ties shall be provided and staggered in accordance with LRFD 5.10.4.3. Lap length of 1.3 ld (Class B) for closed stirrups/ties shall be provided in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.6d.

For lap length, see EPG 751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General.








Commentary on EPG 751.37.1.3 Casing

Temporary or permanent casing is commonly required to support the shaft excavation during construction to prevent caving of overburden soils. Use of permanent casing generally simplifies construction by avoiding the need for multiple cranes to simultaneously place concrete and extract the casing and reduces the risk of problems during concrete placement. However, use of either temporary or permanent casing will generally reduce the side resistance of the constructed shaft over the cased length. Alternatives to use of casing for non-bridge structures include use of mineral or polymer slurry to maintain the stability of the excavation during construction, or use of no casing and no slurry when soil/rock conditions will permit the shafts to be constructed without caving of the excavation walls.

Permanent casing may also be required to provide structural resistance, especially when lateral loads are substantial (see EPG 751.37.6). For example, permanent casing may be required to:

  • Achieve the required flexural resistance of the drilled shaft
  • Resist large lateral loads for bridges located in seismic areas
  • Facilitate shaft construction through water
  • Support the shaft excavation when there is insufficient head room available for casing recovery







751.38.1.1 Dimensions and Nomenclature

Dimensions to be established in design include the bearing depth (depth to footing base) and the footing dimensions shown in Figure 751.38.1.1. Table 751.38.1.1 defines each dimension and provides relevant minimum and/or maximum values for the respective dimension.

Fig. 751.38.1.1 Nomenclature used for spread footings.

Table 751.38.1.1 Summary of footing dimensions with minimum and maximum values

Dimension Description Minimum Value Maximum Value Comment
D Column diameter 12” -- --
B Footing width D+24” -- Min. 3” increments
L Footing length D+24”1 -- Min. 3” increments
A Edge distance in width direction 12” -- --
A’ Edge distance in length direction 12” -- --
t Footing thickness 30” or D2 72” Min. 3” increments
1 Minimum of 1/6 x distance from top of beam to bottom of footing
2 For column diameters ≥ 48”, use minimum value of 48”. Sign support structures may utilize a minimum thickness of 24”.

The nomenclature used in these guidelines has intentionally been selected to be consistent with that used in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (AASHTO, 2009) to the extent possible to avoid potential confusion with methods provided in those specifications. By convention, references to other provisions of the MoDOT Engineering Policy Guide are indicated as “EPG XXX.XX” throughout these guidelines where the Xs are replaced with the appropriate article numbers. Similarly, references to provisions within the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications are indicated as “LRFD XXX.XX”.






751.38.1.2 General Design Considerations

Commentary for EPG 751.38.1.2 General Design Considerations

Footings shall be founded to bear a minimum of 36 in. below the finished elevation of the ground surface. In cases where scour, erosion, or undermining can be reasonably anticipated, footings shall bear a minimum of 36 in. below the maximum anticipated depth of scour, erosion, or undermining.

Footing size shall be proportioned so that stresses under the footing are as uniform as practical at the service limit state.

Long, narrow footings supporting individual columns should be avoided unless space constraints or eccentric loading dictate otherwise, especially on foundation material of low capacity. In general, spread footings should be made as close to square as possible. The length to width ratio of footings supporting individual columns should not exceed 2.0, except on structures where the ratio of longitudinal to transverse loads or site constraints makes use of such a limit impractical. For spread footings supporting overhead sign structures the length to width ratio of footings supporting individual columns may be as high as 4.0.

Footings located near to rock slopes (e.g. rock cuts, river bluffs, etc.) shall be located so that the footing is founded beyond a prohibited region established by a line inclined from the horizontal passing through the toe of the slope as shown in Figure 751.38.1.2. The boundary of the prohibited region shall be established by the Geotechnical Section. For the purposes of this provision, the toe of the slope shall be the point on the slope that produces the most severe location for the active zone. Exceptions to this provision shall only be made with specific approval of the Geotechnical Section and shall only be granted if overall stability can be demonstrated as provided in EPG 751.38.7.

Fig. 751.38.1.2 Prohibited region for spread footings placed near rock slopes unless exception is specifically approved by MoDOT Geotechnical Section.

Footings located near to soil slopes shall be evaluated for overall stability as provided in EPG 751.38.7 unless they are located a minimum distance of 2B beyond the crest of the slope.








751.38.1.3 Related Provisions

The provisions in these guidelines were developed presuming that design parameters required to apply the provisions are established following current MoDOT site characterization protocols as described in EPG 321. Specific attention is drawn to EPG 321.3 Procedures for Estimation of Geotechnical Parameter Values and Coefficients of Variation. The provisions provided in this subarticle presume that parameter variability, as generally represented by the coefficient of variation (COV), is established following procedures in EPG 321.3.

Sign structure spread footing supports are the exception. Sign structure standard spread footings are developed using assumed soil properties and following AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 9th Edition for design. Site specific designs for spread footings for sign structure support may also follow AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 9th Edition if there is not enough geotechnical information available to establish the COV.







751.38.8.3 Details

Hooks at the end of reinforcement are not required for spread footings supporting sign structures. Include reinforcement near the top of spread footings supporting sign structures as required for uplift and in accordance with design requirements.






G8. Drilled Shaft

(G8.1) Include underlined portion when a minimum thickness is required and shown on the plans as minimum.

Thickness of permanent steel casing shall be as shown on the plans and in accordance with Sec 701.

(G8.2) Note may not be required with drilled shafts for high mast tower lighting.

An additional 4 feet has been added to V-bar lengths and additional __-#_-P___ bars have been added in the quantities, if required, for possible change in drilled shaft or rock socket length. The additional V-bar length shall be cut off or included in the reinforcement lap if not required. The additional P bars shall be spaced similarly to that shown in elevation, if required, or to a lesser spacing if not required, but not less than 6-inch centers.

(G8.3) Note not required with drilled shafts for high mast tower lighting.

Sonic logging testing shall be performed on all drilled shafts and rock sockets.

(G8.4) Note to be used only with Drilled Shafts for High Mast Tower Lighting.

Drilling slurry, if used, shall require desanding.

(G8.5) Note to be used only with Drilled Shafts for High Mast Tower Lighting. Drilled shaft diameter is required to be at least 21 in. greater than the largest anticipated anchor bolt circle diameter per the DSP - High Mast Tower Lighting.

The following non-factored base reactions were used to design the drilled shafts for the       ft. high mast lighting towers: overturning moment = * kip-foot, base shear = * kip and axial force = * kip.
 *Values used in the design of the drilled shaft.

(G8.6) Use the following note only when the tops of drilled shafts are ≤ 3'-0" below the ground surface at centerline column / drilled shaft. Otherwise excavation quantity to the top of drilled shafts needs to be figured. Excavation diameter limit will be the 3'-0" larger than the column diameter above the drilled shaft.

The cost of any required excavation to the top of the drilled shafts will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for other items.

(G8.7)

The tip of casing shall not extend into the rock socket elevation range reported in the Foundation Data table without approval by the engineer.

(G8.8) Use the following note when non-contact or contact lap is required at the top of drilled shaft between column/dowel reinforcement and drilled shaft reinforcement.

Column or dowel reinforcement shall be placed prior to pouring drilled shaft concrete in the area of the lap. Dowel bar or column reinforcement shall not be inserted after drilled shaft pour is complete.

(G8.9) For oversized shafts, use the following note in conjunction with callout for optional construction joint near top of drilled shaft.

Remove sediment laitance and weak concrete to sound concrete prior to setting column/dowel reinforcement if optional construction joint is used.







Category:901 Lighting

Nonstandard Lighting Structures

If any lighting installation being considered will use a special or nonstandard structure or with dimensions exceeding those shown in the Standard Plans, Traffic should be consulted early in the project planning regarding the installation’s feasibility and necessary contract provisions. Examples of this situation are high mast lighting and exceeding lengths on the Standard Plans.

Since designing details for nonstandard installations is typically performed by an outside engineer employed by the contractor or producer and is certified to MoDOT, the project contract documents must include appropriate requirements about the design standards used. Since structures beyond MoDOT's standard designs are involved, a performance-based specification of the design signed and sealed by a Missouri Registered Professional Engineer is needed from the contractor. Certification to the current AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals including the latest fatigue provisions is required. For standard detailing notes regarding drilled shafts for High Mast Tower Lighting, see [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#G8._Drilled_Shaft|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes G8.4 and G8.5].








901.7.6 High Mast Lighting

High mast lighting is principally used at complex interchanges and lights a large area by a group of luminaires mounted in a fixed orientation at the top of a tall mast, generally 80 ft. or taller. The district must authorize high mast lighting. The request for high mast lighting conceptual approval is to be included with the lighting warrants. Data supporting the selection of pole height, pole location and type of luminaires is to be included with the preliminary lighting plan. Where high mast lighting is used at complex interchanges, adaptation lighting is recommended for each section where vehicles enter and leave the interchange.

The district is responsible for all bid items associated with high mast lighting and to design the foundation and the structure above the foundation for inclusion in the project plans.

For standard detailing notes regarding drilled shafts for High Mast Tower Lighting, see [[751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#G8._Drilled_Shaft|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes G8.4 and G8.5].